How to do a basketball hop step

Two questions that really need clarification.

1.) Can a player, after taking two steps towards the basket (supposedly to take a shot), stop and begin to pivot? Basicaly, can the player, after initiating the two-step count, stop and reastablish their pivot?
(I think I see Shaq do this all the time.)

2.) If a player does a “hop-step” and jumps into the air, must they land with two feet and go back up or can they land with one foot (then the other) and go back up? Basicaly, does a “hop-step” require both feet to simultaneously hit the ground?

Thanks for the help.

1) NBA rules are different with regards to jump stops and pivoting. I’m not going to even attempt to address it.

2) The player cannot land on one foot and then another. He can only land on one foot or land on both feet simultaneously. He cannot pivot.

I have seen #2 happen quite often in High school boys games. Player will end dribble with a big hop then take a step and shoot or pass. It looks odd and out of control sometimes. I dont call it because the player has not returned the pivot foot to the floor on the step motion. Quite often you will hear the coaches or fans crying for a travel.

__________________
“Your Azz is the Red Sea, My foot is Moses, and I am about to part the Red Sea all the way up to my knee!”

All references/comments are intended for educational purposes. Opinions are free.

Two questions that really need clarification.

The NBA rules make it very clear that a player can pivot even after he lands at the 2nd count of a jump-stop. NBA rules do not assign a pivot foot in this jump-stop move until the player pivots.


2.) If a player does a “hop-step” and jumps into the air, must they land with two feet and go back up or can they land with one foot (then the other) and go back up? Basicaly, does a “hop-step” require both feet to simultaneously hit the ground?

Thanks for the help. [/QUOTE]

if a player execute a 2-count jump-stop, he should land both feet simultaneously.

if it is not a 2-count jump-stop, he can land both feet simultaneously on the 1st count, or one after another.

but not sure if the “hop-step” is the same move but a different name of “jump-stop”.

[Edited by ysong on May 31st, 2005 at 04:50 PM]

When the jump stop came into fashion on the court my coach had several refs come in to discuss rule changes. They showed us that the jump stop has to be done like this.

1- The jump can not happen after the first step.
2- You must basiclly jump during your last dribble, land with two feet.
3- You can not pivot after landing. This would be a third step resulting in a travel call.
4- You also must jump off of both feet. Not lean toward basket and leave off of one foot.

Am I correct in this?

1- The jump can not happen after the first step.
2- You must basiclly jump during your last dribble, land with two feet.
3- You can not pivot after landing. This would be a third step resulting in a travel call.
4- You also must jump off of both feet. Not lean toward basket and leave off of one foot.

Kind of. There are actually two different plays that are commonly called a jump-stop and that’s why there’s so much confusion about it.

The first kind of jump-stop is when a player jumps, then catches the ball, then stops by landing on both feet simultaneously. In this case, the player is allowed to pivot and can use either foot as the pivot foot. This is the simpler case, obviously.

The second kind of jump-stop (some of us have taken to calling it a hop-stop to avoid confusion ) is when an airborne player catches the ball, then lands on one foot, then jumps off that foot and stops by landing on both feet simultaneously. In this case, the player may not pivot at all; he has no pivot foot. The player may jump again to pass or shoot, but I don’t think there’s any requirement that both feet leave the ground simultaneously. The rule simply says that there is no pivot foot.

Table of Contents

Does a hop step count as two steps?

Starts here4:55Hop Travel vs Jump Stop | January 23, 2014 | NBA 2013-14 SeasonYouTubeStart of suggested clipEnd of suggested clip59 second suggested clipHe was in the wrong traveling. Called on Lance. And Joe take us through it. So once again in realMoreHe was in the wrong traveling. Called on Lance. And Joe take us through it. So once again in real time let’s look at the cadence to Lance.

What is a hop in basketball?

Hops is a slang term in basketball used for someone who can jump extremely high with ease. The term “hops” describes the player’s vertical jumping ability and athleticism. Players with hops are even able to dunk the ball seemingly without effort.

How does hop step work?

Starts here0:58Hop Step Move Tutorial | Basketball Scoring Drills | Dre BaldwinYouTubeStart of suggested clipEnd of suggested clip58 second suggested clipNow. Both feet may not land exactly. The same time as you see that one was a little bit ahead of theMoreNow. Both feet may not land exactly. The same time as you see that one was a little bit ahead of the other. But as long as it’s not a 1 – like you’re trying to take two steps.

Why is a hop step not an up and down?

With a hop step, you’re getting in position to score. With an up and down, you jumped up trying to score after coming off your pivot foot, but failed to let go of the ball and came back down with it.

Is a hop step legal?

However the case of so-called ‘Hop step’ has become violation as it is also a violation in the NBA. This means: A player may not touch the floor consecutively with the same foot or both feet after ending his dribble or gaining control of the ball.

Is a hop step considered one step?

Once you stop dribbling, the foot that first hits the floor doesn’t count because you were dribbling while it was moving. After this step you can either do two steps with one foot or you can take one step and then jump off that foot and land with two feet at the same time, that is a hop step.

How do you hop step by step?

Starts here1:34How to Do a Hop Step Move | Irish Step Dancing – YouTubeYouTube

Is a hop step in basketball a travel?

This is normal basketball movement and without using slow motion replay it is difficult to realise whether the foot touches the floor before taking the 2 steps or not. However, according to the current rules it is a travelling violation.

Is a hop step legal in the NBA?

Is a hop step travel?

Hop travel: When a player is taking their two steps, but doesn’t goes left-right or right-left steps. Instead it’s an awkward left-left or right-right. This is a travel. LeBron d idnt jump stop or hop step when he was called for a travel.

Is a hop step a post move?

Starts here10:48All Post Moves: Dropstep, Hopstep, Spins, and more – YouTubeYouTube

Do you have to shoot after a hop step?

A progressing player who jumps off one foot on the first step may land with both feet simultaneously for the second step. If a player, with the ball in his possession, raises his pivot foot off the floor, he must pass or shoot before his pivot foot returns to the floor.

How to Do a Basketball Hop Step in 2022

One of the most basic and essential moves in basketball is the hop step. Though it may seem simple, nailing the hop step can make a big difference on the court. In this post, we’ll break down how to do a proper hop step so you can take your game to the next level. Read on to learn more!

Part 1. Mastering Footwork and Stance

The basketball hop step is an advanced move that can create space for a shot, get around defenders, or change direction on the court. To do a successful hop step, you need to master your footwork and stance.

Footwork: To execute the hop step correctly, you need to have good footwork. You should be able to move quickly and smoothly on the court. To improve your footwork, practice shuffling, crossover steps, and quick direction changes.

Stance: Your stance is also essential for doing a successful hop step. You should be in a low stance with your knees bent and your weight evenly distributed between your feet. It will allow you to move quickly and easily in any direction.

1. Familiarize yourself with the right landing stance

Your landing stance is critical when doing a basketball hop step. You want to be in a low stance with your knees bent and your weight evenly distributed between your feet. It will allow you to move quickly and easily in any direction.

2. Bend your knees and stay low

When you’re doing the hop step, you want to stay low so you can move quickly. It would be best to bend your knees when you jump to get more height and power.

3. Keep your head up

It’s essential to keep your head up when you’re doing the hop step. It will help you stay focused and avoid getting hit in the head.

4. Practice small hops first

Before you try doing the basketball hop step, practice doing small hops. It will help you get used to jumping and landing in a low stance.

5. Land with both feet

When you land after the hop step, make sure to land with both feet. It will help you stay balanced and in control.

6. Limit your pivot

When you do the hop step, you want to limit your pivot. It will help you stay in control and make it harder for defenders to block your shot.

Part 2. Practicing With the Ball

1. Dribble the ball slowly down the court

When you’re practicing the hop step, start by dribbling the ball slowly down the court. It will help you get comfortable with the move.

2. Jump into the hop step with restraint

When you jump into the hop step, don’t jump too high. You want to jump just high enough to get past your defender.

3. Land with both feet simultaneously

When you land after the hop step, make sure to land with both feet. It will help you stay balanced and in control.

4. Practice your single pivot

Once you’ve mastered the essential hop step, start practicing your single pivot. It will allow you to make a quick move in any direction.

5. Finish with a pass or a shot

Once you’ve completed the hop step, finish with a pass to a teammate or a shot at the basket.

Part 3. Practicing Without the Ball

1. Jog slowly down the court

When you’re practicing the hop step without the ball, start by jogging slowly down the court. It will help you get comfortable with the move.

2. Drive with your leading foot

When you drive to the hoop, use your leading foot to take your defender off balance. It will create more space for a shot or a layup.

3. Land on both feet simultaneously

When you land after the hop step, make sure to land with both feet. It will help you stay balanced and in control.

4. Pivot once

When you pivot, make sure to do it in a controlled manner. It will help you stay in control and make it harder for defenders to block your shot.

Part 4. Receiving a Pass with the Hop Step

1. Get a friend and a ball

You may use this hop step to make several good shots in a row. You can practice passing by yourself or with a partner. By doing this, you will be able to get more comfortable with the hop step.

2. Coordinate movement with the teammate in possession

Your teammate in possession must be aware of your movement and coordinate with you. If the player dribbling down the court cannot see you, they will not be able to pass you the ball.

3. Drive with your leading foot into a small hop

When you drive to the hoop and receive the pass, use your leading foot to take your defender off balance. It will create more space for a shot or a layup.

4. Catch the ball and land with both feet

Take a look at yourself and have your work evaluated by your buddy. Have you landed on both feet at the same time? Are your legs bent, and are you low to the ground? If so, you’re doing great! Make sure you keep practicing.

5. Pivot and shoot or pass

If you have successfully caught the ball and landed with both feet, take a quick pivot on your leading foot. It will give you more power to shoot or pass the ball.

6. Practice receiving a pass on your own

It is a simple change for most skilled individuals, but the mechanics involved make it tough to do correctly. Playing catch on your own as follows:

  • Jumping into the air
  • Landing and then pivoting on one foot
  • Finishing with a pass or shot

You will develop muscle memory and be able to execute this move in a game setting better.

1. What is a basketball hop step?

A basketball hop step is a move that allows a player to get around an opponent by jumping off one foot and landing on the other. The player gains more space to shoot or drive to the basket by doing this.

2. How do you do a basketball hop step?

You can get closer to the basket by doing a basketball hop step while taking less steps. It is done by jumping off of one foot and then hopping onto the other foot, pushing off the ground with the ball of your foot to get closer to the basket. You can then shoot or pass the ball.

3. What are the benefits of doing a basketball hop step?

There are a few benefits of doing a basketball hop step. One is that it can help you get around defenders more easily. It can also help you create more space for yourself when you’re shooting or trying to drive to the basket. Finally, it can also help you maintain your balance better when you’re dribbling the ball.

4. When is the best time to use a basketball hop step?

There is no definitive answer, as the best time to use a basketball hop step will vary depending on the situation. However, one general guideline is to use a basketball hop step when you want to create space between you and your defender to get an open shot.

5. Are there any other steps that can be used in place of a basketball hop step?

A few other steps can be used in place of the basketball hop step. One is a crossover step, which is used to change direction quickly. Another is the jump stop, which is used to stop quickly and maintain balance.

Conclusion

That’s it! You now know how to do a proper hop step. As we mentioned earlier, this move can make a big difference on the court, so be sure to practice and perfect it. And if you’re looking for more tips and tricks on how to improve your basketball game, be sure to check out our other posts. Thanks for reading.

Sports and Racing – NBA

  • Topic Archived
  • First
  • Page of 4
  • Next
  • Last
  1. Boards
  2. Sports and Racing – NBA
  3. Can you take a step after hopstepping?

DlSTURBED4282 posted.
You can take another “step” as long as you keep your pivot down, but what you’re doing sounds like a travel.

This. As long as your pivot foot is down you can “step” out of your stance.

Now that I watch it, it doesn’t even look like a hopstep >_>

_SenorCardgage_ posted.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yRUeOdaTwic

Now that I watch it, it doesn’t even look like a hopstep >_>

that’s a legal move when you do it off the bounce like that, it’s not really a hop-step, its more of a gather step, but its still legal.

hamdog43 posted.
_SenorCardgage_ posted.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yRUeOdaTwic

Now that I watch it, it doesn’t even look like a hopstep >_>

that’s a legal move when you do it off the bounce like that, it’s not really a hop-step, its more of a gather step, but its still legal.

That’s definitely a hop step. And the move in the video is definitely a travel. His first two steps are his “gather,” then he hop steps and then switches pivot feet and takes off on his other foot.

Not very debatable. If this is the move that the TC was talking about I’d be annoyed as **** if someone kept doing it in a pick up game.

BrownBearKing posted.
Idk about the gather thing. But It looked like you took a hop step but landed on your 2 feet separately. Which is a travel, both feet have to land at the same time.

yeah this is correct; it was 3 steps, I thought your feet hit at the same time on your initial move but it was a walk.

That move in the video is not a travel. He gathered his dribble taking two steps. Then he shot the layup lifting off of one of his foot without taking another step.

Taking a step after hopstepping sounds really weird even if it isn’t a travel. Usually, when you do a hopstep, you should be fairly close to the basket. So you would hopstep and either finish at the rim with a layup/dunk/fadeaway or if you are heavily guarded, pivot on a chosen pivot foot to kick the ball back out.

100% satisfaction guarantee

Place your order with peace of mind.

100% satisfaction guarantee

If you experience any of the following issues, you’re eligible for a refund or credit: damaged/missing items, poor item replacements, late arrival or unprofessional service.

Similar items at other stores near you

Popular near you

Popular Brands

Why Instacart?

Delivery in as little as 2 hours

Shop local stores at great prices

Get high-quality items you love

Browse more categories

Baseballs

Bowling Balls

Footballs

Golf Balls

Hockey Pucks and Balls

Lacrosse Balls

Other Sports Balls

Rugby Balls

Common questions

How does Instacart same-day delivery work?

It’s simple. Using the Instacart app or website, shop for products from your store of choice near you. Once you place your order, Instacart will connect you with a personal shopper in your area to shop and deliver your order. Contactless delivery is available with our “Leave at my door” option. You can track your order’s progress and communicate with your shopper every step of the way using the Instacart app or website.

How does Instacart in-store pickup or curbside pickup work?

Using the Instacart app or website, select a store of your choice near you that offers pickup, select Pickup, and then select your preferred pickup location from which you’d like to place your order.

Then, when you arrive at the store of your choice, use the Instacart app to notify us. Depending on the store, a shopper or store employee will bring the groceries to your car, or you can pick them up at the designated area.

How much does Instacart delivery or pickup cost?

Here’s a breakdown of Instacart delivery cost:

– Delivery fees start at $3.99 for same-day orders over $35. Fees vary for one-hour deliveries, club store deliveries, and deliveries under $35.
– Service fees vary and are subject to change based on factors like location and the number and types of items in your cart. Orders containing alcohol have a separate service fee.
– Tipping is optional but encouraged for delivery orders. It’s a great way to show your shopper appreciation and recognition for excellent service. 100% of your tip goes directly to the shopper who delivers your order.

With an optional Instacart Express membership, you can get $0 delivery fee on every order over $35 and lower service fees too.

Instacart pickup cost:
– There may be a “pickup fee” (equivalent to a delivery fee for pickup orders) on your pick up order that is typically $1.99 for non-Express members. Express membership waives this like it would a delivery fee.
– Pick up orders have no service fees, regardless of non-Express or Express membership.

What happens if Baden 28.5″ Red & Black Hop Step Basketball is out of stock and I need to give specific instructions?

When an item you want is out-of-stock at the store, your shopper will follow your replacement preferences.

You can set item and delivery instructions in advance, as well as chat directly with your shopper while they shop and deliver your items. You can tell the shopper to:

– Find Best Match: By default, your shopper will use their best judgement to pick a replacement for your item.
– Pick Specific Replacement: You can pick a specific alternative for the shopper to purchase if your first choice is out-of-stock.
– Don’t Replace: For items you’d rather not replace, choose “Don’t replace” to get a refund if the item is out of stock.

What happens if there is an issue with my order?

If something isn’t right, you’ve got options. In the Instacart app or website, you can report:

– Missing items
– Incorrect items
– Damaged items
– Poor replacements
– Early/late orders

Home » Guides » NBA 2K20: How to Hop Step (Eurostep)

There are few feelings more satisfying in NBA 2K20 than driving to the paint and hammering the ball home. While there are certainly a number of ways to get the job done, the hop step is certainly the most efficient way to make room near the bucket. Here is everything you need to know about how to hop step (Eurostep) in NBA 2K20.

A staple of European basketball in the ’80s, the Hop Step, also known as the Eurostep, helps players essentially jump into the paint.

How to Hop Step (Eurostep) in NBA 2K20

To pull the move off in NBA 2K20, press R2 to drive to the hoop with the ball in your right hand, holding the right thumb stick down left all the while.

You can also double tap Square/X/Y while driving with R2 and holding the left thumbstick toward your player’s offhand.

The most important thing to keep in mind is that, like most movements in the game, you’ll need the right spacing and attributes to pull this move off.

It will take some time to get used to the movement, but adding the hop step to your arsenal will make you as dangerous as the Greek Freak himself, Giannis Antetokounmpo.

    1. Press R2 to drive with the ball in your right hand, holding the left thumbstick

You can also double tap Square/X/Y while driving with R2 and holding the left thumbstick toward your player’s offhand.

Note that you’ll need the right spacing and attributes to pull things off.

That is everything you need to know about how to hop step (Eurostep) in NBA 2K20. For more helpful tips, tricks, and guides, be sure to check out our official wiki guide. We’ve got you started with a few of our favorites here below.

How to do a basketball hop step

The hop step was the euro step of 2004, meaning how popular the euro step has become, the hop step trended the same way. Kids were practicing it at every park and every gym trying to be the first to use it amongst their friends. A move that has been around for awhile, some also call it a pro hop or a jump stop, made its wave throughout the world in a more creative way.

How to do a basketball hop step

The move became really popular when NBA Live 2004 added it to their realm of moves along with the new control layout that included freestyle dribbling. A big improvement towards trying to make the game more realistic, gamers enjoyed the new additions. Although personally, I remember the hop step giving the offensive player way too much of an advantage because it made it way too easy to score in that game.

The hop step is a lethal move if used correctly. It’s mainly used when trying to split two defenders on the way to the basket or in other instances just to gain a base for liftoff when driving. What makes it a great move is the options you have once the move is performed. You can either hop step and go straight up or when you feel that defender on your hip, you can hop step, pump fake and get the defender in the air and step through to go up to the basket.

The move has gained some controversy in past years because many players started doing it wrong. When executing the move, it’s a must that you land on two feet simultaneously or else it is deemed a travel. Due to so much confusion when it’s considered a travel and when it’s not, NBA Head of Referees Joe Borgia gave his insight on when this movie is a violation.

Many guys in the league have adopted this move today and we see it from players like LeBron James and Derrick Rose. However, Jamaal Crawford may be one of the craftiest at the move as he puts the ball behind his back making his defender look silly. We all know he’s a wizard with the ball but when he’s coming at you full speed and hits you with his “shake and bake”, there is nothing you can do. The hop step really puts the offensive player in a great position to score and it’s a move that all players looking to be a top scorer should master.

Table of Contents

How many steps is a pro hop in basketball?

Hop travel: When a player is taking their two steps, but doesn’t goes left-right or right-left steps.

What is a hop in basketball?

Hops is a slang term in basketball used for someone who can jump extremely high with ease. The term “hops” describes the player’s vertical jumping ability and athleticism.

Why is a pro hop not a travel?

When ur performing a Pro hop in Basketball, y isn’t it considered a travel? When You begin the jump off one leg that leg becomes your pivot. So y is it that when U follow up by landing on both feet(Which includes ur pivot) a travel isn’t called? It’s known as a jump stop and it’s legal.

Can you take a step after pro hop?

You can take another “step” as long as you keep your pivot down, but what you’re doing sounds like a travel. This. As long as your pivot foot is down you can “step” out of your stance.

Why is a Hopstep not a travel?

A hop step is clearly jumping and landing with the ball. A eurostep is two steps(picking up pivot foot). Why aren’t these manuvers considered a traveling violation? Because you are allowed two steps when coming to a stop.

Why is a hop step not up and down?

With a hop step, you’re getting in position to score. With an up and down, you jumped up trying to score after coming off your pivot foot, but failed to let go of the ball and came back down with it. “**** you, Gumby!”

Is the hop step legal?

However the case of so-called ‘Hop step’ has become violation as it is also a violation in the NBA. This means: A player may not touch the floor consecutively with the same foot or both feet after ending his dribble or gaining control of the ball.

How do u hop step in 2k21?

Just like the Euro step, hop steps can be done with and without the shot stick. The first way is to tap the shoot button while driving to the basket. Easy enough. The second way is to hold the shot stick diagonally down left or down right while driving to the basket.

Can you hop step in NBA?

Is the pro hop a travel?

This is normal basketball movement and without using slow motion replay it is difficult to realise whether the foot touches the floor before taking the 2 steps or not. However, according to the current rules it is a travelling violation.

When to take a hop step in basketball?

At random intervals or at the signal of a whistle, combine the footwork you learning with the dribbling and take your hop step. Jump into the hop step with restraint. Jumping too high will throw off your balance or add to your momentum, which can lead to an unnecessary step and a traveling call.

What’s the best way to jump on a basketball?

Push the ball upward with your shooting hand. As your hips rise up and you start your jumping motion, move the ball in a smooth motion from your dip to eye level. It should all be one smooth motion. Your hips rise as your elbow rises with the ball, and you should turn anywhere from 20-90 degrees towards your off hand.

What’s the best way to do the hop test?

Hop forward as far as possible for three consecutive hops. Measure and record the distance you hopped in centimeters. Repeat the test two times for both legs, recording the distance hopped each time. For diagonal triple hopping, mark a line on the floor about six meters long. (Using adhesive tape here is a good idea.

What’s the best way to improve your basketball shot?

You should reinforce your new set point by daily form shooting close to the basket. In fact, you should rebuild your shot slowly by stepping back one step at a time as you establish consistency from a given range, using the new set point. Shooting after the Top of your Jump.

When to use the pro hop in basketball?

A pro hop is used to beat a defender under control and get a quality shot at the basket. Alright, using the pro hop, so you’re driving to the basket, just beat your primary defender, or you could be in transition. Make sure you’re low, make sure you’re balanced, make sure you’re eyes are on the rim.

What’s the best way to do a hop step?

Bend your knees and stay low. This improves your balance, stability, and response. Keep your head up. Court awareness is often the deciding factor in whether or not you will be able to drive to the hoop and make a shot. Practice small hops.

What do you need to know about portable basketball hoops?

But once you find the right portable hoop and get it home, don’t forget the most important step: filling the base. It’s crucial to properly fill the base to help increase the hoop’s stability during play, as well as in windy weather.

Do you jump into the hop step with both feet?

Jump into the hop step with restraint. Jumping too high will throw off your balance or add to your momentum, which can lead to an unnecessary step and a traveling call. Land with both feet simultaneously. This is the key point of the hop step.

The jump-stop is an important footwork fundamental that all players must learn. The jump stop is executed by the player, who is on the run, taking one small step and then landing on both feet simultaneously in balance (not leaning forward). The jump stop can be used at the end of a dribble. At the end of a speed dribble, young players sometimes stop, fall forward from their momentum, and get a traveling call. Ending the speed dribble with a jump stop will prevent this.

The jump-stop can be used when receiving a pass, to get into triple threat position, or by a post player catching the ball in the low post. When receiving a pass with a jump stop, either foot can be used as the pivot foot. This is especially helpful for the low post player.

Sometimes there is confusion about what is or is not traveling, and when do you still have a pivot allowable after a jump stop. See the jump-stop and traveling rules from the National Federation of State High Schools website. My interpretation is this – it depends on whether you already have possession of the ball or not (as in receiving a pass), and whether or not you have already used up the one-step that you are entitled to.

When receiving a pass with a jump-stop, you can pivot after the jump-stop and either foot can become the pivot foot. A perimeter player can catch the ball with a jump-stop, and the pivot into triple-threat position if necessary and use the non-pivot foot for executing jab-step fakes or a drive step.

Now let’s take a player who already has possession of the ball on the outside. He/she makes a dribble move into the lane, picks up the dribble, takes one step, and then lands a two-footed jump-stop. So far, so good. But after landing the jump-stop, he/she cannot move either foot and has no pivot foot since the one step was already used prior to the jump-stop. He/she could jump upward, but must either shoot or pass the ball before either foot touches the floor again.

Jump Stop Drill #1

Here is a drill for teaching the jump stop. First demonstrate the jump stop to your players. All players lineup on the end-line, with adequate spacing. Start the drill at slow speed initially. Have the players jog down the floor slowly. When you blow your whistle, they come to a jump stop. Yell “go” and they start again.

Every-time you blow the whistle, they jump-stop. Do this back and forth, up and down the court. When they look like they are getting the hang of it, have them sprint and do the drill. Then give everyone a ball, and dribble slowly down the floor, doing jump stops. Eventually work up to the speed dribble and jump stop.

Jump Stop Drill #2, receiving the pass with a jump stop

Form two sets of lines, one at an end-line, the other at half court, with the lines facing each other (see diagram A). This drill is good for learning to receive the pass with a jump stop, and is also a good passing and conditioning drill.

How to do a basketball hop step

Passers make good chest passes. Make sure they don’t lob these passes. Passes should have “zip”, speed. The passer then follows his pass and sprints to the rear of the opposite line.

The receivers move toward the ball and receive it with a jump stop, and hold the triple threat position briefly, and then make the pass to the next player in the opposite line, follow the pass, and get into the opposite line.

Make sure passes are crisp, and the receivers are coming to the ball and are jump stopping. Check their triple threat position. Players should be sprinting to the opposite line, for conditioning.

You can also use this drill to teach the one-two step stop.

Jump Stop Drill #3, Jump Stop and Pivoting Drill

Here is a simple drill for teaching the jump stop and pivoting. Players pair up together on a side or endline. One player dribbles forward about 10 feet, stops with a two-footed jump stop, and then pivots several times and finally passes back to his/her partner, who repeats this procedure, while the first player returns to the endline.

See this clip of a good jump stop – pivoting drill:

HOW TO HOPSTEP IN NBA 2K20 w/HANDCAM! HOW TO HOPSTEP DUNK IN NBA 2K20! HOW TO HOPSTEP DRIBBLE 2K20!

To hop step in 2K20, hold down the left trigger and then press the A button. You’ll then need to press the left trigger again to jump and then press the A button again to hop step.

First, make sure you have the “Hop Step” Dunk package selected in your offensive playbook. Then, when you have the ball and are near the hoop, press and hold the “X” button to start your hop step. While holding “X”, use the left stick to move towards the hoop. When you get close, release “X” and press it again to jump and dunk.

To hop step 2k22 Xbox, you will need to first open the console. Next, locate the white wire that is sticking out of the back of the console and disconnect it from the motherboard. Next, take the white wire and connect it to the black wire. Finally, reattach the cover to the console and turn it on. You should now be able to hop step 2k22 Xbox.

To hop step in NBA 2k21, hold down the L2 button on your controller and then press the X button. You’ll then want to use the left analog stick to move your player in the direction you want to go.

The hop step is a dance move that is used to travel across the dance floor. It is done by hopping on one foot and then stepping onto the other foot.

Ankles can be broken in NBA 2K20 by performing an ankle break move. To do this, hold down the left trigger and then press the right joystick in the direction of the player you want to break their ankle.

A hop step layup is a basketball move in which the player takes a hop step towards the basket before shooting. This move allows the player to get closer to the basket and increase their chances of making the shot.

Hop step is a travel in basketball. This move is used to create space between you and your defender, but it also puts you in a vulnerable position if you’re not successful.

There are a few different ways to side step in 2k. One way is to hold down the right trigger and then move the left joystick in the direction you want to go. You can also hold down the left trigger and then move the right joystick in the direction you want to go.

You need the following badges:
-Contact Dunk
-Dunking Machine
-Towering Dunk
-Posterizer
-Flashy Passer
-Pick Pocket
-Acrobat

There are numerous moves new basketball players will attempt to master when they step onto the court.

One of the most important is the jump stop.

“Coming to a jump stop is one of the first fundamentals all players must learn in the game of basketball,” former college basketball player Kristin Ronai says. “Coming to a jump stop allows you to stop and control [by] landing on both feet simultaneously so you don’t travel.”

HOW TO

To practice the jump stop:

  • Start by dribbling the basketball forward.
  • As you pick up your dribble, you’ll jump forward and land on both feet simultaneously.
  • You should land on the balls of your feet, shoulder width apart. You’ll want your knees bent, hips down, back straight, eyes up and the ball resting in your shot pocket. Your shot pocket is when you have the ball in front of your body to one side. You should have your hand, elbow and arm behind the ball with your off hand on the ball to help protect it.

In this position, you’re now ready to make a basketball play.

“It is important to learn the jump stop before advancing to more footwork off the dribble so that you can pivot off of either foot,” Ronai says.

Players new to basketball will need to work on a variety of skills to help avoid traveling calls. In addition to the jump stop, players should also work on front pivots.

  • Jul 6, 2012
  • #1

thrillhouse

  • Jul 6, 2012
  • #2

Retroballer

  • Jul 6, 2012
  • #3

mco85

  • Jul 6, 2012
  • #4

jbnsoul

  • Jul 6, 2012
  • #5

thrillhouse

  • Jul 6, 2012
  • #6

k town trash

  • Jul 6, 2012
  • #7

shorty doo wop

  • Jul 6, 2012
  • #8

grusumm18

  • Jul 6, 2012
  • #9

kvsm23vs24

  • Jul 6, 2012
  • #10

lightweight champion

  • Jul 6, 2012
  • #11

durden7

But if you take a step going into the hop step (which most people do), then you cant pivot from the hop step.

You cant step, hop step then pivot.

  • Jul 6, 2012
  • #12

10 piece nuggets

Isnt the whole point of a hop step to jump off two feet into it? Then you can pivot yeah.

Atleast thats how I think of it.

  • Jul 6, 2012
  • #13

wcghost

  • Jul 6, 2012
  • #14

Hank Scorpio

I’ve always wondered this and another thing–Is it a travel when you do a hesitation move, cross over and then take a few dribbles and then do a hop step to penetrate into the paint and go up for the lay up.

When I do the hesitation move, I’ll lift the side of my leg thats on the same side of the ball (I.E. if the ball is on the right hand, I’ll hesitate to the right), but I’ll keep the other foot planted so both my feet don’t really leave the ground. It’s a pretty effective move if you’re quick enough and strong enough to get through into the paint, but every time I do it and score people call travel. I never understood this.

Is this because people think both my feet go up when I hesitate?

Profit Project

  • What is a FieldLab
  • Results
  • Hop, step and jump into the future
  • Partners
  • About ProFit | Colofon
  • Download ProFit booklet

To measure physical activity people now wear devices with sensors and have all kind of apps on their mobile phones. This gives us the opportunity to take the ideas of the FieldLabs into the general population. The city becomes the FieldLab. We now can collect big data and learn so much about participation levels, about the health of populations and about what interventions can be put in place to help these populations become more physical active, and thus more healthy.

Steve Haake, Director of the Centre for Sports Engineering Research at Sheffield Hallam University

How to do a basketball hop step

The ProFit project ended in March 2015 with a final conference called Triple Jump Event. Not only the partners in the project participated, but also individuals and representatives of (local) governments, (public and semi-public) organisations, knowledge institutions and companies from other cities that have been involved in establishing international cooperation in sports innovation within the European Union over the last years.

Since 2008 networks like the European Platform for Sport Innovation (EPSI) have been created (Hop). Through the ProFit project FieldLabs were set up and international cooperation was brought into practice (Step). The focus of the Triple Jump Event was on extending and expanding the ideas and contacts into the future (Jump). The contours of this next step are already visible: a program that reaches a bigger, critical mass by creating a transnational cluster of partners in different European countries. Together these Vital Cities, with a lively network of fans and observers, will stimulate enterprise innovations that make more people move more. This requires an interdisciplinary approach, combining behavioural sciences, health, design, high tech & engineering and business & economics. The existing network welcomes newcomers and is already expanding to other cities like Cologne (Germany), Leuven (Belgium) and Birmingham(UK).

How to do a basketball hop step

A great jump shot is one of the best things you can add to your game. The best part? You can practice this tip by yourself. Mastering this skill is all about technique, balance, and repetition but the most imperative part is your will to succeed. The greatest basketball players to ever play the game started just where you are now and worked hard to master this skill. Now it’s your turn. Here are a few jump shot tips, that are commonly taught at Nike Basketball Camps, to help take your game to the next level.

Before the shot
The first step in improving your jump shot technique is keeping your eyes on the rim throughout the whole shot. This will keep your form compact and will lead to a straighter shot. When you get ready to shoot, make sure your feet are shoulder width apart facing the basket and your knees are bent (much like a spring ready to release). Next, you will move the ball into what is called the ‘shot pocket’. This means that you hold the ball just above your waist lined up to the basket. The final thing you do before you are ready to shoot is to find the right grip. In order to do this, you should place the ball’s air hole between your middle and index finger while spreading your fingers enough to feel like you can balance the ball. Let the ball sit on your shooting hand and get ready to begin your release.

During the shot
After completing all of the pre-shot prep, you will be ready to move on to the next phase: during your shot. Make sure your other hand or “non-shooting hand” is on the side of the ball. This hand should not affect the ball’s spin and should not move upon release. Begin to bring the ball directly up from the balanced position you had it in keeping your shooting hand’s elbow underneath the ball. Keep the ball in front of you and all at once begin your jump, releasing all of your power loaded up in your bent knees and bent arms at once. Release the ball at the highest point your hands can go and keep your shooting hand pointing at the basket in a straight line. The ball should be in a backspin and you’re on your way to scoring a bucket.

After the shot
After the ball is released try and land in the same spot you jumped to make sure you are balanced. In your follow through your wrists should be relaxed on the way down and your fingers still pointing at where you wanted to shoot. Hold this position until the ball hits the basket.

If you can practice these steps consistently you will begin to see a major upgrade to your jump shot technique and results. Remember: practice makes perfect. Check out more basketball shooting tips and get better this summer at a Nike Basketball Camp near you.

A jump shot starts way before the arms are even involved. It all begins with your lower body; your feet and legs need to be set and ready to start the upward motion of your shot.

Ray Allen, one of the greatest shooters in the history of basketball, told NBA TV , “Shooting, for me, is not about my upper body. It’s really about my lower body. So when I’m shooting the ball like I need to, I jump and it’s one motion.”

Basketball players are almost universally taught, at an early age, that stepping into your shot one foot at a time, or a “1-2 step,” is the proper way to use your lower body in setting up a catch-and-shoot jump shot.

The 1-2 step is the traditional and still most widely used footwork for shooting, however, some players at higher levels will utilize “the hop” instead of the 1-2 step, at times, to get their feet set for their shot. Many great shooters in the NBA, from Kevin Durant to Bradley Beal to JJ Redick, will use the hop to get into their shot depending on the situation.

Let’s break down both of these techniques to see which one might benefit you best, and illustrate how to perform the hop should you want to give it a chance.

1-2 Step

For right-handed shooters , when using the 1-2 step, you will step with your left foot first, and after that foot is planted you will simultaneously catch the ball and step with your right foot to align your feet (either square to the basket or angled to the left or right). Left handed shooters will use the right foot first and then follow with the left.

Spot up

If you are spotting up, or catching and shooting from a standstill, you can start with your first foot already planted. The shot will then only require one step into your alignment, catch and shoot, and will thus be quicker.

Moving

On the move, the 1-2 step will require you to set up your feet as you move to the desired spot so that the proper first foot is down on the catch, then turning your body to face the basket and into your shot as the ball is caught. To get into the 1-2 step on the move you may have to alter your stride as you run.

After the catch

Once the ball is caught after a 1-2 step, if you decide not to shoot, you can only jab step or begin a drive with the second foot that was used to step into the shot, once the ball was caught.

Your decision to either shoot, drive or pass will be made as you are stepping into your shot and reading the defense.

The Hop

To use the hop, you will start by jumping just 2 to 3 inches off the ground once the pass is thrown and the ball is in the air. While you are briefly in the air you will catch the ball and align your hips and feet for your shot, so the hop, catch and alignment will take place all in one motion. You will land on the balls of your feet and quickly spring back up for your jump shot.

Spot up

If you are spotting up with the hop, you can start with your feet in whatever stance is comfortable for you—square, staggered or angled. You will hop off of both feet, catch, align, land and shoot.

Moving

On the move you can be ready to hop and shoot at any time because as you move you can get into your hop by jumping off of either foot and quickly turning in the air to align your body. When running, shuffling or backpedaling into a shot, as the ball comes toward you, you will start your hop with whichever foot is currently planted. Then jump off of one foot, catch, align with the basket and land on two feet before shooting.

(It maybe be more comfortable to always start your hop with a certain foot when you are on the move, and in this case you will have to set up your steps similar to a 1-2 step.)

After the catch

Once the ball is caught after a hop, you can attack the defense with either foot because landing on two feet does not establish a pivot foot. So you can jab or begin a drive with either foot.

Your decision to either shoot, drive or pass must be made quickly as you are in the air, catching the ball and reading the defense.

Which is better?

Changing your footwork from the 1-2 to the hop is not going to drastically change your shot accuracy by itself. If you have been taught to use the 1-2 step and are considering adding the hop to your game, there are three main aspects of your shot you will want to consider when examining if the hop helps you or not. So as you are trying out the hop you should be asking yourself about:

  • Speed: Does using the hop compared to the 1-2 get my shot off quicker? Is my shot released faster from the time the ball is caught?
  • Balance: Does quickly landing on the balls of my feet give me more or less balance when compared to stepping into my shot, one foot at a time? Do I feel like my weight is distributed equally and I am jumping straight?
  • Rhythm: Does the hop give me more rhythm? Does hopping into my shot give my entire shooting motion more flow from my feet to my release point?

The video below makes the case for the hop but does a good job or comparing the two methods and providing visual examples of how both are done.

These questions should help you determine if using the hop would be good for you. You can obviously use either the 1,2 step or the hop exclusively or a combination of both depending on the situation of the game. What is most important is what makes your shooting motion the most comfortable and how it affects your shot.

  • Facebook
  • Twitter
  • Facebook Messenger
  • Email

The traveling rule in the NBA rulebook has changed in a profound way.

It’s fallout from that surprising moment this early spring when the guy who oversees NBA officials told me that, in calling traveling, referees are instructed to ignore the rulebook.

When that happened, it was as if a thousand cranky old ex-NBA fans, in a thousand sports bars, had been vindicated. “See!” I could hear some imaginary Homer Simpson saying. “Told you. They threw out the rulebook years ago.”

The rulebook allowed for just one step after the “gather,” but NBA referees had long been instructed to allow two.

People have very strong feelings about whether one or two steps ought to be allowed. The two-step crowd insists that if you videotape a normal layup in any game anywhere, and watch it in slow motion, you’re very likely to see two steps after the gather. Magic Johnson did it. Bob Cousy did it. Pete Maravich did it.

The one-step crowd insists that the rules have always said one, and even if that’s hard to call perfectly, that’s basketball, and that’s a standard to shoot for now and forever. Change it at your peril.

I have no dog in that fight. (I play basketball expecting to be allowed one step. I watch the NBA expecting two. It’s one of a zillion differences between my game and the NBA, and I’m fine with it.) But I know in my gut that the rulebook ought to be consistent with what the referees are calling. And I know that no one involved in NBA officiating seemed to think they were anywhere close to just allowing one step.

Therefore, the rulebook surely had to be changed. Here, in its entirety, are the NBA’s new rules on traveling. Section “b” is where the action is:

a. A player who receives the ball while standing still may pivot, using either foot as the pivot foot.

b. A player who receives the ball while he is progressing or upon completion of a dribble, may take two steps in coming to a stop, passing or shooting the ball. A player who receives the ball while he is progressing must release the ball to start his dribble before his second step. The first step occurs when a foot, or both feet, touch the floor after gaining control of the ball. The second step occurs after the first step when the other foot touches the floor, or both feet touch the floor simultaneously. A player who comes to a stop on step one when both feet are on the floor or touch the floor simultaneously may pivot using either foot as his pivot. If he jumps with both feet he must release the ball before either foot touches the floor. A player who lands with one foot first may only pivot using that foot. A progressing player who jumps off one foot on the first step may land with both feet simultaneously for the second step. In this situation, the player may not pivot with either foot and if one or both feet leave the floor the ball must be released before either returns to the floor.

c. In starting a dribble after (1) receiving the ball while standing still, or (2) coming to a legal stop, the ball must be out of the player’s hand before the pivot foot is raised off the floor.

d. If a player, with the ball in his possession, raises his pivot foot off the floor, he must pass or shoot before his pivot foot returns to the floor. If he drops the ball while in the air, he may not be the first to touch the ball. e. A player who falls to the floor while holding the ball, or while coming to a stop, may not gain an advantage by sliding.

f. A player who attempts a field goal may not be the first to touch the ball if it fails to touch the backboard, basket ring or another player.

g. A player may not be the first to touch his own pass unless the ball touches his backboard, basket ring or another player. h. Upon ending his dribble or gaining control of the ball, a player may not touch the floor consecutively with the same foot (hop).

PENALTY: Loss of ball. The ball is awarded to the opposing team at the sideline, nearest spot of the violation but no nearer the baseline than the foul line extended.

Hats off to the League. They simply didn’t have to update their rulebook. Doing nothing was totally an option — they hold all the cards. But they did what strikes me as undeniably the right thing. They got their rulebook, and their referees, on the same page. Nicely played. That’s leadership, and in its way it was bold.

There may be a public relations price to pay, too. Many told me last spring that such a rewording would never happen. One NBA source said that it would anger far too many fans, who would see it as the league letting the players do whatever they want. Right or not, and sometimes with racial overtones, a big bunch of fans just hate the idea that NBA players are getting away with something.

If comments on ESPN.com are representative, this rule change is not being taken lightly. A small minority are positive about the change. But most responses are more like these:

Sinestrojoe Like they call walking anyway . NBA is nothing more than glorified streetball.

Inisfree19 Let’s be honest and call this new rule by its proper name, “The Lebron Rule.” Since he already takes three steps and lowers his shoulder, is he now allowed to take four steps?

buphelow I mean really, why even bother dribbling the ball at all. Lets just get rid of that nit-picky little aspect of the sport as well.

coolhippie51 Once again the NBA has proved it is more about the show than the basketball product. They should consider changeing their name to WWB as they enforce rules as they please to insure an outcome they want.

robertrwebster Let’s allow two fouls before calling a foul, too. Oops — already doing that.

rogersxx1 And for those saying the game is being ruined, it’s too late.

tomjam7777 Rules? The NBA has rules? Easy solution — make dribbling optional. The NBA — Not Basketball Anymore.

jhett09 Terrible! I was already planning on watching hardly any NBA, now it’ll be even less. Can’t stand how much they baby the best players in the world.

vijayfan This is a joke, right?? Right??

I salute the idea that fans feel protective of the game. I’m thrilled people get mad when they see things happen to basketball that they don’t like. All that passion keeps the whole thing rolling.

But I don’t see it on this topic. As of this week, the way it is written is the way referees have been instructed to call it for as long as anyone can remember. It’s hard to imagine there will be a noticeable difference in what we see on the court this season.

And sure, anyone with a Tivo knows that referees make mistakes sometimes. But having spent time with NBA referees I can tell you it’s wrong not to see them as serious professionals. They’re getting things right that most of us know nothing about. (Can you pass this quiz?)

As for those who doubt the quality of the basketball being played in the NBA: Honestly, are you really watching?

Can you take steps in basketball?

In basketball, traveling is a violation of the rules that occurs when a player holding the ball moves one or both their feet illegally. Traveling is also called, predominantly in a streetball game, “walking” or “steps”. A travel can also be called via carrying or an unestablished pivot foot.

Can you take 3 steps in basketball?

Taking more than two steps with control of the ball is considered a travel, so in this case, three steps is a travel. Oftentimes a player will catch the ball while taking a step but not have full control of it and then take two more steps for a layup or dunk, this is legal.

How many steps are you allowed in basketball?

two steps
A player who receives the ball while he is progressing or upon completion of a dribble, may take two steps in coming to a stop, passing or shooting the ball. A player who receives the ball while he is progressing must release the ball to start his dribble before his second step.

How many steps can you take in basketball for a layup?

“A layup is the action of a player dribbling towards the hoop, taking two steps, and then laying the basketball into the hoop off the backboard.”

Can you take 2 steps in basketball without dribbling?

The definition of a travel is when a player illegally moves one or both feet. If a player takes three steps or more before dribbling, or changes pivot foot, it’s a traveling violation. That means a player can take two steps before he has to dribble.

Can you take two steps without dribbling?

Can I take 2 steps without dribbling?

Why is hop step not a travel?

Re: Why aren’t hop steps and euro steps considered traveling Because you are allowed two steps when coming to a stop. This includes passing or shooting. Neither of those moves break that rule.

How many overtimes allowed in college basketball?

Unlike the NBA, college basketball uses two 20-minutes halves, as opposed to four quarters. However, all programs affiliated with the NCAA (Divisions I, II and III) play five-minute overtimes, just like in the pros.

How many PSI should you put in a basketball?

In the United States, we measure this force using psi, or pounds per square inch. Conventional wisdom is that a basketball needs 8 psi to be properly inflated. A car tire, just for a comparison, needs 40 psi. Most basketballs have inflation instructions printed right on them.

How many substitutes are allowed in basketball?

Basketball rules –. Five players are required on each team to begin play. Once the action is under way, fewer than five can play if no legal substitutes are available.

How many overtimes are in basketball?

The National Basketball Association holds five-minute overtime periods, regardless of how many OTs are played. The NBA consists of four 12-minute quarters, and allows for 130 seconds between the end of the fourth quarter and overtime, as well as between each overtime period. The most overtimes in an NBA game is six.

Is Hop Step illegal?

However the case of so-called ‘Hop step’ has become violation as it is also a violation in the NBA. This means: A player may not touch the floor consecutively with the same foot or both feet after ending his dribble or gaining control of the ball.

Is a hop step two steps?

Once you stop dribbling, the foot that first hits the floor doesn’t count because you were dribbling while it was moving. After this step you can either do two steps with one foot or you can take one step and then jump off that foot and land with two feet at the same time, that is a hop step.

Is a Euro step a hop step?

Giroux! A hop step is clearly jumping and landing with the ball. A eurostep is two steps(picking up pivot foot).

Can you take a step after a hop step?

You can take another “step” as long as you keep your pivot down, but what you’re doing sounds like a travel. This. As long as your pivot foot is down you can “step” out of your stance.

Are you allowed to take 2 steps without dribbling?

It’s only legal if you’re on the move. If you’re moving such running, cutting, or going toward the basket then you can take two steps without dribbling to take a lay up or take a jump shot. If you were on the move while catching the ball, you can also take two steps after catching the ball to come to a full stop.

Is there illegal touching in basketball?

In basketball, basket interference is the violation of (a) touching the ball or any part of the basket (including the net) while the ball is on the rim of the basket, (b) touching the ball when it is within the cylinder extending upwards from the rim, (c) reaching up through the basket from below and touching the ball.

What is the 8-second rule in basketball?

8-second rule When a player has the ball in their own half or ‘backcourt’, they have 8 seconds to move the ball over the halfway line into the ‘frontcourt’.

What is a shot clock violation?

If a team fails to attempt a field goal within the time allotted, a shot clock violation shall be called. The ball is awarded to the defensive team on the sideline, nearest the spot where play was suspended but no nearer to the baseline than the free throw line extended.

What is the 25 second rule in tennis?

After the chair umpire announces the score, a server will have 25 seconds to start the next point. If the player has not started the service motion at the completion of the 25-second countdown, the chair umpire will issue a violation.

What happens with a shot clock violation?

A shot clock violation results in a turnover. The opposing team will get to inbound the ball and start a new possession. As long as the ball has left a player’s hands and is in the air by the time the shot clock hits zero, it is not considered a shot clock violation-although the ball still needs to hit the rim.

What is 24 or 30 second clock shot clock?

A shot clock is a countdown timer used in basketball that provides a set amount of time (24–35 seconds, depending on the league) that a team may possess the ball before attempting to score a field goal. It is distinct from the game clock, which displays the time remaining in the period of play.

Is the shot clock on the floor real?

TNT’s New On-Court Shot Clock Is an Abomination Last month, TNT introduced a new, horrifying feature on its NBA broadcasts: a digital shot clock that’s superimposed onto the floor just behind the foul line. Unlike the yellow first-down line, however, TNT’s digital shot clock is completely unnecessary.

Which position is referred to as the 4 in basketball?

Basketball positions with the numbers as they are known: 1–Point guard. 2–Shooting guard. 3– Small forward. 4–Power forward.

Table of Contents

How to do a basketball hop step

Can you take 3 steps in basketball?

Taking more than two steps with control of the ball is considered a travel, so in this case, three steps is a travel. Oftentimes a player will catch the ball while taking a step but not have full control of it and then take two more steps for a layup or dunk, this is legal.

Does basketball take 2 or 3 steps?

Quote from NBA Rulebook. You’re allowed 2 steps upon completion of a dribble, so if you dribble while pushing off of one foot it is not counted toward one of your 2 allowed steps.

How many steps can you take for a layup?

You are allowed to take two steps after you have stopped dribbling when you shoot a layup.

What is a zero step in basketball?

The zero step refers to the step taken when gaining control of the ball. When dribbling, the zero step gathering happens as the ball is gathered in 2 hands or let it rest in 1 hand. Similarly when moving and catching a ball.

Do NBA players carry the ball?

So yes, many players carry the ball. Many players also try to draw fouls, but we seem to agree that what James Harden does is excessive.

Is 2 steps a travel in basketball?

In basketball, traveling is a violation of the rules that occurs when a player holding the ball moves one or both their feet illegally. . When a player has taken more than 2 steps without the ball being dribbled, a traveling violation is called.

Can you take 2 steps in basketball?

A player who receives the ball while he is progressing or upon completion of a dribble, may take two steps in coming to a stop, passing or shooting the ball. . If he jumps with both feet he must release the ball before either foot touches the floor. A player who lands with one foot first may only pivot using that foot.

Can I walk more than 2 steps in basketball?

When a player has taken more than 2 steps without the ball being dribbled, a traveling violation is called. In 2018, FIBA revised the rule so that one can take a “gather step” before taking the 2 steps. A travel can also be called via carrying or an unestablished pivot foot.

Is it legal to take two steps in basketball?

This occurrence is more commonly referred to as taking “two-and-a-half steps”, where the half step is the “gather step”. This half step is what makes the majority of euro-steps look so effortless and sexy. As for whether this is considered legal in NCAA/International basketball, I have no idea.

How many steps are allowed in a dribble in the NBA?

Quote from NBA Rulebook. You’re allowed 2 steps upon completion of a dribble, so if you dribble while pushing off of one foot it is not counted toward one of your 2 allowed steps. Conclusion: This occurrence is more commonly referred to as taking “two-and-a-half steps”, where the half step is the “gather step”.

How to do a 6 step layup in basketball?

How to Do a Layup (6-Steps) 1 Eyes Up 2 Outside Foot Step (Long) 3 Inside Foot Step (High) 4 Protect the Ball 5 Follow Through 6 Practice!

What happens if you do a hop step in basketball?

Even executed perfectly, some officials may still call you for traveling, as it can be difficult to discern a hop step from a travel. Possession of the ball and prior use of a player’s allotted pivot can also influence traveling calls. Dribble the ball slowly down the court. You should pay close attention to footwork and stance.

We all watch the NBA or basketball highlights and see a play that leads to dunk, then stop and think how many steps did he take? was that legal. We think the referee missed the call, actually, we know the referee missed the call. So we question ourselves?

How many steps is a travel in basketball? Taking more than two steps with control of the ball is considered a travel, so in this case, three steps is a travel. Oftentimes a player will catch the ball while taking a step but not have full control of it and then take two more steps for a layup or dunk, this is legal. It is only a travel violation if the referee blows the whistle.

Travel violations can happen in many ways, but in the end, you are technically allowed two steps when in control of the ball. Taking more than two steps is not the only way to travel, let’s look at what else is considered a travel.

More On Travelling

We can say that 3 steps is a travel but really it depends, for example picking up your pivot foot is a travel and that’s one step. If you catch the ball in motion it has to be out of your hands bypassing, shooting, or dribbling, if not this can be a travel. Jumping up and down with the ball is a travel, so it obviously depends on the type of violation.

How to do a basketball hop step

Easy to Understand Travel Violations

Below I have listed the rules to traveling as per the NBA rule book but if you don’t want to go through the fluff I will list in simple terms what other ways in basketball is a travel besides taking more than two steps.

In no particular order doing these things may result in a travel violation call:

  • Picking up the pivot foot.
  • If you land with a left then right and while catching the ball the first foot which in this case is the left is the pivot foot. If you use the right foot it is actually a travel.
  • Switching pivot feet.
  • Taking more than two steps without a dribble or motion to shoot.
  • Standing still you may not take a step without a dribble before the pivot foot is released.
  • Catching your own airball is a travel, it must hit the backboard or rim or touch another player.
  • You may not jump up and down with the ball you must release it on the way up, and catch it mid-air on the way down.
  • You may not take two steps after a jump stop.
  • If you fall to the ground you may not slide, roll or move on the floor with the ball.
  • Pass to yourself off the backboard unless you’re in motion to layup/dunk it.
  • Jab step to quickly and in the process pick up your pivot foot before dribbling the ball.
  • Catching the ball and then taking your two steps to set up for a shot at the hoop.
  • Up and Under is usually done in the post, you fake out the defender with a shot, defender jumps and you go underneath him by taking a step, you must be in the process of shooting the ball as you lift up your pivot foot.

How to do a basketball hop step

Nba Rules on Travelling

So what do the rules say I will go over them using the NBA Rule Book as a reference, most of these rules are universal. You can find the traveling rules in Section XIII—Traveling.

1 . A player who receives the ball while standing still may pivot, using either foot as the pivot foot.

A player who catches the ball and is standing still can pivot but can not take any steps.

2. A player who receives the ball while he is progressing or upon completion of a dribble, may take two steps in coming to a stop, passing or shooting the ball.

This is pretty clear you are given 2 steps to come to a complete stop, pass or shoot. Sometimes this isn’t always called when it is more than 2 steps as the player is running it may be difficult to catch, happens all the time in the NBA where the player looked like they took 3 steps.

3. A player who receives the ball while he is progressing must release the ball to start his dribble before his second step.

I feel this could have been worded better, usually, the ball is not in full control of the player’s hand until the second step which isn’t a travel. Even when the ball is in full control a lot of players do not put the ball down by the second step more like they have already taken their second step and now dribbled not released the ball.

How to do a basketball hop step

  1. The first step occurs when a foot, or both feet, touch the floor after gaining control of the ball.
  2. The second step occurs after the first step when the other foot touches the floor, or both feet touch the floor simultaneously.
  3. A player who comes to a stop on step one when both feet are on the floor or touch the floor simultaneously may pivot using either foot as his pivot. If he jumps with both feet he must release the ball before either foot touches the floor.
  4. A player who lands with one foot first may only pivot using that foot.
  5. A progressing player who jumps off one foot on the first step may land with both feet simultaneously for the second step. In this situation, the player may not pivot with either foot and if one or both feet leave the floor the ball must be released before either returns to the floor.

This is why in basketball footwork is so important, there are many ways to travel, as you can see in most cases the if you lift up the pivot foot before releasing the ball this will be a travel violation.

(e) In starting a dribble after (1) receiving the ball while standing still, or (2) coming to a legal stop, the ball must be out of the player’s hand before the pivot foot is raised off the floor.

This is one of the most common travel violations, may not be called very often in the NBA.

(f) If a player, with the ball in his possession, raises his pivot foot off the floor, he must pass or shoot before his pivot foot returns to the floor. If he drops the ball while in the air, he may not be the first to touch the ball.

This all has to be in motion you can’t let the pivot foot hang in the air.

(g) A player who falls to the floor while holding the ball, or while coming to a stop, may not gain an advantage by sliding.

Any movement and you are more than likely to get called for a travel. You may dribble from the floor if you are that skilled.

How to do a basketball hop step

Is The Step Back A Travel

Many people think that the step back is a travel, to those that play basketball it looks normal to those who just spectate it may look awkward to them. The way that I can explain the step-back is a backward jump stop or sideway jump stop. This move is actually legal.

Sometimes it is a travel, the player will take one too many steps, this is on the ref to call it. But when done right the step back is a very difficult move to guard that James Harden lives by.

I watched videos of James Harden doing step-back three’s this offseason and shooting them off one foot and making it during pickup games, this will be interesting to see if he pulls this off in a real game this season.

If your looking for more rules to the game of basketball check out my other articles down below.

by Nick Bartlett, on May 27, 2019 3:35:21 PM

Throughout the past few years we’ve noticed that there are many “fundamentals” within basketball that are rather controversial – especially on social media.

And recently we’ve tried to get to the bottom of these issues and get both sides of each argument before making our own definitive decision.

Back in January we asked the question to coaches on Twitter on whether they like the “1-2 step” or “Hop” in a catch and shoot situation:

🏀 COACHES & TRAINERS: When teaching footwork in a catch and shoot situation, what do you prefer?

Feel free to share your thoughts in the comments. We’re planning to write a blog post in this topic and you could be featured!

You can see the percentages of each choice which are very interesting but there were some great comments as well.

In Favor of “Both”

Here’s one of our favorites from our partner, Mike Dunn:

For younger kids I find the hop is easier. Reason being it’s an easier concept to grasp when explaining the purpose of coming off of both legs with an equal amount of power. 1-2 step usually comes a little further down the line. Need to be able to do BOTH!

And a great quote from another one of our partners, Reid Ouse of Catalyst Training:

”A good habit is a bad habit when it’s your only habit.” Need to be able to both – multiple habits depending on the situation

In Favor of the “1-2 Step”

But we had a few responses that were very heavy in supporting the 1-2 step like this one from Seth Duke:

This shouldn’t be a question. A 1-2 step is the smoothest and most common way to flow into a jumper. A jump stop for starters leaves you off balance and if you land wrong can twist your ankle on take off. A hop is just not practical.

In Favor of “The Hop”

And last, here’s one from our friend Coach Chris Straker that feels like “The Hop” is the best option the majority of the time:

If we’re coming down off a screen or cutting in to the shot there are time for a 1-2 most of the time I feel the hop is the best option

Our take

We tend to lean towards “being able to do BOTH is important in different situations” AND “every player is going to be slightly different in what they adopt.”

For me personally, I was always taught the 1-2 step and “planting on your inside foot” when shooting in a catch and shoot situation AND off the move. However, I feel like “the hop” has become more popular as of late – especially in catch and shoot situations.

One benefit of “the hop” is being able to choose your pivot foot if you don’t shoot. I can also see how – if timed correctly – “the hop” would help create a quicker shot release.

However, as someone who spent many years focusing on the 1-2 step, I believe it would be hard for me to adopt a new way of shooting. Granted, I’m not sure the rec league games I play in now matter as much as aspiring high school, college, and pro players 🙂

I personally believe that players should practice both and understand what works best for them and what is most comfortable for them to execute in a game situation.

Your Thoughts?

Let us know in the comments! This is a fascinating topic and we want to hear from as many coaches/trainers/players as possible. Any other shooting questions you’d like us to help answer on Twitter?

For more articles and tips like this, make sure to subscribe to our blog newsletter!

Follow us on social media for daily basketball drills, tips, and inspiration!

James Harden isn’t traveling on his drives to the basket. Get educated about the “gather” step.

Share this story

  • Share this on Facebook
  • Share this on Twitter

Share All sharing options for: This James Harden ‘travel’ is actually totally legal. Here’s why

James Harden has become one of the NBA’s most polarizing players as he’s grown into the best pure-scorer alive. While no one denies Harden ’s numbers are incredible — he’s leading the NBA in scoring at 35.2 points per game, five points ahead of Giannis Antetokounmpo — how he gets them has become a topic of national debate.

Harden ’s offensive arsenal has been built on a barrage of step-back and side-step three-pointers combined with an unprecedented ability to draw fouls, but the part of his game that confounds so many people is his euro-step layup.

Harden didn’t invent the euro-step, but it sure looks like he’s perfected it. When Harden picks up his dribble and goes into the move, defenses are at his mercy to surrender two points. The move has become so effective that it’s led to many opposing fans, players, and announcers calling for it to be whistled as a travel.

It happened again during the Houston Rockets’ 120-110 victory over the Utah Jazz Saturday night. Harden again led the way for Houston with 38 points, but it’s one play in particular that has driven conversation in the hours since. As Harden attacked the Jazz defense and used a euro-step layup to score a bucket, Utah’s announcers were pleading for a traveling call on TV.

Either way James still has this in his bag pic.twitter.com/YnwNA3Hka4

At first glance, it sure looks like Harden is taking three steps before he scores the ball, which would be against the rules and should be whistled as a travel. But if you look at the NBA rule book and watch the play again, it’s pretty clear this isn’t traveling. It’s a totally legal move.

It all comes back to the “gather” step. Here’s how the NBA rule book defines a gather:

For a player who is in control of the ball while dribbling, the gather is defined as the point where a player does any one of the following:

Puts two hands on the ball, or otherwise permits the ball to come to rest, while he is in control of it;

Puts a hand under the ball and brings it to a pause; or

Otherwise gains enough control of the ball to hold it, change hands, pass, shoot, or cradle it against his body.

Incorporating the Gather into the Traveling Rule

The gather will be expressly incorporated into the traveling rule to clarify how many steps a player may take after he receives the ball while progressing or completes his dribble:

A player who gathers the ball while progressing may (a) take two steps in coming to a stop, passing or shooting the ball or (b) if he has not yet dribbled, one step prior to releasing the ball to start his dribble.

A player who gathers the ball while dribbling may take two steps in coming to a stop, passing or shooting the ball.

The first step occurs when a foot, or both feet, touch the floor after the player gathers the ball.

That last line is the most important. NBA officials don’t start counting steps until the gather is complete. Harden and other stars like Antetokounmpo have been able to leverage that rule to their advantage when driving to the basket.

Watch the Harden play above again. Harden is gathering the ball as he makes his first step. That is legal according to the rule book and does not start the count on how many steps Harden is allowed to take:

How to do a basketball hop step

Harden then takes two steps and lays the ball in. It does appear he drags his back foot into his final step, but as Basketball Breakdown and others have pointed out, that’s legal as well.

No, Harden isn’t traveling when he goes into his euro-step layup, even if it looks that way to casual fans. This is a legal move because of how the gather is defined in the rule book. Remember that the next time someone complains that Harden is taking three steps.

This is a highlighted and annotated version of the FIBA travel rule, including links to videos. Paragraph numbers are used to facilitate cross-reference. For key videos see

Travelling is the illegal movement of one foot or both feet beyond the limits outlined in this article, in any direction, while holding a live ball on the playing court.

A pivot is the legal movement in which a player who is holding a live ball on the playing court steps once or more than once in any direction with the same foot, while the other foot, called the pivot foot, is kept at its point of contact with the floor.

Establishing a pivot foot by a player who catches a live ball on the playing court:

  1. A player who catches the ball while standing with both feet on the floor:
    1. The moment one foot is lifted, the other foot becomes the pivot foot.
    2. To start a dribble, the pivot foot may not be lifted before the ball is released from the hand(s).
      • See 2018 FIBA Traveling Rules at 5:01 (travel).
    3. To pass or shoot for a field goal, the player may jump off a pivot foot, but neither foot may be returned to the floor before the ball is released from the hand(s).
      • Nothing new here.
  2. A player who catches the ball while he is progressing, or upon completion of a dribble, may take two steps in coming to a stop, passing or shooting the ball:
      • NBA language is basically the same, using “gathers” instead of “catches”; the first steps occurs when a foot, or both feet, touch the floor after the player gathers the ball.
      • Catching a pass while progressing can be on one foot or in the air; a catch on two feet is covered by paragraph 1 (as is a catch in the air then landing on two feet, see 2(g) below). See
        • Stationary start before dribble
        • NBA Video – Traveling and the Gather at 4:10 of video #1 (Moe Wagner).
    1. If, after receiving the ball, a player shall release the ball to start his dribble before his second step.
      • NBA wording is that a player may take one step prior to releasing the ball to start his dribble.
      • While moving, you can catch the ball on one foot (gather), take a first step, then release the ball to dribble before a second step hits the floor. See
        • Kyle Lowry clip
        • 2018 FIBA Traveling Rules at 8:26
        • NBA Video – Traveling and the Gather at 6:15 of video #1.
      • If you catch the ball in the air and land on one foot, that is the first step, and the ball has to be released to dribble before the next step hits the floor.
        • See NBA Video – Traveling and the Gather at 6:44 of video #1 (travel by Rudy Gobert, gather with both feet in the air, step 1-2).
      • This is not stationary situation 1(b) where the ball has to be released before a pivot foot is lifted from the floor.
      • See Shooting – Sackmann pull-ups .
    2. The first step occurs when one foot or both feet touch the floor after gaining control of the ball.
      • Basically the same as the NBA. Note the key phrase “after gaining control of the ball”.
      • If one foot is on the floor when gaining control of the ball on the move, that is not the first step, it is the gather step or zero step (step 0).
        • See Travelling Rules Interpretation at 0:26 (zero step) and 0:54 (when you take control of the ball with one foot on the ground that foot is zero).
      • If both feet are in the air when gaining control of the ball, there is no gather step, landing on one foot or both feet will be the first step; this is not new, see 2(e) and 2(g) below.
        • See NBA Video – Traveling and the Gather (video #1) at 5:50 – Klay Thompson catches in the air and takes 3 steps, it’s a travel.
    3. The second step occurs after the first step when the other foot touches the floor or both feet touch the floor simultaneously.
      • For layups off a catch, see
        • Pick and roll clip (0-1-2)
        • 2018 FIBA Traveling Rules at 0:17
        • NBA Video – Traveling and the Gather (video #1)
          • at 5:05 – gather, step 1, step 2
          • at 5:33 – travel by Klay Thompson (gather-1-2-3)
      • For layups off the dribble, see
        • Travelling Rules Interpretation at 0:26 (dribble, zero step, 1st step, 2nd step)
        • Dribble step, gather step, step 1, step 2.
      • For layups off a catch and dribble, see
        • DeAndre Jordan clip
        • 2018 FIBA Traveling Rules at 8:27.
      • If a moving player catches on one foot (the gather), takes a first step then stops with another step, the first step is the pivot foot , and 1(b) applies to start a dribble.
        • See 2018 FIBA Traveling Rules at 2:42 (lift from corner to 0-1-2 stop).
      • See 2(f) if a player lands on both feet after the first step.
    4. If the player who comes to a stop on his first step has both feet on the floor or they touch the floor simultaneously, he may pivot using either foot as his pivot foot. If he then jumps with both feet, no foot may return to the floor before the ball is released from the hand(s).
      • See 1(a) and 1(c) above.
      • A moving player who catches on one foot then stops with the other foot, or hops off the one foot to land on both feet, does not yet have a pivot foot. The footwork is gather step, first step (not first step, second step). To initiate a dribble, 1(b) applies.
      • See 2018 FIBA Traveling Rules at
        • 3:29 – lift, left-right stop, drive left, left foot (gather step) is the pivot foot.
        • 3:53 – lift, left-right stop, drive right, right foot (first step) is the pivot foot.
        • 4:13 – catch on right foot, hop to land on both feet, drive right.
        • 4:35 – catch on left foot, hop to land on both feet, drive left.
      • See Shooting – Angled pull-up .
    5. If a player lands with one foot he may only pivot using that foot.
      • To repeat, there is no gather step on a catch in the air, landing on one foot (or both feet) is the first step. This is not new.
    6. If a player jumps off one foot on the first step , he may land with both feet simultaneously for the second step. In this situation, the player may not pivot with either foot. If one foot or both feet then leave the floor, no foot may return to the floor before the ball is released from the hand(s).
      • Not new. This is different from catching on the move on one foot then jumping to land on both feet (gather step, first step), where either foot can be the pivot foot. See 2(d) and
        • 2018 FIBA Traveling Rules at 7:58 (spin drop step, hop, step thru – travel)
        • Travelling Rules Interpretation at 6:20 (dribble, 0, 1, jump stop).
    7. If both feet are off the floor and the player lands on both feet simultaneously, the moment one foot is lifted the other foot becomes the pivot foot.
      • Not new, see 1(a), also Travelling Rules Interpretation at 5:53 (the new rules apply to a player who is moving, on a jump stop the old rules apply)
    8. A player may not touch the floor consecutively with the same foot or both feet after ending his dribble or gaining control of the ball.
      • Not new; see Same foot twice clip.

A player falling, lying or sitting on the floor:

How to do a basketball hop step

Posted On: 08/9/21 9:00 AM

I got another opportunity to evaluate some girls basketball at the HSSE National Tournament in Benton, AR during the weekend of July 24-25th. This was HSSE’s first national tournament so the field was small but there was still good basketball played and some players stood out to me.

How to do a basketball hop stepAtesa Johnson | Arkansas Blaze (Lafayette County High School) | Combo Guard | 2025

Atesa is an athletic player that slashes to the basket. She often scored points for her team just by finding ways to score. She uses her athletic ability well in the half-court and in transition. Atesa also displayed the ability to finish at the rim a number of different ways.

How to do a basketball hop stepLindsey Lockheart | South Arkansas Lady Wolves (El Dorado High School) | Combo Guard/Wing | 2023

Lindsey showed the most potential of all the players at the national tournament. When she decided to make a play, whether it was scoring or creating for someone else, she did it. She can shoot the three, score in transition, handles the rock, and anticipate on defense.

How to do a basketball hop step

Arkansas All Access Pass

Subscribe to Prep Girls Hoops Arkansas to get access to all premium articles and prospect rankings for as little as $2 per week with an annual subscription!

Still not sure? Check out some free articles:

How to do a basketball hop step

Table of Contents

  • What is a Basketball Swing Step?
  • Footwork
  • Protecting The Ball

What is a Basketball Swing Step?

A swing step in basketball is a move used by a player on a drive to the basket. Similar to a Euro step, a swing step allows the ball handler to sidestep the defender and finish at the rim, usually with a layup or a floater.

The footwork of a swing step builds upon the fundamental footwork that precedes a regular layup. On a swing step, however, the first step after the dribble is bigger and helps the ball handler to change direction.

Footwork

For the purposes of making these instructions more clear, these steps will refer to a swing step being used when approaching the defender on the right side of his body, which will generally happen on the right side of the court. To use the move on the left, simply replace “right” with “left” and vice versa.

The swing step starts with the ball handler getting low as he drives to the hoop. he takes one last dribble with his right hand and steps with his left foot simultaneously. As the player picks up his dribble, he takes a large, exaggerated step with his right foot across the body of the defender. After this step, the ball handler’s right foot and hip should be on the inside of the defender. The ball handler finishes by taking one more step with his left foot before finishing with a shot at the rim.

Protecting The Ball

As with any drive to the basket, the ball handler needs to protect the ball from defenders. The best way to do this is to keep the ball as far away from the defense as possible.

An effective strategy for the ball handler is to bring the ball over his head while performing the swing step across the defender’s body. When swinging the ball overhead from the right side of the body to the left, the exaggerated step should turn into a slight hop as the player gets out of his initial low dribbling stance to stretch vertically and stand up. This will ensure the ball is as far from the defender’s grasp as possible.

Alternatively, the ball handler can bring the ball down low to his knees during the swing step. Rather than standing up during the large step however, the ball handler gets even lower. Again, this keeps the ball away from the defender.

The ball handler even has the option to bring the ball behind his back, transferring it from the right hand to the left hand in order to protect the ball.

I’ve recently started playing basketball and was wondering about some of the comments made about this (pretty cool) NBA commercial featuring LeBron James. It looks like he takes 1 step after receiving the ball before dribbling it, is that considered to be a travel? I doubt the NBA would make a commercial showing a blatant violation so I’m assuming it’s valid but want to know what the exact rule is.

How to do a basketball hop step

2 Answers 2

You would think they wouldn’t include a blatant violation, but they did. From the NBA Rules Section XIV:

f. In starting a dribble after (1) receiving the ball while standing still, or (2) coming to a legal stop, the ball must be out of the player’s hand before the pivot foot is raised off the floor.

From listening to my friends who I would consider avid NBA fans, travelling and carrying seem to be the most common complaints where modern referees often ignore the written rules.

How to do a basketball hop step

There’s also some additional information regarding traveling in the 2011-12 NBA Rulebook:

Section XIII—Traveling

a. A player who receives the ball while standing still may pivot, using either foot as the pivot foot.

b. A player who receives the ball while he is progressing or upon completion of a dribble, may take two steps in coming to a stop, passing or shooting the ball. A player who receives the ball while he is progressing must release the ball to start his dribble before his second step.

The first step occurs when a foot, or both feet, touch the floor after gaining control of the ball.

The second step occurs after the first step when the other foot touches the floor, or both feet touch the floor simultaneously.

A player who comes to a stop on step one when both feet are on the floor or touch the floor simultaneously may pivot using either foot as his pivot. If he jumps with both feet he must release the ball before either foot touches the floor.

A player who lands with one foot first may only pivot using that foot.

A progressing player who jumps off one foot on the first step may land with both feet simultaneously for the second step. In this situation, the player may not pivot with either foot and if one or both feet leave the floor the ball must be released before either returns to the floor.

Columnists have blasted the rule:

And while you’re at it, clean up traveling, too (the two-steps-and-bunny-hop is especially insulting to the memory of Dr. James).

So the rule specified in @Will Cole’s answer conflicts somewhat with this one. According to this 2009 ESPN article, the league has generally instructed refs not to enforce the rule.

How to do a basketball hop step

How to do a basketball hop step

How to do a basketball hop step

Referee officials JB Derosa, Josh Tiven, and Nick Buchert discuss a play during the game between the Phoenix Suns and Orlando Magic on December 26, 2018 at Amway Center in Orlando, Florida. /VCG Photo

After a summer of reinforcements and readjustments, the 30 teams in the U.S. National Basketball Association are gearing up towards the 74th season, set to kick off on October 22. However, the East and West conferences weren’t the only ones busy at the drawing board.

League officials, as they do between seasons, revisited controversial plays and noteworthy calls in an effort to conform to the seemingly ever-evolving rules of basketball with “new language.”

The NBA introduced newly-defined rules regarding traveling violations on Tuesday that tried putting to rest the controversy surrounding some offensive players’ moves, including the signature “step-back” by Houston Rockets star shooting guard James Harden: a move that is so unique and unusual it seems like he takes an illegal three steps before shooting.

Officials are determined not to allow offensive players to take more than the allowed two steps after “gathering” the ball and have, therefore, issued new guidelines to help clear the smoke.

How to do a basketball hop step

James Harden #13 of the Houston Rockets drives to the basket against the Shanghai Sharks during the pre-season on September 30, 2019 at the Toyota Center in Houston, Texas. /VCG Photo

“The official NBA rule book will now have a section that formally defines the ‘gather.’ The text of the rule will also be revised to provide additional clarity regarding how many steps a player may take after the gather occurs,” read the NBA statement.

For a player who receives a pass or gains possession of a loose ball, the “gather” is defined as the point where the player gains enough control of the ball to hold it, change hands, pass, shoot, or cradle it against his body.

Gathering also applies when a player is in control of the ball while dribbling and does any of the following:

– Puts two hands on the ball, or otherwise permits the ball to come to rest, while he is in control of it.

– Puts a hand under the ball and brings it to a pause.

– Gains enough control of the ball to hold it, change hands, pass, shoot, or cradle it against his body.

It is after the “gather” that the NBA says a player can take the allotted two steps.

Scoring stars like Lebron James and Stephen Curry already have an advantage since the “hand-checking” on the perimeter was made illegal in 2004, essentially freeing up the court so players can drive to the rim without much physical resistance from a defender.

Referee Tyler Ford looks on during a game between the Memphis Grizzlies and the Minnesota Timberwolves during the Finals of the Las Vegas Summer League on July 15, 2019 at the Thomas & Mack Center in Las Vegas, Nevada. /VCG Photo

“If we can’t allow people to hand check, we can’t allow them to travel because then they’re almost unguardable,” vice president of referee operations Mark Wunderlich told the Associated Press.

The traveling guidelines may seem like they’re meant to give moves like Harden’s “back-step” a pass, but it’s rather meant to “eliminate the gap between the rule as written and how it has been applied in NBA games.” Or in other words, quell the controversy.

“It is legal, except for the fact that he gets a third step in every now and then when his rhythm is just off, which shows you the highlight of how difficult it is,” Monty McCutchen, the NBA’s head of referee development and training told the AP.

An educational video was reportedly sent to teams, while referees visited the coaches’ pre-season meetings so they could do demonstrations for them.

Another video was posted by the NBA on Twitter using real examples of double-take moves that either violated or followed the traveling rule.

VP and Head of Referee Development & Training Monty McCutchen provides an overview of rules regarding Traveling for Dribbling Players, and addresses the newly-defined concept of the “gather” on October 1, 2019. /Twitter screen grab

Rockets head coach Mike D’Antoni praised the decision, while rival San Antonio Spurs coach Gregg Popovich criticized such moves last year saying that the step-back 3-point shot came when players “jump backwards and travel and shoot a 3.”

Leaders of the referee team praised Harden for his cleverness and creativity.

“On the dribble, we always talk about dribbling you can take two legal steps to the basket, right? No one ever thought about on the gather after you dribble you can take two legal steps backwards,” Wunderlich said.

Will the signature “step-back” traveling speculation now be put to rest? That depends on how fans and teams react to calls during the upcoming games. They will surely be following each step as closely as the referees.

Thread Tools
  • Show Printable Version

Re: RULE QUESTION: Are you allowed to pumpfake/pivot after a HOPSTEP .

One more very important thing, i have noticed that many fans (even in this forum) confuse a hop step with a jump stop and hence confuse the rules.

The key to determine whether you can pivot after the jump stop is whether you terminate your dribble with a foot still on the floor (this is a HOP STEP, doing a hop step into a jump stop) or terminate the dribble after the jump with both feet in the air (this is a 100% JUMP STOP). For the latter, either foot may be used as a pivot provided you land on the floor with both feet simultaneously after the jump.

Yes a hop step ends up with a jump stop and that procedure looks kindof similar to just doing a jump stop. but since the hop step was made before the jump stop the jump stop now has different rules. understand?

Last edited by pauk; 02-10-2013 at 12:20 PM .

Re: RULE QUESTION: Are you allowed to pumpfake/pivot after a HOPSTEP .

Don’t like the rules, then quit watching basketball! It’s really that damn simple.

Re: RULE QUESTION: Are you allowed to pumpfake/pivot after a HOPSTEP .

When receiving a pass with a jump-stop, you can pivot after the jump-stop and either foot can become the pivot foot. This is especially helpful for post players. A perimeter player can catch the ball with a jump-stop and then pivot into triple-threat position if necessary and use the non-pivot foot for executing jab-step fakes or a drive step.

But a player who already has possession of the ball that makes a dribble move into the lane, picks up the dribble, takes off of one foot, and then lands a two-footed jump-stop, so far so good. this is a “HOP STEP”. Technically this is 3 steps, but the last 2 counts as 1 since both feet land at the same time and take of at the same time. many confuse this with a travel, but it is not. its a travel (3 steps) only if both feet dont land at the same time or if both feet dont leave the ground at the same time (when you jump).

Hence why after landing, the player cannot move either foot and has no pivot foot since the one step was already used up prior to the jump-stop.

Once you are in that jump stop the player can just stand and do his pump fake how much he ever wants (unless he is in the paint, 3 seconds), he can jump upward, but must either shoot or pass the ball before either foot touches the floor again.

To answer your question. you can pumpfake but you cant pivot after a hop step.

WOW pauk knows the rules better than 90% of the board.

Just admit lebron travels. thats all i’m asking.

How to do a basketball hop step

The drop step is one of the most basic moves on a basketball court, and should be a staple for any player who wants to score around the basket.

It’s a move that every youth player should be introduced to at the youth level, and every advanced player should fine tune over time – regardless of their position.

Though it is simple, the drop step can still be one of the most effective ways to score around the basket when performed correctly.

What is the Drop Step?

The drop step is an easy-to-learn move that is designed to create an open layup for a player who is trying to score on the block.

At a glance, it appears that the offensive player is merely catching the ball, taking a step towards the basket, and shooting a layup…

But, of course, perfecting the move requires more than that.

How to Execute the Drop Step in 5 Steps

The drop step is the perfect first post move for a young player to learn because it can be taught in very basic steps:

1. Catch the Ball in a Low, Wide Stance

Setting up the perfect drop step begins with fighting for position on the block.

In order to put yourself in a good place to score, this means getting yourself in an athletic position with your defender on your back.

Your arms should be out wide, giving the passer a big target to throw the ball, and also preventing the defender from getting around you to steal the entry pass.

Another goal should be to catch the ball with both feet on the ground.

When using the drop step, you will usually step towards the baseline – but you want your defender to think that you could go either direction.

2. Take a Big Step Towards the Baseline

After catching the ball with both feet on the ground, your top foot becomes your pivot foot when performing the drop step.

With your bottom foot, take a big step towards the baseline.

Ideally, this step will seal your defender on your high side so that you have an open layup.

The quickness and size of this step are crucial to the effectiveness of the drop step.

If that step does not get you past your defender or at least in a better position to finish, then the drop step will be much easier to guard.

3. Square Your Shoulders to the Backboard

After sealing your defender with a big step towards the baseline, that foot becomes your new pivot foot.

Use one power dribble and step through with your top leg and get your shoulders parallel to the backboard.

Depending on how effectively your drop step has worked, it may not always be possible to get your shoulders all the way square with the backboard.

If your defender is still closely defending the move, you’ll want to get as close to square as possible, while also using your body to protect the ball.

4. Jump Off Two Feet

The drop step is a power move.

It starts on two feet, requires strength to execute, and it ends on two feet.

Once you’re squared up to the hoop, jump off both feet with the idea of exploding up at the rim.

This could vary based on age level, but a good goal to set is jumping high enough to slap the backboard while finishing.

5. Use the Backboard for a Power Finish

Even if you were unable to get your shoulders all the way square to the backboard with your drop step, you should have an angle that allows you to use the backboard for a finish.

Some post moves like the hook shot allow for more finesse or the opportunity to aim for a swish instead of using the backboard…

But the drop step should finish with a shot off the glass 99% of the time.

How to do a basketball hop step

Tips for the Perfect Drop Step

Now that we’ve established the basic steps of performing the drop step, here are a few pointers that can help players perfect the move:

1. Seal Your Defender on the High Side

The drop step is a usually move that takes you toward the baseline, which means it will be more effective if that space is open for you.

It may not be possible in all cases, but sometimes you can set yourself up for the perfect drop step before even catching the ball by using your body to seal the defender on your high shoulder.

2. Check the Middle of the Floor

Since you may not have been able to completely seal your defender before catching the ball, there’s a good chance that he will still be between you and the basket when you catch the ball.

When this happens, you should bring the ball to your chin and then first look to the middle of the floor to see how the defense has reacted to the post touch.

Checking the middle will allow you to see where your own defender is guarding you, and will also be the quickest way to see if a teammate may be open on the opposite block, cutting through the lane, or available for a kick out three point shot.

3. “Sell” That You’re Going Middle

Again, the drop step is designed to take you towards the baseline…

So the more you can convince your defender that you are actually going toward the middle, the more effective the move will be.

Even if your defender is playing straight behind you when you first catch the ball, you can still set up a drop step by making a shoulder fake to the middle.

You could also use an extra dribble to set your defender up in that direction.

4. Change Speeds

Regardless of whether you are able to seal your defender right away or if you have to set him up towards the middle before making your drop step…

One big key to the effectiveness of the move is how quickly it is made.

Setting up for post position can be a slow, physical process — and setting your defender up should be as well.

Then, once you have slowly convinced him you’re making a move towards the middle, the spin back and step towards the baseline need to be quick in order to create an open layup.

Conclusion

The drop step may be seen as elementary to some higher level players, as it is a basic move that doesn’t include any flash.

However, when used effectively, it’s still a very powerful and effective way to score around the basket.

The goal of any offense is to create easy scoring opportunities, and when the finer details of the drop step are perfected by a player who has a presence around the basket, the drop step has the potential to create the highest percentage shot in the game.

How to handle an employee’s attendance problems

Maybe you’re the kind of business leader who prefers to create a work culture free from the corporate grind of time clocks, rules and rigid schedules. Or perhaps you don’t want to be that person at your company, the one who knows exactly what time everyone gets into the office.

Yet absenteeism, without a compelling reason for it, may adversely impact your business. So, let’s take a closer look at poor employee attendance.

Why you can’t ignore employee absenteeism

While it’s true that few business leaders relish calling out employees for being tardy or missing work, the reality is that excessive absenteeism can’t be ignored. And here’s why:

Your other employees can’t ignore it

They’re stuck picking up the slack for the missing staff member, helping with tasks they normally might not have to do. And that’s stressful for employees, especially those who are already stretched to the max.

Your company’s reputation is at stake

When employees aren’t doing their part, the entire team may fall behind on meeting deadlines. In some cases, that could mean losing a valuable contract or earning your company a reputation for not delivering a product or service on time.

Absenteeism affects morale

Over time, the situation can breed resentment and disengagement among employees and bitterness toward you, their employer. Your employees may wonder why they work so hard, when one particular employee suffers no repercussions for his absenteeism. Or escalating bitterness could provoke an argument between problem employees and their co-workers.

Simply put, absenteeism is a big deal for business leaders. And when you consider lost productivity, morale and temporary labor costs, the price of absenteeism grows even more substantial.

The challenge of addressing poor employee attendance

If absenteeism is so problematic, why is it so hard to address? Often, business leaders just don’t grasp the enormity of the issue. They don’t see how excessive absenteeism affects other employees and their business until it’s too late. Or they bring up the issue of absenteeism with offending employees – and take their word that they won’t miss work again.

The result? When there’s a lack of serious consequences for absenteeism, employees won’t take it seriously.

7 steps to curbing poor employee attendance

You need a clear and consistent approach to effectively curb absenteeism. Try these 7 steps:

  1. Put it in writing. An employee handbook is a great way to spell out your policy on absenteeism, as well as the reporting process employees should follow if they’re late or absent. State the consequences of excessive absenteeism — including the potential for termination. Even better? Share this policy when onboarding new staff, so everyone knows your expectations from the outset. (You may also want to consider having new employees sign a statement acknowledging they’ve received a copy of the policy.)
  1. Gather information. Before you broach the subject of absenteeism with individual employees, prepare yourself with examples and the dates and times they were late or absent. With data in hand, you may feel more confident in addressing the problem – and they can’t deny it.
  1. Tell them you’ve noticed. It’s OK to casually address the issue when it happens. Here’s a sample script: “Hey, listen. I know you showed up late a couple of times. It’s important that you get to work on time, and that you come in the days you are scheduled. If you can’t, it is even more important to follow our process concerning absenteeism. Here’s a copy you can keep for reference.”
  1. Show your concern. Once you’ve made clear that you’ve noticed, follow up with something like, “When we don’t hear from you like we’ve defined in our policy, we get concerned that something may have happened to you. That’s why it is so important to notify us.” Placing the emphasis on your employees’ wellbeing helps take them off the defensive.
  1. Open up a discussion. Give them a chance to explain and offer solutions. Their poor attendance record may be the result of a bigger issue. Ask: “Is there something going on that’s causing you to be late or miss so much work? Is there something we can do to help?”
  1. Make accommodations when appropriate. If an employee has difficulties getting to work on time after dropping their children off at school, for example, you might consider allowing a more flexible schedule. (Just remember that, in the spirit of treating all staff equally, you’ll want to develop a specific policy and apply it across the board.) However, if a health condition or family medical emergency is the root cause of absenteeism, it’s wise to consult an HR professional right away. This situation needs to be handled delicately to ensure compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act and Family Medical Leave Act. In this situation, there may be multiple ways to address the problem, including a staff member taking a leave of absence .
  1. Know when to take it up a notch. If the absenteeism or tardiness persists, it’s time for formal counseling. Depending on your company’s structure, counseling could come in the form of meetings with the employee’s immediate manager or an HR representative. Lay out your expectations for attendance, and the serious, specific consequences for unexcused absences from work.

Summing it all up

Poor employee attendance can be a serious issue – one for which many business leaders feel unprepared to address. Yet with the above steps in mind, you’ll help put the brakes on absenteeism, and potentially make your company a happier and more productive workplace.

The key component to having a successful business is surrounding yourself with the right team. Rushing through the employee hiring process may lead to big mistakes being made. Having employees that simply aren’t showing up for work can affect your productivity levels in a negative way.

In a recent study, nearly 40 percent of employees polled claimed to have called into work even when they felt well enough to go. If you are dealing with employee attendance issues, addressing them head-on is essential.

In some cases, these attendance issues may be caused by scheduling conflicts. Solving these issues will be much easier when investing in state-of-the-art employee scheduling software . By taking your employee scheduling digital, you can reduce the number of human errors that occur.

Read below to find out more about some of the effective methods you can use to address employee attendance issues.

1. Put Your Attendance Policy in Writing

Having an employee handbook that clearly lays out the expectations you have is wise. By putting these things in black and white, you can avoid employees using excuses like they didn’t know to get out of trouble when missing work.

Most companies abide by the “three strikes” policy when it comes to excessive tardiness and absences. While no one ever wants to fire an employee, there are some instances when this is the best option. If an employee can’t seem to show up for work even when they have been warned multiple times, you need to replace them with someone who is willing to work.

2. Take Time to Collect Evidence

Are you in the process of scheduling a meeting with an employee to talk about their absences? Before you go into this meeting, be sure to take time to compile evidence . Having actual dates and facts to support the claims you are making will help you get your point across.

Compiling this evidence will also show your employees how serious you are about them showing up to work. Rather than going into one of these meetings with a defensive mentality, listen to what your employee has to say. If they have legitimate reasons why they have been absent, then you may need to rethink writing them up for this offense.

3. Make Sure Employees Know You Are Aware of What is Going On

One of the worst mistakes you can make as a business owner is detaching yourself from day to day operations. As soon as bad employees see that you are not coming around as often, they will probably start to miss more work. Letting these employees know that you have noticed their tardiness and absences can be effective.

In some situations, all it takes is for one member of upper management to confront an employee to get them back in line. If this approach does not work, you need to be prepared to levy harsh punishments.

4. Show Concern For Employees

If an employee starts missing a lot of work all of the sudden, chances are they are dealing with some personal issues. While you need to avoid prying into their personal life, let an employee know that your door is always open should they need to talk.

If the person in question is a valued employee, you need to show a bit of leniency for them. Jumping the gun on firing one of your best employees can lead to lots of productivity problems in the future.

5. Keep Lines of Communication Open

Giving your employees the impression you are unapproachable can come back to haunt you in the future. You need to make sure your team knows they can come to you any time they have a problem. If an employee needs to miss work to attend to personal matters, you need to ensure they feel comfortable talking to you.

Not only can keeping lines of communication open reduce absences, it can make your company run like a well-oiled machine. Investing some time in meeting with each of your employees just to “checkup” on them will let them see you actually care about them and their well-being.

6. Be Willing to Accommodate Employees

Using a one size fits all approach when it comes to employee absences is foolish. Each situation will be unique and will need to be treated as such. In some cases, you will need to offer accommodations to your employees if they are dealing with things like a death in the family or sickness. Showing your employees compassion can be an effective way to keep them loyal to your company for a long time to come.

Are you finding it hard to manage employee issues on a daily basis? If so, it may be time to outsource your human resource tasks. By doing this, you can focus more on growing your company.

Managers Must Commit to Managing Employee Attendance

How to handle an employee's attendance problems

Morsa Images / Getty Images

How to handle an employee's attendance problems

Susan Heathfield is an HR and management consultant with an MS degree. She has decades of experience writing about human resources.

Attendance is critical in many customer-facing jobs. Poor attendance saps the morale of employees, costs employers overtime expenses, and reduces employee engagement. Poor attendance takes supervisory time and attention and often results in disciplinary action.

You can manage employee attendance to reduce attendance problems. You do need to take it on as an important component of any management or supervisory job. Here’s how to manage and encourage attendance. Use these five steps to encourage employee attendance at work.

Steps to Encourage Employee Attendance

First, you must have a way to track the time people take off from work so that the integrity of your Paid Time Off (PTO) policy, your sick leave policy, and/or your paid vacation policy is ensured. This also ensures that the time-off-rules are the same for every employee which is important for the sense of workplace fairness and justice.

When employees are managed across departments, you need to ensure that what John experiences in the warehouse is the same policy that Mary experiences in the office. Employees notice when employees are treated differently and this disparate treatment creates problems with motivation and engagement.

This is especially important to manage unscheduled absences for which many workplaces have trouble with work coverage. Encouraging employee attendance is important for any customer-facing workstation. Attendance is also critical when one employee’s work is dependent on the work of the prior employee in jobs such as manufacturing or assembling products.

Teachers, customer support specialists, technical support providers, health care professionals, and other direct service employees are examples of employees who have workstations that employees must staff on a daily basis. Otherwise, employers are at a loss to schedule and find staff replacements to do their work.

This attendance includes timely arrival at their workstation as well. For example, if a nurse is late for work in the intensive care unit, the nurse from the prior shift cannot leave to go home for a well-deserved rest. If an employee is expected to staff a middle station on an assembly line, either one employee has to work at two stations which is inconvenient and can even endanger the employee or the employer has to find a replacement.

You Must Commit to Managing Absenteeism

Second, and probably most importantly, you need to manage absenteeism and encourage employee attendance. This means that the employee needs to call in directly to the supervisor who is trained to manage absenteeism. This starts with the personal call and the supervisor telling the employee that he or she will be missed and describing the impact of their absence on the workplace.

Each absence ends with the manager or supervisor personally welcoming the employee back to work, encouraging employee attendance in the future, and once again, emphasizing the impact of the employee’s absence on the workplace and their coworkers.

You are not holding this conversation in a blaming tone of voice—after all, many employee absences are legitimate and necessary—you are genuinely welcoming the employee back to work and reinforcing the impact of an unscheduled absence. Your conversation should, once again, describe the impact that the absence had on the employees and the workplace.

Enable Workplace Flexibility Whenever Possible

Third, if possible, allow flexibility with schedules in your workplace so that an employee with an early doctor’s appointment or a sick child, for example, can work later or come earlier to make up the time.

Women, unfortunately, according to the U.S. Department of Labor figures, experience more attendance problems related to illness, injury, and other family matters.  

So, this workplace flexibility might also include the ability to share jobs, schedule flexible days or hours, and work from home, or telecommute, under guidelines. Some think that compensatory or comp time encourages a clock-watching attitude. This may not be in keeping with the mindset of accomplishing the whole job and goals that you look for in an exempt or salaried employee. But, exempt jobs are also the jobs that will most frequently allow flexibility for the employee and the employer.

Rewards and Recognition for Employees

Fourth, rewards and recognition for positive employee attendance can make a difference. While you don’t want people feeling as if their employer must pay them extra for doing their job, you do want them to know that you appreciate and respect their positive attendance.

In some cases, especially with non-exempt employees, and to reduce unscheduled absences, you may want to build actual monetary rewards into your employee attendance policy. These policies emphasize rewarding attendance over a certain number of days. You do, with the employee recognition portion of your attendance policy, want to emphasize the days of attendance, not the act of lowering absences.

Too many attendance policies focus on the punishment side of the equation. More emphasis on rewards for positive attendance might give you more bang for your bucks. Nevertheless, a successful, motivational attendance policy must focus on both.

Provide Consequences

Finally, as with any employment responsibility, an employee must experience consequences if the employee is failing in his or her work attendance. To whom are the consequences the most important? To all of the employees who have good attendance, work hard, and find their personal morale and motivation affected by people who have poor attendance. Progressive discipline is critical, starting with coaching and feedback, and performing the steps in attendance management listed above. Your attending employees will thank you.

How to handle an employee's attendance problems

How to handle an employee's attendance problems

Attendance problems – not a situation a manager wants to face, but a situation a manager can handle quickly and successfully.

Many employers immediately turn to disciplinary or discharge measures for employees with attendance problems. While often a valid response, employers also need to realize the ramifications of certain employment laws. If an attendance problem is handled poorly and a termination results, an employee could bring a successful claim of wrongful termination, given the protections provided in particular laws such as:

  • Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): Under ADA, employers cannot discriminate against an employee because of a disability. In fact, the employer has a duty to reasonably accommodate an employee’s disability. While the duty to accommodate does not relieve an employee from meeting “the same performance and conduct standards” as other similarly positioned employees (without disabilities), “adjustments to various existing policies may be necessary to provide reasonable accommodation.”
  • Family and Medical Leave Act (FMLA): Under FMLA, employees are entitled to be absent from work for FMLA reasons as long as they follow proper notification procedures. If an employee has followed proper procedures and is absent for an FMLA reason, the employer cannot discipline the employee for being absent from work, even if the employer does not believe the reason for absence is justified or has a no-fault attendance policy.
  • Worker’s Compensation Disability Act: While unlawful for an employer to discriminate against an employee because the employee has filed a complaint or exercised rights under a state Worker’s Compensation disability act, it may or may not be unlawful to terminate an employee because of absences resulting from a work-related illness or injury.

Key strategies for addressing them

These laws and their implications for disciplinary action are important to keep in mind. In addition, employers may consider a number of key strategies to effectively address employee attendance concerns:

  • Management Style: Management styles that are too authoritarian tend to promote higher levels of absenteeism among employees. By identifying overtly authoritarian managers and providing them with management training, you will be taking a positive step toward reducing absenteeism as well as reducing turnover, job burnout, and potential employee health problems.
  • Working Conditions: Beyond the physical workplace environment, stress in relationships among coworkers can lead to attendance problems. Companies cannot afford employees calling in sick when the problem is simply not wanting to deal with “so and so” at work. By adopting policies to promote respect and professionalism, and by adhering to internal conflict resolution procedures, businesses can reduce employee stress.
  • Incentive Programs: Providing incentives can be used to motivate employees to avoid unnecessary absenteeism. For instance, some companies allow employees to cash-in unused sick days at the end of every calendar year. Others provide employees with bonus pay for perfect attendance (e.g. the equivalent of five work hours for every quarter) or acknowledge employees with certificates of achievement (and even thank-you gifts) presented by the President at a special recognition lunch. When developing an incentive program for your company, invite and encourage employees to help develop the program. While the management team may think that a $50 McDonald’s gift certificate will be a strong motivator, your employees may have much different preferences. For example, your employees may much prefer the opportunity to leave two hours early on Friday if they have perfect attendance in the previous payroll period. By inviting employees’ early input, you will be able to tailor your incentives to maximize their impact on employee behavior.
  • Attendance Policy: Every company should have an attendance policy which allows a manager to intervene with an employee who is frequently absent. If you address an employee about his or her frequent absenteeism, and he or she informs you that the problem stems from personal issues, consider referring the employee to an Employee Assistance Program (EAP). Moreover, ensure that you periodically review your Employee Handbook’s attendance policy to make sure it remains aligned with current business operations and in compliance with state or federal employment laws.

Remember: If the employee’s absenteeism relates to a medical problem or a family member with a medical problem, you may need to consider informing and offering the employee the provisions allowed to him or her under the Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and / or the Family and Medical Leave Act (FMLA). Early indications of and responses to such employee situations can help prevent any further absence from work and expedite an employee’s return to work.

Incorporating these strategies can help resolve costly and annoying attendance issues as well as help improve employee morale, retention, and overall health.

How to handle an employee's attendance problems

How to handle an employee's attendance problems

Published: December 19, 2019

HRMantra : No. 1 In Attendance Management Software

Startups have really changed the office culture. Most importantly, it has managed to loosen the tight nine-to-five routine that we dislike the most.

In fact, a lot of corporates started trusting their employees with managing their own schedules. They can choose their own work hours and decide for themselves when to show up to the office as long as they get their work done.

However, there is always a downside to every outlook. Many employees tend to become tardy and stay absent and eventually make this a regular occurrence. These employee attendance issues result in lost productivity and also affect other employees.

So, What Is Employee Absenteeism Exactly?

Absenteeism is the employee attendance issue, whereby there is a frequent lack of attendance at work without any valid reason. Now, occasional no-show or no-call instances doesn’t count.

A recent survey showed that employee absenteeism has been on the rise. About 40 percent of employees called in sick even though they were well enough to go to work, up from 35 percent in 2016.

Many business leaders ignore their employees’ behavior because they don’t want to hamper their relationship with them. But whatever the reason, if there is excessive absenteeism, it’s important to talk this through.

Three Reasons Why You Should Confront Employees With Attendance Issues

  • Affects Your Other Employees

That’s right. When an employee is absent, other team members have to take up for the missing work. Thus, they need to continually do more work than they need to, which results in more stress.

  • Delays in Completion of Project

When employees are missing most of the time, it affects the entire project. Deadlines are missed, and in certain cases, you might also lose an important contract. It might have a bad impact on your company’s reputation.

  • Breeds Resentment Among Employees

Eventually, when other team member starts to notice that the missing employee is not facing any trouble, it creates a sense of bitterness. They feel that they are working harder than they need to and not even getting compensated for that. It could lower employees’ morale.

In short, employee attendance issues can act as a roadblock to a company’s success. That’s why it is essential to tackle employee attendance problems.

But worry not, we are going to discuss the sure-shot eight steps that will help you deal with your employees’ attendance issue effectively.

How to Handle Employee Attendance Issues?

I. Craft a Clear Policy

The very first to handling employee attendance issues is by creating an official attendance policy.

It doesn’t matter whether you have ten or fifty employees or you have an official HR department. An employee attendance policy spells out not only the number of leaves an employee can take but also the consequences of needless absenteeism.

It makes expectations for work behavior and disciplinary action clear to all team members. Create a detailed policy — consider different situations like scheduled and unscheduled absences and tardiness and accordingly, draft a disciplinary measure for every possible situation. It will ensure that employees do not take absenteeism casually.

But make sure that the policy is not biased and is fair to both the employee and employer.

Looking for attendance software? Check out SoftwareSuggest’s list of the best Attendance Management Software solutions.

II. Keep Track of Employees Leaves

Without keeping track of employees’ attendance records, you can’t deal with their absenteeism.

There are many ways to track employees’ absenteeism. It may depend upon what works best for your company. For instance, you can use a time tracking tool that records the hours worked by the staff. Or, another way is to integrate your timekeeping system with employee performance tool.

If you want, you can also keep a separate spreadsheet for employees’ attendance entry. This is only useful when you have a small team, though.

Gathering this information is important because it gives you evidence in support of your decision when you try to confront your employees with the issues.

III. Discuss No-Shows and Unscheduled Absences Immediately

The first time they don’t show up for a shift, don’t wait for them to repeat it again. Directly address the situation without letting much time to pass.

Open up discussion and talk to them about their behavior. Tell them you have noticed their absenteeism and ask them why it happened and what’s expected of them. You should also let them know if their behavior has caused any need for disciplinary action.

In some extreme cases, you can use the trick to hold a formal return-to-work interview when they have been absent for a long time.

Such disciplinary actions show that employees’ behavior is being taken seriously, and there is no room for any wiggle.

IV. Find the Cause of Absenteeism and Treat It

The human resource team must have a thorough understanding of the individual circumstance.

  • ‘)” data-event=”social share” data-info=”Pinterest” aria-label=”Share on Pinterest”>
  • ‘)” data-event=”social share” data-info=”Reddit” aria-label=”Share on Reddit”>
  • ‘)” data-event=”social share” data-info=”Flipboard” aria-label=”Share on Flipboard”>

How to handle an employee's attendance problems

Related

  • How to Deal With Bully Employees
  • Hepatitis C & Job Security
  • What Is an ADA Meeting When It Comes to an Employee?
  • How to Document a Poor Performance Evaluation
  • How to Give Warnings to Employees for Being Late

According to a study by the Society for Human Resources Management reported in Forbes, absenteeism cost the American economy $1.8 billion in 2007. As a small business owner, you don’t have much wiggle room in your staffing budget to cope with employees who are chronically absent, but it’s hard to justify disciplinary action when an employee points to genuine illness as her reason for constantly calling in. The best approach is to work one-on-one with problem employees, treating each case individually to come up with a plan that suits everyone’s needs.

Draw up a sick leave policy before absenteeism becomes a problem. In the contract presented to new hires, explain that your company requires a doctor’s note for absences longer than three business days.

Explain to employees what will happen if they don’t follow the company’s sick leave policy. The best follow-up is usually an interview to discuss absenteeism and how management can work with the staff member to reduce the number of sick days taken.

Monitor the attendance of all employees. According to an article for Entrepreneur magazine, people call in sick less often when they know their absences are being tracked.

Meet with the employee after he returns to work. If he returns with a doctor’s note, review the letter with the worker. If the person doesn’t offer a doctor’s note, remind the person of the company’s policy and give her a few days to get a written explanation from a doctor before administering disciplinary action — for example, an initial written warning that long, unexplained absences are grounds for termination of employment.

Discuss possible work environment adjustments with the employee if she presents evidence of a chronic illness or disability. According to the Americans with Disabilities Act, employers are required to provide reasonable accommodations to workers with chronic disabilities or illnesses, provided that doing so doesn’t cause the business “undue hardship.” If you need suggestions to get the conversation started, the Job Accommodation Network makes recommendations by illness or disability.

Grant employees with long-term illnesses, drug or alcohol problems leaves of absence to seek treatment. According to the Family and Medical Leave Act, you’re obligated to provide 12 work weeks of unpaid leave within a one-year period to an employee needing treatment, recovery time or inpatient care, as long as you employ 50 or more people over 20 or more work weeks within the calendar year. To show your support for your employees, consider providing this leave, even if your company’s size doesn’t make you legally obligated to do so.

Issue a written warning if absenteeism continues, despite reasonable accommodations. You should have a written record of actions you’re taking to support the employee, along with documented proof of poor attendance.

Terminate the employee’s tenure with your company as a last resort. If you choose to let a worker go, be prepared with a financial breakdown showing the hardship that further accommodations would bring to your company.

Posted on May 16, 2016 by

It’s the morning after Mardi Gras, and Joe calls in sick. You were expecting it—after all, he was sick the Friday before a long weekend, and the Monday after the big game. Joe’s not alone – 2007 research from time and attendance software provider Kronos suggested that approximately 7 million U.S. workers call in “sick” after the Super Bowl each year.

While employees may not realize the consequences of their behavior to the organization, excessive absences have a significant impact on workplace productivity. In a small business, these effects are even more noticeable, because the size of the company means the work can’t always be redistributed among other employees. And no matter the size of the company, morale is affected when coworkers have to pick up the slack of a routinely absent worker. But by dealing with attendance issues as soon as they arise, managers can control the issue and reduce the negative effects on the business.

Step One: Documentation
Record the employee’s absences to see if any obvious trends or patterns exist. It can be helpful to create a chart to record the days, or use specific colors to annotate a printed monthly calendar . Visually representing the leave will help you identify if a pattern of absences is occurring—and it can also be a reality check for the employee to see his leave documented in that way.

Check if he always calls out on the same days, before or after the weekend, or around major events. Determine how long the pattern has been occurring and see if you can identify the reason. More than one employee’s absences have conveniently coincided with the home games of the local baseball team.

Step Two: Consider the Family Medical Leave Act
Has the employee given you an excuse for his absences? If so, review the reasons to see if they are covered by the Family Medical Leave Act , or FMLA. Occasional sniffles and the common cold don’t qualify—but if your employee is suffering from migraines, he is likely to be entitled to family medical leave. Even if you don’t know the reason, a pattern of absences might indicate that the employee could qualify for intermittent leave . Give him the FMLA certification form for his doctor to complete.

Companies with 50 or more employees—or who have employed 50 or more workers for at least 20 weeks within the current or previous calendar year—are required to provide unpaid, protected leave to eligible staff members. The employee must have been employed for at least 12 months, worked a minimum of 1,250 hours in the previous 12 months, and be located at a worksite where at least 50 other company employees are also employed within a 75-mile radius.

Step Three: Meet with the Employee
Once you’ve prepared the chart and gathered the relevant paperwork , set a time to meet with the employee. Choose a private location and schedule a time when you won’t be interrupted.

  • Conversation Tip Prepare the employee for the meeting by letting him know what you plan to discuss: “Joe, I’d like to meet with you at 3 today, in my office. I have some concerns about your attendance that I need to discuss with you.”

Tell the employee you’ve noticed he’s been absent frequently, and explain the effects his attendance has on the company as a whole.

  • Conversation Tip“Joe, when you’re out, customers notice delays, and your coworkers have to take on the extra work. It makes it difficult for us to get the job done the way we need to.”

Share the chart with him and ask if he, too, notices a pattern to the leave. Ask him if there is an explanation for the pattern of absences. Keep a neutral tone and remain calm, avoiding judgments or accusations.

  • Conversation Tip“As your supervisor, I keep records of your leave requests. I’d like you to take a look at this chart—it seems to me there’s a pattern to your unscheduled absences. Can you tell me why you’ve been absent on so many Monday mornings?”

Listen to the employee’s response and evaluate the situation. Provide him with any relevant paperwork, such as the FMLA certification form , relevant workers compensation papers if he alleges an injury caused on the job, or a referral to the employee assistance program if it’s appropriate and your company uses one.

Step Four: Potential Accommodations
Sometimes the employee will reveal a reason for leave that may be protected by either the FMLA or the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). For example, if the employee provides care for a sick or disabled relative and is required to transport them to treatment on Wednesday mornings. The treatment center doesn’t open until 8:00 a.m.— the time the employee is due to start work. As a result, the employee is late or calls in every Wednesday. A situation like this can be easily accommodated in most workplaces by adjusting his start time to 8:15 or 8:30. However, in certain cases—perhaps where the worker is the only employee, required to open the doors for business at 8:00—an unreasonable hardship might occur. Carefully evaluate all possible options for accommodation on a case-by-case basis.

  • Conversation Tip“I want to work with you to resolve this problem. What suggestions do you have for making sure the issue doesn’t continue? Is there anything we can do to help you achieve it?”

Step Five: Requiring Improvement
If the employee does not provide a justified or protected reason for his attendance problems, inform him of the consequences of continued absenteeism. Make sure he realizes that continued excessive or undocumented absences could lead to disciplinary action , and even cost him his job. Consider requiring the worker to produce a doctor’s note for each unscheduled absence from the workplace, otherwise he will be considered absent without leave. Put this requirement in writing, or include it in a performance improvement plan *, with other documented expectations for improvement, such as calling in to speak to a live person, and reducing the number of unscheduled absences. Review the plan periodically—at 30, 60 and 90 days—to determine if the employee’s attendance has improved. This isn’t a permanent solution—once a sustained improvement has been observed, you can remove the verification requirement or graduate the employee from the performance plan.

  • Conversation Tip“From now on, I’m instructing you to bring a doctor’s note every time you call out sick. We’ll meet again in 30 days to review your progress and I’ll let you know then if this requirement will continue.”

Step Six: Disciplinary Action
If you’ve ruled out FMLA and ADA, and the employee still fails to improve, despite counseling, performance improvement plans and any accommodations you provide, it’s time to take further disciplinary action , up to and including dismissal from employment. If you discover the employee was dishonest about his leave, this is also a reason for discipline.

Things to Consider:

  • Make sure your company has a strong sick leave policy, emphasizing that verification may be required.
  • Check that employees are aware of the call-in requirements.
  • Lead by example. You can’t expect your employees to adhere to a strict attendance policy if you continually flout it yourself.

Don’t discipline an employee with an attendance problem by suspending him—it’s not usually an effective resolution to the problem.

How to handle an employee's attendance problems

10 de February, 2021

Employee absenteeism can have very negative consequences on your business’s profitability. Indeed, the costs of employee absenteeism are often significant. A company should then look at ways to decrease its absenteeism rate in order to optimise its staff’s productivity. In this article we provide you with 9 solutions to better manage employee absenteeism.

Table of Contents

How can employee absenteeism be reduced?

You won’t be able to completely solve the problem of absenteeism in the workplace. Employees will have unscheduled absences from time to time for various reasons.

But there still are several ways you can improve employee attendance. Most of them involve working on creating a healthier working environment as well as stating clear attendance rules. Here are the best strategies you can employ to reduce employee absenteeism:

1. Create a clear attendance policy

Your workers should know exactly what is expected of them in terms of attendance. You policy should therefore state how employees are to report absences, how your company will follow up on unsanctioned absences,as well as what the consequences are for excessive absenteeism. Moreover, in order for your policy to be taken seriously, you must enforce it consistently.

2. Reward good attendance

Implementing a reward scheme for employees with good attendance records is a great way to give them an additional incentive to attend work. But be careful with this one and remember that there can be perfectly legitimate reasons for being absent, such as illnesses. Therefore, the reward system shouldn’t penalise the employees who have excused absences.

3. Address unsanctioned absences immediately

You should deal with absenteeism according to your attendance policy and be consistent when handing out consequences. However, addressing unscheduled absences isn’t only about dishing out sanctions. You should also be understanding and provide support to your employees. Try to find out the reason behind their absences, they might have a problem that you can help them with.

In that regard, a good practice to introduce is the return-to-work interview. This helps the worker ease back into their role, shows that the company cares about its staff and reduces the risk of repeated absenteeism.

How to handle an employee's attendance problems

4. Improve employee well-being

Absenteeism is often linked to a stressful or unhealthy work environment. You can then look at ways to reduce stress in the workplace, for instance by implementing a wellness program or taking the appropriate measures to fight harassment.

Make looking after your employees’ health one of your top priorities. Physical and mental health are essential to an engaged and productive workforce.

5. Offer flexible work options

Offering flexible working hours is an excellent idea to increase your employees’ well-being and their attachment to the organisation.Your should therefore consider introducing flexible schedules and remote work. Some companies even offer unlimited vacation days!

Sesame’s employee panel makes it really easy for employees with a flexible schedule to record their attendance and track how many work hours they have left.

6. Encourage employee engagement

A good way to make your staff more committed and actually want to come to work is to increase their engagement. This means maintaining an efficient internal communication system where employees can follow what is going on in the company, suggest improvements, report problems, etc.

It also includes investing in employee training and development programs. That way, workers can improve their skills and participate more and more in the organisation’s activities.

How to handle an employee's attendance problems

7. Foster a teamwork culture

Following up on the previous idea, employees are more engaged when they feel that they are part of a team. A sense of belonging increases a worker’s motivation to go to work and their loyalty towards the company. This will also make them think twice before taking an unplanned day off and making things more difficult for their team.

8. Provide feedback

Let your employees know what they can improve, but also what they are doing right. Indeed, providing guidance and encouragement makes the employees feel noticed. It will also push them to give their best and want to improve their performance, making them less likely to miss work.

9. Keep track of employee absences

Finally, use absence management tools to track employee work time and absences. They allow you to get useful data and measure employee absenteeism. With time, you will be able to check if you were successful in reducing employee absenteeism and make appropriate changes to your policy.

Some companies have implemented so-called “no-fault” attendance policies that utilize a point system in order to monitor the attendance of their employees. The aim of such attendance policies is to discourage absenteeism and tardiness. However, no-fault attendance policies can run afoul of legally protected rights to leave.

If your employer has a no-fault attendance policy, they may be violating your rights under state and federal employment laws.

What is a No-Fault Attendance Policy?

No-fault attendance policies operate by penalizing workers for missing work by allocating points to an employee’s record for each absence regardless of the reason for such absence. The points accrue over a period of time and, depending on the company’s specific policy, the employee is disciplined or fired if they hit a certain number of points. Specific point totals and the extent of the punishment can vary from company to company.

Employers claim that these policies simplify the company’s attendance regulations. However, this oversimplification of employee attendance and leave policies can lead to serious violations of laws that protect employees’ rights to receive time off from work. Our attorneys are investigating such violations.

How Do “No-Fault” Attendance Policies Potentially Violate Workers’ Rights?

Under federal laws

No-fault attendance policies may result in violations of federal laws like the Family and Medical Leave Act (“FMLA”) and the Americans with Disabilities Act (“ADA”). These laws protect workers who need time off from work due to medical problems, disabilities, or to care for a family member.

Because no-fault attendance policies require employers to treat all absences the same, employers that use no-fault attendance policies may assign points for legally protected forms of leave under the FMLA and ADA. As a result, employees are punished for taking legally protected leave.

Employers may violate an employee’s rights under the ADA if the attendance policy does not adequately excuse the employee for protected absences related to a qualified disability. However, employers are not permitted to discipline workers under these circumstances.

Under California state laws

In California, laws like the California Labor Code, the California Family Rights Act[1] (“CFRA”), the California Pregnancy Disability Leave (“PDL”) law, and California’s New Parent Leave Act[2] (“NPLA”), legally protect certain forms of leave or tardiness from being subject to discipline.

Like federally protected forms of leave, these California state laws prohibit employers from taking disciplinary actions against employees who miss time from work under these statutes.

The U.S. Department of Labor Has Provided Guidance Related to these Policies

The Wage and Hour Division of the Department of Labor (“DOL”) has issued an opinion regarding issues that may arise from no-fault attendance policies. You can find the opinion here https://www.dol.gov/sites/dolgov/files/WHD/legacy/files/2018_08_28_1A_FMLA.pdf .

The DOL opinion explains that the removal of absenteeism points is a reward for working and, therefore, an employee benefit. Under most no-fault absence policies, points are maintained on an employee’s record for a period of 12 months of “active service” after accrual.

A no-fault attendance policy may run afoul of the FMLA when taking a qualified FMLA leave results in an employee losing a benefit. This can occur where an employer fails to treat all legally protected forms of leave as “active service” for purposes of point accrual and point removal.

For instance, if an employer counts workers’ compensation leave as “active service” under its no-fault policy, an employee who goes out on workers comp will continue to accrue time toward the 12 months necessary to remove absence points from his or her record. But that same employer would unlawfully discriminate against an employee if it does not count FMLA leave as “active service,” because this would result in absenteeism points being maintained on the employee’s record for a period longer than 12 months after accrual.

It is important to understand that a leave policy’s compliance with the DOL opinion does not guarantee that the policy is fully legal and that it does not in some way violate other laws. This is especially relevant in terms of the policy’s relation to state laws, which is an area that the DOL does not oversee.

What can I do about it?

Knowing your rights as an employee is essential to ensuring that your employer is not violating protections given to you under federal and state law.

It may be in your best interest to consult an attorney to assess whether you are being unfairly treated under a no-fault attendance policy.

Depending on the case, class or collective action may be taken against your employer, as multiple employees may have similar legal claims. In class action cases, a small number of individuals may represent a larger group who have all been similarly harmed by a company. The lawsuit then will seek to halt the company’s abusive practices as well as recover a financial reward for the class through a court decision or settlement.

Do I Have to Pay Attorney’s Fees?

No. Attorneys typically handle wage and hour claims on a contingent fee basis. This means that the lawyers don’t get paid fees unless they obtain a recovery for you.

If your employer utilizes a no-fault attendance policy, they may be violating your rights given to you under state and federal regulations. If this is the case for you or if you have other questions relating to no-fault attendance policies, please contact us at 844-696-7492 (toll-free) or email us at [email protected] . You can also fill out the form on this page.

We will promptly evaluate your claim and let you know whether you are eligible to participate in a lawsuit.

[1] The California Family Rights Act requires employers of 5 or more employees to provide 12 weeks of job-protected leave to employees to bond with a new child (by birth, adoption, or foster placement), to care for a family member with a serious health condition, or because the employee has a serious health condition (other than pregnancy).

[2] New Parent Leave Act provides eligible employees 12 weeks of unpaid, job-protected leave to bond with a new child within 1 year of the child’s birth, adoption, or foster care placement. It applies to employers with 20 or more employees.

  • Human Resources
  • Payroll Adminstration
  • Employee Safety & Risk Management
  • Employee Benefits
  • All about COVID-19 in the Workplace
  • Kansas & Missouri HR News
  • Kansas City Interest News
  • PEO/HRO

How to handle an employee's attendance problems

Employee absenteeism can be a serious issue if left unchecked. While some bosses may want to be viewed as laid back and more casual, there is a difference between being laid back and allowing employees get away with behavior that could significantly hurt the company.

Think about the consequences of ignoring the attendance track record of an employee who seems to be making a habit of no-shows. What message does this send to your other employees? Why should they work hard at their jobs, when one of their co-workers seemingly gets off scot-free after habitually missing work? Morale is likely going to suffer. You may even start to lose the trust of your other employees—those who diligently show up to work every day.

Poor employee attendance can be a difficult situation to address for some business owners, and yet it is a situation that definitely needs addressing.

The Fallout of Employee Absenteeism

Beyond compromising morale, there are further ramifications of unaddressed employee absenteeism that could impact your office. Among such issues are:

  • Productivity suffers. The absence of one employee could slow down your processes and hinder output. This is in turn, negatively affects productivity.
  • Your company’s reputation could suffer. When one employee is repeatedly gone, this does impact your ability to get jobs done and therefore, detrimentally impacts your overall reputation.
  • It could inspire a domino effect. If other employees sense that nothing is being done to curtail this behavior, what is to stop them from being absent.

Poor employee attendance isn’t good for business no matter how you look at it. As the boss, you need to step in and find a solution to what could otherwise become a very problematic situation.

How to handle an employee's attendance problems

How Do You Tell an Employee to Improve Their Attendance?

As mentioned, this can be a delicate situation. There are tactful and professional ways to approach such a dialogue that demonstrate how serious you are about this issue and still allow the employee a chance to explain their behavior. It is about finding that balance—bosses often have to find this balance; it’s part of what they do.

Make Sure Your Attendance Policy Is in Writing

First off, your employee handbook should clearly state the company’s policies when it comes to attendance and absenteeism. What are the consequences of excessive absenteeism? When you bring in new hires, make sure to not only share the employee handbook with them, but you might go a step further and specifically point out what the rules are regarding time off, unexcused absences and poor attendance.

Address the Employee

Don’t Come Off Too Aggressive

It may be that the employee does have a trying personal issue with which they are dealing. There could be something at home that is affecting their attendance. Expressing your concern in any conversation that you have is a good way to show that the company is there to support them and that you are willing to help them work through potentially difficult personal situations if need be. Employees are human beings; showing empathy and compassion might just help the situation.

Consider Making Accommodations for the Employee

This is really going to depend on the circumstances surrounding their absences and what you discover as a result of any conversations that you have with that employee. For example, if childcare is becoming a problematic issue, then you could consider giving them a more flexible schedule that allows for some work-from-home time. If there is a medical problem at the core of their absenteeism, you want to ensure that you are in compliance with any state and federal regulations here. You could bring in an HR expert to help you more effectively navigate the situation so that you better understand expectations and requirements.

Think About Next Steps

If the problem persists and you’ve determined that the absenteeism isn’t necessarily warranted , then you as the boss need to decide what to do next. Do you get that employee counseling? Might it be beneficial for you and the employee to meet with an HR professional in order to come up with a course of action should the behavior persist? Or, is termination called for in this circumstance? The key is to carefully examine all sides of the issue and if you are unsure, bring in a human resource professional, both to help you handle an employee who is habitually absent and also to ensure compliance with all relevant laws.

Axcet HR Solutions Works with Kansas City Businesses

We’ve helped numerous small businesses across Kansas City deal with issues of employee absenteeism. Such problems can be stressful and take their toll on the company as a whole. You may not have the resources to handle this type of situation on your own. Our experienced HR consultants can walk you through your options and potentially help mediate between you and the employee. Call today and let’s figure out a solution together!

How to handle an employee's attendance problems

Meeting business goals can become difficult if no one shows up for work. Not only does poor attendance drain the morale of co-workers who must pick up the slack, but it also increases expenses and reduces productivity. Absenteeism ultimately affects your bottom line. The HR Professionals at Resourcing Edge have identified five actions that can help you identify and improve employee attendance.

According to reference.com, the average number of sick days taken in one year in the United States is 5.2 per employee. When that number is multiplied by your employee count it can become problematic not only to manage but to forecast goals.

1. Set Clear Expectations

  • Make your employees aware of attendance expectations, including call off procedures and how to request leave.
  • Ensure they are aware of the impact poor attendance can have on the company, including its effects on co-workers, customer service, and workload.
  • This information should be shared during the on-boarding process and communicated on a regular basis.
  • Clearly define expectations in your employee handbook.
  • Having a physical and electronic way for employees to reference will help limit the excuses of not knowing the details or misunderstanding the expectations.
  • Consistency is key when implementing and managing an effective attendance policy. Ensure you are treating all employees equally. If employees notice that someone else in a similar situation was treated differently, it can lead to a decline in morale and increased turnover rates.
  • Consider implementing a point and/or strike system. These can hold employees accountable for their attendance and set clear consequences.

2. Look For Hidden Causes

  • Poor attendance can be a result of a larger problem. Aside from an injury or illness, there could be other factors causing attendance issues.
  • Be on the lookout for:
    • Conflicts with co-workers or supervisors
    • Issues with the work itself (heavy workload, deadlines, lack of training)
    • Family or personal issues
  • Before any disciplinary action is taken, take the time to meet with the employee to determine the cause of their attendance issues. You might discover their absences could be protected under FMLA or ADA.
  • Taking the time to determine the root cause of missing work can lead to a plan of action to get the employee to work and back on track.

3. Train Supervisors

  • Supervisors have a responsibility to manage and encourage employee attendance. In most companies, employees are required to contact supervisors directly when they are going to be out. Properly trained supervisors monitor and address issues promptly and effectively.
  • Initially, supervisors should accept a call off without asking too many questions, accept the reason for the absence, understand the impact the absence could have and shift the workload if necessary, and tell the employee they will be missed.
  • If a pattern develops or the supervisor feels an employee could be abusing the policy, a note about the absence should be made and the employee’s attendance should be monitored moving forward. Proper documentation will be important if the attendance issues continue resulting in disciplinary actions or termination.
  • Supervisors should be aware of how to track attendance, be familiar with the attendance policy, and know when to apply disciplinary actions.

4. Reward Good Attendance

  • Balancing the consequences of attendance issues with rewards for good attendance is an excellent way to show you recognize employees who are dedicated and gives everyone something positive to strive for.
  • The biggest roadblock employers face when considering a reward system is the mindset that it would be rewarding employees for simply doing what is expected of them—coming to work. However, these programs do not have to be a large expense or even an expense at all. They can be as simple as recognition in a newsletter or during a staff meeting, or certificates given out quarterly.

5. Offer Flexibility

  • This may not be feasible for all companies, but implementing flexibility in work schedules can improve attendance and engagement of employees.
  • By allowing employees to flex their start time you may help employees who are having difficulty at home with childcare. Allowing employees to switch their shifts with co-workers could eliminate call-offs due to unexpected personal issues.
  • Similar to your standard work schedules, any flex schedules should be properly documented and approved by management so these can be tracked and monitored.

Identifying and addressing attendance issues quickly and consistently is a first step in lowering the stress that call-offs can cause businesses. The HR professionals at Resourcing Edge will partner with you to develop an attendance policy that is both effective and compliant to help you focus on managing your business with your employees at work.

Kimberly D. Gray is a Senior HR Services Partner at Resourcing Edge, who has 25 years of experience in employee relations, training, and compliance.

How to handle an employee's attendance problems

Most of the time employees take leave to recover from sickness, manage their personal or health-related needs or take a break from work. When an employee falls into a pattern of taking leave on a regular basis, however, it could potentially impact their standing at their workplace.

Employee attendance problems generally manifest as:

  • A pattern of before and/or after weekend absences
  • Early departures or tardiness
  • Long and/or frequent breaks
  • Unauthorized or unplanned absences
  • Excessive use of leave days, resulting in taking leave without pay

Employees who take more leaves of absence than permitted have a far larger impact on a company’s operations than they likely suspect. Excessive absences can cause a company to experience the following issues over time:

  • A lack of employee availability for prospective customers
  • Lost productivity among the workforce
  • Missed deadlines and/or deliveries for the company
  • Negatively impacts other employees’ deadlines, productivity and/or morale

While employee attendance issues do cause the aforementioned problems, employers can find ways to handle them. Let’s examine a few.

Inform Of Company Attendance Expectations

As mentioned, employee absences do negatively impact a business over time. Employers should approach suspected employees and inform them of the company’s expectations for attendance, avoiding a possibly confrontational tone.

Enforce The Rules

Employers should let employees know of the rules regarding attendance and taking leave. The idea is to remind the employee of the limitations they have regarding attendance, allowing them to potentially reduce the amount of leave they choose to take in the future.

Maintain Good Records

Many companies commend or provide incentives for employees who have good attendance records. Employers who have observed employees attempt to maintain their attendance following a period of absence should recognize them for making an effort to improve their attendance. Of course, to be able to do this the employer must maintain complete, accurate attendance records on all employees.

Counsel Employee

Sometimes, learning why an employee is taking a lot of leave time can help resolve their constant absences. An employer should meet with the employee privately to question and counsel them about their attendance issues.

Explain Affect Their Absence Has On Business

Many employees don’t understand the cost behind excessive absences. While consulting an employee, an employer should also inform them about how their excessive absences have negatively impacted the business.

Take Disciplinary Action

If an employee continues to take excessive leave after receiving a private consultation, an employer should take disciplinary action as soon as possible. Some forms of disciplinary action include written or verbal warnings, suspension and, rarely, termination.

Read more about attendance solutions at On-Time Web.

How to handle an employee's attendance problems

Unemployment Cases: Attendance Issues

Let’s face it, an unemployment case that is based on a discharge for attendance can truly pose a challenge for your HR teams. You and your team may have experienced situations in which the documentation and details you presented did not result in a favorable decision. A key to understanding attendance cases and how the state may rule is understanding how much the final incident can influence the outcome.

The Final Incident

What is a “final incident”? Simply stated, it is the “last straw” that leads to a discharge. And while the final incident is important in all employee discharges, it is especially critical when handling attendance cases. For any discharge case, the employer has to show misconduct occurred during the final incident. A general definition of misconduct is willful or intentional action or behavior that violates a known employment policy or rule. But each state ultimately has their own definition and laws on what constitutes misconduct for unemployment purposes.

With attendance cases, the final incident needs to show that the reason for that absence was within the employee’s control.

What reasons are considered outside of the employee’s control?
In general there are three main reasons an employee could provide that are considered outside of their control:

Job Abandonment

Another reason final incident details are so important with attendance cases has to do with determining the moving party in the separation. This can get tricky with cases involving job abandonment. Even though an employer may have to discharge an employee who stopped reporting to work, it is still the burden for that separated employee to prove that they had good cause to stop reporting. Because of this, job abandonment cases are most often viewed as voluntary separations.

When responding to a job abandonment unemployment case, it is important to provide the following information:

The dates the employee failed to report to work

A copy of your company policy as it pertains to reporting absences

The employee’s signed acknowledgement of that policy

Unemployment Case Documentation

Another key piece of documentation for helping build a strong unemployment attendance case is providing prior warnings for similar behaviors. Attendance cases are based on progressive disciplinary actions per your company’s attendance policy. Your company’s policy should outline what actions need to be taken by management after a specific number of occurrences have taken place. These actions are usually in the form of verbal, written, and final warnings. Providing copies of these warnings or proof of conversations will help in strengthening your case. As with all attendance cases, you will also have to show the state that your company has a uniformly enforced policy and the claimant was aware of that policy.

Unemployment Cost Management

If you want even more best practices for managing your unemployment costs, be sure to check out our recent webinar, Mock Unemployment Hearing: Medical Marijuana in the Workplace to learn best practices in:

Preparing hearing documents and witnesses

How evidence can be offered and received

The burden of proof and the impact it may have to a hearing

The facts that had the most influence on the final decision

And, if you want help managing the ins and outs of unemployment, like better understanding how discharge for attendance can impact your costs, check out our Unemployment Cost Management service. We can help you better manage the uncertainty about unemployment claim costs–both in actual taxes and time to process claims. Equifax has some of the industry’s top subject matter experts to help with improved workflow, better risk mitigation, and potentially lowering costs.

The information provided is intended as general guidance and is not intended to convey any tax, benefits, or legal advice. For information pertaining to your company and its specific facts and needs, please consult your own tax advisor or legal counsel.

Are you sitting comfortably? Welcome to my series of podcasts that will help you to navigate those inevitable difficult events at work that are part of being a manager.

Today I want to talk about dealing with attendance issues

In an ideal world, no one would need to take time off work or be late for work; but the fact is in real life, it happens. People get sick or have problems with childcare, and many companies will allow some leeway, depending on their policy. Problems arise, however, when people take days off when they’re not sick, or turn up to work late and do this continuously.

As a manager, you must deal with this behaviour as soon as you can, even if talking to an otherwise excellent employee about their attendance is difficult. If you fail to deal with attendance issues, it can not only damage the company’s bottom line, it can also upset other employees who attend work and who are always on time.

But attendance issues are not just about being absent from work, they can include arriving late and leaving early and taking extra long breaks. All of these behaviours cost businesses in terms of lost productivity and damage to morale.

Most managers will have to deal with attendance issues occasionally, but if you find that you’re increasingly having those problems with good employees, you might have to investigate the underlying causes more carefully. Could employees be bored, suffering from burnout, or struggling with difficult relationships with colleagues (and maybe even with you?)

How to handle an employee's attendance problems

Let’s look at the problems that poor attendance at work can cause.

It affects continuity.

When an employee is absent from work frequently, teams can’t be continuously productive. Other staff might have to assume their responsibilities or replacement staff might have to be drafted in which disrupts workflow.

It can affect the performance of other employees.

If employees who are frequently absent are seen to be ‘getting away with it,’ this might negatively influence others who might feel like they can do the same. This leads to lower productivity, lower morale among the employees who have to take on extra work, and a higher staff turnover.

It affects business growth.

Rather than growing professionally within their role, a frequently absent employee might fail to become proficient enough in their job role and so potential individual and business growth is affected.

So to avoid this, you need to deal with attendance issues, and here’s how.

Make your expectations clear

Sometimes, employees don’t know how to request time off using the correct procedures, and they may not realise how much of an impact that calling in sick has on the business. Make sure everyone has access to your company’s sickness or attendance policy, which should outline sickness procedure, how to request leave in exceptional circumstances, and the consequences of breaching the terms of the policy. Set a good example by following these procedures to the letter yourself.

Maintain accurate records of lateness or absence

This will make it much easier when you come to speak to someone about their attendance. If you can present them with facts, they’re much more likely to accept what you have to say.

Notice any trends

Does the employee in question call in sick frequently on a Friday or a Monday? Do they take time off near payday? Does an employee arrive 15 minutes late every day because of traffic, or do they just not make the effort to leave on time?

Is attendance an individual problem or does it involve multiple people?

If you need to speak to an individual about their attendance, arrange a one to one meeting. The same rule should apply if there are a few repeat offenders. If you’re dealing with multiple people, have a team meeting. Explain how absence and lateness is affecting the business and preventing it from reaching its goals. It may be a good idea to set attendance targets, then offer the team a reward if it’s met.

Do make allowances

If an employee genuinely has personal issues going on and they need time off, they’ll be more motivated and committed to the company if you honour their request. However, requests for time off should be assessed on a case by case basis, so that employees don’t take advantage of this allowance unnecessarily.

Encourage work-life balance

Employees who have a poor work-life balance are more likely to feel burnt out and resentful that work takes up so much of their time. They may then feel they are justified in taking time off, arriving at work late or leaving early. Encourage people to take regular breaks, to leave work on time, and to avoid dealing with work tasks in the evening when they’re at home.

How to handle an employee's attendance problems

Promote a team mentality

Take steps to encourage healthy relationships between employees, and of course, you and your employees. Not getting on with a manager is one of the main reasons people give for leaving a job. Think about organising social events, retreats, and team-building events to help employees get to know each other and to help build trust. If employees have harmonious relationships in the workplace, they’re less likely to be absent from work.

Promote physical and mental wellbeing

This can help reduce absences due to stress or poor physical health. This could include initiatives like subsidised gym memberships, weight loss schemes, smoking cessation classes, or meditation and relaxation sessions.

A successful business is built on skilled, committed and motivated employees who are willing to pull in the same direction to help it achieve its goals. When that doesn’t happen, it’s the task of the manager to investigate underlying issues then deal with them in a timely manner.

It may not be easy, but the continued survival and success of the business in difficult economic times may depend on it.

I hope that you got some good tips from today’s podcast, and I’ll see you next time. for the next one in the series which looks at how to overcome fear in the workplace.

This is The People Mentor, signing off.

Want to enhance your assertiveness then this blog will give you tips

Find it hard dealing with difficult people then sign up for the eBook here.

How to handle an employee's attendance problems

An attendance policy is a document that tells employees exactly how various issues such as tardiness, no shows, early outs, no call-no shows, and different types of leave will be handled. They often outline a progressive discipline policy for attendance infractions as well.

Send jobs to 100+ job boards with one submission

Post Jobs for FREE

  • Completely free trial, no card required.
  • Reach over 250 million candidates.

How to handle an employee's attendance problems

Attendance Policy Template Download

Download this attendance policy template in Word, and quickly customize it to work for your business. Instant download, no email required.

Employee Attendance Policy Template:

1. Overview.

Employees at [company name> are expected to be present for work, on time, every day. Regular attendance and punctuality are important to keep your team and [company name] operating. Arriving late, being tardy, or absence causes disruptions.

2. Calculation of attendance infractions.

  • Absent with calls: 1 point.
  • Absent, no call: 2 points.
  • Tardy: ½ point.
  • Early departure: ½ point.
  • Late return from lunch or break: 1 point (over 30 minutes).

Employees are given a five minute grace period at the start and end of each scheduled shift and for breaks and for lunch. Employees are required to report an absence by [procedure for reporting an absence]. Employees must report each day they are absent. Failure to call-off one hour prior to a shift will result in a no call-no show.

Attendance infractions reset every [length time or dates on which employee attendance infractions reset. Typically 6 months or 1 year].

3. Overview of disciplinary action for attendance infractions.

Attendance issues will result in progressive disciplinary action up to and including termination based on the following point system:

  • 3 points: Verbal warning.
  • 4 points: Written warning.
  • 5 points: Meeting with manager/supervisor, possible suspension.
  • 6 points: Employee is subject to termination.

If an employee is absent for three or more consecutive days, evidence for excusing the absence, such as a doctor’s note, must be provided.

If an employee is a no call-no show for three or more consecutive days it will be considered a job abandonment, or termination without notice.

Employees may request exceptions for work absences from human resources and management. These must be approved on a case-by-case basis.

4. Excused, unpaid absences without disciplinary action.

Excused, unpaid absences can be granted for funerals, jury duty, bereavement, childbirth, a car accident, medical appointment, and unavoidable emergencies. In these cases, employees must provide documentation to prove a reason for the absence.

5. Failure to clock-In or clock-out.

Employees must clock-in and clock-out for each shift. If there is any problem recording a clock-in or clock-out, inform employees should inform a manager immediately. Employees who consistently fail to clock-in or clock-out may receive disciplinary action, up to and including termination.

6. Attendance policy exceptions.

Absence because of bereavement, jury duty, or military duty, are exempt from disciplinary action, as are FMLA and ADA related absences. Bereavement, jury duty and military exemptions require proper documentation to be given to a manager within 48 hours of the absence.

When an employee is hired, the employee is expected to be regularly available for their scheduled work in return for payment for those days of work.

Absenteeism, which refers to frequent, short, unscheduled, or unexpected absences due to sickness or other types of leaves can negatively affect team productivity and morale and the employer’s reputation.

Supervisors with concerns about an employee’s absenteeism may work with an human resource (HR) adviser to identify the specific issues and next steps.

Process

Contact AskMyHR. You’ll be asked to provide specific information about:

  • The nature and extent of the absenteeism
  • Your concerns about impact to the workplace
  • The dates of absences, be prepared to provide supporting documents

The HR adviser determines whether it’s necessary to consult with specialists from Occupational Health and Safety, Early Intervention and Return to Work, or Employee Relations.

Communication is important. The HR adviser is available to provide guidance. Supervisors must meet with employees to:

  • Give the employee an opportunity to share information about their situation
  • Discuss concerns about the employee’s absences and impact on their work performance and the work unit
  • Ask if there’s anything that may explain the attendance issue
  • Ask if there’s something the supervisor can do to facilitate improved attendance
  • Clarify the purpose of any requests for changes to the employee’s job or work
  • Provide information regarding support through Employee and Family Assistance Services
  • Clearly state the employer’s expectation regarding attendance and plan future attendance goals and timelines

After this meeting, supervisors are encouraged to consult with AskMyHR regarding the discussions. The next step is for a supervisor to provide the employee with a letter that recaps the discussion and outlines the support available to help the employee maintain attendance.

Ongoing Management

Once the employee has been notified of the issue, the supervisor works with them to establish attendance goals, timelines, and regular communication.

There are many reasons for employees to be absent. For example, an employee may have medical issues; a supervisor may encourage the employee to work with their physician to identify a treatment program that enables the employee to improve attendance. Other reasons may include a challenging relationship with a co-worker, a heavy workload, training gaps or a personal issue.

One of the keys to managing employee absences is maintaining a positive relationship with each employee. If the various types of support available to an employee are not helping, a supervisor is encouraged to follow up with AskMyHR and explore possible next steps.

As an HR manager, you understand better than anyone that your employees are the most valuable resource in your organization. Managing them correctly can make or break your bottom line. One important aspect of employee management is attendance. Poor attendance management can lead to a loss of business productivity and profit as well as a higher turnover rate. It’s your job to track and maintain your employees’ working hours while staying compliant with labor laws and regulations. In addition to this, employees can only be paid accurately when their attendance is calculated properly. According to federal labor laws, full-time employees are required to work for 40 hours a week, and employers are required to pay employees who work overtime. When employees are not paid for their overtime, they can file lawsuits. This shows that effective attendance management is highly necessary in today’s workplace. Having a well-managed attendance system can improve your organization’s bottom line and improve the overall efficiency of your organization. Here we have listed the different ways in which an organization can track and maintain its employee’s attendance effectively,

  • Set clear expectations for your employees

Drafting a clear attendance policy that lists rules and expectations is the first step to effective attendance management. It helps you run your business efficiently and reduce unscheduled absenteeism. The policy should outline how to request time off and the consequences of not following attendance procedures. Before drafting the policy, however, keep in mind your company culture to ensure that both are consistent. Talk to your employees, listen to their expectations, and ensure they fully understand the policy.

  • Combine your attendance and payroll

Managing employee attendance accurately is crucial for payroll. When there are errors in your attendance data, you can end up overpaying or underpaying your employees. Analyzing attendance data manually to process payroll can be time-consuming and cause more mistakes, especially when your workforce is large and dispersed in different locations. Using HR software that is integrated with payroll software can help. HR software calculates working hours, overtime, and loss of pay, making payroll processing easier, more transparent, and more accurate.

  • Encourage employees to manage their own attendance

Employees should be able to access their attendance and time off data at their convenience. This will reduce the questions employees have for the HR department, and they’ll be able to plan their own work and vacations. Additionally, you should make the company’s attendance policy accessible through an Employee Self-Service portal. With this information at their disposal, your employees will feel like they have more knowledge and control of their work lives. This autonomy will boost their motivation and ultimately reduce turnover.

  • Be flexible

Rigid attendance policies may make employees dislike their job, and that will reduce their morale. When employees are offered very little time off, unscheduled absenteeism increases, and your company’s bottom line may suffer. So, it’s essential to make your attendance policy flexible. Millennials and Gen Z, who will form the majority of the working population in the coming years, prefer flexibility over any other benefit. It’s important to take this into consideration and respect the concerns of your employees. However, don’t allow unconscious bias to creep in. One example of providing more flexibility is giving a remote work option to your employees when they are not able to be physically present at your workplace.

  • Use an attendance tracker

Managing attendance manually has become a thing of the past. With an attendance tracker, every aspect of attendance management can be automated. Data The inconsistencies can be prevented altogether as the attendance tracker can be integrated with your company’s biometric devices. Employees can log their working hours even when they work remotely with suitable IP and geo-restrictions. Employee absences can be converted into days off, easing payroll processing. In addition to this, the attendance data of all your employees can be consolidated in a single location. With it, you can generate insightful reports that show your employees’ attendance patterns.

Attendance management is an essential aspect of every business. Efficiently managing employee attendance can lead to increased productivity and a better work experience for your staff. Keeping this data as accurate as possible is necessary for staying compliant with federal and state laws, so we recommend using automated attendance tracking software. As the world moves toward more flexible working environments, technology will help all businesses keep track of their employees with ease. We hope these tips gave you insight on how to manage employee attendance effectively!

How to handle an employee's attendance problems

8 Surefire Steps To Handle Employee Attendance Issues

While startups are known for their high productivity and flexible work culture, one of the dark sides often overlooked (until too late) is employee attendance. It’s hard to draw the line between flexible work timings and policy abuse, and harder to recognize when one is crossing it.

The proper management of such attendance issues tends to become a highly challenging task. This is because one needs to juggle between creating a time-bound work culture that is diligent and efficient, without making employees feel unappreciated or undervalued.

If you too have been wondering how to curb excessive employee absenteeism, here are 8 surefire steps which can help you devise a consistent, clear and transparent approach:

1. Craft A Policy

To begin with, make sure that your company has a comprehensively structured attendance policy. This policy shouldn’t just contain information about the number of leaves allowed per person, but it should also spell out the consequences of needless absenteeism. Craft a detailed reporting procedure which the employees have to follow in case they intend to skip work and put it in writing. This would ensure that your employees do not take casual absences lightly.

2. Keep Data Handy

Gathering information about the specific dates and times on which employees have been late or absent, would go a long way in helping you address the issue. Have a dialogue with each one of your employees and tell them that their absence has been noticed. A casual conversation with a first-time offender might work. However, when it comes to repeat offenders, their absenteeism would need to be formally recorded. In both cases, keeping data handy would equip you to broach the subject with credence.

3. Discuss With Concern

An open-hearted discussion has long been employed as a tool for sorting many attendance issues. Provide your employees with a comfortable space, wherein they can hold a candid discussion with you. Begin the conversation by listening to their grievances and offering practical solutions. Tell the employees that although you are displeased with their absentee behaviour, you are more concerned about their well-being. Doing so would enable them to speak with you without any inhibitions.

4. Make suitable accommodations

The appropriate management of human resource requires a thorough understanding of the individual circumstance. For example, some employees might be running late because they have to drop their children off to school, while some others might not show up because of a lack of proper transport arrangements. In each one of these cases, making small accommodations can help rectify absenteeism. Draft a flexible shift schedule that considers employee convenience without hampering your business needs.

5. Identify Stress Triggers

Personal or professional stress can often lead to excessive absenteeism. This is why it is important to identify and ameliorate stress triggers in time. In order to do this, you would need to create a work environment that is open, healthy and interactive. Organize activities which can develop and strengthen an interpersonal relationship between employees and employers. Find ways to hold their interest while keeping them motivated. This would give your employees a chance to unwind and thereby, combat various forms of stress.

6. Give Hourly Leaves

Counting the total numbers of leaves availed, in terms of hours instead of days, has the potential of lending your organization, a better employee perspective. For instance, if an employee has an appointment with a doctor, it wouldn’t make sense for him to request a 24-hour leave. He can simply take off for an hour and report back on time! Therefore, by giving out hourly leaves, you can greatly improve employee entitlements and ensure that their needs remain aligned with the goals of your business.

Also read: 5 tips to retain your best employees

7. Begin Counseling

There might be occasions when none of your interventions would seem to work. Despite the best of your efforts, employee absenteeism would persist. In such a time, it would be wise to refer the errant employees to a formal counselling session. This counselling could either come from an HR representative, or it could be provided by the employee’s immediate superior. Nonetheless, make sure that you lay out all your attendance expectations clearly and ask the counsellor to prevent unexcused absences.

8. Seek Professional Help

Last but not least, seeking professional help would prove to be a good final resort. Consulting advisers who have had years of experience in dealing with employee attendance issues would equip you to handle exigent situations in a delicate manner. More so, these professionals would also be able to suggest business-specific and innovative measures which can ensure compliance, save time and reduce overall employee absenteeism.

If your organization has consistently been bogged down due to employee attendance issues, online platforms like Kredily can come to your rescue. Our automated leave management system allows you to keep track of your employees without making them feel bound by too many rules.

How to handle an employee's attendance problemsWith Kredily, everyone wins.

You can set work hours amidst other employee attendance rules. They can punch in and out as they come and go. When your attendance management system records too many anomalies, you can have a conversation with them with all data at your disposal. Isn’t that the easiest solution?

How would you tackle employee absenteeism in your startup? Have you come across any of the above scenarios before? Anything you would have done differently? Would love to hear from you in the comments section below.

How to handle an employee's attendance problems

Share this:

  • Click to share on Facebook (Opens in new window)
  • Click to share on Twitter (Opens in new window)
  • Click to share on LinkedIn (Opens in new window)
  • Click to email this to a friend (Opens in new window)
  • More
  • Click to share on Pinterest (Opens in new window)
  • Click to share on Tumblr (Opens in new window)
  • Click to share on Reddit (Opens in new window)
  • Click to share on Pocket (Opens in new window)
  • Click to print (Opens in new window)

They call off last-minute.

They always seem to suffer from a mysterious “illness” the day after a holiday.

And their chronic attendance problems are driving you nuts.

Frequent absences negatively impact your team’s productivity, efficiency and morale. Regardless of the size of your organization, responsible employees become annoyed when they have to repeatedly “pick up the slack” for unreliable, inconsiderate workers.

As an employer, it’s important for you to give your team time away from work when they really need it. But if employees are taking advantage of your good nature, it may be time to address time and attendance issues head-on. Here are a few practical tips from our Nashville staffing agency to get you started:

Create a written policy.

If it doesn’t already, update your employee handbook so that it includes clear time and attendance policy verbiage. At a minimum, your policy should include:

  • An overview of allowed vacation time, personal and/or sick time, paid/unpaid leave, etc., in accordance with laws like the Family Medical Leave Act (FMLA).
  • Guidelines and timelines for requesting time off.
  • Consequences and protocols for addressing non-compliance. Explain in plain language how first-time and repeat policy violations will be handled.

Communicate clearly.

To be effective, your time and attendance policy must be clearly and frequently explained to your entire team. Be sure to review the policy with each new hire, and send periodic reminders to all employees in emails, meetings, your company newsletter and even check stub memos. By repeating your message, you eliminate the “I wasn’t aware of our policy” excuse.

Document issues.

Record each employee’s absences in an attendance write up to see if any noticeable trends become apparent. Create charts or graphs to help identify patterns of lateness and/or absence. If you notice that an employee regularly calls off on the same days of the week or in conjunction with holidays, determine how long the behavior has been occurring. This will provide the supporting evidence you need when you approach the employee.

Address problems directly.

The best time to talk about an employee attendance issues is when you first notice it. Schedule time for a private meeting with the offender and let him know what you plan to discuss. During the meeting:

  • Share the evidence of his chronic lateness/absence.
  • Explain the effects his poor reliability has on his team and the entire organization.
  • Find out if there is a reasonable explanation for the behavior. There might be! For example, an employee might be chronically late because he has to regularly transport a sick or disabled relative to a medical facility for treatment. If his reason is one protected by FMLA or the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), evaluate your options for accommodating his scheduling needs.
  • Move toward resolution. If his reason for time/attendance problems is notjustified or protected, explain the consequences (refer to the policy in your employee handbook). Clearly explain how he must change his behavior and when you will meet again to review his progress and compliance.
  • Be sure he understands the consequences. Write up what you discussed in the meeting, and then require the employee to provide written acknowledgement.

Accentuate the positive.

If a chronically late employee starts consistently arriving on time, acknowledge it! Make sure you tell the individual how much you appreciate the effort, and explain the positive impact his improved attendance has on the entire organization.

Need reliable workers – without the employment hassles?

Trust our Lebanon staffing agency to deliver dependable, hard-working people who hit the ground running. As their employer of record, Wood Personnel is responsible for addressing time and attendance issues with temporary employees – which means fewer headaches for you!

Approaching an Employee Attendance Management Conversation, What Can I say?

Attendance management seems to have become a more complicated issue these days as a more flexible and contingent workplace smashes up against an employer’s ability to manage the presence of their employees and the increase in employee absenteeism. How does an organization enforce an employee attendance policy when workforces are comprised of part-time, contract, temporary and flex employees who work different hours and have different expectations? Add into this situation legislated leaves and the requirement for accommodation for disability and family situation and there are a lot of layers to consider.

Yet, it does remain that an organization has the right to expect employees will perform their duties as agreed to including being available when and where expected.

Three Steps to Lay the Ground Work for Attendance Management Conversations

1) Agreements and Expectations

Begin with the creation of attendance management policies and an employment agreement that both parties agree to.

2) Record Keeping

The task of gathering and maintaining attendance records for all employees is required. This allows an organization to both define a standard expectation and track the attendance of employees for purposes of attendance management.

3) Communication

Communication on attendance expectations begins upon hire and continues on a regular basis. It is important that an employee first knows the expectations and then knows when he/she is headed off the expected path.

A key part of communication involves gathering information from an employee so the organization is aware of any problems including disability, family situation or other potential issues.

The 4 th Step – Begin to Address the Issue

4) Change Management

If the first 3 elements have been well managed and an attendance problem has occurred then the purpose of attendance management should be to facilitate change. This change can include changing the working conditions if appropriate and feasible (changing the employees hours for example) or asking the employee to change behaviours.

Within your attendance management policy the steps for addressing excessive or culpable absences in the workplace should involve a series of conversations with the employee, often divided into informal and formal meetings. Below are some suggestions for what to say in these meetings

  • Informal meeting: Expression of interest and desire to be of assistance.

“Joe, it has come to our attention that your attendance at work is not what we expected. You have been late on numerous occasions and missed 3 days of work in the past 4 weeks. Is there anything in which we can help you with?’

If Joe says that everything is fine, he just had a few additional challenges this month you should probe further.

“Are these challenges tied to anything that may reoccur in the near future?”

By asking about the future you are focused on what can be changed not what has already passed. Based on what the employee responds can ask another follow-up question. “Can we provide you with any assistance or accommodation now that will help you reduce or better manage the situation if it arises again?’

If the employee does not indicate any need for accommodation you can close by reiterating the importance of future work attendance. ‘If you have your situation managed that is good to hear. Let me close by clarifying our expectations and process related to attendance to make sure we all understand the same information. . . .’

This is your opportunity to review your expectations for the employee’s attendance for the future.

  • First Formal Meeting: If an employee’s attendance continues to be of concern a formal meeting should be requested. This may or may not be a component of a formal progressive disciplinary process.

“Several weeks ago we talked informally about your attendance at work as you had missed several days and been late on numerous occasions. Here is a letter with information about your absences [you do not need to review the details of the document, simply provide it].

‘When we talked last time you indicated there was no particular cause for your attendance issues and that you did not believe they would continue. Unfortunately we have noticed that your attendance continues to be a challenge. Is there anything you would like to share with us regarding your ongoing absences from work?’

If the employee indicates there is an explanation that requires accommodation you can agree to discuss this further and explore what accommodation is available and appropriate.

If your employee indicates there are no extenuating circumstances or if the circumstances do not involve illness, injury or other non-culpable reason then you can review the situation, the employee’s options and your expectations in more detail. Wrap up by asking your employee if he/she can agree to changes to help improve the situation.

‘We value our ability to work with our employees to address situations that can impact performance at work. Can we work together to make some changes so you can continue to make a contribution to the organization?

“I would like to hear your ideas for changes that will help you meet our expectations and thought we could discuss some of mine. . . ’

‘Thank you for agreeing to work with me on this item. I would like to propose the following next steps in the process . . . ‘

Most employees want to make it work, but often don’t know how and if they are backed into a corner react. By approaching the situation and the conversations well you can create an opportunity for change.

Sheryl Ferguson / Human Resources Administrator / PEO Canada

Excerpts from HR Insider article written July 17, 2015.

PEO is one of the foremost HR outsource, employee administration companies in Canada. Put our extensive experience in the human resources industry and corporate cultures to work for your organization.

Employee attendance directly affects staff performance. It may seem out of your control, but there are plenty of ways to work around it. Here are a few tips on how to improve employee attendance.

How to Improve Employee Attendance

Looking for ways on how to improve employee attendance? Be sure to track your employee’s leave, set expectations, boost morale and employee engagement and more.

Track Leave

As a manager, relying on hunches isn’t a brilliant move. Moreover, employees want fair treatment. When tracking employee absences, you can use HR software, attendance management system or come up with a basic spreadsheet. Tracking absences is unlikely to improve attendance but it’s a great starting point when combined with other methods and changes.

Set Expectations

Your workplace culture will determine the extent to which absences are “accepted.” No manager wants their staff to be absent but companies have different expectations around employee attendance. There’s no cookie-cutter approach – what’s important is that employees understand what they’re expected to do when they’re going to be absent.

Expectations are created through management and company culture as well as through documents such as employee handbooks. The trick is to set out expectations for attendance and outline the disciplinary process.

Boost Morale and Employee Engagement

Lower morale can lead to a vicious circle with higher absenteeism levels. You can start boosting workplace morale by making a few small changes such as:

  • Recognizing achievements
  • Trusting your employees
  • Moving towards a more open office culture
  • Listening to employees more.

Reduce Sick Leave

This doesn’t mean you should force employees to come to work while sick. Instead, you can help employees to lessen the impact or prevent some illnesses or health problems from occurring in the first place.

For instance, employers can invest in ergonomic furniture to reduce back pain and associated conditions. Taking such steps will indirectly cut sick leave. Be sure to discuss such plans with staff to find out which options they think will be most effective.

Communicate

It’s crucial that communication about absence takes place during and after every period of absence. Supervisors need to be empathetic and make efforts to understand the situation. For instance, supervisors should check up on absent employees after a couple of days to see how they’re faring.

If an employee is absent for an extended period, managers should hold a return to work interview for the following reasons:

  • Update them on announcements, new hires and company news.
  • Explain who’s been covering their workload.
  • Check whether the employee is well enough to work.
  • Discuss how their absence was managed and steps that will be taken if similar circumstances occur again.

Train Supervisors

Absence policies and initiatives will only be effective if supervisors are aware of them, support them and adopt them. As such, consider training your supervisors on all matters attendance. Start with the basics and narrow down to the specifics.

Final Thoughts

Before trying to tackle any absence problems, start by trying to understand the root cause. Keeping track of hours and leave will go a long way in helping you to come up with policies and initiatives that will help to reduce employee absence. These tips on how to improve employee attendance can help you to reduce absence rates significantly.

It’s a fact that if you have a job, you need to be in the office to complete your work. Generally speaking, if you are hired by a company and are an employee for them, you need to be in the office every day. A big part of being a professional is being a worker an employer can trust.

No matter what your job is, we all need days away from work once in a while. However, some people seem to have a relative that dies every couple of weeks.

Whether your employee likes it or not, their coworkers count on them to be there to do their work every day. If they are not reliable and miss countless days of work, then it’s likely that their coworkers, or you, will have to pick up the slack. This can cause resentment and anger.

The Culture of Absenteeism

There are all sorts excuses and reasons why employees miss a day of work. The real issue is when they start misusing sick leaves and take too much time off. If this is something your employee is doing, it should be addressed right away.

Their reasons for being out frequently don’t matter. What matters is the fact that they are not reliably at work.

Spotty attendance might signal any of a range of issues, from a problem at home to job dissatisfaction. Talk with your employee privately to find out if they have encountered a difficult personal problem, such as a relationship breakup or an ill family member, but be careful not to cross the line of professionalism.

If your discussion reveals dissatisfaction with their job, perhaps the employee needs to consider adjusting their attitude, or if the job is a good fit for them. You may have to remind them that chronic and unexplained absences will be treated according to your company’s attendance disciplinary policy.

It’s difficult deciding whose excuses are legitimate and whose aren’t, but, it is your job is to ensure that you have a reliably present workforce and right now, you have a problem child and their behavior could become contagious.

What to Do?

Work with the affected teams and managers to come up with back-up plans or alternatives while the absenteeism issue is being resolved. As soon as you can, tell the absentee that they have been missing work too often and you need to be able to count on them to be present. While you certainly understand that things come up from time to time, the frequency of these unplanned absences is too high. Mention, going forward, “I need you to be here reliably, every day, except in the most extreme of circumstances”. Ask them to commit to doing that.

From there, stick to it. If they continue to have unplanned absences at a rate that you find unacceptable, you need to enforce consequences. However, if this is a long-term employee whose work has always been good and this is a recent problem, you should express concern and ask what’s going on, and try to solve the problem.

If you find yourself in need of reliable candidates, we can help you! AJobThing is an award-winning job recruitment and hiring solution that can help you find the best job candidates in Malaysia. Join us now!

This article is adapted from What to do about MIA employee? by Dave Conrad

How to handle an employee's attendance problems

Life happens. As cliché as it is to say, we all have that morning where nothing goes right and we’re late to work. While it’s okay to be late in an emergency or call in sick to work, it’s important for employees not to let bad habits build and affect their work.

Employers need to know they can rely on their employees to be to work on time and to communicate with their team if they aren’t able to make it in for their shift. Here are a few ways to deal with employee attendance issues in your business.

Have a clear attendance policy

Every business should have an attendance policy that the employees and supervisors can agree to and reference. It’s essential to set clear expectations for timeliness and attendance. An attendance policy will help lay out the ground rules for tardiness and other attendance matters and explain the procedures for disciplinary actions. Making the attendance policy easily accessible also helps employees navigate tricky schedules, such as flexible working time or shifts outside the standard nine to five jobs.

Identify the key causes of absenteeism

To solve a problem, you first have to identify its cause. The most direct route is to ask employees why they are often late or why they take so many sick days. If you can identify patterns in an employee’s behavior, you can then talk openly about the situation and work together to find a solution.

For example, suppose an employee is often late on Tuesdays and they explain that it is because they need to drop their kids off at school. In that case, the solution might be adjusting that employee’s work hours to accommodate their needs while still completing their work throughout the week.

Follow through on consequences

While it’s easy to create an attendance policy and identify absenteeism, it’s not always as easy to enforce the rules. For employees to see that the policy should be taken seriously, it’s important to follow through on disciplinary action. There may be exceptions, but most cases of excessive tardiness or absences should be addressed with warnings, probation, and ultimately termination if they do not change their behavior.

At the same time, rewarding employees and teams who are consistently on time and present throughout the workweek is a great way to show how much you value their time and work. A simple word of thanks or even lunch on the company’s dime can go a long way in motivating employees to show up for shifts on time.

Monitor Attendance

Keeping a close eye on attendance can make a world of difference for a business. Checking attendance reports monthly or weekly can help companies identify employees who may often be late or not show up for work and take corrective action before things get too far.

Chronotek prevents attendance issues from becoming a problem

Identifying attendance patterns takes time that many supervisors don’t have to spare. Chronotek makes it easy for supervisors to stay on top of tardy or no-show employees and track attendance at a glance.

With supervisor alerts, Chronotek sends a notification when an employee has not clocked in for a scheduled shift. This allows your business to get the shift covered and make a note to review that employee’s attendance records. A variety of reports make it quick and easy to find patterns of absenteeism. With the ability to clock in and out from anywhere with any device, employees and supervisors can communicate throughout the day and stay on top of schedules.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Sharing is caring!

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Is this the cutest cake or what? I first saw the use of gumballs as cake decorations on Whipperberry’s birthday cake and I used that as inspiration for this Minnie Mouse cake!

How to make a minnie mouse cake

This cake is super simple and you can use any decorators icing to ice your cake! I just love how this turned out! Add some candles to make it a birthday cake or add your own special touch.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Minnie Mouse Cake!

Ingredients

  • One double layer 6 inch or 8 inch cake iced with white decorators or buttercream icing and make swirls with a 1M tip around the top of the cake 6 inch is pictured
  • 50 gumballs this is not exact, but will allow for enough- I found mine from Party City
  • 1 package of regular Oreo cookies
  • 1 package of Miniature Oreo cookies
  • 1 package of PINK candy melt disks I used Wilton found at Walmart
  • white round pearl sprinkles I find these at Walmart or Party city

Instructions

How to make a minnie mouse cake

This cake is a part of this cute Minnie Mouse Party! Come see the Minnie Mouse Party post here!

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Wednesday 13th of October 2021

Thursday 23rd of May 2019

Hello! I am working on a digital article for Taste of Home and would love to use this image. It would be perfect and we would like to republish it, with your permission. Please confirm you are the photographer and the rights holder, and that you give us your irrevocable permission to use it across all partners and platforms. Of course, we will credit and link back to your original post. Thank you

Sunday 22nd of March 2015

i love your recipes & Decorating ideas!

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

How to make a minnie mouse cake

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Ingredients

  • Ready-To-Use Gum Paste
  • Black Icing Color

Tools

  • Fondant Roller, 9-Inch
  • Roll and Cut Fondant Mat
  • Knife
  • Fondant and Gum Paste Tools Set, 10-Piece
  • Cake Board
  • Large Round Tip 2A
  • Decorator Brush Set
  • Ruler
  • Aluminum Mickey Mouse Cake Pan
  • Fanci-Foil Wrap
  • Round Cake Decorating Tip 3
  • Open Star Cake Decorating Tip 16

Instructions

Click To Mark Complete

In advance: Make bow. Tint 6 oz. of gum paste rose. Roll out 1/8 in. thick. Using Bow Patterns and knife, cut one bottom and two top sections. Score lines with veining tool from set following pattern. Let dry on cornstarch-dusted board. Attach top sections to bottom with gum glue adhesive.

Also: Make polka dots. Roll out white gum paste 1/16 in. thick. Cut circles using wide end of tip 2A. Attach to bow with gum glue adhesive.

And: Make knot. Roll a 1/2 x 2 in. long log of rose gum paste. Flatten to 3/4 in. wide. Taper one end and attach for knot with gum glue adhesive.

Bake and cool Minnie Mouse cake. Position on foil-wrapped cake board cut to fit.

Outline facial features with tip 3 and black buttercream icing. Pipe in eyes with white, mouth and pupils with black and tongue with peach (smooth with finger dipped in cornstarch).

Cover top of head, nose and ears with tip 16 stars in black. Cover face with tip 16 stars in light copper. Pipe tip 3 dot eye highlights in white and outline lashes in black.

Position bow; prop up with a small amount of icing.

How To

How to make a minnie mouse cake

The star tip creates the most celebrated, easily accomplished decorations, making the star fill-in technique a perfect option for a beginner’s project.

This adorable Minnie Mouse cake is super easy to make and the perfect party centerpiece! This one-layer M innie Mouse Birthday Cake is big enough to feed a crowd and leaves plenty of room to write a sweet message for your favorite little Minnie fan!

How to make a minnie mouse cake

How to Throw a Minnie Mouse Birthday Party (without Breaking the Bank)

When my middle daughter was two years old, we threw her a Minnie Mouse Birthday Party to celebrate. She’s always been a Disney fan and in her toddler years especially, she was obsessed with all things Minnie Mouse!

This post was originally published in May 2016, but I love this Minnie Mouse Cake and wanted to add a video to the post. So we’ve updated as of April 2019 with new photos and video tutorial.

I had two goals for this Minnie Mouse birthday party:

1- Everyone have fun! (Kids AND adults!)

2- Not spend a ton of money (birthdays can get very pricey if you’re not careful!)

How to make a minnie mouse cake

I was astonished when I saw how much my mother-in-law spent on a “simple” birthday cake for our oldest daughter’s party last year, so this time I decided the DIY approach would be friendlier on the budget.

Plus I really enjoyed baking and decorating the cake and I was so happy with the results! I’m not known for my talents in the kitchen, so if I could make this cake, then trust me…it’s easy!!

Minnie Mouse Cake Ingredients

I’ve included shop-able ad links for your convenience in re-creating this recipe; disclosure policy available here.

  • Chocolate cake mix — While you can absolutely make your Minnie Mouse cake from scratch, we used box cake mix to save time. You’ll need two boxes of mix.
  • Dark chocolate frosting — Again, pre-made frosting is an awesome time-saver! (Grab two cans of frosting!)
  • White frosting— This is what we used to make Minnie’s bow and write a birthday message on the cake. One can should be plenty.
  • Red gel food coloring — We use red food coloring to mix up some pink frosting for Minnie’s bow.

Kitchen Supplies Used:

  • 10″ round pan & 6″ round cake pans — You could also use a 9″ and 5″, etc. The most important thing is to have one large cake pan for Minnie’s head and two smaller round cake pans for the Minnie ears.
  • Frosting decorating bag — We love these reusable silicone piping bags because you can wash and use them over and over again. A fine tip is best for writing and to make each white polka dot.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

How Many Does this Minnie Mouse Cake Serve?

If you’re wondering about how many this Minnie Mouse cake serves, it is a BIG cake — more than enough for all of our 25-30 guests!

We used two box cake mixes and two cans of frosting (plus about half of a can of white frosting for writing and decorating).

If you want to make a smaller cake, you could use one box of cake mix and one can of frosting – you would just want to use smaller cake pans than we used.

How to Bake a Minnie Mouse Cake

This Minnie Mouse cake is especially easy because we used a box mix. You can make your favorite flavor: chocolate, vanilla, strawberry — anything works because the dark chocolate frosting covers it.

If you prefer a from-scratch cake recipe, our Toll House Cake recipe is a buttery yellow cake with chocolate chips and it’s gluten free too!

TIP: If you don’t have 2 small pans, bake in shifts, reusing the 6″ pan instead of buying two of them.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Allow cakes to cool completely before trimming the tops. You want all three cakes to be even in height. Use a serrated knife or our foolproof cake-cutting method here. DO NOT throw away the excess cake, as you’ll use it in a minute.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Arrange your cakes: the large cake will be the head and the two smaller cakes make the ears. Frost all of them with dark chocolate frosting.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Remember those extra cake scraps leftover from trimming your cakes? Use these to create Minnie’s bow on top of the big cake.

Once you’ve got the right shape for the bow, cover it in pink frosting.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Finally, scoop the rest of your white frosting into a decorating bag and pipe polka dots onto your pink bow. You can also write a birthday message on the middle of the cake.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Isn’t this Minnie Mouse cake just the cutest?!

How to make a minnie mouse cake

How to Make Minnie Mouse Ears Stand Up on Cake

Since we made our Minnie Mouse birthday cake for a party where we invited quite a few family and friends, we wanted our cake design to be functional.

A cake with ears that stand up would be fragile, and might not make it until party time.

I love how our Minnie Mouse birthday cake turned out and all of our guests immediately recognized those trademark Minnie ears and the white polka dot bow!

It’s one of my favorite birthday cake ideas we’ve ever made!

Bonus Party Idea: Easy Minnie Mouse Goodie Bags

I didn’t want to waste a lot of time on fancy goodie bags, since kids just rip into them, but I still wanted them to be festive and match the theme.

I simply bought pink paper bags (they were $2 for a pack of 12 when I bought them…score!) and cut circles out of black construction paper to make “ears.”

How to make a minnie mouse cake

What’s inside our goodie bags:

We had both boys and girls at the party, so I tried to find things that would be fun for everyone. I also tried to find things they could actually play with instead of junky favors.

Minnie Mouse Birthday Cake Recipe:

If you like this recipe, rate it! We’d also love to hear your thoughts in the comments below.

Published – Jan 20, 2022 Update – Jan 20, 2022 This post may contain affiliate links to Amazon and other sides. This blog generates income via ads and #sponsoredpost

Sharing is caring!

How to make a minnie mouse cake

These Minnie Mouse Cake Tutorials teach you how to make a disney theme cake. Learn to carve a minnie mouse cake and even make a fondant topper

Kids are crazy about Disney characters. From Micky to minnie, these characters are very popular among all. Learn how to make a fancy birthday cakes for your little one with these fun cake ideas

How to make a minnie mouse cakeisa’s cake

Minnie Mouse Cake Tutorials – Videos

Here are a few minnie mouse theme cake tutorials. From carving a cake to making a topper using fondant, its all in here

How To Make A Minnie Mouse Cake | Easy Cake | Manjaris Recipe

How to Make a Minnie Mouse Cake by Shobana’s Kitchen Tamil

Minnie Mouse Doll Cake by Tan Dulce by Grisel

How to make a Minnie Mouse Fondant cake by Sweets By Tiff

Disney’s Minnie Mouse Ruffly Cake Tutorial by The Lovely Baker


Minnie Mouse Cake by I Love Cakes

How to make decorate a Mini Mouse cake by Got Cake?

Fondant Minnie Bow and Ears by SprinkleSpark Cakes

Images For Inspiration

  • How to make a minnie mouse cakeisa’s cake
  • How to make a minnie mouse cakeTortolandia
  • How to make a minnie mouse cakeJackie
  • How to make a minnie mouse cakeStefano Russomanno
  • How to make a minnie mouse cakeDragana
  • How to make a minnie mouse cakeIryna Volosyuk
  • How to make a minnie mouse cakeconfeitaria / Slz-Ma
  • How to make a minnie mouse cakeBella Espiricueta
  • How to make a minnie mouse cakeNancy Bardt
  • How to make a minnie mouse cakeFefi
  • How to make a minnie mouse cakeTorte Panda

The above cakes were found on Pinterest for Inspiration. Some of the cakes have been credited to their original artists. If you know the name of the artist whose cakes are not credited above – please let me know in the comments so I can update the post with the proper credit link. Thanks

Updated on Mar 31, 2022

Published on Jan 27, 2021

Updated on Mar 31, 2022

Published on Jan 27, 2021

Image © Rod Long, under a Creative Commons license.

If you’re planning a birthday party for your Disney-obsessed toddler and friends, baking a sweet treat for your Minnie Mouse-mad daughter, or celebrating the first birthday of your little girl, you’ll love these Minnie Mouse cake ideas and recipes.

This incredible Minnie Mouse face chocolate layer-cake comes with an easy-to-follow guide, so there’s no need to panic at the prospect of making a character cake. Minnie Mouse birthday cakes are adored by little girls across the globe and make a show-stopping centrepiece at any birthday party.

Ingredients

For the large cakes: 175g unsalted butter, 175g golden caster sugar, 100g self-raising flour, 50g cocoa powder, three large eggs, one teaspoon milk, pinch salt

For the small cakes: 195g unsalted butter, 195g golden caster sugar, 110g self-raising flour, 55g cocoa powder, three large eggs, two teaspoons milk, pinch salt

For the buttercream icing: 100g dark chocolate, 170g unsalted butter, 350g sieved icing sugar

For the cake topper: Icing pens in black and white, ready-to roll fondant icing in black, white, red, pink, and light beige

Equipment: Two 20cm round cake pans, four 11cm round cake pans, cake board, greaseproof paper, rolling pin

Image © Johanna’s Paul Undurthi, under a Creative Commons license.

Method

  1. Preheat the oven to 190C/ Gas Mark 5.
  2. Line the cake pans with greaseproof paper.
  3. Starting with the large cakes, cream the butter and sugar together until the mixture is light and creamy.
  4. Add in one egg, and keep mixing.
  5. Using a separate bowl, sieve in the cocoa powder, floor, and salt.
  6. Give the dry ingredients a stir, and then add a third of it to the wet ingredients and mix well.
  7. Mix in another egg and another third of the dry ingredients.
  8. Now add the final egg and the rest of the dry ingredients.
  9. Mix until you have a thick, smooth cake batter; add a splash of milk if needed.
  10. Split the cake mix between each large cake pan. Use a spoon to smooth the tops.
  11. Repeat steps three to ten for the small cakes.
  12. Bake the four small cakes for 15-20 minutes and the two large cakes for 20-25 minutes, until they feel springy to the touch. To ensure they are fully cooked, insert a skewer into the middle of each cake; it will come out clean if the cakes are cooked.
  13. Turn them out and leave until they are completely cool.

Assembly And Icing

  1. To make the buttercream icing, cream the butter until it is fluffy, mix in the icing sugar, then melt the chocolate and add that to the mixture. The icing needs to be firm and spreadable so if it is a bit runny, put it in the fridge until the consistency is right.
  2. Use a thin layer of buttercream to attach one of the large cakes to the cake board. Use a thicker layer of buttercream to stick the other large cake on top. This large layer cake is the head of your Minnie Mouse cake.
  3. Stick two of the small cakes together with buttercream, then do the same with the other two small cakes. These two small layer cakes are the Minnie Mouse ears.
  4. Position the Minnie Mouse ears at the top of the large layer cake.
  5. Take a sharp knife and cut semi-circles off the Minnie Mouse ears, so that they slot in place on the large cake.
  6. Use buttercream to attach the small cakes to the board and to the large cake.
  7. Cover the Minnie Mouse cake with the rest of the buttercream.

Image © Gione Josh Jorquin, under a Creative Commons license.

Minnie Mouse Cake Topper

  1. Print two Minnie Mouse face templates that match the size of your cake; cut one out and keep one of the templates to use for reference.
  2. Place your template onto black ready-to-roll fondant icing. Use a sharp knife to cut round it, then lay on to greaseproof paper.
  3. Cut the bow out of your paper template and use it to cut an edible bow out of red fondant.
  4. Repeat this step with for the Minnie Mouse face, using light beige fondant icing.
  5. Attach the face and bow to the black base using a little bit of water.
  6. Repeat step three, using white fondant icing for the Minnie Mouse eyes, and black for the nose and mouth. Attach to the face.
  7. Now, use the template to cut the tongue out of pink fondant and the pupils of eyes out of black.
  8. Use black icing pen to outline Minnie Mouse’s eyes, and to add the eyelashes, line under the eyes, sides of the mouth, and lines on the bow.
  9. Finally, use white icing pen to add the spots on Minnie Mouse’s bow.
  10. Once all the pieces of the Minnie Mouse face cake topper are dry and firmly in place, gently remove it from the greaseproof paper and attach to the top of your cake.

Tips And Recommendations

-Vegan-friendly butter and margarine alternatives and gluten-free flour are fine to use for your make Minnie Mouse cakes with.

-If possible, make Minnie Mouse cake toppers a few days before you make the birthday cake so that they have time to properly dry.

-You can also make the buttercream icing up to three days in advance, as long as you store it in the fridge. Stir it until it is smooth before you use it.

-If you don’t want to make the topper for your cake, Minnie Mouse toppers can be purchased ready-made, or you could use Minnie Mouse birthday cake decorations.

Image © Deva Williamson, under a Creative Commons license.

Alternative Methods

-If you’re looking for easier Disney birthday cake ideas, you’ll love this simple-to-make Minnie Mouse cake. Bake a large layer cake, cover with buttercream frosting, and attach a Minnie Mouse head cake topper or other Minnie Mouse cake decorations.

-If you’re good with a piping bag, use different coloured piped icing, rather than ready-to-roll icing, to create your Minnie Mouse face.

-Minnie Mouse cakes that are easy to grab are guaranteed to be a hit with your little princess. Back a batch of cupcakes, top with pipped red icing, and use Oreos for ears. Finish with white chocolate chips spots and edible sugar bows. Display in the shape of Minnie and add candles for a fab Minnie Mouse birthday cake.

Good To Know

-Young children will have fun helping you mix the ingredients, but any cutting should be saved for much older kids and done under supervision.

-To freeze your Minnie Mouse birthday cake for up to two months, put in the freezer unwrapped until the icing sets. Then wrap in two layers of cling film, followed by a layer of foil.

I have nine nieces and nephews, all ages seven and under. You can imagine what our holidays are like– the food is easy, the games are simple, and most everyone spends time either coloring, playing dress up or both.

So when my niece asked her mom to make a Minnie Mouse cake for her third birthday, my sister sprung into action and. called me.

I’d planned to be there for the big day (three is, after all, three whole fingers), so helping with the cake seemed like a fun idea.

We waited until the kids were in bed to get started, not because we were dreaming of some ultimate reveal, but more so because we didn’t know how much mental focus it would take to create something cute from cake pans and white icing.

As a note, I’m here to tell you that no specialty items were used to bake or decorate this cake. In fact, I forgot the round cake pans I was suppose to bring from my house. Instead, we used:

  • 1 glass pie plate
  • 1 9×13 casserole dish
  • 2 vanilla cake recipes (you can use boxed)
  • 1 batch of plain white icing (you can use store-bought)
  • 1 batch of chocolate icing (you can use store-bought)
  • 1 butter knife
  • 1 serrated knife
  • 1 toothpick
  • 4 glasses of wine (optional, for some)

I’d also suggest starting before 9pm. Ideally, you’d bake the cakes the day before you want to frost them in order to allow them time to cool. Otherwise, you’ll need to include those optional 4 glasses of wine and plan to stay up until about 1am.

Bake one full cake recipe in the 9×13 pan and bake according to your recipe’s directions. Let the cook cake cool completely, then flip it out onto a cutting board. If flipping a glass container over to remove the cake makes you nervous, use a different type of baking pan. Meanwhile, bake half a cake recipe in the glass pie plate. We used the remaining batter for cupcakes, but you could also make another “layer” if you wanted to serve at a different time, or discard the extra batter.

Once the cake in the pie plate is baked and cooled, flip it out onto the cutting board you wish to serve the cake on; we used a white plastic cutting board, which you can see in the picture. This, my friends, is Minnie’s head, so center it in the middle of the board but a little low so that you have room for her ears and oh-so important hair bow.

Using a round plastic container as your guide, cut two same-sized circles out of the 9×13 cake. You’ll want to cut the circles somewhat close together, or on opposite sides of the car, to ensure you have space to cut the bow. The circles, the ears, should be smaller than Minnie’s head, but you can make them whatever size you like. We used a whipped topping container to get our size. Remember, if they’re too large, you can always trim them down. Place the ears by Minnie’s head. We placed ours slightly askance, which gives Minny a hint of playfulness and whimsy, or just tells you how tired we were that we couldn’t even line up ears!

Finally, cut the bow. We free-handed the bow, but you could also draw a quick template of what you’d like it to look like and lay it on top of the cake, if that helps your cutting confidence. Above all else, remember, this is for a birthday party– the cake will be eaten, so don’t get too attached! Place the bow between the ears to make sure you have enough space between them, then set the bow aside; it’s easier to ice the ears without the bow in place at first.

Now that everything is in place (except the bow!) on your serving board, it’s time to decorate. I prefer to decorate using a picture as a guide, so I searched for images of Minnie, chose the expression I wanted (pure glee!), and got to work.

Start with your chocolate icing. Cover the ears with chocolate icing using a butter knife or a fancy icing tool, if your kitchen is so resourceful as to provide one. Next, use the chocolate icing to create Minnie’s hairline. If you look at pictures of her, her hair cuts in a little by her cheeks. Also, Minnie rocks a Widow’s Peak, in case you hadn’t noticed.

Next, get your white icing and divide it into three plastic bowls. One, you’ll leave totally white for Minnie’s eyes. To the second bowl, add a few drops of red food coloring, enough to create a pink-hued icing for Minnie’s face. Finally, use the third bowl to make a slightly darker pink for Minnie’s tongue. If you hate doing dishes, you can simply ice Minnie’s face, then add more red to make her tongue, and finally more red to make her hair bow a fabulous shade of pink, but I’m ahead of myself.

Once Minnie’s hair is done, ice her face in the lightest shade of pink. Then, add the white icing to make her eyes (you can either make ovals and top them with chocolate to finish her eyes or make mirrored semi-circles, then fill in the gaps with chocolate to complete her eyes). Use the chocolate to make her nose, then make her eyelashes by putting on a small amount of chocolate icing and dragging it away from her eyes with a toothpick. For her mouth, make a chocolate half circle, then drag chocolate lines with a toothpick to complete her smile. Use the second shade of pink to make heart in her chocolate mouth, which becomes her tongue.

Finally, un-frosted bow into place between the ears and ice it with the darker pink icing. My Minnie Mouse wore pink this day, but, as you Minnie Mouse fans know, Minnie has hundreds of outfits, so yours can wear a red hair bow or even one with polka dots. Ice the bow in your color of choice, then use the butter knife to create texture; I made a flat circle in the middle, then dragged the knife away from the center towards the edges to create a more bow-like feeling.

There you have it! A fairly-simple, super cost-effective custom birthday cake for your kiddo or, in my case, niece.

For the record, when she saw it the next day, she stared at it for about 30 seconds then let her smile slowly take over her face. “Is that Minnie Mouse cake for me?” she asked. I was happy to tell her that, yes, it most certainly was.

Home » Recipes » Minnie Mouse Cupcakes

Published February 15, 2019 Last Updated March 2, 2020 / By Jessica 12 Comments

  • Pin
  • Share
  • Tweet
  • Reddit

These Minnie Mouse Cupcakes are my favorite Disney Cupcakes to make! The adorable bows and mini oreo ears take these minnie cupcakes over the top!

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Good morning friends! I am so excited to share these Minnie Mouse cupcakes with you, they have come to have such a special place in my heart! For those of you who don’t know, my Nora girl is three years old. She is my middle child, sandwiched between two brothers! She is my easygoing kid, and unfortunately sometimes that means she gets overlooked. To top it all off, her birthday is the week before Christmas, so you can imagine how that goes.

For awhile now, I have been wanting to do something special just for her, so she knows how much I love her. My parents were really good at making me feel special and loved, they always made an effort to cultivate interests that matched mine, and we have such a strong friendship now because of that. I thought about what Nora is loving, and Mickey Mouse Clubhouse came to mind, but to make things a bit more fun and girly I decided to focus in on Minnie Mouse cupcakes!

HOW TO MAKE MINNIE MOUSE CUPCAKES

How to make a minnie mouse cakeWe started off our special day with a healthy picnic on a new Minnie Mouse blanket! We got to get those nutrients in before we get to baking!

Nora loves to help me cook and bake, and I try not to let my kids eat sugary treats too often, so I knew that having a treat to go along with our Mommy/Daughter time would help make things special! I also wanted to keep it simple, since I didn’t want her to get bored and lose interest! I decided to make the cupcakes and bows the night before and stick them in the freezer and then during our time together we just frosted and assembled and it was so fun and easy!

How to make a minnie mouse cake

What you need to make the Minnie Cupcakes

1 box Strawberry Cake Mix

1 batch Pink Frosting

24 Pink or White Cupcake Liners

White Sixlets (or large white candy pearls)

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Obviously you could also use any from scratch cake recipe that you love (this Red Velvet cake recipe would be amazing) I am a minimalist, so whenever I am doing fancy garnishes I like to cut out some work for myself by doctoring up a box mix!

I have made more Minnie Mouse bow toppers over the years than I could ever count and I’m always asked how I do them. So, today I want to share with you how to make a Minnie Mouse Polka Dot Bow Topper with some simple essentials and a little experience.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

As you may think, it does take a few steps but they’re not hard to make and in the end – everybody loves the final result! Just imagine the look on your daughter/niece/little friend’s face when she sees the Minnie cake. Not to mention the appreciation from the other guests: “That’s amazing! How did you make it look so real?”. Well, you will all learn that from this article. So let’s get it started!

What You Need to Make a Minnie Mouse Bow Topper

First of all, here are all the tools, ingredients, and other essentials you will need in order to succeed in this recipe.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

  • White gum paste;
  • Pink fondant (or gum paste);
  • Small Rolling Pin and mat;
  • Shortening;
  • Water or sugar glue;
  • small paintbrush;
  • Small pastry wheel;
  • Xacto knife or scalpel;
  • Ribbon Cutter;
  • Mini Circle Cutter or punch/plunger;
  • Two bubble tea straws or dowel rods (not pictured).

Minnie Mouse Bow Topper: Step-by-Step Image Tutorial

All in all, these 10 steps will make it clear to everybody what exactly you should do in order to achieve the sweet Minnie Mouse bow topper from the image. So, follow closely the instructions and your success will be guaranteed!

How to Make a Minnie Mouse Bow Cake Topper: Step 1

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Roll out the white gum paste and then cut it into a rectangle using your pastry wheel and a ruler (if you need to). The size can vary depending on how big of a bow you need, but for this bow, it was 9″ long by 3″ wide.

How to Make a Minnie Mouse Bow Cake Topper: Step 2

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Now it’s time to add polka dots!! I like to use shortening to adhere the dots to the gum paste. I brush down the entire surface with a very thin layer, then use a paper towel to wipe off any excess. Shortening is not as messy as sugar glue or water, but those would work too if you prefer.

How to Make a Minnie Mouse Bow Cake Topper: Step 3

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Roll out your pink fondant or gum paste, then cut out lots of tiny circles and lay them on your gum paste. I tried to keep mine pretty evenly spaced but they don’t need to be in a perfect pattern.

I love using a circle plunger/cutter because it makes the polka dots so easy, but you could also use a mini circle cutter or even the end of a frosting tip to cut the circles. Also, you can make them as big or as small as you want. These were just under half an inch.

How to Make a Minnie Mouse Bow Cake Topper: Steps 4 and 5

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Once the dots are in place, flip the white over and cut it into a rectangle. You can make the bow as big or small as you want but mine was 9″ long and 3 wide.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

How to make a minnie mouse cake

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Now, using water or sugar glue, paint the ends of the rectangle, then fold and pinch the ends together for what will be the center of the bow.

How to Make a Minnie Mouse Bow Cake Topper: Steps 6 and 7

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Flip the bow over then fold the ends together. (oops – one of my dots popped off!)

How to make a minnie mouse cake

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Now use your fingers to pinch the back of the bow down to match the front. The gum paste should still be pliable so you can manipulate it without cracking. Once you have it shaped, flip it back over.

How to Make a Minnie Mouse Bow Cake Topper: Steps 8 and 9

How to make a minnie mouse cake

How to make a minnie mouse cake

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Using some of the gum paste you trimmed when you cut the rectangle, cut out 2 smaller rectangles to add the knot at the center of the bow. These need to be around 3″ long and about half an inch wide. I cut two, then layer them together and wrap them around the center of the bow.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Use a little sugar glue to secure the knot on the back then use bubble tea straws or dowel rods to shape the loops while it dries. I like to put straws through the loops, then stand it up to dry because that’s how it’ll be on the cake.

How to Make a Minnie Mouse Bow Cake Topper: Final Step

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Finally, let the bow dry overnight or at least 12 hours, then slide the straws out and it’s ready to go! Last but not least, I used melted white chocolate to secure mine to the cake!!

And you’re all set – a super cute Polka Dot Minnie Mouse Bow Topper! If you’d like to know how to make Minnie’s ears, I also have a tutorial for that here on Rose Bakes.

Happy Caking!

All in all, this is all you need to know in order to create a sweet, dotted Minnie Mouse bow topper for your little princess. If you follow closely these ten steps and you use the tools and ingredients listed, you shouldn’t encounter any problems. However, if anything was unclear from my tutorial, or if you have any further questions, please do not hesitate to ask them in the comments section below.

Also, I would love to hear all your thoughts, advice, and even improvements about this recipe of mine. So, anything on this topic is expected in the comment section! Not to mention, I am super excited to hear everything about your experience with the Minnie Mouse bow topper.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Minnie Mouse Cake Recipe | Minnie Mouse Cake with buttercream frosting | Kids Birthday Cake recipe with step-by-step pictures and instructions. Learn how to make Minnie Mouse Cake for kids’ birthday party. The base of the cake is whole wheat chocolate cake sweetened with brown sugar and frosted with American Buttercream Frosting.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

This is a long pending post and finally making it to the blog. I made this for my second daughter’s birthday last August. I always plan ahead for kids’ birthdays and decide what cake to make and start searching for designs, ideas from the internet. My kids demanded Mickey mouse or Minnie mouse cake. After a lot of research, finally decided to go with a simple Minnie mouse cake without fondants.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

I made a big cake and cut it in the shape of a Minnie mouse. Due to lockdown, could not get the correct colors for the cake. Everything was out of stock and no online delivery at that time. So managed with colors I had in hand. It indeed turned out good with shape and taste. Check out other varieties I made in my birthday party platter .

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Some other celebration cake recipes from the blog

Your child’s Minnie Mouse party will be magical with the help of the 10 Cutest Minnie Mouse Cakes! Instead of whipping up a homemade Minnie Mouse cake, why not get some ideas for a Disney Minnie Mouse cake that will wow your guests and delight the birthday girl!

Are you planning a Minnie Mouse Birthday Party for your little one? Since the birthday cake is the centerpiece of the dessert table and everyone’s favorite party dessert, check out the 10 Cutest Minnie Mouse Cakes for a Disney Minnie Mouse party! There are so many awesome Minnie Mouse cake designs, so if you don’t know how to make a Minnie Mouse cake of your own, you can use this inspiration to show to your local baker.

Minnie Mouse is such a popular party theme, especially for a first birthday. I mean who doesn’t love Minnie Mouse, right?! There are tons of Minnie Mouse party ideas where you can find inspiration for decorations, food, party favors, desserts, cake toppers, and more! You can even find the cutest Minnie Mouse party outfit for your little one’s big celebration.
How to make a minnie mouse cake[convertkit form=4996735]

  • If you’re in love with all things Disney, check out these Amazing Disney-Inspired Birthday Cakes.
  • Another awesome dessert for your Minnie Mouse party is Minnie Mouse Cookies. Get the tutorial from our Easy Mickey Mouse Cookies to make them for your Minnie party!

Shop these Minnie Mouse Party Supplies and Decorations:

  • Minnie Bowtique Party Pack for 16
  • Minnie Mouse Ear Headbands
  • Minnie Mouse Happy Birthday Banner
  • Minnie Mouse Party Favor Bags
  • Minnie Mouse Birthday Party Decorations
  • Minnie Mouse Birthday Cake Candles
    How to make a minnie mouse cake

This perfectly designed Minnie Mouse Birthday Party Cake by Lenka Sweet Dreams is one of our absolute favorites for this Disney theme! Our favorite detail is the Minnie Mouse design in a pink heart in the center of the cake. The birthday girl’s name is underneath in Disney-inspired lettering – what a great touch! Minnie ears and pink bows fill the bottom layer and we can’t forget about some pink polka dots. The top layer of this three-tiered birthday cake design features the birthday girl’s age. The cake topper is simple a pretty pink and white polka dot bow.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Next, this Disney Minnie Mouse Cake by Jillin25 features pink and white layers, followed by polka dot fondant on each layer. Pretty pink bows adorn the bottom of each layer, along with black and white polka dot ribbon. A big number 1 is front and center with the birthday girl’s name above it. The cake topper is a set of black Minnie ears with a white bow. What a pretty cake design for this theme.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

This sweet Minnie Mouse Cake from Kathy Co. is another one of our top favorite birthday cakes for this Disney theme. The top represents Minnie’s head and ears, but what’s so unique about it is that it features pink rosettes. The birthday girl’s name in Disney inspired lettering is front and center on the second cake layer, while the bottom of the cake features pink and white polka dots and small flowers. What a unique way to design a Minnie Mouse birthday cake. Are you loving the 10 Cutest Minnie Mouse Cakes yet?!

How to make a minnie mouse cake

A traditional red, white, black and yellow Minnie Mouse Birthday Cake designed by Flowers For Bella is certainly pretty with a yellow bow! Inspired by Minnie Mouse and her pretty dress, this cake is topped with Minnie Mouse ears. What a beautiful party cake.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

This pink, white and black polka dot Minnie Mouse Birthday Cake by Cathy230 also features cute cupcakes. What a special and girly design for a second birthday.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Pretty polka dots and bows seem to be the favorite details on these Minnie cakes, but we love this Minnie Mouse Themed Birthday Cake with a matching pink cupcake topped with Minnie ears from Love Me Some Cake.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Don’t you just love how this Minnie Mouse design from Gina Falopez has a bottom layer made to look like a pink and white polka dot skirt?! The cake is topped with Minnie ears and the birthday girl’s name. What a cute birthday cake for a second birthday!

How to make a minnie mouse cake

We love the mix of pinks and purples in this Minnie Mouse Cake from Karolyn’s Kakes. Polka dots, bows and Minnie Mouse ears make this adorable cake complete. We’ve seen a lot of Minnie Mouse themes done in the traditional black and red or pink and black, but adding purple into the mix is our favorite!

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Y’all know how much we love surprises and this Surprise Minnie Mouse Birthday Cake from Zeek71 is so creative and unique. It’s like Minnie just popped out of a present! The pink, white and black two-layered birthday cake features black Minnie ears with pink bows. The top layer is pink with white polka dots. With Minnie as the cake topper, this birthday surprise is perfect for any Minnie Mouse fan!

How to make a minnie mouse cake

No matter which Minnie Mouse color palette you choose, the party and cake will be fabulous. Any little girl will adore this Red, White and Black Minnie Mouse Birthday Cake from jaklotz1. This two-tiered cake features adorable fondant Minnie Mouse ears with a bow and Minnie ears as the cake topper! The top layer is red with white polka dots. This cake is simple, yet totally adorable for a red, black and white Minnie Mouse Party.

If you’re planning a Minnie Mouse themed party, don’t forget that the cake is one of the most important details of the whole party! Which of these 10 Cutest Minnie Mouse Cakes are your favorites? Let us know in the comments below.

My daughter absolutely adores Minnie Mouse, so for her second birthday, I wanted to make her a Minnie Mouse cake. I made her a large Minnie Mouse cake on her actual birthday and Minnie Mouse cupcakes for her birthday party the following week. I am by no means a professional cake decorator, but I thought they turned out pretty cool and my daughter loved what she called her “Mimmy cake”.

Large Minnie Mouse Cake

Materials:

– Ingredients needed for the Hershey’s “Perfectly Chocolate” chocolate cake recipe

– One round 9″ cake pan

– At least one round glass cake pan/baking dish about 5″ in diameter (to be used for the ears and the bow)

– Pink frosting – or – the ingredients needed for white frosting + pink food coloring

– White icing for the polka dots on the bow

Directions:

In order to make the large Minnie Mouse cake, I used a 9″ round cake pan for the head and my two glass Pyrex bowls (that have a diameter of approximately 5″) for the ears. I used the Hershey’s “Perfectly Chocolate” chocolate cake recipe and the Hershey’s “Perfectly Chocolate” chocolate frosting recipe. The recipes for the cake and the frosting can be found here. Simply follow the recipe, but instead of using two 9″ round cake pans like it calls for, use one 9″ round cake pan and two smaller round pans or baking dishes for the ears. Make sure you use enough grease and flour in the bottom of the pans so that you can easily remove the cakes. Once they are cool, arrange the cakes on a large plate or platter so that they resemble Minnie Mouse’s head and ears. Then follow the Hershey’s frosting recipe and frost the cake. Next, I explain how to make the bow.

I ended up with enough leftover batter that I was able to bake a third small cake the same size as the ears. It was slightly thinner, but not much. I figured we would just use it as extra cake. I was trying to figure out how to make a bow so that the cake officially looked like Minnie Mouse instead of Mickey Mouse and my husband suggested using the leftover cake to cut a bow shape from that. I didn’t know how it would turn out, thinking that the cake would probably crumble when I started to cut it, but it actually held together nice and was pretty easy to cut! I simply cut a section out of the top and a section out of the bottom to create a bow shape. The picture below shows the result.

Since I didn’t know ahead of time how I would make a bow, I didn’t have any pink frosting on hand. I made some white frosting and dyed it using pink gel food color that I had leftover from Easter. The white icing recipe I used can be found here. After frosting the “bow” cake with the pink icing, I carefully placed it on top of the large cake between the ears. The next step of putting the white polka dots on the bow is when I got a little sloppy because I was rushing to finish before my daughter was up from her nap. I used a tube of Cake Mate white icing but I didn’t have any decorating tips to use with it, so the polka dots came out a little large and distorted. I would definitely recommend using a decorating tip so they come out neater. Finally, I used a knife to outline the center of the bow to give it some definition. Below is the end result minus the candles! I put one candle in the center of each ear since my daughter was turning two and it looked really cute. Oh yeah, and it tasted pretty great too!

Minnie Mouse Cupcakes

Materials:

– Ingredients needed for the Hershey’s “Perfectly Chocolate” chocolate cake recipe

– Ingredients needed for white frosting

– Pink food coloring

– Polka dot cupcake wrappers (I found mine at Michaels)

– Mini Oreo cookies

– Pink candy melts (I found mine at Michaels)

Directions:

Believe it or not, these Minnie Mouse cupcakes were easier to make than the large Minnie Mouse cake. I followed the same recipe (The Hershey’s “Perfectly Chocolate” chocolate cake recipe) since everyone that tried the large Minnie Mouse cake said it tasted delicious. I made the same white icing from before (recipe found here) and dyed it pink using pink gel food coloring. After frosting the cupcakes with the pink frosting, I used Mini Oreo cookies and pushed them into the icing just far enough to get them to stand up on their own and resemble Minnie Mouse ears.

Finally, for the bows, I used Wilton’s pink candy melts and this bow mold ( Bite Size Bows ). I simply melted the pink candy melts and used an icing decorating tool to fill each bow mold with the melted candy. I slightly tapped the mold to remove air bubbles as the directions from the mold recommended to do and placed it in the freezer for about 10 minutes. Then I removed the bows from the molds and continued making batches of them until there were enough for all of the cupcakes. I actually made the bows a few days before making the cupcakes and they held up just fine. If you are going to make these cupcakes for a party, I would suggest making the bows a day or two ahead of time just so it’s one less thing you would have to do on the day of the party. I placed a bow on each cupcake between the Oreo ears and they were finished. Can you spot the cupcake with the missing bow in the picture!? I know I caught it before the party but took my pictures ahead of time!

Feel free to post comments here or on my Facebook page!

**If you like what you see, feel free to pin, share, and link back to my site. Thank you for visiting!

By: madincrafts | 13 Comments

Please note: This page may contain affiliate links. If you click a link and choose to make a purchase from the partnership site, I will earn a commission. Thank you for supporting Mad in Crafts!

Sharing is caring!

How to make a minnie mouse cake

How’s that for a title?! When I was researching cakes for my daughter’s Mickey Mouse birthday party, I found that most of them required a fancy Wilton pan and/or frosting or fondant chock full of red and black food coloring. Neither of those qualities worked for me because A) I didn’t want to drop $20 on a one-time use pan and 2) ew. Instead, I found a way to make a cute Mickey Mouse Cake without the fancy pan or added food coloring. And, as a bonus, it was both easy and delicious.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

How to Make a Mickey Cake

Supplies You Will Need to Make a Homemade Mickey Birthday Cake

How to make a minnie mouse cake

You can see how nicely the proportions of the standard round cake pan and the dollar store pans work together to make the classic Mickey Mouse silhouette. Dollar Tree sells the foil pans 4/$1 so I doubled them up to make them more sturdy. You can also find them at the grocery store or online for slightly more if your dollar store doesn’t have them in stock.

These are all affiliate links, if you make a purchase (of anything from the site, not just these items) after clicking through, I will earn a small commission. Ads and affiliate links are the way I am able to keep this website running and to offer you free tutorials all year long. Thank you so much for supporting me and Mad in Crafts!

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Want to know which craft supplies I always keep in my craft room?
Visit the Mad in Crafts Amazon Storefront to learn more and to buy your own supplies!

Improving the Taste of Boxed Cake Mixes

How to make a minnie mouse cake

I used a Pinterest trick to make baking the cake even easier. Instead of following the directions on the cake mix package, I just added 1 cup of water and 6 ounces of Greek yogurt to the mix. I used Chobani’s Vanilla Chocolate Chunk, but plain Greek yogurt would work too.

The trick definitely made the baking process super quick, but I am not sure if I am sold on it or not. I used the absolute cheapest chocolate cake mix I could find, and I think that might have screwed up the texture of the cake. It was not as light as I would have liked. I will try the Greek yogurt trick with a less cheapskate mix and let you know how it turns out.

Baking and Assembling a Mickey Mouse Cake

How to make a minnie mouse cake

I mixed up a double batch of the batter to make the cakes and the We’ve Got Ears cupcakes. I poured the batter into the pans, trying to keep the depth of the batter even among the three pans.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

I baked the cakes at 350 for 32 minutes, and they were perfectly done.

Ooh! The marks left by the foil pans would make perfect guidelines for truck wheels! ((Filing away for the future))

How Do You “Frost” the Mickey Cake?

How to make a minnie mouse cake

I cut each cake into two layers, smooshed chocolate Bettercreme frosting down, and restacked them. Then, in a stroke of brilliance, I decided to replace the typical icky black frosting with… wait for it… CHOCOLATE GANACHE! Ganache is so easy to make and tastes SO much better than standard frosting or black fondant.

Be sure to add any additional non-frosting decorations, like sprinkles or jimmies, before the ganache has completely cooled. Once the ganache hardens to room temperature, it is nearly impossible to get them to stick.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

I think the cake turned out especially well, and there was no need for a special cake pan or gobs of colored frosting.

Etsy предоставляет возможность прямой связи покупателей и продавцов со всего мира. Когда вы используете сервисы Etsy (мы будем называть etsy.com, Pattern by Etsy, наши мобильные приложения и другие сервисы нашими «Сервисами»), вы несете ответственность за соблюдение этой политики, независимо от вашего местоположения.

Эта политика является частью наших Условий использования. Используя любые наши Сервисы, вы соглашаетесь с этой политикой и нашими Условиями использования.

Как транснациональная компания из США, ведущая деятельность в других странах, Etsy должна соблюдать экономические санкции и торговые ограничения, включая введенные Управлением по контролю за иностранными активами (OFAC) Министерства финансов США. Это означает, что Etsy или кто-либо, пользующийся нашими Сервисами, не может участвовать в транзакциях, в которые вовлечены определенные люди, места или изделия из этих мест, указанные государственными органами, такими как OFAC, в дополнение к торговым санкциям, предусмотренным соответствующими законами и нормами.

Эта политика действует в отношении всех, кто использует наши Сервисы, независимо от их местоположения. Решение об ознакомлении с такими ограничениями остается за вами.

Например, эти ограничения в целом запрещают, кроме прочего, транзакции, в которых участвуют следующие стороны:

  1. определенные географические регионы, такие как Иран, Крым, Куба, Северная Корея, Сирия, Россия, Беларусь, Донецкая Народная Республика («ДНР»), Луганская Народная Республика («ЛНР»), а также любые физические или юридические лица, ведущие деятельность или находящиеся на этих территориях;
  2. физические или юридические лица, состоящие в санкционных списках, таких как Список лиц особых категорий и запрещенных лиц (SDN) или Список иностранных лиц, уклоняющихся от санкций (FSE) организации OFAC;
  3. граждане Кубы независимо от их местоположения, не имеющие гражданства или вида на жительство за пределами Кубы; и
  4. изделия, из Ирана, Крыма, Кубы и Северной Кореи, за исключением информационных материалов, таких как публикации, фильмы, постеры, грампластинки, фотографии, кассеты, компакт-диски и определенные произведения искусства.
  5. Любые товары, услуги и технологические решения из ЛНР и ДНР за исключением информационных материалов и сельскохозяйственной продукции, в том числе продуктов питания для людей, семян сельскохозяйственных культур или удобрений.
  6. Импорт в США следующей продукции российского происхождения: рыба, морепродукты, алмазы непромышленного назначения и любая другая продукция, согласно периодическим указаниям министра торговли США.
  7. Экспорт из США либо гражданами США предметов роскоши и любых других товаров, согласно указаниям министра торговли США, любому лицу, находящемуся в России или Беларуси. Список и определение «предметов роскоши» приведены в «Дополнение № 5 к Разделу 746», опубликованном Федеральным реестром США.
  8. Изделия, изготовленные за пределами США и попадающие под действие Закона о тарифах США и связанных с ним законов о запрещении принудительного труда.

Для защиты нашего сообщества и торговой площадки Etsy предпринимает меры для соблюдения режимов санкций. Например, Etsy запрещает участникам пользоваться своими аккаунтами в определенных географических регионах. Если у нас есть основания полагать, что вы управляете своей аккаунтом из места, находящегося под санкциями, например, любого из перечисленных выше санкционных мест, или иным образом нарушаете какие-либо экономические санкции или торговые ограничения, мы можем приостановить или прекратить использование вами наших Сервисов. Как правило, участникам не разрешается выставлять на продажу, покупать или продавать изделия из регионов, находящихся под санкциями. Сюда входят изделия, появившиеся ранее санкций, поскольку у нас нет возможности проверить, были ли они вывезены из запрещенного места. Etsy оставляет за собой право обращаться к продавцам с запросом предоставить дополнительную информацию, раскрыть страну происхождения изделия на странице товара или предпринять другие шаги для соблюдения обязательств. Мы можем отключить товары или отменить транзакции, представляющие опасность нарушения этой политики.

Кроме соблюдения требований OFAC и применимых местных законов, участникам Etsy следует иметь в виду, что другие страны могут вводить собственные торговые ограничения и что определенные изделия могут не допускаться к экспорту или импорту согласно международным законам. Когда в транзакции участвуют лица из разных стран, вам следует изучить законы любых соответствующих стран.

Наконец, участникам Etsy следует иметь в виду, что сторонние платежные системы, например PayPal, могут самостоятельно отслеживать транзакции на предмет соблюдения санкционных требований и могут блокировать транзакции в рамках собственных программ, обеспечивающих соблюдение требований. Etsy не имеет власти или контроля над процедурами независимого принятия решения в таких системах.

Экономические санкции и торговые ограничения могут применяться к порядку использования вами Сервисов и могут изменяться, поэтому участникам следует регулярно проверять источники информации о санкциях. За юридической консультацией обращайтесь к квалифицированному специалисту.

Вы можете прочитать эту политику на вашем языке, но помните, что версия этого документа на английском имеет преимущественную силу в отношении использования вами сервисов Etsy. Язык можно изменить в настройках аккаунта.

Minnie Mouse is a popular cartoon character, and she is also a very popular cake idea. When you’re looking for a Minnie Mouse cake, you can be sure to find one in this guide.

Minnie Mouse Cake Ideas:

Minnie mouse cake ideas are usually pretty easy to come up with and they’re perfect for parties or celebrations. Some of the most popular Minnie Mouse cakes are the Minnie mouse cupcakes, Minnie mouse wedding cake, and the Minnie mouse cookies.

Minnie Mouse Cake Ideas is a blog that shares the most creative and delicious cake ideas for Minnie Mouse cakes.

This article is about the different ideas that you can use to make a cake for your little one. If you are looking for some inspiration, then this article is just what you need.

Minnie Mouse is a popular character and Disney’s most iconic character. The cake ideas for Minnie Mouse cakes are quite extensive and there are many ways to make your own.

When it comes to making a cake for Minnie, you don’t need to be an expert in baking cakes or decorating cakes. You can simply use this guide and find out what the best way is for you to make your own Minnie Mouse cake.

In this article, I will be sharing some of my favorite Minnie Mouse cake ideas.

Minnie Mouse Cake Ideas

  • Cake in a Jar
  • Minnie Mouse Cake Pops
  • Mini Minnie Mouse Cupcakes
  • Mini Minnies in a Jar

Minnie Mouse is a popular character in Disney, and she is also a part of the Disney brand. This article will discuss the different ways that people can celebrate Minnie Mouse.

Minnie Mouse Cake Ideas:

  • – Minnie Mouse Birthday Cake:
  • – Minnie Mouse Cupcakes:
  • – Minnie Mouse Cookies:
  • – Minnie Mouse Ice Cream Sandwiches

Minnie Mouse is a popular character and has a wide range of merchandise. Some people love to bake cakes for their friends and family, so here are some ideas for cakes that can be made with Minnie Mouse.

Minnie Mouse cake ideas include:

  • – Minnie Mouse cupcakes
  • – Minnie Mouse birthday cake
  • – Minnie Mouse birthday cake with candles

I’ve have been making so many cakes lately, I haven’t had any time to blog. Honestly I’ve been getting a little overwhelmed by cake request: baby showers, birthdays, engagement parties. Cakes are just a hobby of mine, so I have to be careful not to let it slip from being an enjoyable pastime to a chore.

Anyway, here is a little cake I made from my sister-in-law’s sister’s step-grandchild. Does that make sense? Happy Birthday, Molly.

The poor little girl’s birthday fell during the height of the 2018 Mardi Gras season so her mom couldn’t find a bakery willing to make a cake. FYI: During the Mardi Gras season, bakeries in New Orleans turn their shops into King Cake making assembly lines. Apparently King Cakes are more profitable than regular cakes and pastries. Strangely in the Cajun/Creole city of New Orleans the hottest selling King Cake is made by a Vietnamese bakery name Dong Phuong. DP went from selling 80 King Cakes in the 2008 season, to selling 80,000 in 2017. In 2018 they won the James Beard Award for American Cuisine, and demand for their cakes sky rocketed. People have been lining up outside the bakery and waiting in line for 2 hours to get one of their King Cakes. No telling how many Kings Cakes they will sell this season. Congrats Dong Phuong.

So little Molly is crazy about Minnie Mouse, and her mom requested a simple cake with ears and a bow. For the free standing ears I just cut out circles from black fondant mixed with a little Gum-Tex. I cover the fondant with plastic wrap so that the top edge would have a rounded look instead of sharp edge.

I attached a bamboo stick to the back and let it dry for a few days till it hardened. The letters I made using a cute Funky Alphabet cutter from CK Products.

The bow was next. I wanted a polka dot bow so I pushed white dots into the pink fondant.

I cut out a strip about 2” wide and 11” long. Folded the ends over toward the center.

Crimped the top edges, and then stuck the crimped side to the flat bottom piece.

Instead of crimping the bottom section to make it match the top, I just trimmed the bottom section to a size that was slightly smaller than the top.

I wrapped a 1/2″ piece around the center to form the “knot”, and then stuffed plastic wrap inside the bow to hold the shape as it dried.

For the little bows I just made a paper template, and stuck the fondant cutouts together.

I used cotton swabs (wrapped in plastic wrap) to hold the bow open as it dried.

The cake assembly was really easy. I just cut out some mouse silhouettes out of black fondant and stuck them to the cake. The hardest part was making sure there was an equal distance between each silhouette.

I glued the little bow to the silhouette with a bit of melted white chocolate, and used the same white chocolate to make the dots on the little bows. Next I put the ears and the big bow on top of the cake, and finally a border and a few pick flowers to completed the cake.

So cute, and actually one of the easier cakes I have done. Happy Birthday, Molly!

H appy Decorating,

Carol


>

Supply List:

We heart a good birthday party and all the memories that come with it. Here’s how a Minnie Mouse cake was baked and decorated beautifully! Using an inexpensive Wilton Cake pan $12- shaped just like Mickey Mouse made this very easy to do. And to easily make it a “Minnie Mouse” cake, just add that pink ribbon bow! Love it!

Creating a cake to match your party theme perfectly adds just the right touch to your party to make it extra special and memorable for both your guests and the birthday girl or boy.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

My best friend’s Mom always makes the most amazing cakes and this one was no exception. She said it was one of her easiest cakes ever. The ribbon on top turned Mickey into Minnie. And the Wilton Cake pan only costs about $12 on Amazon!

How to make a minnie mouse cake

The kids loved sporting the little Mouse ears too!

How to make a minnie mouse cake

For the icing, Kelli’s Mom only used the “black” dyed icing for the nose and to improve taste on the entire cake, she made the ears a dark chocolate icing from a standard Duncan Hines/Betty Crocker style pre-made tub. I never would have noticed this color discrepancy if she didn’t tell me how she made the icing taste so yummy.

And she just applied all the icing using a pastry tube. Impressive!

Of course, no 5 year old birthday party is complete without cupcakes. So Kelli and her Mom had these out for all of Ava’s guests to devour too.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

The best part of the party – no matter what kind of cake you make – is celebrating with friends. I love seeing my Kenzie sharing such a fun friendship with the daughter’s of my two best friends. Oh how these girls adore each other!

Published: Sep 27, 2020 · Modified: Oct 24, 2020 by Priya Maha

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Here is a Minnie Mouse 1st birthday cake I made for a sweet little girl for her first birthday. I decorated this cake based on a picture provided by the girl’s mother. And she wanted the cake to look exactly as in the image she provided.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Minnie Mouse 1st birthday cake in the shape of ‘1’

Since the design was not mine (I merely recreated it with some slight tweaking), I did an internet search to see if I can find the original designer. And to my surprise, I found many variations of this design (similar to another Minnie Mouse cake I made previously based on a customer request), so again I am not quite sure who is the original designer.

This was a very pretty cake. It turned out very pretty and my customer was totally happy. Her exact words were ‘This cake is better than the photo I gave you’. That made my day and so I am sharing here how I made this pretty Minnie Mouse 1st birthday cake.

How to Make Minnie Mouse 1st Birthday Cake

Main supplies for the cake:

Raw materials

  • Cake – I baked a marble cake for this project and it was an orange chocolate marble cake.
  • Number “1” template – I don’t have a ‘1’ shaped cake tin. So I had to carve the ‘1’ out of a rectangle cake.
  • Buttercream – I filled the cake with buttercream and crumb coated with buttercream.
  • Fondant – The whole cake was covered in fondant. I used Satin Ice in 3 main colors, i.e., white, light pink, and dark pink. The other color I used was green and it was only for the tiny leaves on the cake.
  • Edible image – Minnie Mouse’s image on the cake was an edible image print. I downloaded it from the internet and ordered the print from a local supplier.
  • Fondant cupcake image – I cut out the cupcake in fondant. I then hand-painted it to match the cupcake in the image provided to me. For the outline, I used my black edible ink pen.
  • Shortening – I used shortening to attach all my fondant cut-outs on the cake including the cake borders.

Tools

  • Sugar Paste Extruder– I used the tool fitted with a circular disc to pipe out the border for the cake edges. I also used the same for the fondant plaque frame with the birthday girl’s name.
  • Clikstix Groovy Letter Cutter – I used Clikstix alphabet cutters for the ‘Happy birthday’ phrase. I also used it for the girl’s name.
  • Flower Plunger Cutter, Round Plunger Cutters and Oval Plunger Cutters- The flower cutters were used for the tiny flowers at both ends of the “happy birthday’ message as well as the girl’s name. As for the round cutters, I used them in 2 sizes. One for the white polka dots on the cake. The other, a slightly larger one for the large pink dots on the cake board. The oval cutters were used for the tiny green leaves placed near the flowers.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Minnie Mouse 1st birthday cake in polka dots design

Assembling the Minnie Mouse 1st birthday cake:

Baking the cake

  • I started by baking the cake. My original marble cake recipe here is a combination of vanilla and chocolate cake batter. To make orange chocolate marble cake, simply replace vanilla essence and milk in the plain batter with grated orange rind and freshly squeezed orange juice.

The number 1 template

  • Since I did not have a ‘1’ shaped cake tin, I made my own cake template. I drew the number ‘1’ on a piece of A3 paper. And I used it to carve the cake out of a rectangle cake.

Carving the cake

  • To optimize the cake, I split the template into 2. I carved the cake in 2 sections. The long vertical part of the number ‘1’ formed the first part. And the horizontal base of the number ‘1’ was the second.
  • Next, I carved the cake, using my templates as a guide. After that, I crumb coated the cake and did the fondant covering. I did this by sections, starting with the top and then the sides. I covered the sides with a darker shade of pink. For the cake border, I piped out a long thin roll of dark pink fondant using my extruder tool. I attached it all around the base of the cake.

Minnie Mouse and the cupcake images

  • Next to go on the cake were Minnie Mouse and the cupcake images. The name plaque with the girl’s name went on next. I also added the “happy birthday’ wordings on the cake board.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Minnie Mouse baby for the Minnie Mouse 1st birthday cake

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Cupcake image cut out of fondant for the Minnie Mouse 1st birthday cake

The polka dots

  • The polka dots were the next step. If you notice carefully, I arranged them in a pattern. This is to make sure I space them out consistently. Where they fall on Minnie Mouse or the cupcake or even the name plaque, I cut the dots off so that they fit on the cake naturally.
  • And the final touch up for the cake were the tiny flowers and the matching green leaves. I used a small oval cutter to cut out the leaves. I then pinched one end of the cutouts to form the leaves.

And that’s my Minnie Mouse 1st birthday cake decorating guide.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

It’s Friday, it’s Friday and I have lots and lots of things to do! But for now, I’m going to tell you about this Pink Ombre Minnie Mouse Cake!

How to make a minnie mouse cake

This cake was 5 layers of white cake tinted different shades of pink so that the outside matched the inside. sort of like the Ombre Ruffles Princess cake. remember?

Here’s a picture I took (in very bad lighting) of the inside of the cake before decorating.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Isn’t that pretty cool? I wish I had a picture of it cut, but you’ll just have to imagine! Oh, and the cakes were done in 9″ round pans.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

To do this cake, I used my always handy Wilton 1M tip and did the buttercream roses. You can scroll through all of my buttercream roses cakes here.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

For the topper, I baked Minnie’s “head” in the Wilton Sports Ball pan then covered it in buttercream and Satin Ice Black Vanilla fondant.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

The ears were made ahead of time. For those, I mixed Tylose into the fondant, rolled it out and cut the circles. Then I let them dry for a couple of days. I “glued” lollipop sticks to the back of the ears with sugar glue then put strips of fondant over them to secure them.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

I made the bow with gum paste so it would dry hard and stand up. easy-peasy! I have a tutorial for a similar bow here 🙂

How to make a minnie mouse cake

For Miah’s name on the front, I used my Funky Alphabet cutters, then laid the letters on white fondant and used an Xacto knife to cut out a background. I made the “2” by hand and tried to match the fondant!

How to make a minnie mouse cake

And that’s it. I don’t think there’s anything else to tell you about this cake!

Sooo, do you have any questions about this cake? Please leave me a comment and I’ll answer and help out if I can!

About Rose Atwater

Rose Atwater is the founder and cake decorator behind Rose Bakes. She is baker, cake decorator, author, wife to Richy and homeschooling mommy to 6 wonderful kiddos! Her work has been featured in American Cake Decorating Magazine, Cakes Decor, Pretty Witty Cakes Magazine, Huffington Post and Cake Geek Magazine. Learn more here.

Reader Interactions

Comments

Linda Harvey Reed

May 24, 2013 at 2:53 pm

I’m new to cake decorating and so appreciate your tutorial. My first goal is to master the rose swirl. And then I’m going to dive right in! Thanks for the inspiration.

May 24, 2013 at 4:19 pm

Linda Harvey Reed

May 24, 2013 at 2:54 pm

I forgot that I had a question. Is there anything that is run down through the middle of this cake to keep it stable and straight up and down?

Vanilla Oreo® cupcakes with cream cheese frosting. These were a huge hit with the kids and tasted so good. They were so much better than using a packaged cake mix. The cream cheese frosting went really well with the Oreo®’s. As the birthday cake lady, this is now my go-to cream cheese frosting, and I will never buy a box cake mix again.

Gallery

Recipe Summary

Ingredients

Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F (175 degrees C). Line 36 cupcake cups with paper liners.

Twist 36 cookies apart carefully. Break the side without cream into quarters and place in a bowl; toss in 2 tablespoons flour so that they don’t stick together. Place the cookies with cream into the bottoms of each cupcake cup, cream-side-up.

Whisk 3 1/3 cups flour, baking powder, and salt together in a separate bowl.

Beat butter using an electric mixer with a flex edge attachment in another bowl until creamy and fluffy, about 5 minutes. Beat in sugar, milk, and vanilla extract using a wire attachment. Mix in flour mixture slowly until well blended using the flex edge attachment. Add egg whites and beat for 2 minutes. Fold in quartered cookies.

Spoon batter into the prepared muffin cups, filling each 3/4 full.

Bake in the preheated oven until a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean, about 20 minutes. Remove from the oven transfer to a wire rack to cool completely, about 30 minutes.

Mix softened butter and vanilla extract together using an electric mixer in a mixing bowl until completely combined. Add powdered sugar, 1 cup at a time, mixing slowly until incorporated. Increase speed to medium-high and beat, scraping the sides of the bowl often, until frosting appears dry.

Dip 2 toothpicks into food coloring twice and mix into frosting. Frost cupcakes as desired and decorate using mini chocolate cookies.

Cook’s Notes:

For the bows, I found ribbon at Michael’s(R) and made my own, but only got 24 out of a roll. I ended up buying 12 more pre-made bows at Wal-Mart(R) and they looked much better. I also bought blank barrettes, so a few of the bows could be re-purposed.

Use a decorating bag or zip-top plastic bag and a Wilton(R) 2D decorating tip for frosting.

This post may contain affiliate links. Please read my privacy policy and disclosure.

Minnie Mouse has a soft spot in my heart. I think she’s my favorite Disney character because of her fabulous fashion sense. What can I say, she had me from her big bows, polka dots, platform shoes, and those ruffled undies. oh hello.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

So I was quite excited when I was commissioned by Heartmuch Weddings & Events to make not one but two Minnie Mouse inspired cakes for two little sisters celebrating milestones in their lives. One sister is having her baptism and the older sister is celebrating her 3rd birthday.

This Minnie Mouse party has a different twist to the theme. I was told that it would be a vintage Minnie Mouse and instead of the usual black, pink and red polka dots, the colors used were softer shades of pink and peaches. Hot air balloons were included as well to add to the vintage feel.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Vintage Minnie Mouse Cake with Hot Air Balloon

The main celebration of the event was the little sister Viera’s baptism. For her cake I made 2 tiers of red velvet cake. I made the hot air balloon out of gum paste in advance so it would get firm and solid. I printed an image of a hot air balloon and traced it from there. I also made a ribbon banner at the same time as well and I just did it by hand, no templates needed.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

I was shown a picture of the canopy that they were going to use for the dessert table. The fabric used had stripes, so I incorporated the stripes on the bottom tier. I used one of my favorite cake decorating tools, a fondant ribbon cutter to cut out the stripes.

For the top tier I used this rounded petal flower cutter to make the clouds, just cut the bottom part and voila, instant clouds. I attached the hot air balloon to the cake with some royal icing.

Before attaching the ribbon banner, I wrote the celebrant’s name with a black edible marker. The bottom part of the banner is actually long enough so that it can be attached to the cake so that it will hold better. So the backside of the banner is attached with royal icing to the cake and the front is attached to the hot air balloon.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

For the silhouette of Minnie Mouse I simply used round plunger cutters of 2 different sizes, a big one for the face and a smaller one for the ears. For the bow, I lucked out because I found these heart sprinkles and I just used two of those hearts to make a bow.

Vintage Minnie Mouse had a hat with a flower. I made the hat out of rice krispies and covered it in fondant. To make the lip of the hat, I cut out a strip of fondant and attached it to the bottom part of the base.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

I also made the flower in advance so that it will dry. I just free hand cut the gum paste then attached the wire by sandwiching it with the flower and another small ball of gum paste. I use black edible marker to trace the outline of the flowers.

For the baby blocks, I covered plastic blocks with fondant and used Tappits to cut the letters.

Minnie Mouse Birthday Cake

For the bigger sister’s birthday cake, I went for the classic polka dot Minnie Mouse bow. I made a fondant bow and simply added dots.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

I used a number 3 template (I just went on Word program and looked for a number 3 that I liked), and cut that out of gum paste as well. I also cut out a ribbon banner similar to the other cake and let those dry as well.

I used a beautiful stencil that I got from The Stencil Closet. I used the pattern called the Curvy Herringbone and I used royal icing to do the stencil on the sides of the cake. I just love how it turned out. I used a Mickey Mouse cookie cutter to do her silhouette but you can use circle cutters as well.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

I finished the cake with some blossoms cut with these flower plungers.

Oh, and I also made cupcakes and decorated those with blossoms too.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Vintage Minnie Mouse Party

Here are some images of the party styled by Heartmuch Weddings & Events . They did such a great job on creating the dessert table and the decorations of the event. I especially love the hot air balloon centerpiece. Pictures taken by Adi Photography.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

How to make a minnie mouse cake

How to make a minnie mouse cake

How to make a minnie mouse cake

How to make a minnie mouse cake

How to make a minnie mouse cake

How to make a minnie mouse cake

If you have any questions on how I made the Minnie Mouse cake just leave a comment below. I would to hear from ya!

You might also like:

How to make a minnie mouse cake

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Disclosure: Please note some of the links in this post may be affiliate links, I will earn a commission if you decide to make a purchase. This doesn’t cost you anything additional and I truly appreciate this support, thank you!

Introduction: Easy Minnie Mouse Cake

How to make a minnie mouse cake

How to make a minnie mouse cake

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Need to make a quick and easy Minnie Mouse cake for any occasion! This instructable will tell you how!

Step 1: Materials Needed

Cake (from scratch or a box) – 1 9″ round and 1 6″ round
Fondant (homemade or bought)
Butter cream frosting (homemade or bought)
Rolling pin
Vodka (yes vodka)
Food coloring (I use Wilton gels)
Shot glass
Coffee Mug
Decorating Tips
Wired pink ribbon
paint brush
Wax paper
Cake board (10″ round)
Decorating bag and tips

Step 2: Make the Cake

Bake a 9″ round cake then freeze it, once your cake is frozen you can spread your butter cream frosting very easily and evenly. Much easier than frosting the cake at room temp.

For the bottom of this cake, I used white butter cream. I’d give you my recipe but it’s a guarded secret. 😉

For the second lay bake a 6″ round cake, freeze it, then frost is a lovely pink.

To make your butter cream frosting pink – add a dash of red and smidgen of black. The black will deepen the color but you barely wat to use any.

Step 3: Fondant Flair

Roll out your fondant evenly. To make my circles I got creative. The larger ears were made pressing a coffee cup down into the fondant. The medium circles were made with a shot glass and the tinny circles were created using one of my decorating tips. You can pick up the fondant and smooth the edges, I was in a hurry and skipped this step, but it can easily be done.

Step 4: Paint the Fondant

Now you need to paint your fondant. Yes, you could dye your fondant while you make it, however, I prefer painting it because the colors are richer.

To make your dye flow and get the rick color on you need to mix up your “paint”

Teaspoon of vodka and enough food coloring (in this case black) to make the liquid look black.

Do not freak out!! The vodka will evaporate, the alcohol will not be left you will not be given small children a buzz.

Take your paint brush and brush on the liquid black, let this dry completely before serving (see above for why)

Step 5: Minnie Your Mouse

Place your black ears on the back of the mouse make sure they sick out of the top. Take your white fondant circles and place them around the pink top cake.

Use your ribbon with wire to go around the bottom of the cake and tie a bow.

Step 6: Finishing Touches

Pipe around the top tier of the cake. On the white part of the cake create a small Minnie Face with a medium circle and two small circles. Pipe a bow on the top. Pipe on your saying.

I wound up making a second 6″ cake for this birthday party in a different flavor, I decorated it very similarly.

Learn how to make Mickey and Minnie Cake Pops. Tutorial with photos plus all the details of our trip to Disney World and Epcot.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Micky and Minnie Mouse Cake Pops

Guess where I just got back from!!

That’s right! Sea World!

Hahahaha! Ok, ok… just joking!

We just spent three fun filled days at Walt Disney World!

How to make a minnie mouse cake

How to make a minnie mouse cake

We were planning on going to Disney World for my Little Cup’s 7th birthday in February. The weekend we were planning on going was just three days after the tickets for the Food Blog Forum went on sale. So I talked with Mr. Quart about postponing the trip and us all going to Orlando for the conference.

And that’s just what we did!

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Lucky for us, we travel standby so there were no tickets to deal with. And, because we never really know exactly what day we’ll travel on, we don’t book hotels until the very last minute.

Fast Forward from February to June, and now we’re at Disney World!

How to make a minnie mouse cake

We left on a Thursday so that we could maximize the three day park hopper passes that Disney was so generous to provide to the conference attendants. On Friday, we got up, checked out of the Disney Movie All-Stars resort, checked in to the Grand Floridian Resort and Spa, got the conference info and park passes, and got going over to Disney’s Animal Kingdom!

How to make a minnie mouse cake

We had never been before, so we jumped on the Kilimanjaro Safaris. My daughter LOVED it! She’s an animal lover and this was just perfect for her.

She really enjoyed walking around and seeing all the animals in the park. It was like a zoo on steroids!

We came back to the hotel after Mickey’s Jammin’ Jungle Parade and while they went to the pool, I headed off to my meet n’ greet.

Then it was off to Magic Kingdom for some evening rides and late night snacks.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

No… I did not get any of the Disney Cake Pops… I opted for a HUGE mickey chocolate chip cookie instead. But I thought there were pretty!

After a short nights sleep, I got up and set off for the conference and Mr. Quart and the Little Cup headed into Hollywood Studios. I loved receiving the constant texts and pictures from Mr. Quart of their day at the park. They had a great time watching the shows!

How to make a minnie mouse cake

How to make a minnie mouse cake

I loved every second of the ride! There’s no way I would get my kid to go on it!

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Sunday was the toughest morning to get up! Seriously… dragging…

Good thing we were guests at Whole Food for a scrumptious brunch and socializing with bloggers and their family members. The last giveaway of the conference was a KitchenAid Mixer – and guess who won… ME!! So needed it! So blessed!

We made it to Epcot in the afternoon and toured the world!

How to make a minnie mouse cakeHow to make a minnie mouse cake

How to make a minnie mouse cake

It was an amazing trip! The generosity of Disney was wonderful! There is no way that we would have been able to afford this vacation if the park passes weren’t included in the conference.

So…. after all of that… I came home and made some fun Mickey and Minnie Cake Pops to celebrate!

Don’t worry, they are NOT difficult to make.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

  • STEP 1 – Bake a Cake, let it cool, cut out 1/4 of it and add 2 tablespoons of frosting and combine in a mixer. Measure out 8 – 10 cake pops with a 1 tablespoon measuring scoop. Roll smooth and place in the fridge. Get Red and Black Candy Melts, lollipop sticks or straws, yellow and white sprinkles, tweezers, and a cake pop stand.
  • STEP 2 – Melt the red candy in a ceramic mug per the instructions. Reserve two black candy melts per cake pop. Dip the straw into the candy melt and then insert into the cake pop. Dip the cake pop into the candy melts and stand upright.
  • STEP 3 – Add ears to the pop while candy is wet. Push the ears into the cake to secure. Let the cake pop completely dry.
  • STEP 4 – Melt the black candy melts in a ceramic mug according to the instructions. Add some coconut oil if the candy is thick. This layer should be very thin. I used half a bag of black candy melts and added over a tablespoon of oil to get it very thin. Make sure that the candy is smooth in the mug and dip the pop into the black until the ears are covered. Keep the cake pop straight! You don’t want a crooked line.
  • STEP 5- Shake off the excess and add two yellow sprinkles to make Mickey’s buttons. I used tweezers to apply the small sprinkle right where I wanted it. Stand upright and allow to dry!

How to make a minnie mouse cake

To make Minnie’s Bow, I used a mold from Ella, from Lollicakes by Ella (you can order many, many, many molds from her). I added the bows to the her head while the black was still wet.

Also, Ella taught me a little trick to get the black a bit more shiny – place the wet pop into the freezer for 30 seconds to quickly dry the pop. There was a lot less white streaking when I did it.

We won’t send you spam. Unsubscribe at any time.

Popular Searches:

  • gluten free
  • cheese
  • carrot
  • cookies
  • red velvet
  • Birthday
    • Birthday Cakes
    • Daily Deal
    • New Arrivals
    • Best Sellers
    • Chocolate Lovers
    • Big Cakes
    • Theme Cakes
    • Gluten Free Bakery Gifts
  • Occasions
    • Happy Birthday
    • Mother’s Day
    • Congratulations
    • Thank You
    • Happy Anniversary
    • LOVE
    • Thinking Of You
    • Sympathy
    • Get Well Soon
    • I’m Sorry
    • Best Wishes
    • Father’s Day
  • Gift Type
    • Cakes
    • Cupcakes
    • Cheesecakes
    • Big Cakes
    • Cookies
    • Towers
    • Pies
    • Brownies
    • Personalized
    • Baskets
    • Military
    • Theme
  • Business Gifts
    • Corporate Birthday Gifts
    • Custom Business Gift Delivery
    • Corporate Events Gift Delivery
    • Business Holiday Gifts
    • Business Gift Certificates
    • New Arrivals
Need Help? Call Us:

1-888-987-9474

9AM – 6PM EST Monday – Friday

Have Questions? See our FAQs section
Or use our Contact Us form

How to make a minnie mouse cake

How to make a minnie mouse cake

How to make a minnie mouse cake

How to make a minnie mouse cake

How to make a minnie mouse cake How to make a minnie mouse cake How to make a minnie mouse cake How to make a minnie mouse cake How to make a minnie mouse cake

Description

Details ▼

  • Serves 6 to 8
  • 7 inches in diameter
  • Ships Nationwide in Refrigerated Packaging
  • Best used upon receipt for maximum freshness. Store in an airtight container for 5 days, refrigerated. Store up to 2 months frozen.

*ALLERGY INFORMATION: Unless otherwise noted, products contain milk, wheat, soy and egg, and were produced on equipment that processes peanuts, almonds, hazelnuts, pecans, walnuts. Our facility is not Gluten Free.

Shipping ▼

This gift is available for overnight and 2-day delivery and is guaranteed to arrive on-time via UPS. To secure overnight service, gift orders must be placed by 4:40PM ET. We’ve worked with our delivery partner to provide the best available rate for your gift. Morning and Saturday deliveries are available and we can also ship to Alaska and Hawaii for an additional charge.

Every order will be confirmed via the email provided for your account. Along with confirmation, you will receive a verification that your order has shipped as well as confirmation that your order has arrived. Please put bakemeawish.com on your safe sender list so that you do not miss these important messages.

Our gifts are perishable and on-time delivery is of utmost importance! As such, we cannot be held responsible for incorrect or incomplete addresses. Apartment numbers and suites for residential and business deliveries, as well as business names, must be included. Please ensure you have the full address – delays due to missing or wrong information will nullify guaranteed delivery. We want your gift to arrive fresh and delicious!

Orders placed after 1:00PM EST Monday through Friday will be processed the following business day. Deliveries to Alaska & Hawaii are an additional $25.00; no international shipments. Our gifts are perishable and on-time delivery is of utmost importance! We cannot be held responsible for incorrect/incomplete addresses. Apartment numbers and suites for residential and business deliveries must be included. Please ensure you have the full address – delays due to missing or wrong information nullifies guaranteed delivery. We want your gift to arrive fresh and delicious!

Procrastibaking my way through life

A few weeks ago I was chatting to my sister about cake, as we do. We were discussing previous cake orders and I mentioned how every toddlers birthday cake I’ve been commissioned to do was for a little boy. I kinda missed pink. Pink and frills and all those other things customers will say they absolutely do not want on a cake for a boy. Not half an hour later, my cousin messaged me asking if I could make a cake that ticked all those boxes.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

We spent a bit of time talking about whether it was going to be a 3D Minnie Mouse cake, or a cake made in the style of her instead. She opted for something that was midway in between.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

The cake itself is stylised after her dress. I made a few layers of ruffles at the bottom to represent the frilled briefs she wears under her skirt. Then I draped the fondant over, giving it a scalloped edge to match all the frills. Last of all I covered it with polkadots. Minnie appears most frequently in red, but we went with the hot pink version to match the birthday girl’s favourite colour.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

At first we spoke of just having mouse ears and a bow on top, but my cousin said she might not recognise the character from ears alone so suggested instead having her face on top. I went with making a 2D cake topper and having that standing up on the cake instead. That feat was certainly precarious, more so when my cousin asked to pick the cake up a day early. I was worried it wouldn’t have time to dry, but thankfully it managed to stay upright.

How to make a minnie mouse cake

While the topper was 2D, there were a couple of features I thought should be 3D instead: her nose, and of course her bow. The bow was definitely a challenge. I tried making the fondant as thin as I could to avoid making the whole thing top heavy, but of course it still did so. I ended up having to put an extra layer of fondant behind it as the whole thing started to crack at the ears. (I’m also really terrible at fidgeting with sugar work and not leaving it dry properly, so that certainly doesn’t help!) That did the trick and the day was saved!

How to make a minnie mouse cake

The inside of the cake was my usual chocolate mudcake, layered and covered with whipped chocolate ganache before the fondant was applied.

Rejoice every Mickey Mouse lover by gorging on these delicious Mickey Mouse theme cakes built for every special occasion of your kids. Based on the popular Mickey Mouse cartoon character, our cakes are one-of-a-kind and are perfect for a delightful indulgence for adults as well as kids with a unique taste and exquisite design. Order this cake right away and have a rocking birthday party!

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Rs. 1,949 Ex Tax: Rs. 1,949

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Rs. 3,698 Ex Tax: Rs. 3,698

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Rs. 1,899 Ex Tax: Rs. 1,899

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Rs. 1,989 Ex Tax: Rs. 1,989

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Rs. 3,645 Ex Tax: Rs. 3,645

Rs. 2,149 Ex Tax: Rs. 2,149

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Rs. 3,049 Rs. 3,650 16% OFF Ex Tax: Rs. 3,049

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Rs. 3,699 Ex Tax: Rs. 3,699

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Rs. 1,949 Ex Tax: Rs. 1,949

How to make a minnie mouse cake

Rs. 1,799 Ex Tax: Rs. 1,799

Send Special Mickey Mouse Birthday Cakes Online With Us

Mickey Mouse is one among the most popular cartoon characters that kids admire. Delight your adorable kids on their birthday with a Mickey Mouse theme cake from MyFlowerTree.

One of the most exciting parts of a birthday celebration for a kid is the cake. MyFlowerTree helps you to choose the best birthday cake for your kid. Birthday cakes need not be delicious only but exciting and fun too! Thus, there is a lot more to keep in mind while choosing one. Mickey Mouse is one of the famous and cute cartoon characters liked by every kid. Buy Mickey Mouse cake online from MyFlowerTree and make your child’s birthday super special.

Explore Various Mouth-Watering Flavors of Mickey Mouse Cakes At MyFlowerTree

Think of a story of cartoon character that your kid admires all the time such as Mickey Mouse. Your kid would jump with happiness after seeing a cake of his/her favourite cartoon character. You can even send Mickey Mouse cake online anywhere in India to surprise your dear ones from miles away. We have a gamut of cartoon cakes online for you to pick and send across India. We also give you the option to personalise your cakes with the name or photo of your little ones on the cake or as a topper. Add a fun element to the party by ordering cupcakes or a shortcake with us. It will be another good option to opt for, for all the Mickey Mouse fans. We also offer Minnie cakes for your little girl as well.

Online Mickey Mouse Cake Delivery In India With Same Day and Midnight Delivery

Kids usually have a strong liking or disliking about every food item. It applies to cakes as well. You need to keep in mind your kid’s taste before ordering a cake of any flavor. At MyFlowerTree, you would get a wide variety of flavours such as Strawberry, Pineapple, Vanilla, Butterscotch, Black Forest, Red Velvet, Chocolate or more, so you can easily choose one according to your child’s taste. Book a Mickey Mouse cake online for same day to save your time and efforts in searching for a cake from one confectionery shop to another with our Same Day delivery. Before ordering a cake, you must take an estimate of exactly how many guests would attend the party. After you get an approximate idea of the number of guests you can place an order for a flavorful Mickey Mouse birthday cake accordingly.

You can go for a 3 Kg or 5 Kg chocolate truffle cake handcrafted in Mickey Mouse theme if many people are coming to your party. This cake would enough to feed a large gathering. Apart from this, we also offer distinct flavors along with varied cake designs. Our delectable range of Mickey mouse cakes have an alluring look, good enough to make your kid’s party memorable. We offer timely Mickey Mouse cake delivery in India right at the doorstep. All you need to do is browse through our eclectic collection and opt for the best one for your little ones and finally place the order for the occasion.

Search Forums (Advanced)

Our daughter is turning 1 end of this month and we’re throwing her a Minnie Mouse themed birthday party. We’d like to order a cake with a Minnie Mouse theme, something like the ones attached here.

Would love to order either from somewhere near Downtown Raleigh, Cary, or Apex.
Those that come to mind are Edible Art (Hillsborough St) and Sweet Memories (Apex).
Not sure if the place in downtown Apex does custom cakes. Not sure about Blue Moon Bakery in Cary either.

Other than these, looking for other suggestions. Thanks!

I tried to get a Minnie/Mickey cake for my daughter’s birthday last year, and had trouble finding a bakery that would make it custom. They said they couldn’t use licensed characters.

I ended up just getting a licensed one from Walmart. Lowe’s Foods had the same options, but Walmart was cheaper. For us, the hardest part was getting a cake with BOTH Mickey and Minnie. Just Minnie had more choices. Unfortunately, they are not nearly as nice as the custom types like you have in mind.

I tried to get a Minnie/Mickey cake for my daughter’s birthday last year, and had trouble finding a bakery that would make it custom. They said they couldn’t use licensed characters.

I ended up just getting a licensed one from Walmart. Lowe’s Foods had the same options, but Walmart was cheaper. For us, the hardest part was getting a cake with BOTH Mickey and Minnie. Just Minnie had more choices. Unfortunately, they are not nearly as nice as the custom types like you have in mind.

Yeah. If you want a licensed character on a cake, larger bakeries won’t do them. If you want a cake that is reminiscent of the character, they will do that. Needs to be transformative enough to prevent a trademark lawsuit.

Disney is fierce about protecting trademarks.

I’d go with Edible Art, by the way. Just judging from the cakes you posted.

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

  • Pin
  • Share
  • Email

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

The significance of nitrate in the aquarium is arguably less understood by fish keepers than the effect of ammonia and nitrite. Although nitrate is not as directly lethal as ammonia or nitrite, over time, high levels of nitrate negatively impact fish and the aquarium environment in general.

Where Does Nitrate Come From?

Nitrate is a by-product of nitrite oxidation during the latter stages of the nitrogen cycle and is present to some degree in all aquariums. Detritus, decaying plant material, dirty filters, over-feeding, and overstocking the aquarium all contribute to increased levels of nitrate.

Additionally, tap water used to fill the aquarium may contain nitrate in it. In the United States, drinking water may have nitrates as high as 40 parts per million (ppm). Before adding water to your aquarium, test it for nitrate to discover if the levels are unusually high in your water source. If your baseline nitrate is above 10 ppm, consider other water sources that are nitrate-free.

Desired Level

In nature, nitrate in water remains very low, generally well below 5 ppm. In freshwater aquariums, nitrates should be kept below 50 ppm at all times, and preferably below 25 ppm. If you are breeding fish, or are battling algae growth, keep nitrate even lower, below 10 ppm.

Effect on Fish

Fish will feel the impact of nitrate by the time levels reach 100 ppm, particularly if these levels persist. The resulting stress leaves fish more susceptible to disease and inhibits their ability to reproduce.

High nitrate levels are especially harmful to fry and young fish and will negatively affect their growth. Furthermore, the same conditions that cause elevated nitrate often cause decreased oxygen levels, which further stress the fish.

Nitrate and Algae

Elevated nitrate is a significant contributor to undesirable algae growth, and nitrate levels as low as 10 ppm will promote algae growth. The algal blooms that are common in newly set-up tanks are usually due to elevated nitrate levels.

Although plants utilize nitrate, if nitrate levels rise faster than the plants can use them, then even the plants can become overgrown with algae, ultimately leading to their asphyxiation and demise.

How to Reduce Nitrate

Unlike the aerobic bacteria that convert ammonia to nitrite and then nitrite to nitrate, the bacteria that remove nitrate avoid oxygen-rich environments. Therefore, well-oxygenated conventional filters, unfortunately, will not harbor the kinds of bacteria that remove nitrate.

However, there are some steps you can take to keep nitrate low.

  • Keep the aquarium clean: Waste ultimately produces nitrate; cleaner tanks produce less nitrate that must be removed by water changes.
  • Feeding amounts: Overfeeding is a significant contributor to excess nitrate and other undesirable wastes, such as phosphate.
  • Water changes: Performing regular water changes with water that has little or no nitrate will lower the overall nitrate level in the aquarium. If your local tap or well water is high in nitrate, using deionized water (DI) or reverse osmosis water (RO) can help keep nitrate levels low when doing a water change. However, since these are devoid of minerals, the hardness, alkalinity, and pH of the water can become too low and mineral supplements may need to be added. Mix your nitrate-containing tap water with DI or RO water to make a blend with the correct water parameters.
  • Keeping live plants:Live plants utilize nitrate and will help keep the levels lower.

Although special filters, called denitrators, exist that will remove nitrate, such devices are usually quite expensive compared to other filtration units. Instead of purchasing a pricey denitrator or special filter, you can purchase from your fish store a nitrate-lowering media to put into the filter you have. These will pull the nitrate out of the solution and need to be replaced periodically.

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

  • Pin
  • Share
  • Email

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

High nitrate accumulation, sometimes referred to as old tank syndrome, can be a common problem for long-time aquarium hobbyists. It usually occurs when regular maintenance and water change routines are ignored. Nitrate is the end product of bacterial reduction of ammonia to nitrite and then to nitrate. The nitrate will accumulate in the aquarium water until it is assimilated by plants or removed by water changes.

In freshwater, nitrate is relatively nontoxic even at high levels (200 mg/L or more), but in saltwater aquariums, it can be a problem for marine invertebrates, so it should be kept at lower levels (below 20 mg/L). Some marine aquarium keepers are reluctant to perform regular water changes to lower the nitrate as they would then need to add more salt into the aquarium, and so they only top off the evaporated water with freshwater (as salt does not evaporate). This does not remove the nitrate but allows the nitrate to rise and can cause problems in the aquarium.

This nitrate reduction method is an instant nitrate reduction water change method. You can reduce nitrate quickly to zero with no ill or harmful effects to your established aquarium residents. In fact, the behavior of the tank inhabitants can improve greatly afterward. You may notice the fish will become more active, start eating better, and may display brighter colors within a few days.

” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

Moto “Club4AG” Miwa / Flickr / CC BY 2.0

Important Considerations

One important consideration before you start a massive (or any, for that matter) water change is to remember that you will also be changing the pH in your tank (probably upward). Before beginning this water change, it is wise to slowly adjust your tank water pH to where it will be when you are finished. You can adjust the pH upward with common baking soda or downward with one of the many products on the market to reduce the pH of aquarium water. This will prevent your tank critters from going through “pH shock,” which can be fatal to more sensitive tank critters.

This method was proven when an experiment was performed to test it. The test tank’s nitrate was allowed to rise to a dangerously high level, literally off the scale, to observe the transitions the tank would go through. The experiment was successful. It allowed the testers to observe the formation of different algae.

The established aquarium residents survived, too; a 15-inch snowflake eel, various types of hermit crabs and snails, a few crabs, two colonies of zoanthids, some non-living corals, and some live rock. The testers even added a newly mated pair of coral-banded shrimp the day after the completion of the water change procedure with no problems at all.

Rapid Nitrate Reduction Method

Many people try to reduce their nitrate levels by performing a series of partial, 20 percent water changes. This will reduce your nitrate (or any other chemical substance) levels, but it is rather inefficient if the object is to reduce the levels to near zero in the shortest period of time as possible, with the least amount of water.

For example, if you reduce the level of water in the tank to 20 percent of normal and then refill the tank to a 40 percent level, you have already reduced your nitrate levels by half. If you then refill the tank to the 100 percent level, your nitrate levels will be 20 percent of the original level that you started at.

If, on the other hand, you reduce the 40 percent water level once more to 20 percent and then refill the tank, you will end up with a nitrate level of 10 percent of what you started with. Perform the 40 percent to 20 percent reduction once more, and you will end up with a nitrate level of 5 percent of what you started with. So, if you started out with a nitrate level of 100 parts per million and used this method, your 100 ppm nitrates would be reduced, in a short period of time, to five ppm, which is considered to be an acceptable level even for corals.

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

Why It Is Safe

Some people fear that the rapid reduction of nitrate would “shock” tank critters. This is an understandable concern, but under the circumstances, the rapid reduction of potentially harmful toxins in a tank is of the utmost importance.

For example, it would be like standing in a closed garage with a car engine running, filling the garage with carbon monoxide. Then imagine someone telling you not to open the garage door since the rapid reduction in carbon monoxide levels is more harmful than reducing the carbon monoxide levels by 20%. The scenario is the same. The fish and other tank inhabitants are swimming in a toxic substance that will kill ​based on exposure.

Of course, the best way to avoid the urgent need to have to reduce toxic nitrate levels is to follow a regular maintenance and water change routine. If you find you are in a position where everything you have tried does not seem to work and rising nitrate levels continue to be a problem, give this water change method a try.

You can be conservative while using this method, too. if you are concerned about “shocking” your tank inhabitants, you can always perform this process over a period of time (waiting a few days between each water change process) until the nitrate is reduced.

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

Perhaps the most challenging part of maintaining aquaria (whether freshwater, brackish or marine) is controlling nuisance algae growth.

It seems the stuff just spontaneously generates if you make one wrong move, such as overfeeding the fish, skimping on a water change or slacking on replacing chemical filtrants.

Algae cannot simply grow from nothing. Yes, being capable of photosynthesis, they certainly do obtain their energy from light. But like any plant, they must obtain the basic building blocks of their biomass from their surrounding environment in the form of various nutrients. In other words, algae need fertilizers.

The most important components in “algae fertilizer” are ammonia/ammonium, nitrite and nitrate. Nitrate is the form preferred by most plants. Therefore, maintaining low concentrations of macronutrients, such as nitrate, is key to keeping an algae-free tank.

What’s the Role of Fish Tank Nitrate?

Because it is so important, nitrate can get used up rather quickly in the natural environment. In fact, in many ecosystems, it is a limiting nutrient. Nitrate is critical for the growth and reproduction of plants, and because it is in low supply, its abundance very directly influences the algal productivity. In the characteristically nutrient-poor waters of habitats such as coral reefs, algal growth is very, very restricted.

Fish tanks are another story, mainly due to the fact that conventional aquaria are recirculating systems that filter and recycle water over and over again. Though toxic substances are converted into less toxic substances, accumulations of their biological byproducts can themselves pose issues.

Take, for example, the nitrogen cycle. As we feed our fishes, they produce nitrogenous waste products in the form of ammonia. Nitrifying bacteria in our so-called biological filter convert the ammonia to nitrite and the nitrite into nitrate. All good, right?

Not necessarily! Where is all that nitrate going? If you cannot answer that question with a number, you need to start testing your water!

Reliable nitrate readings can be quickly and easily obtained using a quality test kit, such as the API Nitrate fresh and salt water aquarium test kit. If your nitrate levels are above, say, 10 or 15 parts per million (ppm), you’ve got some stuff to do.

The Potential Dangers of Excess Nitrate Levels

Sure, you’ve been told so many times that nitrate is harmless. A lot of fishes can tolerate brief exposures of up to 550 ppm. Chronic exposure, on the other hand, can indeed be damaging, even at much lower levels of exposure.

Over time, at just 30 ppm, nitrate can negatively impact cell development in both fishes and invertebrates. Lethargy, poor color, poor immune system and weakened feeding response are all signs of nitrate poisoning.

Most professional aquarists contend that nitrate concentrations should never exceed 20 ppm but are much more safely maintained below 10 ppm.

Still, nitrate concentrations of just a few parts per million can lead to massive algal blooms. These may occur as either planktonic (e.g., “green water”) or benthic (e.g., film or slime) blooms.

By the time they become evident, they are already well on their way to choking out your corals, adversely altering your water chemistry and making your tank look generally overgrown and derelict.

Truly, the best way to avoid battling algae in these endless cycles is to effectively prevent its proliferation through strict nutrient limitation.

How to Reduce Nitrate in an Aquarium

There are essentially two manners in which nitrate levels can be kept low, even in well-stocked and well-fed aquaria. These are (1) minimizing nitrate input and (2) promoting its removal/uptake.

Minimizing Nitrate Input

Of course, very few among us would grab a bottle that boldly reads NITRATE and pour its contents into our aquarium. Nitrate gets into our tanks in more sneaky ways, such as in replacement water, supplements and fish food.

Consequently, one should use only purified water for replacement or top-off, be certain that any products used in the water are nitrate-free, and then, follow that big one: feed your fish sparingly!

Conducting Water Changes

Removal is simple enough if you carry out large, regular water exchange. Water changes are a sure shot, as they instantly and permanently remove the nitrate from the system.

Want to remove 20 percent of the nitrate in the water? Do a 20 percent water change; it’s as straightforward as that.

Additionally, use of chemical filter media (such as the Deep Blue Professional nitrate reducer filter media pad) between water changes can provide very welcome relief in the event of an odd spike.

Installing a Refugium

For those who care not for tasks that require hauling heavy buckets about, there is one option that can significantly reduce the demand for water exchange. Using a planted refugium, the keeper can orchestrate the uptake of nitrate directly from the water via living, growing macroalgae.

Removal of nitrate (and other nutrients) occurs when portions of the standing crop are harvested and discarded. Though they require a little extra investment to install, refugia offer huge long-term payoff in the form of continuous, near-effortless and totally natural nitrate removal.

One might say that they provide the most interesting means of nitrate removal, in that cultivating the seaweeds (some of which can be quite beautiful) is a rewarding effort all in itself.

Using Microbes

Lastly, one might control nitrate levels (here again through biological action) using various types of microbes. These diverse microorganisms either sequester nitrate for biomass or convert it to another substance (e.g., nitrogen gas).

Live cultures are increasingly becoming available in the trade. These include both aerobic and anaerobic types. Aerobic forms (mainly heterotrophic bacteria) can take up nitrate rather quickly but usually need to be “fed” a carbon source, such as ethanol.

Anaerobic forms (such as purple nonsulfur bacteria) work more slowly but do not require carbon dosing, as they typically dwell deep in the bottom sediments where organic matter is plentiful.

Additionally, unlike their aerobic counterparts, anaerobes pose no risk of blooms (typically from carbon overdosing) that can cause dangerous oxygen depletion.

In most cases, it’ll be best to foster a microbial community that is as dynamic and diverse as possible. This could involve the addition of a deep sand bed, use of bacterial inoculants and regular addition of bacterial supplements/foods.

However you choose to manage nitrate, one thing is clear: to keep healthy animals in a relatively algae-free tank, it must be managed aggressively.

By sticking to a tight water change regimen, using only purified water, adding quality chemical filters, installing a refugium and supporting the growth of beneficial microbes, you need not ever struggle with chronic nitrate build-up!

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

Nitrates are the bane of many an established fishkeeper. But there are some quick and easy fixes.

What is nitrate?

Nitrate is part of the Nitrogen cycle and is formed when ammonia is converted by bacteria. Nitrosomonas bacteria convert ammonia into nitrite, before Nitrospira convert nitrite (NO2) to nitrate (NO3). Nitrite and nitrate sound very similar and are often confused, but nitrite is very toxic to fish even in low levels, whereas nitrate is less toxic and builds up.

A nitrite level of just 1 part per million is enough to poison and kill most aquarium fish, yet nitrate levels can be 100 times that in some cases. High nitrates are linked by some to nuisance algae, and Old Tank Syndrome, where nitrates rise, pH drops, and any newly introduced fish are shocked and die, despite ammonia and nitrite tests proving negative.

Nitrate can also be present in tapwater, so you may introduce nitrate unknowingly, when replacing old tank water with new tap water.

Fixes

The quickest and easiest way to get nitrates down in your setup is to change the water. As long as your tap water has a lower nitrate level than your tank water, by replacing it, your nitrate level will go down. Test the nitrate level in both your tank and your tap, to ensure that this is the case.

As long as the water you are replacing is of the right temperature, and has been treated for chlorine or chloramine, you can conduct water changes of 50% without issues.

If the nitrate level in your tapwater is high however, at 40ppm or more, most people opt not to continue using it, and turn to RO water instead. RO stands for Reverse Osmosis, and the process removes nitrates, phosphates, chlorine and minerals from tapwater.

Plumb one in at home and you will have an unlimited source of purified water to carry out water changes. RO water is soft too, benefiting fish which prefer water with a low pH.

Plants

Live aquatic plants are nature’s nitrate filters, and readily soak up nitrates, and use them as fertiliser. Heavily plant any nitrate-laden aquarium with fast growing live plants, and they will remove all the nitrate within days or weeks.

Aquascapers actually add nitrate in the form of Nitrogen, or N, as plants can actually become deficient of this key nutrient after they’ve used it all up. Live aquatic plants have many other benefits too including providing shelter for small fish and fry, providing places for fish to scatter eggs, and they help to fight off algae. Just ensure that any planted aquarium has the right lighting, and other fertilisers, to keep the plants healthy and growing.

Liquids

Nitrate can be lowered by the addition of some specially designed liquids. Use as directed, add to established tanks, and you should see the nitrate curve lessen over time when compared to not using it. Along with Tetra Easy Balance, this is useful for standard community aquariums where regular maintenance cannot always be carried out as often as it should.

Media

Nitrate can also be reduced by special filter media. Bacteria can be both aerobic (oxygen consuming) and anaerobic, and it’s anaerobic bacteria that are good at reducing nitrate. Although not a rapid fix, once the anaerobic population of bacteria are established within the media, nitrate should reduce.

Nitrate sponges

Some Nitrate sponges work in a similar way to other nitrate reducing media, encouraging bacteria to reduce nitrate from within, while others work chemically, absorbing nitrate and locking it away. Both can be effective, and the mainstay of many leading filter media systems including Juwel and JBL.

Feed less, stock less

The nitrate level of any aquarium should be in direct relation to the amount of ammonia being produced by the fish. The more fish you have, the more nitrate will be produced. So tanks with chronic nitrate problems are usually overstocked, and over fed. Keep fewer, smaller fish, and don’t overfeed, and less ammonia and subsequent nitrate will be produced.

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

What does it look like?

  • High nitrite test results
  • Invisible issue

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

What are the fish doing?

  • Acting irritable – ‘scratching’, jumping, twitching, shimmying
  • Breathing at the water’s surface
  • Fish appear pale or dark
  • Flicking against objects
  • Gasping, rapid gill movement

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

What should I do?

  • Complete a 25% water change and retest after a few hours
  • Add Fast Filter Start to boost the natural bacteria in your filter to process the extra nitrite
  • Support the health of your fish using Aquilibrium First Aid Salt
  • Continue to regularly test your water

See which treatments we recommend >

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

Why does this happen and how do I prevent it?

Nitrite is a naturally occurring chemical in your aquarium and is created through the breakdown of ammonia by bacteria in your biological filter as part of the Nitrogen cycle. The main causes of high nitrite are:

  • immature or damaged biological filter
  • over stocking
  • over feeding

To prevent high nitrite levels:

  • Complete regular water changes of up to 30% and test your water
  • increase aeration
  • maintain a healthy filter (if you need to clean elements of the filter use water from the aquarium as tap water will damage the bacteria that remove Nitrite)
  • Posted on 23 July 2018
  • Posted in aquarium nitrate, biopellets, denitrator, nitrate control, nitrate reduction, protein skimmer, reef octopus, refugium, seachem purigen
  • 0

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

We will show you how you can reduce nitrates and control your nitrate levels to keep you fish and corals healthier! Protein skimmers, denitrators, organic removers: we will explain to you what they do and how you can use them in your aquarium to combat nitrates!

The first step to combat high nitrate level in a saltwater aquarium is an efficient protein skimmer. The skimmer removes waste before it breaks down. The more efficient/effective the protein skimmer, the more waste it will remove from your system to help keep your water cleaner. Investing in a good skimmer, such as a Reef Octopus or Nyos, is definitely a no-brainer when it comes to nitrate control.

The next step is regular water changes. It is also a good idea to vacuum the gravel when you perform a water change. Like the saying “the solution to pollution is dilution”. If you remove 50% of your water with clean water, you will lower your nitrates by 50%. Similarly, if you do small 10% water changes, don’t expect your nitrates to change a whole lot.

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

For, those with persistently high nitrates, carbon dosing can be a good solution.

Using biopellets, such as Brightwell Aquatics Katalyst or TwoLittleFishies NPX Bioplastics, in a media reactor is a method of carbon dosing that is easy to implement and effective. The way biopellets work is that specific strands of bacteria grow on the biopellets. As the bacteria consume the biopellets, they also consume nitrates and phosphates. These bacteria will form a film that coats the biopellets. As the biopellets tumble inside the reactor, the film sheds off and is then removed from the aquarium by your protein skimmer or filter socks. Every 4-6 months, you simply add more biopellets to the reactor to replenish what have been consumed.

The Brightwell Xport NO3 Brick and Xport NO3 Plate also utilize the same concept of sulfur and anaerobic bacteria without requiring a reactor. It is extremely affordable and easy to implement as you simply drop the brick/plate in to your sump. We have found it to be one of the best biological media. However, it’s effectiveness on nitrate reduction is variable as it is not always easy, or possible, to achieve the right flow rate to create those anaerobic zones in an open sump.

We hope that understanding the various different methods of nitrate control will allow you to choose the methods that will work best with your system. If you need a second opinion or would like more information, feel free to shoot us an email or give us a call.

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

Thank you for visiting! By the way… any links on this page that lead to products on Amazon and other stores/partners are affiliate links. Aquarium Store Depot earns a commission if you make a purchase.

“Help, my nitrate levels are over 50 PPM!” This is a common email or text I get on my live chat. High nitrate levels can be a major problem for freshwater aquarium keepers. In today’s post, I want to talk about the best nitrate remover for freshwater tanks. Nitrates, for some of us, are the bane of our existence. We obsess over the nitrate level in our fish tanks because our local fish store and fish guides told us that high nitrate levels is bad and stresses out our pet fish.

This is all true, however, instead of stressing out over them let’s talk about how to take proper action in tackling the issue. I want to revisit the nitration cycle and talk about ways to remove and lower nitrates in your aquarium water. I want us to reflect on how we got to this place. Once we know, let’s talk about the best nitrate removers to solve our problem.

Revisiting the Nitration Cycle

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

Let’s first revisit the nitration cycle. I know some of you reading this already know it, but I also know some of you may not and have become successful by listening to your local fish store on what to buy. Part of having a nitrate problem is because we are out of balance. The nitration cycle has 5 stages:

  1. Nitrogen is introduced with fish food
  2. Ammonia is excreted either by fish waste (fish poop) or decaying material
  3. Nitrosomas bacteria convert Ammonia to Nitrite
  4. Nitrobactor bacteria converts Nitrite to Nitrate
  5. Plants use Nitrates and Ammonium as fertilizer

The above is the natural way of how an aquatic ecosystem would work. The issue most likely with your aquarium water is that you are missing #5. If you lack live plants, nitrate levels can build up. Also, the stock media from your aquarium filters will not address #5. It is not common for filter makers to provide media that will remove nitrates. This is to keep costs down as the media designed to lower nitrates is more expensive and some buyers may not even want it.

Ways To Remove Nitrate

So now that we know the cycle, and likely what our deficiency is in the cycle, let’s talk about how to remove nitrates.

1. Water changes

This is the most common way. Water changes will reduce nitrates in the aquarium environment and bring in clean water to your fish tank. While this is an all-around fix, too many water changes can be disruptive to our closed systems. They are also labor intensive. We do not want to be a slave to the water change. Our goal is to get down to changing the water tank every other week, or every month.

2. Live Plants

A large live plant population can actually act as an effective nitrate remover for your aquarium. This works great for planted tank setups. However, I do know many people who have had nitrate problems and cannot have planted tanks. This usually happens when you’ve got fish who eat live aquarium plants, aggressive fish that uproot or damage them, or people who do not want to regularly prune live plants and maintain them.

3. Reduce livestock

Sometimes an aquarium has high nitrate levels because the fish tank is overstocked. This is common with people who follow the 1 inch per fish rule. Your biological filtration products are working overtime when your fish tank is overstocked. Other times, you have fish that are hard on your bioload such as gold fish or large aggressive fish.

4. Nitrate Removers

Nitrate removers are filter media designed to remove nitrate from your aquarium either through chemical or biological means. They either come in disposable media or permanent media. They are not dangerous to the inhabitants in your tank, and will reside in your filter compartments. Some nitrate removers have mixed media, meaning that they handle other things aside from nitrate in your tank water. Some will have carbon while others use resin to remove other impurities in your aquarium water.

A dedicated nitrate removing media is a great way to target the problem immediately, but they need to be replaced regularly. A permanent media will grow anaerobic bacteria in the media. This anaerobic bacteria will consume nitrates in your tank water. If you’ve considered all these ways to reduce nitrates in your aquarium water, and are still at the point where nitrate removers are necessary, then read on for our buying guide.

The Candidates For “Best Nitrate Remover For Freshwater Aquariums

Below is a list of the best nitrate removers for freshwater aquariums. All products here have been selected through our field experience and all are safe to use in a freshwater tank. Each have their pros and cons, which I will discuss below. There is a product for you on this list.

In a hurry? I recommend Biohome for a permanent solution and Seachem Purigen for a disposable solution.

Best level Information and References website . Search all about level Ideas in this website.

Nitrite Levels In Fish Tank. Most professional aquarists contend that nitrate concentrations should never exceed 20 ppm but are much more safely maintained below 10 ppm. Keeping the levels of nitrate under 10 ppm, and ideally under 5, will result in healthier fry, no stunted growth, extended lifespan of the fish, and no algae outbreaks.

Can’t Get Nitrite And Nitrate Levels To Go Down My from www.myaquariumclub.com

Yep, you read that right… nitrites are pretty bad news. Nitrite is toxic for fish and can even be fatal in higher amounts. Keep nitrate levels below 10 parts per million.

Can’t Get Nitrite And Nitrate Levels To Go Down My

What causes the progressive intoxication is the rapid ingestion of the poison (actually aiming for chlorides) through the gills. Welcome to your simple guide on how to reduce nitrites in your fish tank! Contrary to popular belief, a level of 20 ppm of nitrate could become toxic to freshwater fish and invertebrates over time. The nitrate levels in your fish tank should never go above 40 ppm, and ideally the level should stay under 20 ppm.

What is the ideal nitrate level in a fish tank? Effect on fish fish will feel the impact of nitrate by the time levels reach 100 ppm, particularly if these levels persist. Still, nitrate concentrations of just a few parts per million can lead to massive algal blooms. The health of your whole aquaponics system is compromised when your nitrite.

Most professional aquarists contend that nitrate concentrations should never exceed 20 ppm but are much more safely maintained below 10 ppm. The nitrite level should always be zero, or as close to zero as you can get it. However, when it goes above two ppm, it can also cause the death of the fish. Effect on fish fish will feel.

Still, nitrate concentrations of just a few parts per million can lead to massive algal blooms. What causes high nitrite levels in fish tank? If you are experiencing high levels of ammonia in your fish tank, high levels of nitrites will follow. Measures must be taken by aquarists even at a concentration of 0.5 mg/l nitrite, because at the latest.

What causes high nitrite levels in fish tank? This is the “toxic” level in the chart below. It is generally safe for fish to consume nitrates between 0 and 40 parts per million. Nitrite poisoning follows closely on the heels of elevated ammonia as a major killer of aquarium fish. The nitrate levels in your fish tank should never go.

Keeping the levels of nitrate under 10 ppm, and ideally under 5, will result in healthier fry, no stunted growth, extended lifespan of the fish, and no algae outbreaks. A level of nitrite above 0 is considered to be dangerous. A desired level of nitrates in freshwater aquariums should be kept below 50 ppm at all times, and preferably below.

Welcome to your simple guide on how to reduce nitrites in your fish tank! What is the ideal nitrate level in a fish tank? The amount of water in the body can cause stress in fish, and the amount of water in the body can be toxic. I have this aquarium already (60litres) for 1 week so far.currently i have.

A key tip to keep your aquaponics system thriving is to reduce your nitrite levels. What is the ideal nitrate level in a fish tank? The acceptable level of nitrites in your tank is… zero. The health of your whole aquaponics system is compromised when your nitrite levels exceed a certain level. Nitrite poisoning follows closely on the heels of.

In freshwater aquariums, nitrates should be kept below 50 ppm at all times, and preferably below 25 ppm. Well, zero is the number that needs to come on the test kit when you test your aquarium water for nitrite. Anything above 0.1 mg/l should be viewed as unacceptable and a potential cause of stress, although some fish might tolerate very.

The water parameters in the aquarium should therefore be checked regularly and altered if necessary. Always below 40ppm and preferably below 20ppm. If you are breeding fish, or are battling algae growth, keep nitrate even lower, below 10 ppm. Changing the water in the fish tank partially every week can be very beneficial in checking nitrite development in. A desired.

Anything above 0.1 mg/l should be viewed as unacceptable and a potential cause of stress, although some fish might tolerate very high levels. The acceptable level of nitrites in your tank is… zero. Still, nitrate concentrations of just a few parts per million can lead to massive algal blooms. This causes the nitrite level in the water to rise, so.

The amount of water in the body can cause stress in fish, and the amount of water in the body can be toxic. Anything above 0.1 mg/l should be viewed as unacceptable and a potential cause of stress, although some fish might tolerate very high levels. This is the “toxic” level in the chart below. A key tip to keep.

This is the “toxic” level in the chart below. Still, nitrate concentrations of just a few parts per million can lead to massive algal blooms. The bacteria can be overburdened even when the fish density is higher, the plant growth is strong, or the amount of food is increased. Nitrite is toxic for fish and can even be fatal in.

Welcome to your simple guide on how to reduce nitrites in your fish tank! The nitrite level should always be zero, or as close to zero as you can get it. The nitrate levels in your fish tank should never go above 40 ppm, and ideally the level should stay under 20 ppm. I have this aquarium already (60litres) for.

The acute toxicity is where the fish die in hours or days. What causes high nitrite levels in fish tank? Changing the water in the fish tank partially every week can be very beneficial in checking nitrite development in. The bacteria can be overburdened even when the fish density is higher, the plant growth is strong, or the amount of.

I know this is toxic for the. Nitrite is not a poisonous as many would have us believe. What causes the progressive intoxication is the rapid ingestion of the poison (actually aiming for chlorides) through the gills. Well, zero is the number that needs to come on the test kit when you test your aquarium water for nitrite. These may.

A key tip to keep your aquaponics system thriving is to reduce your nitrite levels. Nitrite is not a poisonous as many would have us believe. These may occur as either planktonic (e.g., green water) or benthic (e.g., film or slime) blooms. The health of your whole aquaponics system is compromised when your nitrite levels exceed a certain level. What.

What is an acceptable level of nitrates in aquarium? Nitrite is not a poisonous as many would have us believe. A level of nitrite above 0 is considered to be dangerous. A key tip to keep your aquaponics system thriving is to reduce your nitrite levels. 1  just when you think you are home free after losing half your.

Most professional aquarists contend that nitrate concentrations should never exceed 20 ppm but are much more safely maintained below 10 ppm. A level of nitrite above 0 is considered to be dangerous. If you are breeding fish, or are battling algae growth, keep nitrate even lower, below 10 ppm. If you are experiencing high levels of ammonia in your fish.

The nitrate levels in your fish tank should never go above 40 ppm, and ideally the level should stay under 20 ppm. A desired level of nitrates in freshwater aquariums should be kept below 50 ppm at all times, and preferably below 25 ppm at all times. A key tip to keep your aquaponics system thriving is to reduce your.

It is important to look for signs of elevated nitrites including fish gasping for breath at the surface, fish hanging near water outlets, rapid. What nitrite levels are acceptable in an aquarium? Contrary to popular belief, a level of 20 ppm of nitrate could become toxic to freshwater fish and invertebrates over time. What causes high nitrite levels in fish.

The “new tank syndrome” is a rather well known and often also dreaded occurrence in the aquarium hobby. Especially beginners of the beautiful hobby are often unsure when talking about it. There is some advice on the Internet which in part contradict each other. What does new tank syndrome mean, when does the new tank syndrome occur and what can be done against it? We want to clarify things with this article.

1. What is the new tank syndrome?

The expression new tank syndrome (“nitrite peak”) is composed from the English words “nitrite” and “peak”. The new tank syndrome means quickly rising nitrite levels in water leading to a very high level. Afterwards, the nitrite concentration sinks again. Nitrite is toxic for fish and can even be fatal in higher amounts. The water parameters in the aquarium should therefore be checked regularly and altered if necessary. Measures must be taken by aquarists even at a concentration of 0.5 mg/l nitrite, because at the latest at 1.0 mg/l, nitrite is harmful for the aquarium inhabitants.

NO2 Evaluation
0.0 mg/l good
> 0–0.5 mg/l action required
0.5 mg/l critical
1.0 mg/l harmful
2.0 mg/l dangerous
5.0 mg/l toxic

2. How does the new tank syndrome form?

It is important to know the basic principle of the nitrogen cycle for understanding how the new tank syndrome occurs. A functioning nitrogen cycle is the basis for a properly running aquarium.

The inorganic nitrogen compound ammonium (NH4) is being formed from plant and food leftovers, fish waste and other organic substances in an aquarium. This substance in itself is not a threat for aquarium inhabitants. However, if the pH value in the water is above 7, toxic ammonia (NH3) is being formed. In a biologically well established aquarium, the so-called Nitrosomonas bacteria, among others, ensure both ammonium and ammonia are converted into nitrite (NO2). These bacteria form rather quickly in a newly set-up aquarium, which is why the breakdown of ammonium and ammonia works quite well also in a new aquarium. In the following step, the formed nitrite is converted into nitrate (NO3) by Nitrobacter bacteria, among others, and then serves as a plant nutrient. The bacteria that break down nitrite take rather long to form in a new aquarium. At this time, the new tank syndrome can therefore arise: too few filter bacteria have formed or are present, which could convert arising nitrite into nitrate and thus render it harmless. The substance enriches and is harmful for the animals kept in the aquarium. Only after some time, enough nitrite converting filter bacteria have formed, allowing nitrite immediately being converted into nitrate from now on. The new tank syndrome is thus over, and the nitrite amount goes down, so the nitrogen cycle can run regularly now.

Nitrate is a plant food and is normally rare in situations where plant growth is abundant such as ponds and natural water bodies – this is why it can be so deadly to wild-caught fish or sensitive species. In heavily planted freshwater tanks or marine aquaria with lots of liverock or a deep sand bed, some degree of balance can be achieved as long as patience is exercised in the early days of stocking. More usually, nitrate accumulates as a result of healthy biological filtration and is best removed by regular partial water changes.

By performing a weekly 25% change you can limit the build-up of nitrate, although overstocked systems or those with large messy fish may need more frequent changes. It is always less stressful for both fish and fishkeeper to perform lots of small changes rather than a few large-scale ones and in the case of extremely high readings, daily water changes can be carried out until levels are under control. Remember that established fishes can tolerate levels that can be damaging to newly introduced livestock and when problems occur introducing new fish, this is often the cause.

It is well worth testing your tap water for nitrate, as this often contains concentrations that exceed acceptable levels and in this instance, it may prove impossible to run your aquarium using your mains water. In this case it may be necessary to investigate alternatives such as R.O. water or nitrate-removing resins, etc. Often a solution can be tailored to your aquarium after discussion with your regular store.

Subscribe to our emails!

Be the first to receive fintastic fishkeeping tips, product news, special offers and personalised product recommendations direct to your inbox.

Care and maintenance

September 30, 2020

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

Whether you have a freshwater or saltwater tank, nitrites and nitrates are something you are just going to have to deal with. Both of these substances are by-products of the nitrogen cycle so you can’t avoid having them in your tank but you should do your best to control them. If you let the nitrite or nitrate levels in your tank get out of control, it could have serious consequences for your fish. Luckily, controlling these substances is not a very difficult task – performing a few routine maintenance tasks and installing an EcoBio-Stone in your tank can make a huge difference.

Dangers of High Nitrite/Nitrate Levels

You may already be familiar with the dangers of ammonia poisoning but you may not realize that nitrite and nitrate can be just as dangerous for aquarium fish. In fact, nitrite poisoning is closely linked to ammonia poisoning because high levels of one are often linked to high levels of the other. Nitrite poisoning is often nicknamed “brown blood disease” because it results in increased levels of met hemoglobin in the blood of fish which can cause a brown discoloration. Discoloration of the blood is not the only problem associated with nitrite poisoning – this disease can also cause damage to the gills and inhibits the ability of blood cells to carry oxygen throughout the body. Fish suffering from nitrite poisoning may suffocate, even if the water in the tank has plenty of oxygen in it. Nitrite poisoning can also lead to stress in fish which can increase their susceptibility to disease – secondary infections like fin rot are common in fish that are already suffering from nitrite poisoning.

Though nitrate is less harmful than nitrite and ammonia, it can still be toxic for fish at high levels. The ideal level for nitrate in an aquarium is less than 30ppm, though most fish can tolerate levels up to 50ppm. When the nitrate levels in your tank reach 100ppm or higher, your fish will definitely start to feel the effects. Prolonged exposure to such high nitrate levels may cause increased stress, reduced reproductive capabilities and, in juvenile fish, stunted growth. In addition to affecting your fish, high nitrate levels in the tank could also contribute to increased algae growth. If algae growth is allowed to get out of control, it could have a negative impact on the water quality in your tank.

Tips for Control

As you know, ammonia, nitrite and nitrate are the by-products of the nitrogen cycle. As part of the nitrogen cycle, beneficial bacteria break down organic wastes like uneaten fish food and fish feces. It makes sense, then, that the less waste available in your tank, the lower the levels of ammonia, nitrite and nitrate will be. In order to minimize the amount of waste in your tank, make sure not to feed your fish more than necessary – only offer your fish as much as they can consume in 2 to 3 minutes and remove the uneaten portions of sinking wafers after an hour before they can fully dissolve. Another simple tip for controlling nitrite and nitrate in your tank is to install an EcoBio-Stone. These stones are made from volcanic stone and they are infused with beneficial bacteria as well as the nutrients they need to thrive. Adding extra beneficial bacteria to your tank through the EcoBio-Stone will help to maintain the nitrogen cycle, combatting high nitrite and nitrate levels in your tank. In combination with routine water changes, adding an EcoBio-Stone to your tank is an effective way to keep the water quality in your tank high and the nitrite/nitrate levels under control.

What Causes High Nitrites In The Aquarium?

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

LAST UPDATED: March 22, 2021

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

Sharing is caring!

While you might have heard that ammonia is deadly for aquarium fish, you might not have heard that nitrites can also be just as dangerous. It is important to understand what causes nitrites in the aquarium and how to quickly remove them if they do enter your saltwater or freshwater system as they can lead to dead fish and invertebrates.

Keep reading to find out everything you need to know about the nitrogen cycle, nitrites, and how to remove them from your aquarium water!

What causes nitrites in aquarium water to be high?

Nitrites (NO2) are the result of when nitrifying bacteria process ammonia as a kind of biological filter. These nutrients are usually a sign of a cycling tank, overfeeding, overcrowding, or other poor fish aquarium maintenance.

Cycling tank

In order to make an aquarium inhabitable for fish and other aquatic life, it must first go through the nitrogen cycle. This involves having a source of ammonia that is first converted into nitrite and then into nitrate by beneficial bacteria. Over the course of a month, ammonia levels will rise, leading to a detectable nitrite level and a decrease in traces of ammonia. Nitrite levels will then decrease while nitrate levels increase; when only nitrate levels are present the aquarium is considered fully cycled and a water change is strongly recommended.

Most of the water quality issues associated with a newly setup aquarium can be attributed to ‘new tank syndrome,’ which is due to the bacteria not being fully established enough to correctly balance the nutrient input demands of the freshwater or saltwater aquarium system.

Overfeeding

Overfeeding can lead to a lot of excess nutrients in the water column, which can lead to algae and overall poor water quality. As leftover food goes uneaten, it can lead to rot and waste that causes ammonia spikes. Not only is this ammonia immediately toxic to fish and invertebrates, but the nitrogen cycle will also lead to dangerous levels of nitrites and high nitrates.

Overcrowding

While you might not be overfeeding your fish, overcrowding can also lead to increased amounts of waste in the water column. Many fish and invertebrates excrete bodily waste through the form of ammonia, which will be converted into nitrite by the nitrogen cycle. More fish equals more ammonia which equals more nitrites and nitrates in the aquarium.

Poor aquarium maintenance

Even if you’ve let your new tank completely cycle and you’re careful to not overfeed or to overcrowd with fish, there is still a chance that you’re just not giving your aquarium the attention it needs to thrive. In general, good aquarium maintenance requires partial water changes every 2-4 weeks and rinsed/new filter media every month or so. Dirty substrate or clogged equipment can start to leak excess nutrients into the aquarium water if left unchecked, even in an established tank.

How do you fix high nitrites in aquarium water?

Luckily, it is pretty easy to avoid having any nitrites in your aquarium water at all. First, you will need a saltwater or freshwater test kit that tells you the exact water parameters in your saltwater or freshwater tank; usually, you will not have just nitrites present if there’s an obvious problem, and other levels will probably need to be balanced as well.

Once the problem has been detected, it is usually recommended to perform a partial water change daily until nitrite reads 0 ppm with an accurate test kit; this will also help reduce any traces of ammonia and help keep nitrates down. During these water changes, it is also recommended to vacuum the substrate to get stuck detritus out. However, upsetting the substrate too much at one time can cause water parameters to fluctuate, leading to a mini cycling process.

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

Water changes and vacuuming the substrate are usually the easiest and most immediate ways to eliminate ammonia and nitrite from the aquarium. Supplementing filter media and chemical solutions are usually not recommended as they are only a temporary solution. However, in newer aquarium setups, nitrifying bacteria supplements may be added to help establish and bolster bacteria populations to help process the high nitrite levels faster.

Also, make sure that your tap water does not have nitrites in it by regularly checking with a test kit. If your tap water does have a lot of extra nutrients, it might be worthwhile to switch to distilled or reverse osmosis water.

Will high nitrites kill your fish?

Yes, high nitrites in aquarium setups will kill your fish and invertebrates. Due to its chemical structure, nitrite has the ability to bind with hemoglobin where oxygen should otherwise bind to in the blood. Poor water chemistry in your aquarium can cause your fish to experience nitrite poisoning where they suffocate due to lack of oxygen in the blood.

How long can fish live with high nitrites in the aquarium?

With both high ammonia and nitrite levels present, aquarium fish could die within hours of being added to the aquarium. With just high nitrite levels, fish might be able to survive a few days but will be in extreme amounts of pain. Some signs of nitrite poisoning are lethargy, lack of appetite, redness around the gills, heavy breathing, and gasping for air at the surface of the water.

If you see any of your aquarium fish displaying these signs, make sure to test the water parameters and take the proper measures for correcting the water chemistry as soon as possible.

Conclusion

Nitrite is just as dangerous as ammonia is to many species of fish and invertebrates. Nitrites are often the result of newly setup aquariums where water quality fluctuates day to day, but may also be the result of overfeeding, overcrowding, or poor aquarium maintenance.

Always make sure to have the appropriate test kits on hand so that you can figure out the problem as soon as possible and give your aquarium fish and invertebrates the best chance of surviving. Also, make sure to never put livestock in an aquarium that is currently cycling, even if treating with bacteria supplements.

If you have any questions about the nitrogen cycle, partial water changes, or have had experience tackling high nitrites in your own saltwater or freshwater aquarium, don’t hesitate to leave a comment below!

Nitrate and nitrite are naturally occurring ions that are part of the nitrogen cycle.

Naturally occurring nitrate levels in surface and ground water are generally a few miligrams per litre. In many ground waters, an increase of nitrate levels has been observed due to the intensification of farming practice. Concentrations can reach several hundred miligrams per litre. In some countries, up to 10% of the popullation may be exposed to nitrate levels in drinking water of above 50 mg/l.

In general, for humans vegetables will be the main source of nitrate intake when levels in drinking water are below 10 mg/l. When nitrate levels in drinking water exceed 50 mg/l, drinking water will be the major source of total nitrate intake.

Extensive epidemiological data support the current guideline value proposed by the World Health Organization (WHO) for nitrate-nitrogen of 10 mg/l. However, this value should not be expressed on the basis of nitrate nitrogen but on the basis of nitrate itself, which is the chemical entity of concern to health, and the guideline value for nitrate is therefore 50 mg/l. Click here for further information about this.

Nitrification is the oxidation of an ammonia compound into nitrite, especially by the action of the nitrifying bacteria called Nitrosomas. The nitrites will then be oxidized to nitrates by the bacteria Nitrobacter .

Nitrate is less toxic than nitrite and is used as a food source by live plants.

The process of converting ammonia to nitrate is diagramed in the nitrogen cycle.

Nitrification is most rapid at pH of 7-8 and at temperatures of 25-30 o C. Nitrification causes waters to decrease in pH.

Ecotoxicology of nitrite and nitrate

Nitrite levels above 0.75 ppm in water can cause stress in fish and greater than 5 ppm can be toxic.

Nitrate levels from 0 – 40 ppm are generally safe for fish. Anything greater than 80 can be toxic.

Nitrate occurs naturally in your aquarium as a byproduct of the breakdown of waste, be it feces, uneaten food or decaying organic matter. When too much is present in your tank’s water, this chemical compound can be toxic to your fish and other life. Also, algae like nitrate because it fuels their growth. If your regular water testing confirms high nitrate levels, take action to remove the excess before it jeopardizes your aquarium system.

Proper Nitrate Levels

Generally, in a fish-only aquarium, aim for a nitrate level under 20 parts per million, or ppm. If you also have invertebrates in your aquarium, though, you typically have to keep your nitrates below 5 ppm. Reef setups should definitely not exceed nitrate levels higher than 1.0 ppm, but often closer to 0.5 or below. These are guidelines, not hard-and-fast rules. Do some homework on the specific types of life you keep in your tank to determine a more definitive target level.

Remove Nitrates Gradually

Your aquatic ecosystem depends on relatively steady water chemistry. The nitrate levels, along with most other aspects of the water makeup, need to remain consistent for the health of everything living in it. Sudden considerable changes to any readings — from temperature to ammonia to carbon dioxide to nitrates and other levels — stress tank life and can be fatal when severe or when particularly sensitive species are present. Employ only one effort to remove high nitrates per day, or wait a few day between tactics if your levels aren’t dangerously elevated, to bring down levels gradually and avoid shocking anyone or anything living in the aquarium.

Tank Maintenace

Start with a standard 10 to 15 percent partial water change. The new water is lower in nitrates, so begins to balance the ecosystem. Also, make sure your filter and protein skimmer are plugged in and properly functioning. Clean out their trays and perform any manufacturer-recommended maintenance if it’s due. When they’re functioning well, these accessories remove debris that releases nitrates and other compounds. Because excess food, fish waste and deceased life give off nitrates, thoroughly check your tank for dead critters or plants and remove them, vacuum the substrate and run your net through the water.

Tank Additives

Fish and pet supply stores stock various products called denitrators that remove nitrates from water. Different products work in different ways and have different effects on water chemistry, so get a recommendation from a trusted source. Also, test your water daily for a few days to monitor the product’s effects. Follow package directions carefully to avoid drastic drops in nitrate levels. A more natural option is to add cured live rock or live sand into your tank. These contain microorganisms that eat nitrates in the water. Products called “biopellets” are also available that house these microscopic lifeforms; they’re released when the pellets dissolve in the tank water.

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

Keeping fish or other aquatic pets in an aquarium, you cannot avoid nitrate buildup, and nitrate originates from fish waste, food leftover, or rotten plant materials. Nitrate is odorless and colorless, thus challenging to notice its presence.

Though nitrate is not much less toxic than other aquarium byproducts as ammonia and nitrites, an excessive buildup can be deadly for your fish.

Both ammonia and nitrate are byproducts of aquarium waste, and more specifically, nitrate comes from ammonia after a multistage chemical reaction. The toxicity of ammonia is acute, and therefore it is crucial to establish a nitrogen cycle in an aquarium.

In a nitrogen cycle, ammonia converts into nitrite first, and then nitrite converts into nitrate through an oxidation rotation.

This biological cycle is essential to maintain a healthy environment for aquarium inhabitants, and beneficial bacteria promote this cycle. While producing nitrate from ammonia is our primary desire because nitrate is much less toxic.

Still, we have to find ways to manage nitrates. You cannot allow excessive nitrate accumulation in an aquarium as it will eventually affect fish.

Whether you are an expert hobbyist or a beginner, you should be aware of nitrate buildup’s adverse effects and know how to eliminate it. Well, you can never eliminate nitrate buildup, but you can manage it properly.

In this article, I’ll talk about how to lower nitrate in freshwater aquariums.

Every new aquarium set-up goes through a process of establishing beneficial bacterial colonies. This process is generally known as the nitrogen cycle, but is also called nitrification, the start-up cycle and/or the break-in cycle. As you know, your aquarium is a closed environment so all of the waste excreted from your fish and uneaten food accumulates in your aquarium. The nitrogen cycle converts these wastes to safer by-products. The fluctuations you have noticed in your aquarium water quality recently are likely the result of this cycle.

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tankThe Nitrogen cycle in a new tank. Photo courtesy of Michigan Department of Natural Resources, Salmon in the Classroom Program.

Stage 1:
The cycle begins when you add fish to the aquarium. All uneaten, decayed food and waste generated by the fish breaks down to form ionized or unionized ammonia. The ionized form, Ammonium (NH4), is present in higher amounts if the pH is below 7, and is not toxic to fish. The unionized form, Ammonia (NH3), is present in higher amounts if the pH is 7 or above, and is highly toxic to fish. These ammonia levels will increase for about 2 weeks until the second stage of the cycle begins. (The Freshwater Master Test Kit’s ammonia test gives a combined reading of Ammonium (NH4) and Ammonia (NH3).)

Stage 2:
During the second stage of the nitrogen cycle aerobic bacteria called nitrosomonas grow to sufficient quantities in the filter to convert the ammonia to toxic nitrite. (Nitrite destroys the
hemoglobin in the fish’s blood and eventually prevents the blood from carrying oxygen) As this happens, the ammonia levels will quickly begin to drop as the nitrite levels slowly increase. These nitrite levels will continue to increase for about 2 weeks until aerobic bacteria called nitrobacters grow to sufficient quantities in the filter to convert the nitrite to less toxic nitrate.
If your current water quality testing indicates high nitrites, the nitrobacters are still establishing themselves in your filter media, gravel and hydro-sponge.

Stage 3:
The conversion of nitrites to nitrates is Stage 3 of the nitrogen cycle. Again, as the nitrite levels quickly decrease due to the work of nitrobacters, the nitrate levels will slowly increase. Once your tank has reached this point (about 5-6 weeks total), it is said to have “cycled”. All you need to do now, is to perform your regular partial water changes in order to keep a moderately low nitrate level. If this practice is followed routinely, you should have no problems maintaining your biological filter.

What not to do during the nitrogen cycle:
-Don’t change the filter media – the beneficial bacteria are growing there. Don’t disturb them until they have become well established.
(You may need to clear debris from the filter sponge once a week– do this in dechlorinated water.)
-Don’t overfeed the fish – when in doubt underfeed your fish. Remember that anything going into the tank will produce waste one way or another.

Stage 4:
Many TIC tanks now use MicrobeLift Special Blend, which further converts nitrates into nitrogen gas, which then bubbles out of the tank. Some water changes and vacuuming are still advisable, but on the whole nitrate levels are lower and more manageable with this product.

February 16, 2020

The key to healthy fish is healthy tank water. Here’s how to check your aquarium health and stop your fish looking green around the gills.

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank
The easiest way to check your fish tank water is to buy a good all-round tester kit. The key things to look out for are ammonia, nitrite, nitrate and pH. These compounds will be kept largely in check with a good mechanical, chemical and biological filter. But it’s a delicate balance, so check your tank’s water health regularly. Remember that you can always bring in a sample of 100mL of your aquarium water and have it tested for free at your local Petbarn.

Ammonia

The number one killer of fish is ammonia. It forms the first part of your tank’s nitrogen cycle and comes from fish waste and uneaten food. Whether your aquarium is fresh or salt water, you want the ammonia level to be 0.0ppm or undetectable. Any higher and the water could be toxic for your fish and needs to be treated with an ammonia removal product. To stay on top of your aquarium’s ammonia levels, install an ammonia alert sensor.

Nitrite

The second part of the nitrogen cycle is nitrites. They are the result of ammonia being broken down by the natural bacteria in your tank. Again, nitrites are toxic and should be in concentrations no greater than 0.0ppm. To contain toxic nitrite levels during a cycle, use a conditioner.

How do I lower the nitrate levels in my fish tank?

Feed fish sparingly, and consider feeding them a small amount of food several times a day rather than once large feeding. Change about 50 percent of the water in the tank at least once a week to keep nitrate from building up. The more fish you have in your tank the more often you may need to change the water.

How long can fish live with high nitrates?

Eventually, fish death will begin, occurring over a period of a few days to a few weeks. When fish are suddenly exposed to very high nitrate levels, they will usually die within 24 hours of exposure. Often owners are not aware of the problem until the fish are dead or near death.

Why is my nitrate still high after water change?

High nitrate accumulation, sometimes referred to as old tank syndrome, can be a common problem for long-time aquarium hobbyists. It usually occurs when regular maintenance and water change routines are ignored. Nitrate is the end product of bacterial reduction of ammonia to nitrite and then to nitrate.

Do water filters filter out nitrates?

The only way to remove nitrates from drinking water is through a water filtration system. Many water treatment companies promote Reverse Osmosis (RO) systems as an immediate solution to provide nitrate and nitrite reduction.

What removes nitrates from water?

Nitrate may be successfully removed from water using treatment processes such as ion exchange, distillation, and reverse osmosis. Contact your local health department for recommended procedures. Heating or boiling your water will not remove nitrate.

How do you lower nitrates quickly?

The quickest and easiest way to get nitrates down is to change the water. As long as your tap water has a lower nitrate level than your tank water, by replacing it, your nitrate level will go down. Test the nitrate level in both your tank and your tap, to ensure that this is the case.

What happens if you drink water with high nitrates?

Consuming too much nitrate can affect how blood carries oxygen and can cause methemoglobinemia (also known as blue baby syndrome). The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) standard for nitrate in drinking water is 10 milligrams of nitrate (measured as nitrogen) per liter of drinking water (mg/L).

How can I lower the nitrite level in my Aquarium?

The quickest way to reduce both nitrite and nitrate levels is to reduce the stocking density of your tank – move some of your fish to another tank. The more fish you have in your tank, the more waste they will produce and your beneficial bacteria will have to work overtime to break it down.

How do you reduce nitrate in aquarium?

Use a nitrate remover such as ALGONE ALGONE gently removes nitrates from the aquarium and effectively prevents all the common problems associated with high nitrate levels. Through nitrate reduction ALGONE also clears cloudy and murky aquarium water, restoring a brilliant, crystal clear water column.

How to reduce nitrate in your aquarium?

Free Ways To Reduce Aquarium Nitrates: Remove Detritus. Vacuum the sand regularly with each water change. Reduce Feeding Quantity. This is the easiest and one of the biggest causes of high Nitrates because we all love to keep our fish ‘Fat & Happy’! Increase Water Change Volume & Frequency. Rinse Store-Bought Frozen Food. Overstocked?

How do I lower me nitrates?

How to promptly lower the nitrite levels in your freshwater aquarium? Change 30% of the water. With this initial step, you aim to replace part of the nitrite-rich water. Add nitrifying bacteria. Since high nitrite levels are signaling an incomplete nitrogen cycle, this should be your second course of action. Set a filter. Filters are where most of the beneficial bacteria live. Add substrate from an established aquarium.

Carpenter’s Flasher Wrasse

Carpenter’s Flasher Wrasse

Put simply, the biological cycle that happens within your aquarium starts with wasted food & fish waste. This is converted into ammonia, which is then converted in to Nitrite, the that is converted into Nitrate.

Though corals and fish needs some Nitrate to thrive, high numbers will reduce their vibrancy, growth rates & may put their lives in danger.

10-20% Water changes are unlikely to have a significant effect of lowering Nitrates in your fish tank.

Here are the top 5 ways you can reduce your Nitrates within your Aquarium.

5. Reduced Feeding

It’s tempting, but just don’t do it!

” data-medium-file=”https://firsttimemarinekeeperhome.files.wordpress.com/2019/04/overfed-fish.jpg?w=256″ data-large-file=”https://firsttimemarinekeeperhome.files.wordpress.com/2019/04/overfed-fish.jpg?w=256″ src=”https://firsttimemarinekeeperhome.files.wordpress.com/2019/04/overfed-fish.jpg?w=256″ alt=”Overfed Fish” srcset=”https://firsttimemarinekeeperhome.files.wordpress.com/2019/04/overfed-fish.jpg 256w, https://firsttimemarinekeeperhome.files.wordpress.com/2019/04/overfed-fish.jpg?w=150 150w” sizes=”(max-width: 256px) 100vw, 256px” /> It’s tempting, but just don’t do it!

We all love feeding our fish, but over feeding your tank to the point where food is sent to your filtration, or it is left uneaten at the bottom of your tank will increase the Nitrate within your tank.

Reducing the amount you feed, will reduce the amount of waste, which in turn will reduce the amount of ammonia etc for the denitrification bacteria to consume.

” data-medium-file=”https://firsttimemarinekeeperhome.files.wordpress.com/2019/04/live-rock.jpg?w=300″ data-large-file=”https://firsttimemarinekeeperhome.files.wordpress.com/2019/04/live-rock.jpg?w=616″ src=”https://firsttimemarinekeeperhome.files.wordpress.com/2019/04/live-rock.jpg?w=616″ alt=”live rock” width=”256″ height=”197″ /> live rock

4. More Live Rock

Live rock is called live rock because of the bacteria that grows on it.

The more live rock you have, the more bacteria you have, the more bacteria you have, the easier it is for the bacteria to process the waste.

Live rock also offers critters such as copepods, bristleworms, peanut worms and other great additions to your clean up crew, a perfect place to hide. All of these helpful hitch-hikers will help reduce the waste within your aquarium, which will help reduce nitrates.

Live rock substitutes like ceramic media would also have the same effect.

3. Carbon Dosing – The Cheap Way

Carbon dosing doesn’t have to be expensive & you can use a couple of items to do it that can be found in most local supermarkets.

Common Carbon Sources

” data-medium-file=”https://firsttimemarinekeeperhome.files.wordpress.com/2019/08/carbon_src.jpg?w=300″ data-large-file=”https://firsttimemarinekeeperhome.files.wordpress.com/2019/08/carbon_src.jpg?w=420″ src=”https://firsttimemarinekeeperhome.files.wordpress.com/2019/08/carbon_src.jpg?w=420″ alt=”Common Carbon Sources” width=”256″ srcset=”https://firsttimemarinekeeperhome.files.wordpress.com/2019/08/carbon_src.jpg 420w, https://firsttimemarinekeeperhome.files.wordpress.com/2019/08/carbon_src.jpg?w=150 150w, https://firsttimemarinekeeperhome.files.wordpress.com/2019/08/carbon_src.jpg?w=300 300w” sizes=”(max-width: 420px) 100vw, 420px” /> Common Carbon Sources

  1. Vodka Dosing.
  2. Sugar Dosing.
  3. Vinigar

By adding carbon to your aquarium, you are increase the amount of bacteria within your tank, this allows the bacteria to deal with the nasty bacteria in a more effective manner.

Once your bacteria can keep up with the denitrification required, your skimmer will take over and remove the Nitrate.

You can use the below chart to work out how much to dose. This is based on 80% proof unflavoured vodka in ml. To use this for sugar, 0.1ml of vodka is equal to 1/10th of a teaspoon of sugar.

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

NOTE: You need an efficient skimmer for this to work properly

2. Grow Algae

” data-medium-file=”https://firsttimemarinekeeperhome.files.wordpress.com/2019/08/chaeto-algae.jpg?w=300″ data-large-file=”https://firsttimemarinekeeperhome.files.wordpress.com/2019/08/chaeto-algae.jpg?w=616″ src=”https://firsttimemarinekeeperhome.files.wordpress.com/2019/08/chaeto-algae.jpg” alt=”” width=”256″ height=”236″ /> Chaeto Algae

Now, when I say algae, I don’t mean hair algae or other nasty looking algae. I mean a Macro-Algae such as Chaetomorpha or Caulerpa.

Algae uses nutrients to grow, one of the main nutrients it uses is Nitrate.

By setting up a refrugium or an algae scrubber, every time you harvest the algae you are physically removing a great big lump of Nitrate.

You will need a grow light of some kind, which will have an additional electrical cost.

1. Nitrate Reactors

” data-medium-file=”https://firsttimemarinekeeperhome.files.wordpress.com/2019/08/nitrate-reactor.jpg?w=300″ data-large-file=”https://firsttimemarinekeeperhome.files.wordpress.com/2019/08/nitrate-reactor.jpg?w=614″ src=”https://firsttimemarinekeeperhome.files.wordpress.com/2019/08/nitrate-reactor.jpg” alt=”” width=”256″ height=”180″ /> Nitrate Reactor

Though this is the most expensive means of removing Nitrate on this list, it is also the easiest & most effective way. Buying a piece of equipment that is purpose built to help reduce nitrates will be more efficient than trying to do something yourself. It will also help reduce the chance of you making a mistake and causing a bacteria bloom in your aquarium!

By creating an anaerobic chamber inside a reactor, a colony of nitrate-consuming bacteria is established on the media that is placed within it. As the bacteria grows, your nitrates will lower.

Donations

This website is expensive to run in both monetary value and time. If you like what you see, and find this site helpful, please consider donating towards the running costs of the site.

Editor’s Picks

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

Features Post
The highs and lows of the ‘Insta-aquarist’
23 February 2022

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

Fishkeeping News Post
A visual guide to butterflyfishes
15 February 2022

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

Fishkeeping News Post
Women in fishkeeping
15 February 2022

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

Fishkeeping News Post
Easy tiger.
15 February 2022

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

Features Post
What caused this snail die-off?
04 January 2022

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

Features Post
Why does my common goldfish have a swollen abdomen?
04 January 2022

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

Nitrate is less of a problem in your aquarium than ammonia or nitrite, but it still shouldn’t be ignored. Matt Clarke answers some of the most frequently asked questions on nitrate.

Nitrate is less of a problem in your aquarium than ammonia or nitrite, but it still shouldn’t be ignored. Matt Clarke answers some of the most frequently asked questions on nitrate.

What is nitrate?

Nitrate (NO3 ) is a by-product of the breakdown of fish wastes by beneficial bacteria living in the filter. It encourages algal growth and may be toxic to some fish and invertebrates.

How can I tell how much is present in the tank?

You should test your water every week for signs of nitrate using a liquid or tablet test kit. Test your tapwater at the same time and compare the two.

If you are maintaining your tank properly, the two nitrate levels should be quite similar. If you’re not, the nitrate level in your tank will be much higher.

Surely nitrate hasn’t always been seen as a problem?

There’s been a sneaking suspicion that high levels can cause problems for fish for many years. Research has failed to show that it is toxic to most species, except at high levels. However, fishkeeping experience suggests that it does actually cause a number of problems for fish.

What levels should I be aiming for?

Try to keep the nitrate level as low as possible. Some fish and inverts are particularly sensitive to raised levels. For inverts and sensitive marines, the levels must be below 15ppm. Tropical freshwater species should be kept below 40ppm, where possible.

How do I maintain a low nitrate level?

Overfeeding is a common cause of high nitrate levels. Regular partial water changes of 25% every week or two help to keep the nitrate level low. Do them with a syphon-powered gravel cleaner and remove decaying organic material from the gravel at the same time.

Nitrate-removing filter media will keep the nitrate level extra low, but isn’t a substitute for plenty of water changes.

What effect will high nitrate levels have on my fish?

High levels of nitrate will stress your fish. This affects their immune systems and they are much more at risk from diseases such as whitespot.

Increased levels over a long term may reduce your fishes’ lifespans, cause deformities and won’t help much if you’re trying to breed them – poor water quality doesn’t put fish in the mood.

What should I do if the nitrate level in my tapwater is very high?

If you’re keeping delicate fish or inverts any water you use for water changes should be run through a nitrate-removing resin, or a tapwater filter like a Nitragon, before use to remove the nitrate.

An RO unit is even better as it also filters out metals, pesticides, hardness etc, so it’s ideal for softwater fish as well as delicate marine species.

The existing fish in my aquarium all seem healthy and my ammonia and nitrite levels are at nil. The tank has been set up for two years. Every time I buy new fish, they stop eating after a couple of days and then, usually within a week, they die. What’s the problem?

You may have checked the ammonia and nitrite levels (which are very important), but what about your nitrate level?

If your nitrate has gradually risen over time since your tank was set up, your fish will probably have built up some resistance to it. But any new stock you add to a tank where there is a high nitrate level may fall ill or die.

Try to stay on top of tank maintenance and check how much you’re feeding your fish. Remember to remove all uneaten food from the aquarium.

How do I lower the nitrate, alkalinity and pH in my freshwater tank

Nitrates can be lowered by performing water changes.
Nitrates will always go up due to fish producing waste, and leftover food being processed by bacteria (nitrogen cycle). Having a planted tank can help reduce nitrate levels, but water changes is a must (weekly).

Alkalinity is how basic your water is (eg a pH above 7)

What is your pH and all your other water parameters (eg. ammonia, nitrite, nitrate, temp)?

My Nitrate is 80.
My Nitrite is 10.0.
My Hardness is 75.
My Alkalinity is lighter than 0.
My ph is 6.8.

What an I do to maintain my tank better. I change the water weekly. I have fizz pills that I put in for Ammonia and reduces chlorine, and for ick and fungus..
Are these levels to dangerous for my freshwater babies

Your pH is good for most tetras, but what fish do you have? All evolved under different conditions we should try to offer them. we have to adapt to their needs.
Lowering the alkalinity is lowering the pH – generally, it isn’t necessary.
Don’t treat for Ich and fungus unless the fish are sick. Keep those fizzy pills in reserve, and just use the treatments against chloramines.

Soo, tank size, and fish numbers and species would help us help.

I have a 20 gallon. I have red eyes, neons, guppies. Albino catfish, sucker fish, ghost shrimps. Two of each fish

You say you have 2 guppies- that isn’t health for them. They need to be in school of odd numbers (at least 3) with more females than males as the males will bother the females and stress them out

The ideal concentration of nitrite in a reef aquarium is less than 0.2 ppm or 200 ppb. Nitrite levels above this value may weaken sensitive fish and corals.

How much nitrite can marine fish tolerate?

By many accounts, the optimal amount of nitrate in any type of saltwater system is an immeasurable one, but an acceptable range for fish-only tanks is from 10 to 40 ppm. Although fish-only tanks may run at much higher levels, sometimes with no ill effects, this is not recommended.

How much nitrite should be in a fish tank?

Generally, the safe level of nitrites in an aquarium is considered to be between 0 and 0.2 ppm (ml/g).

How much nitrite is too much in aquarium?

Nitrite levels above 0.75 ppm in water can cause stress in fish and greater than 5 ppm can be toxic. Nitrate levels from 0 – 40 ppm are generally safe for fish. Anything greater than 80 can be toxic.

How do you get nitrites down in a saltwater tank?

How do you reduce nitrite levels? Water change! A 30-50% water change should be the first thing you do after confirming a nitrite spike. Add cycled filters. As I touched on earlier, bacteria turn nitrites into much less harmful nitrates. Water conditioner. This is essentially a nitrite remover in a bottle.

Is nitrite bad for saltwater?

Its toxicity in marine systems is far lower than in freshwater systems. Nevertheless, many aquarists incorrectly extrapolate this toxicity to reef aquariums and suggest that any measurable amount of nitrite is a concern. In reality, nitrite probably is not toxic enough to warrant measuring in most marine systems.

How long does it take for nitrites to turn into nitrates?

After a water change, the nitrite spikes within 24 hours and then the nitrate will spike about 24-48 hours after that. However, the nitrite is still at extremely high levels even after the nitrate spikes.

What should my nitrite level be freshwater?

In freshwater aquariums, nitrates should be kept below 50 ppm at all times, and preferably below 25 ppm. If you are breeding fish, or are battling algae growth, keep nitrate even lower, below 10 ppm.

How long can fish live with high nitrites?

Eventually, fish death will begin, occurring over a period of a few days to a few weeks. When fish are suddenly exposed to very high nitrate levels, they will usually die within 24 hours of exposure. Often owners are not aware of the problem until the fish are dead or near death.

How can I lower my nitrite levels?

First, perform water changes with dechlorinated water to reduce the nitrite level. The addition of a half-ounce (1 tablespoon) of salt per gallon of water will prevent methemoglobin toxicity by blocking the nitrite absorption through the fish’s gills. Any aquarium salt or marine salt mix can be used.

Is 10 ppm nitrate too high?

Although many aquarists run their tanks with extreme nitrate levels, the ideal is a maximum of 5 to 10 ppm. Levels of 20 to 50 ppm are too high.

Why won’t my nitrite levels go down?

Doing water changes is the only way to get your nitrites down. Keep up the changes and remember that water changes do not slow down a tank cycle. You have to grow the nitrite eating bacteria and that bacteria will reduce them to 0. If you keep removing every bit of them with water changes, you can’t grow the bacteria.

What do I do if my nitrites are high in my fish tank?

What should I do? Complete a 25% water change and retest after a few hours. Add Fast Filter Start to boost the natural bacteria in your filter to process the extra nitrite. Support the health of your fish using Aquilibrium First Aid Salt. Continue to regularly test your water.

What causes a nitrite spike?

Overfeeding and overstocking can lead to high nitrite levels, but incorrect filter maintenance and new tank syndrome are perhaps the most common cause. To speed-up the growth of bacteria in new filters you can transfer some media from an existing filter, or add a bacterial starter culture and food source.

How much nitrite can clown fish tolerate?

For marine organ- isms, the ranges in safe concentrations are higher – 0.5 to 15.0 mg/L for invertebrates and 5.0 to 50.0 mg/L for fish. Nitrite toxicity is not a common problem in brackishwater and seawater systems, but it is relatively common in freshwater.”Nov 6, 2020.

Is nitrite toxic to corals?

Nitrite is not toxic to corals, some corals, not so much to saltwater fishes than to fresh water fishes? It is very intersting point.

How quickly do nitrites drop?

This process normally takes anywhere from 2-6 weeks. At temperatures below 70F, it takes even longer to cycle a tank.

How do you know when your saltwater tank is cycled?

How To Know When The Aquarium Cycle Is Complete? The only way you can truly see what is going on in your cycle is by testing your Ammonia, Nitrites, and Nitrates every day or two and record the results.

Do nitrates mean tank is cycled?

When nitrates are being produced and ammonia and nitrite levels are zero, your tank is fully cycled and your biological filter is fully functioning (from 2-6 weeks). In low levels, nitrates are not highly toxic to fish. Routine partial water changes of about 10% should keep nitrate levels within a safe range.

Do Live plants help with nitrites?

Healthy aquarium plants absorb nitrogen compounds including nitrite and ammonia from the water. The fact is, keeping plants healthy and happy takes more work than most people realize.

How is nitrite removed from water?

Nitrite can be removed from drinking water by reverse osmosis, distillation or ion exchange. Boiling, carbon adsorption filters and standard water softeners do not remove nitrite.

Does distilling water remove nitrates?

Nitrate may be successfully removed from water using treatment processes such as ion exchange, distillation, and reverse osmosis. Heating or boiling your water will not remove nitrate.

How do you reduce nitrate and nitrite in a fish tank?

What can we do to aid in the removal of nitrates from the aquarium? Add live plants to a freshwater aquarium. Plants naturally utilize nitrate as a nutrient and food. Reduce fish population or upgrade to bigger tank. Cut back on feeding. Use a nitrate remover such as ALGONE.

Why are nitrate levels important?

Nitrate levels in aquariums need to be controlled as at high levels they compromise the health and well-being of the fish. This can eventually lead to bacterial and fungal infections, Whitespot, Fin-rot and other diseases that take advantage of compromised immunity. High nitrate levels are often the cause of excessive algae growth too.

The level of nitrates tolerated without ill-effect varies from species to species, but as a general rule-of-thumb the level in the tank should be kept as low as possible: always below 40ppm and preferably below 20ppm. Some species have a particularly low threshold for nitrates – Fancy Goldfish need levels below 20ppm as higher amounts can cause buoyancy problems which are frequently mistaken for Swim Bladder Disease. Where fish have low nitrate tolerance care sheets for such species will usually indicate this.

Water should be tested weekly using an aquarium nitrate test to monitor the level so you can be ready to take appropriate action when levels rise.

How do nitrates get into the water?

Nitrates are the end product of the Nitrogen Cycle. Any aquarium with life in it will accumulate nitrates as a natural consequence of the filtering process. Standard filtration does not deal with nitrates and they must be removed by regular partial water changes. A typical freshwater aquarium with the correct amount of stock, efficient filtration and correct feeding will need a water change of around 25% every week to keep nitrate levels in check and to replenish essential minerals and trace elements in the water that have been consumed by the tank’s occupants and plants.

Nitrates are usually present in the tap water used to fill the tank. The level varies with the source of the tap water, but in the UK must be no more than 50ppm by law. Most UK water suppliers provide information by postcode on various aspects of water quality for the locality, including the average nitrate level, but because this can still vary it is advisable to use your test kit to establish the nitrate level in your own water supply.

What should I do if nitrates in my tank are too high?

The first thing to do when you realise you have a high nitrate level in your aquarium is to establish the cause. Many of the common causes can be remedied simply by changes to tank husbandry. Is your tank overstocked? Are you skimping on your partial water changes? Are you forgetting to clean trapped waste from the gravel? Are you feeding too much? If the answer to any of those questions is “Yes”, the solution to the problem is easily within your control.

If your tank is correctly stocked, not overfed and is properly maintained by weekly gravel vacuuming and 25% water changes then the problem may be that nitrates in your water supply are high. The level of nitrates in the tank can never realistically be lower than that of the water you put in, so if the water from your tap already has a high level it makes life a little more difficult.

How can I reduce nitrate levels in the tank if my water supply already has a high level?

There are a number of ways to approach this, but all involve either taking nitrates out of the water before it ever goes into the tank, or changes to the tank and filters to allow some nitrate reduction to occur inside the tank.

Reducing Nitrates in the tank itself

This approach is the simplest, especially where tap levels are higher than you’d like, but still a reasonable amount less than the 40ppm maximum recommended. Keeping to a minimal stock level will obviously help, as will taking care not to overfeed, removing uneaten food daily and increasing water changes to twice a week instead of once.

Adding more live plants can produce a quite respectable reduction as the plants will consume some of the ammonia produced by the fish before it is converted to nitrate. Floating plants such as Duckweed are particularly good for this.

Nitrate absorbing sponges such as those made by Juwel can be used in your filter, but must be regularly replaced as they become exhausted. API Nitrazorb Pouches can be placed in your filter in a similar manner, but have the advantage that they can be recharged when exhausted by soaking in salt water.

Products such as Seachem DeNitrate and Seachem Matrix can be used inside filter canisters as part of the biological filtration mechanism and have the advantage that they do not need to be regularly replaced or recharged. Seachem DeNitrate is only effective in low flow filters running at less than 200 litres per hour so it may be advisable to add a secondary low powered filter filled with this specifically for nitrate reduction. Matrix can be used in higher powered filters.

Liquid additives such as Tetra Nitrate Minus contain small beads impregnated with nitrate-eating bacteria. Because these bacteria are typically anaerobic in their action, their life is limited when introduced in this way and the treatment needs to be repeated weekly to maintain satisfactory nitrate levels. It is a very simple treatment to use as it is added directly into the aquarium, but its disadvantage is the ongoing cost of regular treatment.

Reducing Nitrates in Tap Water

Where tap water nitrate levels are unacceptably high there are a number of ways to reduce the concentration before adding the water to your tank.

Mixing tap water with RO water may be a very straightforward option, especially for those who also need to reduce water hardness. It’s easy to calculate the reduction given by any mix ratio as the concentration of nitrates reduces proportionally. E.g. a mix of half tap water and half RO water will halve the nitrate level. RO water can be purchased from many LFSs for quite a small cost, or you can install your own RO filter to produce RO water. RO water should not be used “neat” as it has none of the minerals essential to fish health and has no buffering capacity and so has unstable pH.

Another alternative is to use a nitrate reducing filter. This will remove nitrates from the water, leaving other aspects of the water chemistry untouched. These can either be permanently plumbed into your water supply, with their own tap, or used in a temporary arrangement with a tap adaptor as and when needed.

A third option is to fill a container with tap water a couple of days before a water change and run an internal filter filled with nitrate reducing media in the container. A heater can also be added if desired, to bring the water to the correct temperature for your tank.

Final Comments

Please remember that reducing nitrates by any of these methods can be useful where there is a real problem, but should never be used as a substitute for correct stocking levels, regular water changes and proper tank maintenance.

06 Jul NITRITE AND NITRATE IN AQUARIUM: What are No2- and No3 water values

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tankNitrites and Nitrates are harmful and undesirable chemical compounds in aquarium, resulting from a biological decomposition process that comes from fish or invertebrate waste substances such as feces, urine and excess food. You must to know that the biological load, that is, the ratio between the number of fishes in relation to the water volume of the tank and the filtration system will be very important for determining a good or pollutants biosystem.

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tankIn a good aquarium and then in a functioning biosystem, the so-called “Nitrogen Cycle” is replaced by miraculous bacteria called Nitrosomonas and Nitrobacter, in the transformation of proteins in excess, into Ammonium then in Nitrite No2- and finally in Nitrate No3. This last product will be essential for the life of plants that thanks to Co2 and light, will largely overwhelm it and produce oxygen useful for fishes and invertebrates breathing. In practice, it will form a system that can go on its own where animals waste materials will help plant growth, and consequently, waste plants substances will serve fishes. Summing up and explaining the “Nitrogen Cycle”, you can understand that you will be project and set up a tank that can activate this biosystem in the shortest time and in the best possible way, that will prevent the presence of harmful substances. To do this there are some important rules that you will have to follow:

1 – Maintain a low biological load, that is a good ratio between individuals and water liters of the tank .

2 – Installing an excellent mechanical filtering system, will help retain all those debris that would increase the ammonium levels in the aquarium.

3 – Let biological filtering, consisting of the proliferation of Nitrobacter and Nitrosomonas bacteria, be broadly effective, using ceramic rings in the filter, oxygenated substrates made of porous gravel or lava stone where these bacteria will easily colonize. We can also buy products that contain latent bacteria for accelerate the colonization process.

4Planting the aquarium very much and make the plants efficiently with the correct Co2 Carbon Dioxide Systems and with adequate illumination, increasing the consumption of Nitrates No3 and increase the oxygen production.

5Make periodic changes of water with the help of special siphons that will also eliminate the debris on the bottom, keeping under control the values No2 – No3.

6Be very careful when you administering the food, check the total consumption during meals, the food should be finished in less than 5 minutes.

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tankIn conclusion, the efficiency of the biosystem and of the Nitrogen Cycle is fundamental and very important, anyhow the presence of N02- and No3 values must be detected by various systems that we can find on the market, such as reagent strips or liquid reagents that will indicate the actual presence in water. The values that you will find, to be sure that the biosystem is not “polluted” and then animals are not negatively affected are:

Once you have set up your fish tank and added water, then you’re probably excited to begin adding fish. However, there is an important step you must take before adding fish. You must cycle your fish tank.

Cycling a fish tank includes growing nitrifying bacteria to convert fish waste. The name for this process is called the nitrogen cycle.

NOTE: You will need to be patient as your tank cycles. If you try to add fish too early, they may die from ammonia poisoning.

Beneficial bacteria is needed to take toxic fish waste called ammonia and convert it into nitrite and nitrate. Growing this beneficial bacteria takes time! It may take 4 to 6 weeks for the process to complete.

FYI: Salinity, ammonia, nitrite, and nitrate levels are all examples of water parameters.

Start the nitrogen cycle by adding 4 drops of Ammonium Chloride per gallon of water (the instructions will be on the bottle). We sell Ammonium Chloride at the front of the store. The ammonia level in your tank will spike, reaching levels above 1ppm, then it will turn into nitrite and finally nitrate. Again, this process usually takes several weeks. It is important to wait until your ammonia levels reduce to 0ppm before adding fish.

It is also essential to add Live Rock, Bio Media and/or Dry Rock to your tank for the cycle to complete. Beneficial bacteria will cling to the rock and bio media.

Live Rock helps provide beneficial bacteria. You can also use Dry Rock or Bio Media and then add the bacteria yourself. Dr Tim’s Live Nitrifying Bacteria is a great source for beneficial bacteria. We sell this product at the front of the store.

How do you know when your tank is fully cycled and ready for fish?

When your ammonia levels reduce to .25ppm, your nitrate levels will begin to rise. Your tank is close to completing the cycling process when you see a rise in nitrates. It is best to wait until there is 0ppm of ammonia in your tank before adding fish. Once you have 0ppm of ammonia, then you can add one hardy fish such as a clownfish or a green chromis. Be sure to acclimate your new fish to your tank. It’s recommended to add one fish at a time. Adding many fish at once can lead to an ammonia spike that could kill them.

After you add your new fish, be sure to check your water parameters daily. If your water parameters begin to rise after adding new fish, then perform a water change. You can also add more nitrifying bacteria after changing the water. Finally, you can use Prime (Seachem Prime Fresh and Saltwater Conditioner) to detoxify the ammonia, if needed.

Be patient through the beginning cycling process. It is worth the wait! Remember, all of our tanks at Aquatic Collection started out by cycling them.

Again, the products you will need to buy to start your nitrogen cycle once your tank is filled with water:

Bio Media, Dry Rock, or Live Rock

Live Nitrifying Bacteria

Ammonia, Nitrite, and Nitrate Test Kits

Prime (Seachem Prime Fresh and Saltwater Conditioner)

All of these are available for purchase at Aquatic Collection!

  • How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

The good news is. They Can Be Beaten Down Into Submission.

Nitrates are a part of nature in the ocean, and correspondingly in our tanks. As waste breaks down in your aquarium, it cycles from ammonia to nitrite to nitrates. The first two are highly toxic to marine life, and we make it a point to make sure our tanks test zero for these. However, nitrates aren’t as bad, and sometimes are even a little beneficial.

Specifically, few organisms need nitrates. Both micro and macro algae love the stuff, while fish tolerate it. Invertebrates suffer if the levels are too high, but a little is required to keep clams happy. In our goal to match NSW as closely as possible, we strive to keep nitrates down to a minimum at 10 ppm or less.

First things first — what is causing the nitrates in your tank? Bioballs, biowheels, filter pads, foam blocks & tubes, and under gravel filters all contribute to the production of nitrates. Overfeeding is another cause, and a lack of water changes will be another factor.

Nitrates are in the water column, not your substrate or rockwork. Frequent large water changes will quickly reduce the amounts of nitrates present in your system. I battled with nitrates for years, even when using Nitrate Sponge on a weekly basis. I’d change 5 gallons in my 29 gallon tank and see the nitrates drop from 80 to 60ppm, only to rise again. I’d cringe when I’d run a new test and see the fluid bright red before the timer was even set!

Once I removed the 3 year-old under gravel filter & my Penguin Biowheel filter filled with bioballs, I was finally on track. I did three 10 gallon water changes in one week, or 33% at a time. Nitrates were down to 20ppm. I became more meticulous with my water changes, changing 7 – 10 gallons each time every two weeks.

Later on that year, I added a sump & refugium to that tank. The saying “Dilution is the Solution to Pollution” proved to be absolutely true. The macro algae in the refugium as well as the small sandbed helped denitrify my tank, and nitrates are ranging from 0 – 2ppm with a water change only being done every other month.

In November 2002, I bought an existing 55 gallon tank filled with seven fish, 120 lbs of live rock and crushed coral substrate. The previous owners never tested their water, and the nitrates were 200ppm or more. Through a series of major water changes in those first two weeks, nitrates were lowered without stressing the fish. The substrate was replaced with a DSB (deep sand bed), and the canister filters with biowheels were removed as a sump was incorporated. Nitrates were down to 7ppm after three months, and only one fish was lost during that period (probably due to starvation… it never looked healthy).

If your tank is suffering from high nitrate levels, the success of your reef will depend on your being able to get this under control. Changing 100% of the water would be the ideal, but it may shock your corals, fish and invertebrates in the process. A more gradual way is recommended.

Example from my 55-gallon Reef : Make up 20 gallons of fresh saltwater in a trashcan in front of your tank. Drain 10 gallons of tank water into the 20 gallons of new water, and let that mix. Pump 10 gallons of that water back into your tank, and let the power heads mix that water up in your tank for a minute or so. Then repeat this three more times. Dispose of the now polluted 20 gallons of water. Make up another 20 gallons of fresh saltwater, and repeat this procedure. As long as your temperature and salinity match the tank, your inhabitants won’t be affected adversely, and with each rotation of water, the nitrates are being diluted and removed from your tank.

Simply pulling out all of the water in one massive water change puts stress on your entire tank. Doing small water changes consistently won’t bring nitrate levels down. At best, it will maintain them at their current levels. Using the example above, a tank that was at 80ppm would be around 30ppm after a couple of hours work and your population will be happy and unaffected. Once your nitrate levels drop, they are easily kept low with regular water changes, as well as the use of a DSB and macro algae.

Your tank will be healthier, your reef happier and the nitrate problem fixed!

Update – 5/10/09:

Since the writing of this article six years ago, other options have become available. Some people have opted to purchase a De-nitrification Reactor, such as the one made by Midwest Systems. These definitely work, but they are not cheap.

Another method that has proven effective is to dose the tank with a carbon source, such as vodka, sugar, or vinegar. Some use a combination of these three products, concocting a very precise dosing regiment. Please do your homework before putting anything new in your tank. I’ve been dosing my 280g reef tank with vodka since July 2008, and will be doing a write up soon on what that entailed and how it worked. In the meantime, here’s the article that was my guide. Please read it very carefully: Notes from the Trenches – Vodka Dosing. Distilled!

Update – 5/11/09:

Was that soon enough? LOL Here’s the article: Vodka Dosing – Why?

Update – 6/3/11:

Now I’m using biopellets. And it’s working great so far.

Update – 9/30/14:

I stopped running biopellets and am only using Prodibio after waiting about 3 months for the corals to settle down after an accidental overdosing event. I did a few water changes and waited 12 weeks, the resumed Prodibio dosing every 15 days.

Another nitrate reduction method that has worked for some is NoPox by RedSea which is great for smaller system, but has to be dosed daily.

Update – 1/28/16:

Using biopellets once more to get nitrates back down as they rose inexplicably high in record time over the holidays.

Update – 11/30/16:

Nitrate has measured less than 2ppm for over six months. Here’s my video pertaining to important biopellet knowledge after years of personal experience:

And I’m using the Elos Nitrate test kit these days. API is just fine if you want to go that route, but Elos measures between 0 and 25ppm with a very easy to determine color chart.

Last Updated: Feb 10 2022

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

All healthy aquariums will have nitrates in the water. This is the result of the nitrogen cycle (the process whereby nitrifying bacteria is formed). Although a small number of nitrates present in the water will not pose harm to your inhabitants, if the maximum parts per million (ppm) is exceeded, you will start to have trouble inside of your saltwater aquarium. All fish can tolerate a maximum amount of 20 ppm to 40 ppm nitrates before overdose symptoms will strike. It is said that fish and invertebrates can adapt to the level of nitrates in an aquarium. This is simply false and will cause health issues once a water change is completed.

The chemistry of the water is important to maintain a healthy saltwater aquarium. Fortunately, this article will inform you of our top 8 methods to lower the number of nitrates in your saltwater aquarium.

Table of contents

Understanding Nitrates

You may be wondering what exactly nitrates are? Nitrates are a product of the nitrogen cycle produced from rotting foods, fish and invertebrate waste, and decomposing plant matter. It is derived from the conversion of ammonia into nitrites until it is finally converted to nitrates. Nitrate is less toxic to aquatic inhabitants when it is compared to deadly ammonia and nitrites. Both ammonia and nitrites should be 0 ppm to avoid illness and eventually death in both fish and invertebrates.

Nitrates are more tolerated and can stay under an ideal amount of 30 ppm. Although some fish can only tolerate up to 20 ppm and the hardier fish have been reported to tolerate up to 40 ppm. Death can occur if the inhabitants are left untreated for more than a few hours in severe cases and 48 hours in mild cases.

How to lower your nitratenitrite levels in your fish tank

Image Credit: Ihor Matsiievskyi, Shutterstock

Using a Test Kit

The only way to find out the number of nitrates in the aquarium is done by a liquid test kit. Since nitrites are invisible compounds that cannot be seen inside of the water, testing the water for all three parameters is essential. We recommend testing the water at least once a week. You can even design a document or journal the number of nitrates in your saltwater aquarium after every test.

Nitrate Poisoning in Fish

Watching out for symptoms of high nitrates is important for all aquarium keepers. The onset of symptoms can be very sudden and may catch you off guard. A healthy fish can quickly turn sickly if exposed to undesirable nitrate levels.

Similarly, you may ask, how do you fix nitrate levels in a fish tank?

How to remove aquarium nitrate:

  1. Add live plants to a freshwater aquarium. Plants naturally utilize nitrate as a nutrient and food.
  2. Reduce fish population or upgrade to bigger tank. Fish waste results in an increase of nitrate levels.
  3. Cut back on feeding.
  4. Use a nitrate remover such as ALGONE.

Subsequently, question is, how do I reduce nitrites during my period?

  1. Water change! A 30-50% water change should be the first thing you do after confirming a nitrite spike.
  2. Add cycled filters. As I touched on earlier, bacteria turn nitrites into much less harmful nitrates.
  3. Water conditioner. This is essentially a nitrite remover in a bottle.

Beside this, how do you lower ammonia levels in a fish tank?

To lower ammonia levels in a fish tank, do weekly partial water changes, removing around 30% of the water in the tank and replacing it with fresh, dechlorinated water. You should also scoop out any organic matter that shouldn’t be in the tank, like uneaten food, fish waste, and uneaten plant matter.

How do you remove nitrates from water?

Nitrate may be successfully removed from water using treatment processes such as ion exchange, distillation, and reverse osmosis. Contact your local health department for recommended procedures. Heating or boiling your water will not remove nitrate.

Controlling the water parameters in your saltwater aquarium is crucial for it to thrive and one of the most important things to keep in check is the nitrate level. But what exactly are nitrates and why do they matter for the longevity of your reef?

Chemical Nitrate Reducers

De*Nitrate

Add to a hang-on filter or sump in a mesh bag to bind up excess nitrate.

NO3-PO4-X

Highly regarded nitrate and phosphate control liquid additive.

Nitrate Reducer

Alternative liquid nitrate reducer from a well-respected brand.

Nitrate Filter

Filter media pad that can be placed in the flow of your sump or hang-on filter.

What Even Are Nitrates?

Nitrates are essentially the end product of the nitrogen cycle and are the least toxic of the compounds. That does not mean that nitrates are safe though. They are still able to cause issues for your tank’s inhabitants if not properly kept in check. Though some corals can use nitrate for growth, they do not need high levels of it. Nitrate should be kept between .25 ppm and 5 ppm.

Some Issues Nitrates Cause for Your Aquarium

  • Coral can die or lose its color
  • High algae growth
  • Illness and death for aquarium inhabitants

What causes high nitrates in a reef aquarium?

Nitrates can commonly become a problem for reef tanks that are not quite prepared for the levels of nitrate present. For example, your aquarium might not have all the live rock and beneficial bacteria that would help to keep the nitrate levels in check. They can be caused by poor care practices such as overfeeding and infrequent water changes.

Avoiding High Nitrates Means Adhering to Best Care Practices

Avoid Overfeeding Your Fish

Food that is left uneaten and increased waste produced by fish will all begin to wreak havoc on the tank’s water quality. Not only can overfeeding cause a spike in nitrates in your aquarium water but it can also lead to increased ammonia levels. Try measuring the food for your fish so that they can eat it all in 1-2 minutes. This will help to cut down on the over-abundance of food present. If you don’t think you are feeding enough, you can always add more a little later. It is easier to add more food later than it is trying to remove excess food. And always try to stick to a schedule. I typically use a digital excel sheet to help remind me when and if I fed my aquarium that day. Whatever you need to do to be consistent in your practices, do it. By preventing overfeeding, you help make it easier to reduce nitrate levels naturally.

Frequent Water Changes

Perform your regular water changes to help remove excess waste, algae, and provide quality clean water for your fish. How much constitutes a good water change? Try to aim for between 15 – 30 percent for your weekly water changes. Ensure that the water you are adding back into your tank is safe and ready to mix with your aquarium’s water. That means no nitrates in the water (you know the compound we are trying to keep as low as possible). You can use filtered water and test the water before you actually begin to add it to the tank. You can buy nitrate test kits for your water changes if you use a nitrate monitoring system in your tank.

Add more Live Rock

One of the reasons your tank may have started with a nitrate imbalance is that it did not have the time to properly mature with bacteria before you began adding your fish. If you barely have any live rock, you should seriously consider adding more to your reef aquarium. Live rock comes with helpful bacteria that can be beneficial to a variety of things in your tank. One of those benefits is helping to cultivate the bacteria that work to reduce nitrates.

This should only be done if you did not take the time to properly add enough live rock in the first place. Throwing in an unnecessary live rock into your tank could cause more bad than good due to wasted space, blocked water flow, and algae buildup.

Protein Skimmer

A skimmer is always a great thing to consider if it is within your budget. They help to reduce the buildup of nitrates in the first place by cleaning up the waste and algae that it is derived from. They don’t directly reduce the nitrate level from the aquarium water instead they remove the compounds that lead to the production of nitrate. They are a great proactive tool to help keep your tank’s water quality perfect.

Get a good clean-up crew

A good clean-up crew will help to clean up a lot of the excess waste that might be missed by frequent water changes and your protein skimmer. Nas snails would make a great addition to your tank’s clean-up crew. They like to dig in the sand which causes it to be turned over and reveal waste that might have sunk into the sand bed allowing for it to be eaten or cleaned. Emerald crabs are also great for eating up algae and leftover food from your fish but you might need several for them to be successful. Careful not to overdo it and add too many cleaners to your tank.

Rinse off Frozen Food

Frozen food can be a great nutrient-dense way to feed your fish but sometimes these useful meals are packed with juices that are sometimes detrimental to your tank’s water quality. You should rinse these foods before feeding them to your fish. It will help to reduce the bad bacteria being introduced at the time and stabilize the nitrate level. The best way to do this is to use a fish net to hold the food and rinse them with filtered water. The same filtered water that you would be okay with using for your water changes, so guarantees that you will not be introducing harmful bacteria and water to your aquarium.

Remove Some Fish

You think you aren’t overfeeding your fish and you are performing weekly water changes, but your nitrate levels are staying at the same level. What this could mean is that you overstocked your saltwater aquarium. Also, you may not think you are overfeeding your tank, but chances are if the tank is overstocked, you very well could be overfeeding as well. You might need to remove a few of your tank’s inhabitants to stabilize the nitrate level.

How to restore voting rights in virginia

A summary of current felony disenfranchisement policies and the history of advocacy in Virginia.

On March 16, 2021, Governor Ralph Northam took exec­ut­ive action to restore the right to vote to all Virgini­ans who are not currently incar­cer­ated, and he has stated his inten­tion of continu­ing this prac­tice going forward for all Virgini­ans upon their release from prison. This exec­ut­ive action builds on past efforts from prior gubernat­orial admin­is­tra­tions to restore voting rights for Virgini­ans after they had completed proba­tion or parole. Virginia is one of three states whose consti­tu­tion other­wise perman­ently disen­fran­chises all citizens with past felony convic­tions, but grants the state’s governor the author­ity to restore voting rights. Northam’s action follows the General Assembly’s passage of a consti­tu­tional amend­ment that would cement the auto­matic restor­a­tion of voting rights upon release from prison. In order to take effect, that amend­ment must be passed again after a new legis­lature is seated follow­ing the 2021 elec­tions, and then approved by a major­ity of Virginia voters.

Recent Devel­op­ments

Virgini­a’s disen­fran­chise­ment provi­sion dates to the nine­teenth century, and advoc­ates have worked for years, urging Virginia governors to exer­cise their exec­ut­ive author­ity to restore voting rights. The Bren­nan Center was among those who urged Governors Mark Warner (2005), Tim Kaine (2009), and Robert McDon­nell (2010) to do so. In 2021, after years of progress through exec­ut­ive action, the legis­lature finally began the process of amend­ing Virgini­a’s consti­tu­tion to elim­in­ate perman­ent disen­fran­chise­ment.

In May 2013, rights restor­a­tion gained momentum when then-Gov. McDon­nell ended Virgini­a’s policy of perman­ently disen­fran­chising all citizens with felony convic­tions. His action auto­mated rights restor­a­tion for people complet­ing sentences (includ­ing payment of any fines, fees, and resti­tu­tion) for convic­tions clas­si­fied as non-viol­ent and elim­in­ated their two-year wait­ing period, though it required that each person receive an indi­vidu­al­ized rights restor­a­tion certi­fic­ate before regis­ter­ing to vote.

In April 2014, Gov. Terry McAul­iffe announced that he would further stream­line the restor­a­tion process. The policy change broadened the category of people who auto­mat­ic­ally received their right to vote upon the comple­tion of their sentence, and shortened the rights restor­a­tion wait­ing period for rehab­il­it­ated viol­ent offend­ers to apply from five years to three.

In June 2015, Gov. McAul­iffe removed the require­ment that citizens fully pay court costs and fees to have their voting rights restored.

In April 2016, Gov. McAul­iffe issued an exec­ut­ive order restor­ing voting rights to Virgini­ans with felony convic­tions who, as of that date, had completed the terms of their incar­cer­a­tion and any period of super­vised release (proba­tion or parole). He issued similar orders in May and June. These orders were chal­lenged in court, and in July 2016, the Virginia Supreme Court ruled in Howell v. McAul­iffe that they viol­ated the state consti­tu­tion, which required the governor to make clem­ency determ­in­a­tions on a case-by-case basis.

In August 2016, Gov. McAul­iffe announced that his office would issue restor­a­tion orders on an indi­vidual basis to Virgini­ans with completed sentences, start­ing with the approx­im­ately 13,000 citizens who had their voter regis­tra­tions cancelled in the wake of the Howell decision. The governor also announced that, going forward, the Secret­ary of the Common­wealth would identify indi­vidu­als with completed sentences, start­ing with indi­vidu­als who have been released from super­vi­sion the longest. The Secret­ary would then recom­mend indi­vidu­als for rights restor­a­tion on a rolling basis to the Governor for his final approval. Indi­vidu­als may also receive an exped­ited restor­a­tion order by apply­ing directly to the Secret­ary’s Office online or by mail. Accord­ing to the announce­ment, the Secret­ary will announce citizens that received an indi­vidu­al­ized restor­a­tion order on a monthly basis.

In March 2021, the General Assembly approved a consti­tu­tional amend­ment to provide for the auto­matic restor­a­tion of voting rights upon release from prison. The General Assembly must re-approve this consti­tu­tional amend­ment in the next legis­lat­ive session before it can be sent to the voters for rati­fic­a­tion. Subsequently, Gov. Northam took exec­ut­ive action to restore the right to vote to all Virgini­ans on proba­tion or parole, mirror­ing the consti­tu­tional amend­ment, and he has stated his inten­tion of continu­ing this prac­tice going forward for all Virgini­ans upon their release from prison.

Mater­i­als on 2016 Exec­ut­ive Orders and Howell v. McAul­iffe Case

Bren­nan Center Cover­age

  • The Vote in Virginia, Andrew Cohen (Apr. 25, 2016)
  • Keep Polit­ics Out of Virginia Voting Rights Restor­a­tion, Tomas Lopez & Kwame Akosah (July 19, 2016)
  • Virginia Governor Restores Voting Rights to 200,000 Citizens (Apr. 22, 2016)
  • How Much of a Differ­ence Did New Voting Restric­tions Make in Yester­day’s Close Races?, Wendy Weiser, Cross­pos­ted at Bill Moyers & Company (Nov. 5, 2014)
  • The Demo­cracy Restor­a­tion Act: Secur­ing Voting Rights for All, Nicole Austin-Hillery, Cross­pos­ted at Amer­ican Consti­tu­tion Soci­ety (April 15, 2014)
  • States of Dysfunc­tion: Voting Issues from Elec­tion Day 2013, Victoria Bassetti (Nov. 6, 2013)
  • Virgini­a’s Step Forward On Voting Rights, Carson Whitelem­ons (June 11, 2013)
  • A Step Forward in Virginia on Restor­ing Voting Rights, Vishal Agra­harkar, Cross­pos­ted at The Huff­ing­ton Post (Jan. 11, 2013)
  • Jim Crow makes a comeback in Virginia, Erika Wood, Origin­ally published at The Grio (Apr. 15, 2010)
  • WOOD: Restore the Vote to These Virgini­ans, Erika Wood, Rich­mond Times-Dispatch (Jan. 13, 2010)
  • It Isn’t Complic­ated: Restore the Vote to 300,000 Amer­ic­ans, Erika Wood, Origin­ally published in the Rich­mond Times-Dispatch (Jan. 13, 2010)

Press

Bren­nan Center Public­a­tions

Restoration of Rights in Virginia

On April 22, 2016, Gov. Terry McAuliffe signed a historic executive order restoring the civil rights of an estimated 206,000 disenfranchised Virginians. Unfortunately on July 22, 2016, the Virginia Supreme Court ruled that the Governor could not restore the voting rights of those formerly convicted with one executive order. The Governor has decided to individually restore the voting rights of the 206,000 disenfranchised Virginians.

What does this mean for you?

  1. If you have registered to vote because your rights were restored under the Governor’s executive order, you must wait to receive a letter from the Governor informing you that your individual rights have been restored. Once you receive the letter, you must re-register to vote before the October 17, 2016 deadline to be eligible to vote in the upcoming November election. You can register to vote by mail, at your local the local registrar’s office, or online at http://elections.virginia.gov/citizen-portal/index.html.
  2. If you have not yet registered to vote and have not received a letter from the Governor restoring your rights, monitor the Secretary of the Commonwealth’s website to check your restoration status. You must follow the instructions on the website about how to confirm whether your rights have been restored before you attempt to register to vote.
  3. IMPORTANT: The Secretary of the Commonwealth is expediting (or fast-tracking) restoration of rights letters for individuals who contact them about their status. Contact the Secretary of the Commonwealth’s Office immediately to expedite your restoration status and letter. You can contact the SOC online, by telephone at 804-692-0104, or mail in a contact form.

Check Your Restoration Status

Virginians are encouraged to check their restoration status online or call 804-692-0104.

All individuals who have had their rights restored can register to vote immediately. You must register to vote before voting in any election. Any individual applying to register to vote must swear under oath on the application, state that they have been convicted of a felony, and that they have had their rights restored.

If you encounter a problem or difficulty obtaining your restoration status or registering to vote, contact the ACLU of Virginia.

How to have your Restoration of Rights Shown on your Criminal Record

Once your civil rights have been restored by the Governor, you may have a notation added to your Virginia Criminal Record showing your Restoration of Rights.
To have such a statement added to your criminal record, you must submit a complete set of fingerprints, taken by a law enforcement agency on an “Applicant Fingerprint Card.” Click here for further instructions.

Need More Information or Have Questions?

Secretary of the Commonwealth’s Restoration of Rights Division

P.O. Box 2454, Richmond, VA 23218

(804) 692-0104 or 1-855-575-9177

Virginia Voter Restoration Project

ACLU of Virginia, 701 E. Franklin St., Ste. 1412, Richmond, VA 23219

Learn more about felon disfranchisement in the United States: National ACLU
Get Informed: Briefing Paper on Felon Disenfranchisement in Virginia

In all states, it’s a felony to vote if your voting rights are currently revoked. If you are uncertain about your status from the information provided on this page, call 1-866-OUR-VOTE for more information.

Misdemeanor convictions in Virginia

You do not lose the right to vote if you are convicted of a misdemeanor in Virginia. If you are incarcerated for a misdemeanor you should check voter registration status, register to vote if necessary, and request an absentee ballot from your Local Election Office.

You can vote while awaiting trial for any charge, even if incarcerated, as long as you have not lost your right to vote due to a prior conviction.

Felony convictions in Virginia

You permanently lose your right to vote if you are convicted of a felony. You can’t vote while incarcerated, while on probation, or while on parole. Your right to vote can only be restored by the Governor. However, this process is effectively automatic for anyone who has been released from prison. This is subject to change under future Governors, this page will be updated as needed.

Next steps for restoring voting rights in Virginia

If your sentence is completed, you should check your pardon status, apply to the Governor for a pardon if necessary, then you may register to vote and cast a ballot, even if you are on parole or probation.

Helpful U.S. Vote Foundation Resources

Registering to vote

Requesting an absentee ballot

Requesting a mail-in ballot

Click here for help with finding your Election Official.

Restoration of Voting Rights in Virginia

for Citizens with Prior Felonies

How to restore voting rights in virginia

General Information

If you have been convicted of a felony,

you have lost your right to vote in Virginia.

Restoration of civil rights allows you to:

Register to vote

Hold public office

Serve on a jury

Serve as a notary public

Restoration does not:

Restore the right to possess a firearm

Expunge (erase) a criminal conviction

Restoration is not a pardon.

The Secretary of the Commonwealth gives priority consideration to persons who request that their rights be restored, but also identifies persons who may be eligible.

Applications must be complete in order to be considered.

Applicants will undergo a criminal history check.

If you have completed your sentence for a felony conviction and have been released from any term of incarceration, and / or supervision, probation, or parole, your rights may be restored by submitting an application to the Secretary of the Commonwealth.

The sitting Governor has sole discretion to decide whether or not to restore your rights.

Virginia Felon Voting Rights Restoration Amendment
Election date
November 8, 2022
Topic
Suffrage
Status
Not on the ballot
Type
Constitutional amendment
Origin
State legislature

The Virginia Felon Voting Rights Restoration Amendment is not on the ballot in Virginia as a legislatively referred constitutional amendment on November 8, 2022.

The ballot measure would amend the Virginia Constitution to restore voting rights to persons convicted of a felony after they have completed their sentence. Currently, the governor has the sole authority to restore voting rights regardless of whether a felon has completed their sentence. [1]

Contents

  • 1 Text of measure
    • 1.1 Full text
  • 2 Path to the ballot
    • 2.1 2020-2021 legislative session
    • 2.2 2022-2023 legislative session
  • 3 See also
  • 4 External links
  • 5 Footnotes

Text of measure

Full text

The full text is available here.

Path to the ballot

In Virginia, a constitutional amendment needs to be passed by a simple majority vote in both chambers of the state legislature over two consecutive legislative sessions to be certified for the ballot.

2020-2021 legislative session

The Virginia House of Delegates and the Virginia State Senate each introduced and passed two versions of an amendment that would restore voting rights for felons—House Joint Resolution 555 (HJR 555) and Senate Joint Resolution (SJR 272). After a conference committee, the Senate voted 21-18 and the House voted 56-40 to approve a substitute version. [1] [2]

Vote in the Virginia House of Delegates
February 27, 2021
Requirement: Simple majority vote of all members in each chamber in two sessions
Number of yes votes required: 51 a
Yes No Not voting
Total 56 40 4
Total percent 56.00% 40.00% 4.00%
Democrat 54 0 1
Republican 2 40 3

2022-2023 legislative session

Legislators needed to approve the constitutional amendment again during the 2022-2023 legislative session before the proposal could appear on the ballot.

On February 15, 2022, the state Senate voted 24-16 to approve the amendment, which was introduced in the 2022 session as Senate Joint Resolution 1. All Democrats and three Republicans voted in favor of it, and 16 Republicans voted against it. [3]

In the 2021 elections, the partisan control of the House changed from a 55-45 Democratic majority to a 52-48 Republican majority.

On March 1, 2022, a House Privileges and Elections Subcommittee voted down the constitutional amendment, preventing it from moving forward. The vote was 6-4, with Republicans opposed and Democrats in support.

How to restore voting rights in virginia

RICHMOND — Virginia Gov. Ralph Northam (D) said Tuesday that he has restored the voting rights of 69,000 people convicted of felonies under a policy change that speeds up the process, no longer requiring former prisoners to go through lengthy probations before qualifying to seek restoration.

Get the full experience. Choose your plan ArrowRight

Virginia is one of a handful of states that permanently disenfranchise all those convicted of felonies unless they have their rights restored by the governor, according to the National Conference of State Legislatures. Felons never lose their right to vote in D.C.; Maryland automatically restores voting rights when a felon completes his or her sentence, although a conviction for vote-buying requires action by the governor.

This year, Virginia’s General Assembly gave preliminary approval to a constitutional amendment that would automatically restore voting rights for felons as soon as they complete their incarceration. That measure would have to be approved by the legislature again next year and then put to the voters in a referendum before going into effect.

In the meantime, Northam said he was taking a cue from that proposal and changing the timing of his process, reviewing rights as soon as someone is freed.

“Probationary periods can last for years,” Northam said in prepared remarks as he announced the change at a Richmond nonprofit. “But that’s also time in which a person is living in the community, rebuilding their lives. They should be able to exercise those civil rights, even if they are still under supervision.”

The move is part of a broad effort by Northam and Democrats who control the General Assembly to expand access to voting, even as Republican lawmakers across the country push in the opposite direction.

This year, the General Assembly passed measures to permanently expand absentee voting and became the first state in the former Confederacy to approve a Voting Rights Act that enshrines protections for minority voters and makes it harder to change access to polling places. Northam is expected to sign the measures into law.

Northam already signed a measure moving local elections to November from May in an effort to boost turnout for local races.

Felons lose a host of civil rights in Virginia in addition to the vote, including the right to run for office, serve on a jury, be a notary or own a firearm. A governor can restore all but the firearms right, which a felon must apply separately to have restored.

Republican governor Robert F. McDonnell kicked off the modern effort to restore rights for nonviolent ex-felons, intervening in several thousand cases before leaving office in 2014. But his successor, Terry McAuliffe (D), took the matter to a different level.

McAuliffe issued an executive order that would have automatically restored voting rights to hundreds of thousands of former prisoners. Republicans challenged him in court, and the Virginia Supreme Court ruled that he could only restore rights in individual cases, not en masse.

So McAuliffe began a process that eventually restored voting and other civil rights to about 173,000 felons once they had served their sentences and completed a period of community supervision, or probation.

When Northam decided this year to hasten the process, his advisers identified 69,045 individuals who were eligible for restoration. The addition of those people, announced Tuesday, brings Northam’s total so far to more than 111,000 felons whose rights have been restored.

“This change will have a tremendous impact on the people we serve, enabling more Virginians to have their rights restored sooner,” Sara Dimick, executive director of OAR of Richmond, a nonprofit organization that helps formerly incarcerated people reenter society, said in a news release from the Northam administration.

Northam said he hopes that the constitutional amendment ­passes to make the criminal justice system more fair. “We must change it so we can get closer to being a state where people can move beyond their mistakes, and where justice is our priority,” he said.

By: Graham Moomaw – February 8, 2022 7:46 am

How to restore voting rights in virginia

Election official with voting stickers at Robious Elementary School in Midlothian, Va., November 5, 2019. (Parker Michels-Boyce/Virginia Mercury)

A Republican-led House of Delegates committee voted Tuesday to block a pending constitutional amendment that would automatically restore voting rights to felons once they regain their freedom.

If it holds, the decision will prevent Virginia voters from weighing in on the issue in a ballot referendum this fall, a major setback for voting-rights advocates who have spent years pushing to end Virginia’s lifetime disenfranchisement policy for people convicted of felonies, which falls disproportionately on Black communities.

Some Republicans and conservative groups supported the proposal, which had passed the General Assembly last year under Democratic control and needed to pass again in order to go to voters. But its opponents won out an early-morning subcommittee meeting, where it was defeated on a 5-4, party-line vote.

That vote came despite support from a diverse coalition that included the American Conservative Union, Americans for Prosperity Virginia, the ACLU of Virginia, the Legal Aid Justice Center, the League of Women Voters of Virginia, the Virginia Interfaith Center for Public Policy, the Virginia Catholic Conference and the Virginia NAACP. No one spoke in opposition.

Del. Charniele Herring, D-Alexandria, one of the amendment’s sponsors, said the vote appears to be the end of the line for the amendment for the immediate future.

“It’s extremely disappointing when you see this support that’s across the political spectrum,” Herring said. “For a lot of people it’s a question of faith and just forgiveness.”

The subcommittee did not take up a version of the proposal sponsored by Del. Mike Cherry, R-Colonial Heights, who had argued it fit squarely within the GOP’s purported defense of constitutional rights. Republicans in charge of the panel only heard the version sponsored by Herring, avoiding having to vote to kill the amendment sponsored by one of their own members.

The subcommittee was unswayed by conservative testimony in favor of the amendment.

“’We want to reintegrate people that have served their time that may have kids in school, that may be productive members of society, but can’t have a voice,” said Kaitlin Owens, deputy director of advocacy at the American Conservative Union’s Nolan Center for Justice. “This is a way we can do that.”

During the hearing, the five Republicans who voted the amendment down offered little rationale for their position beyond the fact it wouldn’t require people with felonies to pay all restitution and fees before regaining their voting rights.

“So none of that is included,” Del. Chris Head, R-Botetourt, the subcommittee’s chairman, said while questioning Herring. “Very good.”

Head declined to elaborate on his position when approached by a reporter after the vote, saying he had to get to another meeting and had said all he wished to say.

The Democratic-controlled state Senate can send over its version of the proposal for another vote in the House. But it’s unclear if the outcome in the subcommittee would be any different the second time.

The apparent failure of the effort to change the felon disenfranchisement policy in the state Constitution means ex-offenders will have to rely on Republican Gov. Glenn Youngkin to restore their voting rights. The Youngkin administration had not wieghed in on the proposed amendment making that process automatic.

Democrats noted that the only Republican on the subcommittee who could face a competitive re-election fight, Del. Karen Greenhalgh, R-Virginia Beach, was absent for Tuesday’s meeting. Voting in her place was Del. Margaret Ransone, R-Westmoreland, who chairs the House Priveleges and Elections Committee and represents a reliably red district.

In a brief interview, Ransone said she opposed the felon voting proposal because she thinks the current rights restoration system, which allows governors to be as strict or as lenient as they wish to be, works fine.

“We have a process and place now for them to go and get their rights restored,” Ransone said.

RICHMOND, Va. (AP) — Virginia Gov. Ralph Northam announced Tuesday that he has restored voting rights to more than 69,000 former felons who have completed their prison sentences but are still on probation.

Northam’s move mirrors a proposed constitutional amendment recently approved by the General Assembly that would automatically restore voting rights to people convicted of felonies once they serve their time and are released from prison. To take effect, the amendment must be approved by the legislature again next year and must win approval from voters in a statewide ballot referendum.

Until now, former felons who have served their sentences were not eligible to have their civil rights restored until after they completed probation. The new eligibility criteria announced by Northam means that, going forward, people convicted of felonies will become eligible to have their rights restored once they serve their prison time, although the governor’s office would still have to approve it.

In addition to being able to vote, the rights include the right to serve on a jury, run for office and become a public notary.

“Too many of our laws were written during a time of open racism and discrimination, and they still bear the traces of inequity,” Northam said in a statement.

“If we want people to return to our communities and participate in society, we must welcome them back fully — and this policy does just that,” he said.

Under the state constitution, the governor can restore civil rights to former felons. If the constitutional amendment is approved, the restoration of rights will become automatic when a felon is released from prison.

“We are making a tweak to the eligibility criteria that makes a huge impact on these people’s lives after they have returned to their communities,” said Secretary of the Commonwealth Kelly Thomasson.

Northam made his announcement at OAR of Richmond, a reentry services provider for former inmates as they return to society.

“This change will have a tremendous impact on the people we serve, enabling more Virginians to have their rights restored sooner,” said Sara Dimick, Executive Director of OAR of Richmond.

Virginia is one of just three states whose constitution permanently disenfranchises citizens with felony convictions, but gives the governor the discretion to restore civil rights.

Reforms over the last decade have made the restoration of rights process easier by streamlining the application, and eliminating the waiting period and a requirement to pay court costs and fees before rights can be restored. Before Tuesday’s announcement, Northam had restored civil rights to about 42,000 people. His predecessor, Gov. Terry McAuliffe, restored rights to about 173,000 people.

Some Republicans are opposed to restoring rights before inmates complete their sentences, including any probationary period.

“Democrats won’t be happy until they can do an absentee voting drive at Red Onion (State Prison),” said Jeff Ryer, press secretary for the Senate Republican Caucus.

How to restore voting rights in virginia

“We are a Commonwealth that believes in moving forward, not being tied down by the mistakes of our past,” Virginia Gov. Ralph Northam said in a statement. Steve Helber/AP hide caption

“We are a Commonwealth that believes in moving forward, not being tied down by the mistakes of our past,” Virginia Gov. Ralph Northam said in a statement.

Virginia Democratic Gov. Ralph Northam announced an executive action on Tuesday that allows tens of thousands of felons to recover their voting and other civil rights upon release from prison.

The move applies immediately to an estimated 69,000 Virginians who have completed their sentences, including ex-convicts who remain on supervision. And it comes as the state prepares for gubernatorial and legislative elections on June 8.

“Too many of our laws were written during a time of open racism and discrimination, and they still bear the traces of inequity,” said Northam said in a statement.

“We are a Commonwealth that believes in moving forward, not being tied down by the mistakes of our past. If we want people to return to our communities and participate in society, we must welcome them back fully—and this policy does just that,” he added.

Politics

Virginia Is Poised To Approve Its Own Voting Rights Act

Under current law, anyone convicted of a felony in Virginia loses their civil rights, including the right to vote, serve on a jury, run for office, become a public notary, and carry a firearm. The state constitution gives the governor sole discretion to restore civil rights, with the exception of firearms rights.

Prior to the executive action, only former inmates who had finished serving “active supervision,” including probation or parole, were eligible to have their voting rights restored. Now, eligible people can apply to get those rights restored.

As NPR member station VPM reported:

“The Virginia General Assembly approved a constitutional amendment last month that would automatically restore the voting rights of people who served out their jail or prison sentence. But in order to amend the constitution, lawmakers have to approve the measure again during the next general assembly session and put it before voters in a referendum.”

Northam’s office touted the action as the latest bipartisan move to restore civil rights over the last decade. That includes streamlining the application and eliminating the waiting period and the prerequisite that court costs and fees be paid prior to having one’s rights restored.

“With today’s announcement, Governor Northam has restored civil rights to more than 111,000 people since he took office,” the statement reads.

Virginia Gov. Ralph Northam on Tuesday announced an executive action that restores the right to vote to all Virginians when they leave prison, even if they remain on community supervision. This week’s action immediately restores the rights of about 69,000 people, and the governor said it will apply going forward to all Virginians upon release from incarceration.

This change mirrors a proposed Constitutional amendment that would automatically restore the civil rights of any person when they have completed their prison sentence. The amendment was approved during the 2021 General Assembly session and has to be passed again by the General Assembly in 2022 before going to a voter referendum.

It would represent a major shift in Virginia law, which has disenfranchised all people with felony convictions since the Civil War. Restrictions on voting rights were expanded in 1902 and poll taxes and literacy tests were introduced.

As one state senator put it at that time, these measures were designed to “eliminate the darkey as a political factor in this State” and ensure “the complete supremacy of the white race in the affairs of government.”

Race, Voting, and a Gaping Loophole: A Critical Look at the 14th Amendment

Millions of Americans are barred from voting because of criminal convictions in their past.

Under current law, anyone convicted of a felony in Virginia permanently loses their civil rights—including the right to vote, serve on a jury, run for office, become a public notary, and carry a firearm. Virginia remains one of three states whose constitution permanently disenfranchises citizens with past felony convictions.

“Too many of our laws were written during a time of open racism and discrimination, and they still bear the traces of inequity,” Gov. Northam said in a statement. “We are a Commonwealth that believes in moving forward, not being tied down by the mistakes of our past. If we want people to return to our communities and participate in society, we must welcome them back fully—and this policy does just that.”

How to restore voting rights in virginia

Virginia law grants the governor authority to restore voting rights, but past efforts by governors to exercise that authority have been challenged by lawmakers and hampered by state courts.

In 2016, Gov. Terry McAuliffe issued an executive order restoring the voting rights of more than 200,000 people who were convicted of felonies, served their sentences, and completed probation or parole. After more than 9,000 people registered to vote pursuant to the order, state lawmakers sued, arguing that the order exceeded the governor’s authority.

The Virginia Supreme Court ruled in favor of state legislators, holding that the state constitution requires the governor to decide whether to restore voting rights on a case-by-case basis. The court invalidated the executive order and ordered the Department of Elections to “delete from the record of registered voters the name of any voter who . . . has been convicted of a felony.”

Gov. McAuliffe responded by announcing a process for issuing restoration orders on an individual basis to Virginians who had completed their sentences, including any period of probation or parole. This week’s action by Gov. Northam expands rights restoration to include people who are on probation or parole.

Gov. Northam said in a statement that, with this week’s action, he has restored civil rights to more than 111,000 people during his term.

Felon voting rights remains an ongoing issue in Virginia. The League of Women Voters of Virginia has been very active in efforts to restore voting rights to convicted felons who have completed their sentences and returned to society.

Felony Convictions & the Right to Vote. A New Brochure from LWV Lynchburg

Special thanks to Molly McClennon for making sure this was made available to all.

LWV-VA and the Restoration of Voting Rights for Felons

Lois Page, Co-President. How to restore voting rights in virginiaThe recent initiative by Gov. McAuliffe to grant voting rights to a large number of ex-offenders has raised a number of questions from Virginia Leaguers. Because this has now become mired in partisan politics, with one party threatening to bring a lawsuit challenging the governors’ right to do this, some Leaguers have become concerned about taking an active role However the League’s commitment to the principles involved in this action did not start with this initiative. LWVUS’s position on voting reads as follows: “…voting is a fundamental citizen right that must be guaranteed.” More specifically, embedded in “Positions for Action in Brief,” the statement of LWV-VA’s adoptedpositions, is the following: Read More

Analysis: Virginians Whose Voting Rights Have Been Restored Overwhelmingly Nonviolent, Completed Sentences More Than A Decade Ago

Today (5/11/16) Governor Terry McAuliffe released a statistical analysis of demographic and other characteristics of the population of former Virginia felons whose rights the Governor restored with his historic April 22nd order.The analysis reveals that the average time since release and completion of parole or probation is 11.1 years. The average age of this population is 45.9 years. Previous to his April 22nd order, Governor McAuliffe offered immediate restoration of rights to nonviolent felons and imposed a 3-year waiting period on any violent felons. According to this analysis, 93.4% of individuals covered by the April 22nd order would have been qualified before that date.

Governor McAuliffe Restores Voting and Civil Rights to Over 200,000 Virginians

RICHMOND + Governor Terry McAuliffe today restored the voting and civil rights of more than 200,000 Virginians who were convicted of felonies, served their time and completed any supervised release, parole or probation requirements. Each of those Virginians will immediately regain the right to register to vote, to run for office, to serve on a jury and to serve as a notary public.”Throughout my administration my team and I have operated on a simple principle: Virginians who have served their time and reentered society should do so as full citizens of our Commonwealth and country,” said Governor McAuliffe. “Too often in both our distant and recent history, politicians have used their authority to restrict peoples’ ability to participate in our democracy. Today we are reversing that disturbing trend and restoring the rights of more than 200,000 of our fellow Virginians who work, raise families and pay taxes in every corner of our Commonwealth.”

The Governor implemented his action by signing an order restoring the rights of every Virginia felon who completed his or her sentence and all other requirements as of April 22nd, 2016. The total number of Virginians impacted by the Governor’s order today is 206,000. He also instructed the Secretary of the Commonwealth to prepare a similar order monthly in order to restore the rights of individuals who complete their sentences in the future. Click Here for more information.

[Ed. Note: “League and its coalition partners are studying ways to register these newly enfranchised Virginians”]

WELCOME CHANGES TO RESTORATION OF RIGHTS PROCESS ANNOUNCED

On June 23, 2015, Governor McAuliffe announced two changes to the restoration of rights process, representing the latest steps in pursuit of his priority to ensure all Virginians have the opportunity to exercise their voting and civil rights.Under the new reform, outstanding court costs and fees will no longer prohibit an individual from having his or her rights restored. McAuliffe said, “These men and women will still be required to pay their costs and fees, but their court debts will no longer serve as a financial barrier to voting, just as poll taxes did for so any years in Virginia.”

Additionally individuals who have their rights restored will now have the option to include a notation in their criminal record designating that their rights have been restored.

Previously on April 21st, 2014, McAuliffe moved all drug-related offenses into the non-violent category, reduced the waiting period for more serious offenders from five to three years and published a list of the offenses that require this waiting period. For less serious (non-violent) offenders there is no waiting period.

In December2014, he shortened the application for Serious Offenders from 13 pages to just one page and removed burdensome requirements such as notarization and letters to the governor.

WASHINGTON, D.C. — Gov. Ralph Northam (D) announced yesterday that he is restoring the voting rights of over 69,000 Virginians. The change updates the current eligibility criteria for formerly incarcerated citizens to have their voting rights restored by the governor, speeding up the process so that “any Virginian released from incarceration will qualify to have their rights restored, even if they remain on community supervision.”

The move follows the Virginia 2021 General Assembly’s approval of a constitutional amendment to automatically restore voting rights to the formerly incarcerated upon their release. However, the amendment must pass the General Assembly once again in 2022 and then be approved by voters in a 2022 referendum. Currently, only the Virginia governor can restore these civil rights — Northam’s move on Tuesday re-enfranchised 69,000 Virginians under this authority. Although the next governor would have the ability to overturn his action, the pending constitutional amendment, if passed, would make this restoration of voting rights automatic and permanent, regardless of the governor in power.

Related Links

  • Arizona Legislature Passes Bill Streamlining Rights Restoration After Felony Convictions
  • Mississippi Governor Vetoes Bill Easing Strict Felony Disenfranchisement Law
  • Florida Enacts Law Creating Special Election Force and New Voting Restrictions
  • Florida Governor Proposes Special Force to Monitor Elections
  • South Carolina Senate Passes Bill Expanding Early Voting

Next Up

Five Georgia Companies Hesitant To Defend Voting Rights

Despite pressure from voting rights activists, five Georgia-based corporations are refusing to stand against Republican voter suppression efforts in the Peach State.

Brief Available Here: http://www.fsaproject.wpengine.com/VAAmicusBrief

WASHINGTON – Yesterday, New Virginia Majority and the national civil rights and racial justice organization, Advancement Project, filed an amicus brief in Howell v. McAuliffe, a lawsuit regarding the restoration of voting rights in Virginia. On April 22, Governor Terry McAuliffe issued an executive order that restored the voting rights of the Commonwealth’s residents who had completed their sentences for felony convictions. On May 23, Republican members of the Virginia General Assembly filed a legal challenge to the governor’s authority to restore these rights. The brief supports the constitutionality of the governor’s action and provides context for the racial dynamics involved in this case.

“Restoring the right to vote for people who have repaid their debt to society was a logical, legally-sound step taken by Governor McAuliffe,” said Tram Nguyen, co-executive director of New Virginia Majority. “More so, it was an affirmation of our democratic values – making the Commonwealth and our political system more open, accessible and representative. We are pleased to help support these claims to the court.”

Virginia previously had one of the harshest disenfranchisement laws in the nation. The original purpose of the law was plainly stated by Delegate Carter Glass at the Virginia Constitutional Convention of 1902. “This plan,” Carter Glass said, “will eliminate the darkey as a political factor in this state in less than five years, so that in no single county…will there be the least concern felt for the complete supremacy of the white race in the affairs of government.” Until Governor McAuliffe used his authority to address this, the modern version of the law continued to make it disproportionately harder for people of color to participate in Virginia elections.

“Denying voting rights to people with prior felony convictions was an explicit scheme to eradicate Black voters from Virginia’s electorate,” said Judith Browne Dianis, executive director of Advancement Project’s national office. “The idea of now taking away the right to vote for the more than 206,000 Virginians who regained voting rights under Governor McAuliffe’s proclamation would be extremely problematic, especially for African-American voters. Rescinding this right to vote from citizens properly registered under the law would likely constitute a purge, which would be illegal.”

“This has been a long process,” said Terry Garrett, a formerly incarcerated individual whose rights were restored by the Governor’s executive order. “I paid my fines, did my time, got off probation and parole for five years before I applied and was still rejected twice. Then, I heard about what Governor McAuliffe did. I realized my rights had been restored. I was devastated and excited at the same time because I felt like somebody believes in us. I felt like a citizen again. I’ve been in Alexandria all my life but never felt like I was a part of the community. Now I have a voice too. I did make some mistakes that I regret but it is challenging every day to hear about what you did so many years ago and still have it affecting your life today. I’m just grateful to have my rights back and I would do everything in my power to keep them.”

“When I found out that I was eligible to vote, I was elated because I am a taxpaying, law-abiding citizens and I should have the right to dictate who represents me,” said Richie Cannady. “When I found out that there was a challenge to my right to vote, I thought it was really sad and shameful. Being able to vote is an important part of being American.”

“I was overwhelmed with tears when I found out that I could register,” said Louise Benjamin. “I felt like I could finally get my life back on track and be somebody.”

“When I found out I had my right to vote restored, I was grateful because I wanted to have the same opportunities that others do,” said Viola Marie Brooks. “When I found out about the challenge to my right to vote, I thought it was wrong. I made a mistake and I paid for it, and I am a changed person.”

In addition to supporting the governor’s constitutional authority to restore voting rights, the brief submitted yesterday addresses holes in the legal theory and evidence petitioners have provided to support their claims against McAuliffe’s action. Importantly, the brief also highlights the emotional process of having one’s rights restored through personal narratives – underscoring the unfairness of once again depriving newly eligible voters of their right to the ballot. According to The Sentencing Project, more than seven percent of Virginia’s adult population was disenfranchised due to a felony conviction. Moreover, one in five African-Americans in Virginia had been disenfranchised due to a felony conviction in recent years.

“The restoration of voting rights is deeply personal for the 206,000 people whose voices have just been welcomed back into our democracy,” said Advancement Project Managing Director and General Counsel Edward A. Hailes, Jr. “It is deeply personal, too, for all who believe in the values of a just, fair and inclusive democracy.”

The full brief can be viewed here. A special hearing on the case will take place on July 19, 2016. For more information or requests for interviews, please contact Jennifer Farmer at [email protected] .

Advancement Project is a multi-racial civil rights organization. Founded by a team of veteran civil rights lawyers in 1999, Advancement Project was created to develop and inspire community-based solutions based on the same high quality legal analysis and public education campaigns that produced the landmark civil rights victories of earlier eras.

Press Contact

Contact: Nidya Sarria-King, Deputy Director of Communications

Share this:

Recent reforms in Virginia have made it far easier for voters to cast a ballot, but some residents with prior felony convictions will still be excluded this election cycle.

“It should say something that the Department of Elections has put out a 25-page document of all the changes that came out this legislative session,” said Jenny Glass, director of advocacy for the American Civil Liberties Union of Virginia.

Watchdog delivered

Want our investigations in your inbox? Subscribe to our Watchdog newsletter.

During this year’s legislative session, lawmakers nixed the requirement that voters have to have a qualified excuse to vote absentee; no excuses are needed now. Virginia also repealed the requirement that voters present a photo ID, and the state now automatically registers residents to vote when they interact with the Department of Motor Vehicles.

The changes have perhaps resulted in a surge in early voting. Virginia voters have returned the second highest number of absentee and mail-in ballots in the country so far, second only to Florida.

Virginia used to be ranked as one of the most difficult states to cast a ballot in, but that’s likely changed after the most recent legislative session.

“Historically, we’ve been awful,” especially to voters of color, Glass said.

Here’s a look at some of the most significant barriers to voting rights and access in the state:

About this series

Stateline and the Center for Public Integrity are exploring how changes to polling places and other election shifts affect Americans’ ability to vote. Stateline is an initiative of The Pew Charitable Trusts. Go to vote.org for information on how to vote in 2020.

Felony disenfranchisement

Residents who have been convicted of felonies are still permanently barred from voting in Virginia — unless the governor signs off to restore their rights once they’re no longer under supervision. That law is baked into the state’s constitution, and Glass said changing it would require a lengthy, complicated process and voter approval.

Virginia is one of just three states that permanently disenfranchises people with felonies.

Former Virginia Gov. Terry McAuliffe, a Democrat, tried to restore voting rights to more than 200,000 formerly incarcerated people with felonies through an executive order in 2016, but courts blocked the order. McAuliffe then signed off on about 173,000 individual restoration orders in his term, which the state’s constitution permits. His successor, Gov. Ralph Northam, a Democrat, has restored voting rights for tens of thousands more people.

Voter registration deadlines

Some states allow residents to register to vote the day of the election — but Virginia is not one of them.

Residents must register at least 21 days before the election in order to be eligible to vote.

“The longer someone has to think about the election before participating, the worse it affects turnout,” Glass said.

Virginia’s deadline to register is Oct. 13.

Help support this work

Public Integrity doesn’t have paywalls and doesn’t accept advertising so that our investigative reporting can have the widest possible impact on addressing inequality in the U.S. Our work is possible thanks to support from people like you.

WHO WE ARE

The Center for Public Integrity is a nonprofit investigative news organization focused on inequality in the U.S. We do not accept advertising or charge people to read our work.

Search

DEEP DIVES DELIVERED

Get a weekly dive into inequality in America with our Watchdog newsletter delivered to your inbox.

SUPPORT US

latest Stories

How to restore voting rights in virginia

To imagine a world without Roe, look to Kentucky

How to restore voting rights in virginia

‘All value is socially constructed’

How to restore voting rights in virginia

Public Integrity expands audience team

How to restore voting rights in virginia

Yvette Cabrera, Aaron Mendelson join Public Integrity

Republish This Story

Republish our articles for free, online or in print, under a Creative Commons license.

Republish this article

by admin, Center for Public Integrity
October 9, 2020

One of the consequences of a felony conviction in Virginia is the prohibition against gun ownership, regardless of how long ago the conviction occurred or when the sentence was completed. The process of restoring the right to legally possess firearms was a two step process with possible rejections at both stages.

A recent change in Virginia legislation, which has restored voting rights, after a felony conviction, could have an impact on your ability to legally own guns. Therefore, if your felony conviction has barred you from gun ownership, contact an experienced Virginia gun rights restoration attorney that will work for you to regain your right to keep and bear arms.

Voting Rights Restoration

A recent executive order, by Virginia Governor Terry McAuliffe, has restored voting rights for a significant number of Virginia residents that were convicted of felonies, but have served their time and are no longer on probation or parole. This order impacts more than 200,000 Virginians.

Even if the executive order is subsequently overturned, those who currently meet the requirements will retain the right to vote and any other rights that are regained. Further, while he remains in office, Gov. McAuliffe has promised to issue monthly executive orders so that the restoration of rights order remains applicable for those that meet the requirements to have their voting rights restored.

Restoration Process

In Virginia, a felony conviction automatically disqualifies the convicted from legally possessing a firearm. Virginia Code §18.2-308.2 sets forth the rules for gun ownership after a felony conviction and the steps necessary to regain those rights. To regain gun ownership rights, an individual or their Virginia gun rights restoration lawyer in had to petition the governor, by filing an application with the governor’s office to restore their civil rights. Those rights included the right to vote and run for political office, as long as the requirements to apply for restoration were met.

If restoration of civil rights was approved, the individual is required to file a petition in court, in the county that the individual lives in, to restore their gun ownership rights. It was not uncommon, once the petition was filed, for the state to oppose the restoration of gun ownership rights. It is the judge’s decision whether or not the petition will be approved, but there is no uniform standard for this.

Recent Changes

The Commonwealth of Virginia specifies that “[t]he Governor’s proclamation only restores civil rights (the right to vote, serve on a jury, run for office, and become a notary public.) Pursuant to §18.2-308.2 C, individuals may petition the Circuit court in the jurisdiction where they reside for a permit to possess, ship, or transport a firearm.” While the governor’s executive order does not automatically restore gun ownership rights, it has removed the first barrier to you regaining gun ownership rights.

If you were awaiting a decision on the restoration of your civil rights or want to have your gun ownership rights restored, seek the services of an experienced Virginia gun rights restoration attorney for an evaluation of your case.

Former and possibly future Gov. Terry McAuliffe says he holds the national record for restoring voting rights to people who have finished felony prison sentences.

“I restored felons’ rights – 173,000 – more than any governor in the history of America,” he said during an April 6 debate between the five candidates in the June 8 Democratic primary election for governor.

When a candidate claims a record, our ears perk up. We fact checked McAuliffe’s statement.

McAuliffe was governor from 2014 to 2018. He stepped down because Virginia is the only state that doesn’t allow its governor to serve successive terms.

McAuliffe’s numbers

On April 22, 2016, McAuliffe issued a blanket executive order enabling 206,000 Virginia people who served their prison time and finished parole or probation to register to vote. He said people who had completed their punishment deserved redemption. McAuliffe stressed that many of the eligible people were African Americans and said the ban on former felons voting was a remnant of Virginia’s racist history of keeping Black citizens from the polls.

The action was heralded by civil rights advocates. Marc Mauer, then executive director of The Sentencing Project, a criminal justice advocacy group, called the order “the single most significant action on disenfranchisement that we’ve ever seen from a governor.”

Republican legislative leaders said McAuliffe’s action was a ruse to maximize likely Democratic voters during a presidential election year and filed suit, arguing the governor had exceeded his power. The Virginia Supreme Court agreed, ruling on a 4-3 vote that McAuliffe lacked the authority to issue the blanket order. The court said the governor could grant voting rights to ex felons only on an individual basis.

And that’s what McAuliffe did. His administration streamlined its review process, checking only if people had completed their sentences, parole or probation, then sending each a letter with an image of the governor’s signature, saying he or she could register to vote.

By the end of his term, McAuliffe had restored voting rights to 173,166 people, according to the Secretary of Commonwealth’s office. That’s almost five times more than the total for the 19 governors who preceded him, back to 1938.

Virginia Gov. Ralph Northam (D) restored the voting rights of 69,000 former felons on Tuesday through executive action, the governor’s office announced in a statement.

Why it matters: Northam’s move to expand voting rights comes amidst a wider push across the country to restrict voting rights. As of mid-February, 43 states have introduced more than 250 bills that include voting restrictions, according to CNN.

  • Last year, Florida introduced new rules to limit some ex-felons’ voting rights, even after the state voted to restore voting rights to former convicts in 2018.

The big picture: Northam also reformed Virginia’s restoration of rights process using new eligibility criteria similar to those proposed in a possible amendment to the state’s constitution. In the future, any citizen will qualify to have their civil rights restored to them upon completing their prison term, “even if they remain on community supervision.”

  • Current laws in Virginia state that “anyone convicted of a felony in Virginia loses their civil rights, including the right to vote, serve on a jury, run for office, become a public notary, and carry a firearm,” the statement notes.
  • The law also gives the governor the sole discretion to restore such rights.

What they’re saying: “Too many of our laws were written during a time of open racism and discrimination, and they still bear the traces of inequity,” Northam said in the statement.

  • “If we want people to return to our communities and participate in society, we must welcome them back fully—and this policy does just that,” he added.

What’s next: Earlier this year the state’s General Assembly approved a constitutional amendment that would automatically restore a person’s civil rights upon the completion of their prison sentence.

  • The amendment must be passed again by the GA in 2022 before moving to a voter referendum.

March 16, 2021, 12:00 PM

  • Share This:
  • share on facebook
  • share on twitter
  • share via email
  • print

Virginia Democratic Gov. Ralph Northam announced Tuesday that he’s taking executive action to restore voting and other civil rights to former felons as soon as they complete their prison terms — a move that will immediately apply to more than 69,000 formerly incarcerated Virginians.

Northam’s action, shared first with CNN, is the latest push to expand the franchise to ex-convicts in the state, and comes just months before Virginia’s gubernatorial and state legislative elections.

It also occurs in the middle of a battle around the country over who has the right to vote. Republican-controlled legislatures are moving to clamp down on access to the ballot. As of February 19, lawmakers in 43 states had introduced more than 250 bills that included voting restrictions, according to a tally from the Brennan Center for Justice at New York University. Arizona and Georgia — two traditionally Republican states that backed President Joe Biden last fall — have led the way in pushing new restrictions.

Removing obstacles to voting for former felons has been the subject of partisan warfare in some states because of the perception that this cohort of voters is more likely to support Democratic candidates.

Under current law in Virginia, anyone convicted of a felony loses an array of civil rights, including the right to vote, serve on juries or run for public office. The state Constitution gives the governor the sole power to restore most of those civil rights.

Previously, the state’s policy required former felons to finish serving “active supervision,” including probation or parole, before they were eligible to have their rights restored by the governor. Northam’s move means Virginians who have been released from prison but still remain on probation or parole now are eligible to vote.

On Tuesday, Northam said it’s unfair to deprive former felons of their rights once they have served their time.

“Probationary periods can last for years. But that’s also time in which a person is living in the community, rebuilding their lives,” he added. “They should be able to exercise those civil rights, even if they are still under supervision.”

“Letting these folks vote or exercise other civil rights isn’t a threat to public safety,” he said. “We’re a Commonwealth that believes in second chances. And we believe in forgiveness. We want people to move forward — not be tied down by the mistakes of their past.”

State officials, in anticipation of the announcement, reviewed Department of Corrections records to identify the former felons who meet the new criteria, and Northam will restore the rights of 69,045 people Tuesday, said Kelly Thomasson, Virginia’s secretary of the commonwealth.

“We’re making a kind of a technical change that has a big impact,” Thomasson told CNN in an interview Tuesday morning. “You don’t deserve to permanently have these rights stripped away because of a mistake you made. It’s about treating people equally and fairly.”

Thomasson did not have demographic data for the more than 69,000 Virginians whose rights were being restored Tuesday.

Nationally, nearly 5.2 million Americans cannot vote because of a felony conviction, according to The Sentencing Project. The barrier particularly affects African Americans: One out of 16 Black people of voting age are barred from the ballot box because of felony disenfranchisement laws, nearly four times the rate of non-Black Americans, the group’s data show.

Northam’s actions are the latest in a series in Virginia to expand the franchise. With Tuesday’s announcement, Northam said he has restored voting rights for more than 111,000 people during his time in office. The governor is term limited and is not on the ballot in Virginia this fall.

His predecessor, former Gov. Terry McAuliffe, has counted his push to individual restore voting rights to more than 156,000 Virginians among his “proudest achievements” as governor. McAuliffe, a Democrat, is seeking to reclaim the governorship in this year’s election.

The state’s General Assembly this year took the first step toward changing the state’s Constitution to make the restoration of voting rights automatic as soon as felons complete their prison terms. The measure now must go to a newly elected state legislature next year and win voter approval in a referendum before it becomes permanent.

Thomasson said it’s hard to predict how many other Virginians will be affected by the change announced Tuesday but said she expected the governor to restore voting rights on a rolling basis as more people complete their prison terms or reach out to state officials.

Virginia is one of a handful of states that still require a governor to act to restore voting rights. In 18 states, felons received automatic restoration of voting rights as soon as they are released from prison, according to the National Conference of State Legislatures.

VCU CNS | February 23, 2022

A proposed constitutional amendment making headway in the Virginia General Assembly would grant former felons the right to vote.

Senate Bill 21, introduced by Sen. Mamie Locke, D-Hampton, also removes a prohibition preventing people from voting who were declared by the court as mentally incompetent. The legislation instead prohibits people from casting ballots if they lack the capacity to understand the act of voting.

Locke also introduced SB 767, which outlines how former felons would be enabled and encouraged to vote if the proposed constitutional amendment passes. The Senate passed both measures.

To amend the Virginia constitution, lawmakers need to pass the legislation by majority vote for two consecutive years and then voters would decide in November through a referendum. Lawmakers passed the proposed constitutional amendment last year.

Virginians with past felony convictions are barred from voting in elections unless the governor or another appropriate authority restores their rights. Sheba Williams couldn’t vote for years after being convicted of a felony. She is now the founder and executive director of Nolef Turns, a Richmond-based criminal justice advocacy group.

Williams said she lost her right to vote for nine years due to a wrongful embezzlement conviction. Former Republican Gov. Bob McDonnell reinstated her voting rights in 2013.

“Our group does restoration rights and voter registration for thousands of Virginians who lose their rights and come back and have to get it reinstated by the governor’s office,” Williams said.

The advocacy group’s Right to Vote Campaign is a nearly three-year initiative to amend the Virginia Constitution and not disqualify voters over past convictions.

More than 5 million former felons – and some people with misdemeanors – who completed their sentences can’t vote, according to the American Civil Liberties Union.

Voter disenfranchisement is one of the issues that is broken in the criminal legal system, said Brad Haywood, executive director of advocacy group Justice Forward Virginia.

“If you see the world as we do, and you believe that the criminal justice system disenfranchisement of the institution of slavery, the disenfranchisement of people who commit certain crimes obviously fits within that paradigm,” Haywood said.

Haywood works as a public defender in Northern Virginia and has represented over 3,000 individuals with felony cases.

“We also know the message it sends to people who are caught up in the criminal justice system, and they’re basically being told that ‘you don’t matter anymore,’” Haywood said. “You’re not part of this participatory democracy we claim to have.”

Former Democratic Gov. Terry McAuliffe restored voting rights in 2016 to about 200,000 felons through a blanket executive order. The Virginia Supreme Court eventually ruled that McAuliffe’s executive order was unconstitutional. The court found that restoring voting rights would need to be on a case-by-case basis.

There are over 250,000 Virginians barred from the ballot box due to a previous conviction, according to the American Civil Liberties Union.

Both measures have advanced to the House but have not been assigned a committee.

The laws would take effect on Jan.1, 2023, if voters pass the proposed referendum.

Written by Safia Abdulahi, Capital News Service. Photo by Megan Lee with VCU CNS.

In Virginia, any person convicted of a felony automatically loses certain civil rights, including the right to vote, run for and hold public office, serve on a jury, and serve as a notary public*. Luckily for those Virginians who have completed their sentences and seeking a second chance in their communities, civil rights restoration is possible. Recent government policies have made the process easier than ever.

How to restore voting rights in virginia

The Constitution of Virginia gives the Governor the sole authority and discretion to restore civil rights lost due to a felony conviction. On August 22, 2016, Governor McAuliffe enacted a new Restoration of Rights Policy to facilitate the restoration of these rights to vote, run for and hold public office, serve on a jury, and serve as a notary public. Ralph Northam continued this effort, and the Secretary of the Commonwealth restored rights to over 22,000 Virginians.

Anyone previously convicted of a felony is eligible for this civil rights restoration as long as he or she is no longer incarcerated and not under active supervision, including supervised probation or parole. As part of the Governor’s mission to provide equal access to all citizens, this process is free, and hiring an attorney is unnecessary.

In fact, because the Secretary of the Commonwealth’s office works with other state agencies to proactively identify and restore rights to qualified individuals, many people have their civil rights restored without ever having to make the request. However, priority consideration is given to eligible individuals who reach out and initiate the process.

How to restore voting rights in virginia

If you’ve previously been convicted of a felony and are either not sure of the status of your civil rights or are interested in having your rights restored, the best place to begin is the Secretary of the Commonwealth’s Restoration of Rights website. From there, you can check the status of your civil rights, request restoration if necessary, and find additional helpful information such as further details about the restoration of rights process and answers to frequently asked questions.

For any questions not answered on their website, the office for the Secretary of the Commonwealth can be reached by phone at (804) 692-0104. The average review process takes 30-60 days, and once the process is complete, the Restoration of Rights office will issue and mail you a personalized order confirming your rights have been successfully restored.

Allen & Allen is dedicated to being a resource for the community. Stay up-to-date on Virginia law by following this blog!

Share this:

How to restore voting rights in virginia

Virginia Gov. Ralph Northam has restored the voting rights of more than 69,000 Virginians under a new change to the state’s constitution, which automatically restores voting rights to individuals upon completion of their sentence of incarceration.

From now on any Virginian released from incarceration will qualify to have their rights restored, even if they remain on community supervision.

The governor’s office says this change builds on bipartisan reforms that have been made to the restoration of rights process over the past decade.

“Too many of our laws were written during a time of open racism and discrimination, and they still bear the traces of inequity,” said Northam.

“We are a Commonwealth that believes in moving forward, not being tied down by the mistakes of our past. If we want people to return to our communities and participate in society, we must welcome them back fully — and this policy does just that.”

Under current law, anyone convicted of a felony in Virginia loses civil rights, including the right to vote, serve on a jury, run for office, become a notary public and carry a firearm.

Virginia remains one of the three states in the nation whose constitution permanently disenfranchises citizens with past felony convictions, but gives the governor the sole discretion to restore civil rights, excluding firearm rights.

“Restoring the rights of Virginians who have served their time makes it easier for these men and women to move forward with their lives,” said Secretary of the Commonwealth Kelly Thomasson.

During the state’s 2021 General Assembly session, legislators approved a constitutional amendment that affirms the fundamental right to vote and automatically restores the civil rights of any individual, upon completion of their sentence of incarceration.

The constitutional amendment must be passed again by the body in 2022 before going to a voter referendum.

This comes as Virginia readies for gubernatorial and legislative elections over the next three months with primary voting on June 8.

Under Northam’s leadership, Virginia has set out to make many changes in a way that reckons with its racial past.

In 2020, Virginia eliminated the state holiday Lee-Jackson Day which honored Confederate generals replacing it with Election Day in April.

The Commonwealth also remained the leader throughout the nation in removing Confederate symbols with 71 down to date, according to the Southern Poverty Law Center [SPLC].

“We must recognize states like Virginia who not only had the courage to discontinue its preservation law, but also led by example after removing 71 Confederate symbols from their public spaces in 2020,” SPLC Chief of Staff Lecia Brooks said.

In February, Virginia lawmakers signed off on making recreational marijuana legal.The same month legislators voted to repeal the death penalty due to its disproportionate impact on Black residents making it the first southern state to do so.

Northam has restored voting rights to more than 111,000 individuals since taking office.

“This change will have a tremendous impact on the people we serve, enabling more Virginians to have their rights restored sooner,” Sara Dimick, executive director of OAR of Richmond said.

“OAR is committed to removing barriers for those who seek to be contributing members of their communities, and we look forward to working with newly eligible individuals to ensure they can exercise their civil rights.”

How to restore voting rights in virginia

A. E. Dick Howard, executive director of the commission that wrote Virginia’s current constitution, and Daniel Ortiz, director of UVA Law’s Supreme Court Litigation Clinic, have joined forces with other law professors.

University of Virginia School of Law professor A. E. Dick Howard , principal architect of Virginia’s current constitution, Professor Daniel Ortiz and other Virginia-based law professors have filed an amicus brief in Howell v. McAuliffe , a case that challenges the restoration of voting rights to convicted felons in the state.

William J. Howell, the speaker of the Virginia House of Delegates, and several other petitioners are challenging, on constitutional grounds, Gov. Terry McAuliffe’s order restoring the voting rights for those who have completed their sentence and parole or probation.

The June 27 friend-of-the-court filing by the professors, in coordination with the law firm Hogan Lovells, argues that both the plain language of the state constitution and the historical record support the governor’s right to “remove political disability by group.”

Article II, Section 1 of the constitution allows the governor to restore the rights, the brief states, with Article V, Section 12 giving the governor absolute power to remove political disabilities, except where constitutional language expressly prohibits. (Read the full amicus.)

Howard, who advised the governor before his rights-restoration announcement on April 22, and Ortiz, director of the UVA Law Supreme Court Litigation Clinic, are joined by two professors from the University of Richmond School of Law, Carl W. Tobias and John Paul Jones, emeritus.

“The other professors and I argue that there is solid ground in the constitution of Virginia for the governor’s order,” Howard said.

Widely acknowledged as an expert in the fields of constitutional law, comparative constitutionalism and the Supreme Court, Howard is the White Burkett Miller Professor of Law and Public Affairs at the University of Virginia. He was executive director of the commission that wrote Virginia’s current constitution and directed the successful referendum campaign for its ratification.

The professors’ amicus was facilitated by the pro bono efforts of Hogan Lovells partner Tom Connally, a 1993 graduate of UVA Law.

How to restore voting rights in virginia

Republican Governor Bob McDonnell will take a concrete step forward for voting rights Wednesday as he unveils a new plan to help nonviolent felons have their voting rights restored.

Currently, Virginia is one of only four states that do not automatically restore voting rights to felons once they’ve served their time, instead forcing felons to directly petition the Governor to have their rights restored after a two-year waiting period. Under the new McDonnell plan, the governor’s office has nixed the waiting period and will instead notify nonviolent felons in a letter that their rights have been restored once the office has verified that he or she has served all time and paid all debts owed.

The change means thousands of nonviolent felons in Virginia could get their voting rights back in time to vote in the upcoming gubernatorial election, although it still puts the onus on the Governor’s office to take action on each felon. Until now McDonnell could only take action on the applications his office had already received, a process considered too cumbersome.

“In many ways it’s the culmination of a career of effort to fix this issue in Virginia,” McDonnell’s spokesman tells the Richmond Times Dispatch.

McDonnell has been a champion of felon voting rights since before he became governor and campaigned on the issue of rights restoration.

During his term, he approved applications at a higher rate than his predecessors, restoring voting rights for nearly 5,000 former felons—including some prominent ones like Scooter Libby. Unfortunately, that heightened attention still barely made a dent in total number of former felons in Virginia who have yet to see their rights restored, estimated to be more than 350,000. In 2012, President Obama won Virginia by a margin of just over 100,000 votes.

Even under the new improved process, the administration will be able to restore rights only on an individual basis, which McDonnell’s office says is the furthest action he’s legally able to take. During his State of the Commonwealth address earlier this year he pressed lawmakers in the Republican-controlled state house to move forward with a constitutional amendment to provide a better solution for blanket restoration, but the legislation that followed his call to action ultimately failed.

Recent polling has found a majority of Virginians support restoration of voting rights for felons who’ve served their time.

“While today’s announcement represents a positive step forward, Virginia still needs a more permanent solution through a Constitutional amendment from the General Assembly to automatically restore civil rights for all citizens who have served their time,” said Judith Browne-Dianis, co-director of the civil rights organization the Advancement Project. “We hope to build on this development in order to move Virginia fully toward America’s promise of a robust and inclusive democracy.”

McDonnell’s new plan will not be binding for future governors, and so the decisions of his successor—whether Republican Ken Cuccinelli or Democrat Terry McAuliffe— will matter. Cuccinelli voiced his support for an improved process Tuesday.

“I believe we need a simpler way for individuals who want to return to their place in society to be given a second chance and regain their civil rights that were lost through a felony conviction,” Cuccinelli said according to a Richmond Times Dispatch report.

McDonnell’s announcement will draw praise from many voting right activists, many of whom have taken issue with his past action on voting issues. Earlier this year McDonnell signed his second piece of legislation designed to further restrict the forms of voter ID accepted in Virginia.

Republican Governor Bob McDonnell took a concrete step forward for voting rights Wednesday as he unveiled a new plan to help nonviolent felons have their voting rights restored.

Republican Governor Bob McDonnell will take a concrete step forward for voting rights Wednesday as he unveils a new plan to help nonviolent felons have their voting rights restored.

Currently, Virginia is one of only four states that do not automatically restore voting rights to felons once they’ve served their time, instead forcing felons to directly petition the Governor to have their rights restored after a two-year waiting period. Under the new McDonnell plan, the governor’s office has nixed the waiting period and will instead notify nonviolent felons in a letter that their rights have been restored once the office has verified that he or she has served all time and paid all debts owed.

The change means thousands of nonviolent felons in Virginia could get their voting rights back in time to vote in the upcoming gubernatorial election, although it still puts the onus on the Governor’s office to take action on each felon. Until now McDonnell could only take action on the applications his office had already received, a process considered too cumbersome.

“In many ways it’s the culmination of a career of effort to fix this issue in Virginia,” McDonnell’s spokesman tells the .

McDonnell has been a champion of felon voting rights since before he became governor and campaigned on the issue of rights restoration.

During his term, he approved applications at a higher rate than his predecessors, restoring voting rights for nearly 5,000 former felons—including some prominent ones like Scooter Libby. Unfortunately, that heightened attention still barely made a dent in total number of former felons in Virginia who have yet to see their rights restored, estimated to be more than 350,000. In 2012, President Obama won Virginia by a margin of just over 100,000 votes.

Even under the new improved process, the administration will be able to restore rights only on an individual basis, which McDonnell’s office says is the furthest action he’s legally able to take. During his State of the Commonwealth address earlier this year he pressed lawmakers in the Republican-controlled state house to move forward with a constitutional amendment to provide a better solution for blanket restoration, but the legislation that followed his call to action ultimately failed.

Recent polling has found a majority of Virginians support restoration of voting rights for felons who’ve served their time.

“While today’s announcement represents a positive step forward, Virginia still needs a more permanent solution through a Constitutional amendment from the General Assembly to automatically restore civil rights for all citizens who have served their time,” said Judith Browne-Dianis, co-director of the civil rights organization the Advancement Project. ”We hope to build on this development in order to move Virginia fully toward America’s promise of a robust and inclusive democracy.”

McDonnell’s new plan will not be binding for future governors, and so the decisions of his successor—whether Republican Ken Cuccinelli or Democrat Terry McAuliffe— will matter. Cuccinelli voiced his support for an improved process Tuesday.

“I believe we need a simpler way for individuals who want to return to their place in society to be given a second chance and regain their civil rights that were lost through a felony conviction,” Cuccinelli said according to a .

McDonnell’s announcement will draw praise from many voting right activists, many of whom have taken issue with his past action on voting issues. Earlier this year McDonnell signed his second piece of legislation designed to further restrict the forms of voter ID accepted in Virginia.

How to restore voting rights in virginia

TribLIVE’s Daily and Weekly email newsletters deliver the news you want and information you need, right to your inbox.

RICHMOND — Virginia Gov. Ralph Northam announced Tuesday that he has restored voting rights to more than 69,000 former felons who have completed their prison sentences but are still on probation.

Northam’s move mirrors a proposed constitutional amendment recently approved by the General Assembly that would automatically restore voting rights to people convicted of felonies once they serve their time and are released from prison. To take effect, the amendment must be approved by the legislature again next year and must win approval from voters in a statewide ballot referendum.

Until now, former felons who have served their sentences were not eligible to have their civil rights restored until after they completed probation. The new eligibility criteria announced by Northam means that, going forward, people convicted of felonies will become eligible to have their rights restored once they serve their prison time, although the governor’s office would still have to approve it.

In addition to being able to vote, the rights include the right to serve on a jury, run for office and become a public notary.

“Too many of our laws were written during a time of open racism and discrimination, and they still bear the traces of inequity,” Northam said in a statement.

“If we want people to return to our communities and participate in society, we must welcome them back fully — and this policy does just that,” he said.

Under the state constitution, the governor can restore civil rights to former felons. If the constitutional amendment is approved, the restoration of rights will become automatic when a felon is released from prison.

“We are making a tweak to the eligibility criteria that makes a huge impact on these people’s lives after they have returned to their communities,” said Secretary of the Commonwealth Kelly Thomasson.

Northam made his announcement at OAR of Richmond, a reentry services provider for former inmates as they return to society.

“This change will have a tremendous impact on the people we serve, enabling more Virginians to have their rights restored sooner,” said Sara Dimick, Executive Director of OAR of Richmond.

Virginia is one of just three states whose constitution permanently disenfranchises citizens with felony convictions, but gives the governor the discretion to restore civil rights.

Reforms over the last decade have made the restoration of rights process easier by streamlining the application, and eliminating the waiting period and a requirement to pay court costs and fees before rights can be restored. Before Tuesday’s announcement, Northam had restored civil rights to about 42,000 people. His predecessor, Gov. Terry McAuliffe, restored rights to about 173,000 people.

Some Republicans are opposed to restoring rights before inmates complete their sentences, including any probationary period.

“Democrats won’t be happy until they can do an absentee voting drive at Red Onion (State Prison),” said Jeff Ryer, press secretary for the Senate Republican Caucus.

Support Local Journalism and help us continue covering the stories that matter to you and your community.

Washington just enacted a new law, but other states are making progress, too.

How to restore voting rights in virginia

State Rep. Park Cannon addresses media after case dismissed by Fulton County DA

For Tarra Simmons, a representative in the Washington legislature, Wednesday was a “full-circle moment.”

After initially failing in 2020, Gov. Jay Inslee restored voting rights to more than 20,000 people with felony convictions who are out of prison, but still under community supervision.

Simmons, one of the bill’s sponsors, knows the impact of disenfranchisement firsthand. After being “born into generations of addiction and incarceration and poverty and violence,” Simmons was sentenced to prison in 2011 for selling a small amount of prescription drugs to financially fuel her own drug addiction, which she said resulted from trying to suppress the post-traumatic stress of her childhood.

She served 16 months, spent another four on work release and lost her right to vote through it all.

“Your life is just destroyed,” Simmons told ABC News, explaining the barriers people with felony convictions face trying to rejoin their communities, like finding a job, paying fines and navigating child custody battles. “I see why it sends people back to prison.”

Simmons did not go back to prison; she went to law school and became a civil rights attorney — but only after she won a unanimous opinion from the Washington Supreme Court, which ruled the state’s Bar Association could not prevent her — or anyone else — from taking the exam because of her past conviction.

She remarried seven years ago, adding a step-daughter to her family. Her youngest of two sons turned 18 on Tuesday; the older is 28. The whole family gets together for dinner at least once a week in the home they own.

“And now here I am, a freshman — only been on the job for two months — and the governor is signing my first bill,” she said.

The sweeping, nationwide effort to enact legislation with restrictive voting provisions has overshadowed an even greater endeavor to do the opposite. While lawmakers in 47 states have introduced 361 restrictive voting bills as of the end of March, proposed bills expanding voting outnumber that figure by more than twofold, according to the nonpartisan Brennan Center for Justice.

In several states, these expansive bills tackle felony disenfranchisement, which, according to the Brennan Center, disproportionately impacts Black Americans.

“The movement that we’re seeing this year is fantastic. It’s also a part of a trend that’s been going on for a number of years now,” said Sean Morales-Doyle, the deputy director of the Voting Rights and Elections Program at the New York-based think tank. “We still have a long way to go, but the fact that we’re seeing all this movement . helps me think that maybe we will get where we need to go soon.”

Last month, Virginia’s governor used his executive authority to return civil rights, including voting eligibility, to people who have completed their incarceration sentence. In November, California voters approved Proposition 17, restoring voting rights to those who have completed their prison terms. In 2019, Colorado, New Jersey and Nevada enacted similar legislative reforms.

Though financial hurdles still exist, Florida voters approved an amendment in 2018 ending permanent disenfranchisement for people convicted of felonies, excluding murder and sex crimes. Kentucky and Iowa’s governors, Democrat Andy Beshear and Republican Kim Reynolds, issued executive orders in 2019 and 2020, respectively, ending most permanent felony disenfranchisement in their states as well. The District of Columbia has taken the most significant step, beginning in 2020 to restore voting rights to people still incarcerated. Just two states, Vermont and Maine, allow people in prison to vote.

“There’s a lot of momentum here, and I think it’s really a policy that lawmakers are realizing is popular with voters across the political spectrum,” Morales-Doyle told ABC News. “Everyone believes in forgiveness and second chances.”

Morales-Doyle isn’t naïve to how divisive voting issues are in the United States. Still, according to a recent Associated Press-NORC poll, a majority of Americans support allowing people with felony convictions to vote after completing their sentences and, more importantly, only 20% oppose it.

New York is expected to follow in Washington’s footsteps by codifying voting eligibility for people with felony convictions who are on parole, and a similar bill has been introduced in Connecticut.

Gov. Andrew Cuomo signed an executive order in 2018 restoring voting rights for people with felony convictions who are on parole. However, like any executive action, it’s not permanent, and for this specific issue, governors must use their executive pardon authority, which is cumbersome and can lead to weekslong delays in restoring voting eligibility, according to Morales-Doyle.

In Virginia, the legislature is trying to amend the state constitution to permanently restore voting rights to people with felony convictions, post-incarceration. It passed both chambers this year and must again in 2022’s session before being on the ballot for voters to decide that November.

Daniel O’Donnell, who has represented a district on the Upper West Side of Manhattan in the New York Assembly since 2002, has been trying to expand voting rights to people on parole in his state for the past five years. He’s driven by his experience chairing the Corrections Committee while in office and his work as a public defender before that.

He said at the core of this fight is a decadeslong misunderstanding of what community supervision, like parole, means.

“In their minds, parole means ‘get out of jail free,’ when actually what parole means is you get supervised, and people don’t realize how strict that supervision is,” O’Donnell told ABC News. “If you are successfully on parole, you’re living a very restricted life — and you’re living a very restricted, law-abiding life because even the most minor infraction could end up (with) you getting off parole.”

Like Washington state’s bill, New York’s includes a provision that requires notifying people with felony convictions that they will regain their right to vote upon release from prison and assisting them with re-registration. O’Donnell described this as an essential step in the process, since re-assimilating into society is critical to prevent people from reoffending.

“If we keep on treating people as the other, they’re going to behave like the other,” O’Donnell said. “What they need is incentives to not commit again. So the better their life is, the more they feel connected to their neighborhood, and their neighbors and their community, the less likely they are to recommit.”

How to restore voting rights in virginia

Virginians with felony convictions on their criminal records will have an easier path to having their voting rights restored thanks to reforms called for this morning by Governor Terry McAuliffe, the Richmond Times-Dispatch reports. Under McAuliffe’s new rules, the time that people convicted of “violent” felonies must wait to apply for rights restoration will shrink from five years to three years. The list of crimes that constitute “violent felonies” in Virginia has historically included drug charges. That will change with these new reforms. All drug distribution and manufacturing crimes will be recategorized as “nonviolent” felonies, which means Virginians with these drug convictions will have no waiting period for applying for restoration. All “nonviolent” felony convictions already qualify Virginians for automatic rights restoration when they appeal directly to the governor, a policy instituted by former governor Bob McDonnell.

Finally, in case there’s still any confusion around what crimes are considered “violent” or “nonviolent” felonies, the McAuliffe administration plans to post a list on its website for clarification.

“Virginians who have made a mistake and paid their debt to society should have their voting rights restored through a process that is as transparent and responsive as possible,” McAuliffe said in a statement.

Virginia once had some of the strictest terms for restoring voting rights in the nation. A coalition of grassroots organizations led by the Virginia NAACP state conference, Advancement Project, Virginia New Majority, Virginia Organizing, Holla Back and Restore, S.O.B.E.R. House, and Bridging the Gap in Virginia have worked to make the new reforms possible.

But there is still much further to go. The civil rights organizations are pushing for automatic voting rights restoration for all people who have paid their debts to society immediately after serving their time in prison.

“While we are glad the Governor has responded to community concerns, we remain concerned about Virginia’s continued distinction between violent and non-violent offenses in the voting rights restoration process,” said Advancement Project Managing Director and General Counsel, Edward A. Hailes. “There are numerous benefits to restoring voting rights for people who have completed their sentences, including the fostering of full community integration and the fulfillment of our core democratic principles. Those benefits apply for everyone, regardless of the basis for their conviction. We encourage Virginia to join the majority of states, which do not make distinctions between different types of offenses, by passing a constitutional amendment to automatically restore voting rights for all.”

RICHMOND, Va.—On July 1, Virginia will implement eight more voting rights expansion measures backed by the House Democrats, making voting more accessible for all eligible voters to cast their ballots, which contrasts how Republicans nation-wide have advocated for voting restrictions.

“The right to vote is the bedrock of our democracy,” Virginia Speaker Eileen Filler-Corn said. “Here in the Commonwealth, our Democratic Majority has taken historic steps to expand the franchise and allow Virginians to have their voices heard.”

The new Virginia House measures improve both availability and accessibility of absentee voting, expand curbside voting, and allow early voting on Sundays. Notably, the House Democratic Caucus was proud to pass the Voting Rights Act of Virginia.

“Voter suppression efforts in other states show us the importance of our efforts to ensure ballot access here in Virginia,” said House Democratic Majority Leader Charniele Herring, who carried HJ 555, which begins the constitutional amendment process to restore the voting rights of former felons. “As legislators, our job is to make sure citizens have their voices heard, and that happens through their vote. Restricting or removing that power is undemocratic.”

This year, Virginia House Democrats also successfully passed legislation (HB 2081) banning people other than law enforcement from possessing guns within 40 feet of polling places on an election day. The ban also applies within one hour of opening or after closing the polling place, when ballots are counted, or when a local electoral board meets after an election to ascertain results. This legislation comes after the 2020 presidential election when armed protesters gathered outside vote counting centers in Arizona to protest the apparent election results.

Around the country this year, Republican-controlled legislatures are rolling back voting rights in an effort to suppress voters after former President Donald Trump made baseless claims that election fraud caused his loss. States such as Georgia, Texas, and Florida have made national headlines for their drastic voter suppression efforts. On June 22, Republicans in the United States Senate blocked a House bill aimed at securing voting rights nationwide.

“As we’ve seen across the nation, in Republican-led state legislatures, they are repeating history and punishing Black and Brown voters for exercising their power. In Virginia, under our leadership, we know that our democracy is strongest when everyone can participate,” said Delegate Cia Price, the patron of HB 1980. “The Voting Rights Act of Virginia protects the rights of historically suppressed communities instead of attacking them.”

Last year, when Virginia House of Delegates experienced its first Democratic majority in more than 20 years, House Democrats passed sweeping voting rights legislation including creating a permanent absentee vote-by-mail option, removing the excuse requirement for absentee voting, enacting same-day voter registration, establishing Election Day as a state holiday, expanding the voter identification law to include certain non-photo IDs, making voter registration applications available at high schools and colleges, authorizing automatic voter registration, and providing voting materials for non-English-speaking citizens in localities where a language minority group includes at least 10,000 voters or five percent of the voting population.

“The House Democratic Caucus continued our priority of expanding voting access during our second year in the majority. Voters should be free from unnecessary barriers or intimidation,” House Democratic Caucus Chair Rip Sullivan said. “The ballot box gives citizens the opportunity to shape their communities, the Commonwealth, and the country for years to come, which is why we have worked hard to uphold the rights of all voters across Virginia.”

The following measures go into effect on July 1, 2021, unless noted otherwise:

  • HJ 555 begins the two-year constitutional amendment process to restore certain civil rights — including the right to vote — for felons who have served their time. Leader Herring served as the patron.
  • HB 1810 grants the Governor authority to re-open online voter registration if the system fails prior to a pre-election registration deadline. The online system can be re-opened for the amount of time equal to the duration of the outage (rounded up to the nearest whole day) plus one additional day. Currently, the only way to extend the voter registration deadline is through a court order. This legislation was filed by Delegate Schuyler Van Valkenburg.
  • HB 1888 improves the availability and accessibility of absentee voting by requiring prepaid postage on envelopes to return absentee ballots, authorizing local electoral boards and registrars to designate drop-off locations for ballots, and allowing absentee-by-mail voters to “cure” certain errors in order to make their ballot countable. This legislation also creates procedural changes to help voters with a visual impairment or a print disability vote absentee by mail. The reforms in HB 1888 make voting easier for the voter and the registrar, amend some procedures to enhance clarity for both election officials and the public, and help place the Commonwealth on a solid legal footing. Del. Van Valkenburg carried this bill as well.
  • HB 1890, also known as the Voting Rights Act of Virginia, affirms voters’ access and ensures equity at the polls, by requiring any proposed changes to local voting laws or regulations must be (i) publicized and available for public comment by the affected communities and (ii) evaluated for adverse effects on members of protected classes before going into effect. It applies federal language access requirements to state and local elections when either 5 percent or more than 10,000 of the voting-age residents of a locality are members of a single language minority. Election and voting materials must be provided in the minority language once the threshold is met. The Voting Rights Act of Virginia strengthens protections against voter threats, intimidation, and misinformation, to ensure every voter can cast a ballot freely and safely. Either the Virginia Attorney General or affected individuals have the ability to initiate a civil action in court if these protections are violated. Del. Price served as the patron for HB 1890. This legislation goes into effect on September 1, 2021.
  • HB 1921 allows voters to vote outside the polling place if they have a disability or are injured; during a state of emergency due to a public health crisis, this extends to every voter. Signs outside of the polling place must clearly mark where the curbside voting area is located and notify voters how they can inform election officers that they are outside waiting to vote. Del. Price also introduced this bill.
  • HB 1968 permits localities to hold early voting on Sundays. This legislation was sponsored by Delegate Lamont Bagby.
  • HB 2125 allows any Virginia citizen who is 16 or 17 years old and otherwise eligible to vote, to be automatically added to the voter rolls on their 18th birthday. Delegate Alfonso Lopez filed HB 2125. Goes into effect on October 1, 2022.
  • HB 2198 addresses local elections for district- or ward-based offices, and mandates that if a candidate for the governing body or school board must reside in a district or ward, they must be elected by registered voters of that district or ward. Delegate Kelly Convirs Fowler patroned this measure. Goes into effect on January 1, 2022.

RICHMOND, Va. (AP) – Virginia Gov. Ralph Northam announced Tuesday that he has restored voting rights to more than 69,000 former felons who have completed their prison sentences but are still on probation.

Northam’s move mirrors a proposed constitutional amendment recently approved by the General Assembly that would automatically restore voting rights to people convicted of felonies once they serve their time and are released from prison. To take effect, the amendment must be approved by the legislature again next year and must win approval from voters in a statewide ballot referendum.

Until now, former felons who have served their sentences were not eligible to have their civil rights restored until after they completed probation. The new eligibility criteria announced by Northam means that, going forward, people convicted of felonies will become eligible to have their rights restored once they serve their prison time, although the governor’s office would still have to approve it.

In addition to being able to vote, the rights include the right to serve on a jury, run for office and become a public notary.

“Too many of our laws were written during a time of open racism and discrimination, and they still bear the traces of inequity,” Northam said in a statement.

“If we want people to return to our communities and participate in society, we must welcome them back fully – and this policy does just that,” he said.

Under the state constitution, the governor can restore civil rights to former felons. If the constitutional amendment is approved, the restoration of rights will become automatic when a felon is released from prison.

“We are making a tweak to the eligibility criteria that makes a huge impact on these people’s lives after they have returned to their communities,” said Secretary of the Commonwealth Kelly Thomasson.

Northam made his announcement at OAR of Richmond, a reentry services provider for former inmates as they return to society.

“This change will have a tremendous impact on the people we serve, enabling more Virginians to have their rights restored sooner,” said Sara Dimick, Executive Director of OAR of Richmond.

Virginia is one of just three states whose constitution permanently disenfranchises citizens with felony convictions, but gives the governor the discretion to restore civil rights.

Reforms over the last decade have made the restoration of rights process easier by streamlining the application, and eliminating the waiting period and a requirement to pay court costs and fees before rights can be restored. Before Tuesday’s announcement, Northam had restored civil rights to about 42,000 people. His predecessor, Gov. Terry McAuliffe, restored rights to about 173,000 people.

Some Republicans are opposed to restoring rights before inmates complete their sentences, including any probationary period.

“Democrats won’t be happy until they can do an absentee voting drive at Red Onion (State Prison),” said Jeff Ryer, press secretary for the Senate Republican Caucus.

For nearly 50 years, the state was subject to Voting Rights Act rules meant to deter racial discrimination. Those federal guidelines are now shredded, but Virginia just recreated them on its own.

Send any friend a story

As a subscriber, you have 10 gift articles to give each month. Anyone can read what you share.

Give this article

How to restore voting rights in virginia

How to restore voting rights in virginia

ARLINGTON, Va. — Georgia has sharply limited voting access, making drop boxes less available and forbidding anyone to hand out water to voters in line. Florida and Texas are poised to advance similar legislation. Alabama’s strict voter identification law is being used as a template elsewhere.

As states across the South race to establish new voting restrictions, Virginia is bolting in the opposite direction. The Democratic governor, Ralph Northam, this week capped a multiyear liberal movement for greater ballot access by signing off on sweeping legislation to recreate pivotal elements of the federal Voting Rights Act that were struck down by the Supreme Court’s conservative majority in 2013.

Alone among the states of the former Confederacy, Virginia has become a voting rights bastion, increasingly encouraging its citizens — especially people of color — to exercise their democratic rights. In the last 14 months, the state’s Democratic-controlled General Assembly and Mr. Northam have together repealed the state’s voter ID law, enacted 45 days of no-excuse absentee voting, made Election Day a state holiday and enacted automatic voter registration for anyone who receives a Virginia driver’s license.

Virginia, which for nearly 50 years had to submit changes to its elections to the federal government for approval under the Voting Rights Act’s preclearance requirements, has now effectively imposed the same covenants on itself, an extraordinary step for a state with a long history of segregation and racially targeted voting laws.

The new law that was approved on Wednesday, called the Voting Rights Act of Virginia, requires all local elections administrators to receive public feedback or advance approval from the state’s attorney general for changes like moving voting precincts or elections registrars’ offices, and allows voters and the attorney general to sue over voter suppression. It expressly prohibits any racial discrimination or intimidation related to voting.

“I have an aunt who marched against the poll tax. My grandparents both had to pay poll taxes,” said Marcia Price, a Democratic state delegate who sponsored the legislation. “Just knowing that they lived under a system that was unfair and unequal, I learned very early that it was wrong, and that it needs to be changed.”

Virginia’s expansion of voting protections comes at a moment when the state has ushered through a raft of progressive legislation unseen in its history. Since the 2019 election, when Democrats won majorities in the General Assembly to give the party full control of state government for the first time since 1993, Virginia has abolished the death penalty; enacted gun control measures long stymied in Washington; introduced an independent redistricting commission; raised the minimum wage to $15 per hour; and allowed local governments to remove Confederate statues, names and emblems that dot the state, which was once home to the capital of the Confederacy.

Republicans’ longtime grip on Virginia politics reached even the state’s most liberal corners. In Arlington, a Democratic stronghold across the Potomac River from Washington, a main highway stretching south from the nation’s capital was named for the Confederacy’s president, Jefferson Davis, for nearly a century until 2019. Under pressure from Mr. Northam, a state board allowed Arlington to change the name.

The state’s voting rights act is being signed into law by a governor whose career was nearly derailed by a blackface scandal in 2019. Since then, Mr. Northam has been at the forefront of a host of the state’s racial justice initiatives and has enjoyed high approval ratings. He said on Wednesday that the Virginia law should become a model for the nation.

“At a time when voting rights are under attack across our country, Virginia is expanding access to the ballot box, not restricting it,” Mr. Northam said. “Our Commonwealth is creating a model for how states can provide comprehensive voter protections that strengthen democracy and the integrity of our elections.”

Virginia’s turn away from its longtime restrictions on voting rights began in 2016, when Gov. Terry McAuliffe restored voting rights to 206,000 felons in the state over the objections of the Republican-led General Assembly and the state’s Supreme Court. After the court ruled that Mr. McAuliffe did not have the authority to restore felon voting rights en masse, but could do so case by case, he sent 206,000 individual voting rights restoration letters to felons, who were sent envelopes with a Virginia voter application form and a self-addressed stamped envelope.

“To me it was a moral, civil rights issue and this was a racist Jim Crow law that needed to be eliminated,” Mr. McAuliffe said on Wednesday.

Once Democrats took full control of state government last year, one of the first bills they passed created one of the longest early-voting periods in the country — a 45-day window for no-excuse absentee voting, in which people can vote remotely without having to provide a rationale. More than 2.8 million Virginians voted early in the 2020 election, nearly five times as many as did so in 2016.

“This is what my ancestors fought hard for,” said Charniele Herring, the author of the early voting bill, who last year became the first Black majority leader in the Virginia House of Delegates. “My parents had to have that struggle in the ’60s, and this is the time to stop that struggle and to protect everybody’s right to vote, no matter their political affiliation.”

Republican state legislators all opposed the Virginia Voting Rights Act, arguing that it would inundate local election administrators with lawsuits and complicate routine changes to voting. Glenn Davis, a Republican delegate from Virginia Beach who is running for lieutenant governor, said it was “simple human nature” that Democrats’ efforts to make voting easier, like eliminating Virginia’s photo identification requirement, would result in more fraud.

How to file taxes as a published writer

Note from Jane: Today’s guest post is by attorney Helen Sedwick (@helensedwick), an attorney licensed to practice in California only. She is the author of Self-Publisher’s Legal Handbook.

This information is general in nature and should not be used as a substitute for the advice of an attorney authorized to practice in your jurisdiction.

Most writers don’t realize that their memoir, short story collection, children’s book, or novel could mean money in their pockets, even if sales are disappointing.

Suppose you spend $5,000 hiring editors, designers, and other freelancers to publish your book. At the end of the year, you’ve made $2,000 in sales, which you offset with $2,000 of expenses. Can you deduct the remaining $3,000 from your “day job” income and reduce your income taxes?

Yes, if you treat your writing as a business and not a hobby.

U.S. tax code encourages new businesses by permitting entrepreneurs to offset losses from one business from other income as long as the owner has a serious intent to operate the business at a profit. The IRS wants you to succeed, so they can tax your income later.

For a long time, the IRS followed the rule that an income-producing activity was considered a hobby unless it showed a net profit during three out of five years. (If your writing is a hobby, then you may deduct book-related expenses only from book-related income.)

In practice, the hobby rule is not that strict. If you have a serious intent to make a profit from your writing (and quit your day job), a little advanced planning and discipline will help convince the IRS you’re an entrepreneur.

Treat your venture as a business.

Set up a website and advertise. Print business cards and bookmarks. Promote yourself and your book on social media and other venues. Hire experts to advise you. If you don’t treat your writing as a business, no one else will.

There is no need to incorporate or form a business entity. Your business is just as legitimate as a sole proprietorship. Maintaining an entity is simply too expensive, unless you are making $5,000 or more in net income. In that case, don’t worry about hobby rules, but discuss forming an entity with a tax professional to save on self-employment taxes.

Give your business a name.

Having a name helps you and others separate the business from your personal activities. File a Fictitious Business Name Statement (also called a DBA, doing business as, filing) with your local county. I suggest using a service, such as the DBA Store.

Obtain a Federal Employer Identification Number (EIN).

Even if your business is a sole proprietorship and you never have employees, get a separate EIN, the equivalent to a Social Security Number for your business. Be sure you go directly to the IRS website. Sham sites that look like the IRS site are popping up every day. They ask for your Social Security Number, mother’s maiden name, birthday—all the tools for stealing your identity. Don’t use them!

Apply for a resale certificate.

Unless you live in a state that does not charge sales tax, obtain a resale certificate, sometimes called a seller’s permit. Put the certificate in the name of your company and use your new EIN.

Find out if you need a local business license.

Many cities and counties require some businesses to obtain a business license. Search for “business license” and the city and county where your business is located. The Small Business Administration website has helpful links.

Invest time and effort into making a profit.

Attend conferences, and even better, speak at them. Join and host readings. Arrange school visits. Keep working on new books. Pitch new projects.

Follow tax rules.

  • If in any calendar year you pay an independent contractor (other than a corporation) $600 or more for services or $10 or more in royalties, ask the freelancer for a W-9 and report the payments on a 1099-MISC and the equivalent state form. This does not apply to payments to a corporation such as BookBaby, CreateSpace, or Lightning Source.
  • Report your business income and expenses on a Schedule C. If you have kept separate financial records, this is easy.
  • If your net income (gross revenues less deductions) from writing and self-publishing is $400 or more in any year, you may be required to pay self-employment tax on that income. If taxes on that income exceed $1,000 per year, you may be required to pay quarterly estimated taxes. Once you have reached this level of success, it’s time to consult a tax professional.

Separate personal finances from business finances.

Set up separate bank accounts and credit cards to cover business income and expenses.

Don’t jump the gun.

Wait until you have reasonable writing income before “launching” the business for tax purposes. Limit your deductions to those related to your self-published book or freelancing efforts. If you try to deduct ten years of writing conferences, you are inviting IRS scrutiny.

Maintain good business records.

In tax audits, more people are nailed for losing receipts than for cheating. If you don’t have a file cabinet (real or virtual) dedicated to your writing and self-publishing business, then get one. Invest in a simple business accounting software program.

Keep all records for seven years. Some people say three, but I suggest seven years to support your position that writing is your business.

What records to keep:

  • receipts
  • royalty statements
  • sales slips for direct sales (the ones you make at conferences and readings)
  • appointment books
  • brochures, business cards and handouts from conferences
  • manuscript critiques
  • thank-you notes from libraries or schools after readings
  • fan email
  • contest entries and notifications
  • correspondence with freelancers, whether or not you hire them
  • letters from agents and publishers, including rejections
  • bank and credit card records
  • printouts of PayPal summaries
  • W-9s and 1099s
  • sales tax returns

Final note

This tactic won’t work forever. If you have too many years of losses, the IRS is likely to question you or audit your returns. So don’t go overboard.

This nitty-gritty is the unromantic side of writing. But take the time to do it right, and you could save enough taxes to enjoy several lovely, romantic dinners, if not a wonderfully passionate vacation.

Disclaimer: Helen Sedwick is an attorney licensed to practice in California only. This information is general in nature and should not be used as a substitute for the advice of an attorney authorized to practice in your jurisdiction.

How to file taxes as a published writerNote from Jane: I highly recommend the Self-Publisher’s Legal Handbook. I received an advance copy and found the information useful and essential for just about any author. Click here to learn more and download a sample.

How to file taxes as a published writer

Helen Sedwick is a business lawyer with 30 years of experience assisting clients in setting up and running their businesses legally and successfully. Her clients include entrepreneurs such as wineries, green toy makers, software engineers, and writers. She is the author of Self-Publisher’s Legal Handbook.

How to file taxes as a published writer

How to file taxes as a published writer

Any tax advice for authors and writers should start with the question: are you a hobbyist or a pro? Being a “pro” affects what you can deduct expenses related to your work as an author, so it’s important to understand the distinction.

Making money as an author isn’t easy, and even bestselling authors advise you not to quit your day job. While many people are passionate about their writing and aspire to make a living at it, not every book author can claim to be a professional — “for profit” — in those most important eyes of the IRS. Here are some guidelines.

Hobbyist vs. Pro Author

The IRS makes a critical distinction between sole-proprietor authors (and all other hobbyists) who ply their craft vocationally rather than depend on their writing work to make a living.

You are presumed to be a professional if your writing makes a profit in at least three of the last five tax years, including the current year. If your book authoring doesn’t prove to be a for-profit endeavor, losses from your writing may not be used to offset other income for tax purposes (that is, if you can’t prove yourself to be a pro, allowable deductions cannot exceed the gross receipts for the activity.)

Of course, many self-published book authors want to make a profit and become pro (like Donna Fasano), but not everyone will. For that reason, writing is one of the professions that the IRS deemed worth deeper scrutiny because of their potential pursuit and attractiveness as avocations rather than vocations. (Others include horse and dog breeding, yacht chartering, airplane leasing, gambling, photography, fishing, farming, stamp collecting. and bowling).

The Hobby Loss Rule for Authors

Essentially, what’s informally known as the “hobby loss rule” separates the hobbyist from the pros. In addition to the 3-out-of-5-years of profit, the following factors (annotated from the IRS) may further help you to determine whether your writing would likely be considered “for profit” or as a hobby in the eyes of the government (1):

  • “Does the time and effort put into your writing indicate an intention to make a profit?” A full-time corporate day job requires you commit 35 hours or more to it — something to think about when considering your claim of “professional writer’s” hours.
  • “Do you depend on income from the activity?” Be realistic here: if your rent is $1,000 a month and for the past two years your total writing income from e-book royalties hovers around $25 for the same time period, you’re not going to legitimately claim that you depend on that income.
  • “If there are losses, are they due to circumstances beyond your control or did they occur in the start-up phase of the business?” The former part of the question could be interpreted as: could you have possibly made a profit had it not been for factors in the book marketplace? If you’re a writer in “startup,” rather than a hobbyist, you have several years to show a profit (see below).
  • “Have you changed methods of operation to improve profitability?” In other words, where your writing is concerned, if your profits are less than what you’d like, are you thinking like a businessperson and trying to improve your income by changing the way you operate? Maybe that would mean spending money to create a multi-author blog, or paying someone to create a content marketing plan, or augmenting your income by trying to get sponsors for your blog.
  • “Do you have the knowledge needed to carry on the activity as a successful business?” Being a professional book author, like running any business, is complex and challenging. How much do you know about running that business? Are you running it like a business, keeping records, keeping an eye to profitability?
  • “Have you made a profit in similar activities in the past?” If you have a successful book under your belt — or even a series of articles in paid publication — that’s a predictor that you’re a pro.
  • “Does your writing make a profit in some years?” The IRS is looking for sustained activity and profit to show you’re a professional rather than an amateur dabbler.

Of course, the hobbyists today can be the professionals of tomorrow. If you truly aspire to be a professional book author but don’t quite make the cut of the IRS definition, take heart. Keep plugging away at your writing and keep in mind the factors you need to develop to become considered a “pro.”

Read more about taxes and the book author, including sales tax facts for self-published authors.

Disclaimer: This article is meant to give general insight into tax information that might apply to writers, and to give readers an entry point so they themselves can research further. While every effort was made to ensure the information in this article was accurate at the time it was written, the Book Publishing site guide is a writer — not a tax expert. Therefore, anyone filing his or her taxes should consult a qualified tax preparer for updated tax laws and further specifics on how these rules might apply to an individual tax situation.
Following are specific IRS resources regarding the subjects mentioned in this article, to facilitate research into individual tax matters.
(1) Internal Revenue Code Section 183 (Activities Not Engaged in for Profit), as described in FS-2008-23
(2) IRS Publication 970 – Tax Benefits for Education
Note: The general information included in this article is not to be used avoid any tax penalties that might be levied by the IRS (see the Treasury Circular 230 regulation for the specific provision).

Unique Tax Issues to Be Aware of as an Author

How to file taxes as a published writer

Tim Boyle/Getty Images

How to file taxes as a published writer

Book authors face some unique situations when it comes time to file their tax returns. From keeping records to deciphering what it means to be an “exception” to a key tax rule, here’s a round-up of tax-related issues that may affect those who write books.

Book Writing: Hobby or Profession?

The “hobbyist vs. for profit” distinction for authors matter greatly for tax reporting. Because the job of a book author is not necessarily “steady,” there is an ebb and flow of income, some years might be more profitable than others — some years, not at all. In addition, with the proliferation of self-published authors — many of whom do see at least some income from their work — it becomes a bit confusing.

Profitability is a key factor in how the Internal Revenue Service determines whether or not you can legitimately claim the costs of your writing as business expenses. If you don’t already know for sure, it’s important to be aware of how the IRS makes the distinction between whether you’re a hobbyist writer or professional author.

Writers and Taxes: An Important Exception

The profession of “freelance author” is a bit different than most others in the eyes of the U.S. government — at least as far as capitalizing expenses on a tax return concerned.

The uniform capitalization rules require that most taxpayers match expenses with the income related to the expense during a tax year. However, since 1988 writers (and other artists, such as photographers) are exempted from this rule. That means, if you’re working on a long-lived book project (such as the biography of a U.S. President), you are allowed to deduct the expenses related to that book (say, travel for research) in the year the expense is incurred rather than in the year you receive the income.

Typical Tax Deductions for Authors

Bookmarks, launch parties, Book Expo America (BEA) trade show attendance, membership fees for the Author’s Guild — those are just a few of the business expenses a book author might incur. While you’re gathering and organizing your receipts — or setting up your new-author organization system for the coming tax year — learn about some author-specific, typically deductible expenses, so you can remember to plan or and/or keep the appropriate records for them.

Sales Tax Payments for Self-Published Books

Income taxes aren’t the only taxes self-published authors need to worry about. If you’re a self-published author and sometimes sell your own books, you’ll likely need to be collecting and paying state sales tax.

Disclaimer: This article is meant to give general insight into tax information that might apply to writers, and to give readers an entry point so they themselves can research further. While every effort was made to ensure the information in this article was accurate at the time it was written, the Book Publishing site guide is a writer — not a tax expert. Therefore, anyone filing his or her taxes should consult a qualified tax preparer or tax expert for updated federal and state income tax and sales tax laws and further specifics on how these rules might apply to an individual tax situation.

I’m thinking of publishing a book on kindle, but I don’t currently have a business set up. Do you need a business to publish a book? I’m curious as to how to handle US taxes for the royalties. I wouldn’t be publishing it from outside the US.

4 Answers 4

No, you don’t need to set up a business to self-publish a book. In the U.S., royalty income and all related expenses to publishing the book (e.g. paying a graphic designer to create a cover, advertising, travel expenses for a book tour, etc.) are reported on Schedule C of your personal tax return.

EDIT

Regarding Social Security and Medicare taxes, you don’t use the forms 940/941 that an employer would file. Instead, these contributions are called self-employment tax on your personal return, and cover both the employer and employee portion for Social Security and Medicare. The employer portion is a deduction on your personal tax return (available even to those that don’t itemize deductions).

As Steven pointed out in his answer, don’t forget that you may owe additional taxes that aren’t covered by withholding of any W-2 income you may have, so you may need to make estimated quarterly payments to avoid having to pay an underpayment penalty when you file your tax return.

Amazon will send you a 1099 that will identify the amount of royalties that they paid you. If you are just now starting, I would strongly recommend setting aside at least 30% of everything you earn in royalties as soon as you receive it. You are now considered self-employed, and you will have to pay 15% of your royalties as self-reported income tax. You will also have the self-employment tax, or the Social Security/Medicaid portion an employer would normally pay, which is now your responsibility. That will be about 15% as well.

Also keep in mind that if you start doing well with your sales, you will probably want to start paying that 30% to the IRS every quarter as estimated taxes. If you wait until the end of the year and then show a large sum of income on which you had not paid any taxes during the year, they will slap a penalty on you for failure to pay sufficient estimated taxes. Paying the estimated taxes throughout the year will help you to avoid that.

How to file taxes as a published writer

Usual disclaimer: I am not a lawyer nor a tax accountant. But here’s my understanding.

Yes, you must set up a business. You must report this income to the Federal government on Schedule C, which by definition makes you a business.

If you’re thinking, “Do I have to set up a CORPORATION?”, then no. You can be a simple sole proprietorship. This usually does not involve a lot of paperwork. You must check your state and local law to see what you have to do. I used to have a small side business in Ohio. There I was basically required to file a state form registering my business name and address and pay a small fee, like $50 or something like that. Now I live in Michigan and I had to fill out a form with the city and give them some modest amount of money, I forget how much. I also had to register with the state through a website. Big long form to fill out, but I don’t think I had to pay anything.

If you will be selling books directly to customers, you must register to collect sales tax. If you do all your selling through Amazon or other distributors, it’s their job to collect the sales tax. In America, only the final customer pays sales tax, not anyone else in the supply chain. (Unlike VATs in Europe.)

I presume you are not going to open an office but will work from your home. Check on local regulations about home-based businesses. Many towns have regulations intended to prevent someone from opening a factory in the middle of a residential neighborhood that has trucks arriving day and night and that’s churning out pollution, or to open a night-club that results in rowdy drunks wandering the streets. It’s highly unlikely that a writing business is going to disrupt the neighborhood, but you might get caught on some technicality not intended for people like you.

As @StevenDrennon notes, be prepared to pay taxes. I think he’s a little sloppy on his terminology: “Self-Employment Tax” means Social Security Tax paid by self-employed people. With a regular job, you pay half the tax and the company pays half the tax. (Which is all a silly fiction: as far as the employer is concerned, their half of the tax is part of what it costs them to hire you, and has to be turned over to the government just like your half of the tax. A more accurate statement would be that the amount of tax reported on your pay stub is only half of what you actually pay. But that’s another story.) When you have self-employment income, you have to pay both halves, or about 15%.

In addition, you must pay regular income tax on whatever you earn. How much this is depends on what tax bracket you’re in. It could be anywhere from zero to 39-point-something percent as of 2013. Plus you may have state and local taxes.

But remember to keep track of your expenses, as these are deductible. If you create a web site to market your book, your web hosting fees are deductible. If you mail copies of the book to reviewers, the cost of these books to you and the postage to mail them is deductible. If you buy software to format the book or produce artwork for the cover, that’s deductible. Etc.

If writing will be a significant percentage of your income, then you need to make quarterly estimated tax payments or you’ll get slapped with penalties. If you have a regular job and writing is just a small sideline, then you don’t really need to worry about this. Depending on how big a sideline, it may mean you owe a little bit come April 15. If your writing is small enough compared to your regular income, it may just be a dent in your refund. Yes, I know, we’re all hoping to write a best seller and get rich, but I suspect that most of us here measure our writing income in a few hundred to maybe a few thousand dollars a year.

“To produce an income tax return that has any depth to it, any feeling,” author Frank Sullivan quipped, “one must have Lived–and Suffered.” The suffering stems not only from the necessity of giving hard-earned money to the government, but also from the nature of dealing with tax regulations. Because tax policy is one of the most potent ways to regulate society, Congress and the President frequently amend the tax laws. Yes, the IRS puts out general guides to federal taxation, such as IRS Publication 17, Your Federal Income Tax, for individuals, and IRS Publication 334, Tax Guide for Small Business, for individuals who use Schedule C or C-EZ; both are free from http://www.irs.ustreas.gov . And yes, the IRS also has a Tele-Tax service you can use to check the status of a refund or hear recorded tax information. But the advice you receive might be erroneous and is not binding on the government. And in any event, IRS publications and tapes represent the views of the IRS and are sometimes inconsistent with precedent established by the tax courts.

The good news, though, is that tax preparation can be considerably easier if you follow a few simple recommendations, and you may be able to reduce your tax bill in the process. Of course, these recommendations are not a substitute for the advice or services of a qualified tax advisor, but if you’re publishing or thinking of publishing your own work,you should be able to prepare and carry out a tax strategy that will make your accountant’s job easier in April.

The guidelines we offer in Part I will cover the simplest issues. In forthcoming newsletters, we’ll provide advice on more complicated tax issues, including the home officededuction and the hobby loss challenge.

Getting Started

If you’re self-employed and make money from writing or self-publishing, youmust file Schedule C–Profit or Loss from Business or Profession–as an addendum to Form 1040. Schedule C is the main form for filing self-employment income and expenses (except for prize and award income, which you may enter directly on Form 1040 as “Other Income” to avoid payingself-employment tax on it).

In addition to personal income tax, you may also have to pay state or local taxes, such as an unincorporated business tax. These taxes vary with each state and municipality, so be sure to consult the tax guidelines of your home state and locality.

Updating your records on a regular basis makes the task of filling out tax returns mucheasier come April. Consider maintaining a separate business checking account and savings account for your professional income and expenses (seeIRS Publications 552, Recordkeeping for Individuals, and 583, Starting a Business and Keeping Records, for details about the “permanent, accurate, and complete” records the IRS requires).

Record all income and expenses generated from your self-publishing project promptly in a ledger, specifying the date any money was received or paid out, the character of the receipt or payout, the source or destination of the income, and other relevant data, and supporting the entries with copies or originals of the checks, bills, and receipts.

To set up a simple and efficient ledger, use column 1 for the date, column 2 for the nature of the income or expense, column 3 for the check or receipt number, column 4 for the amount of income, column 5 for the amount of the expense, and column 6 and subsequent columns for different expenses based on your special needs (for instance, office supplies, local transportation, subscriptions, legal/accounting fees, etc.). This means entering each expense twice, once in the expense column and again under the particular expense category into which it falls. For obvious reasons, it helps to make your expense categories fit easily into the expense categories shown on Schedule C. If you are self-publishing books, you should keep track of production and printing expenses as separate categories. Computer programs such as Excel, Quicken, and Quickbook are good for this kind of record-keeping.

Although larger publishers, with average annual gross receipts in excess of $1 million, must use accrual accounting, othersmay choose either the cash method or the accrual method. The cash method requires that you include all income actually received during the tax year and deduct all expenses actually paid during that year. (Also,in a few cases, the cash method might involve including income not yet actually received, if the income was credited or set apart so as to be subject to the taxpayer’s control. For example, income received by an agent for an author will usually be taxable to the author when received by the agent.) The accrual method, on the other hand, requires that you include all income that you earned and have a right to receive in the tax year, even if you do not actually receive it until the following tax year, and that you deduct expenses when they are incurred instead of when they are paid.

Most taxpayers operate on the simpler cash method, and we’re assuming here that you will too. Similarly, since the tax year for most taxpayers is January 1 through December 31, we’re assuming that you’re also using the calendar year.

The cost of creating a work (or of acquiring a capital asset) is called its “basis” for tax purposes. When you use the cash method and deduct expenses currently, your work has a zero basis and the entire amount of the proceeds from sales will be taxable income. However, the cost of inventory may have to be deducted over several years under capitalization rules provided by the InternalRevenue Code.

One tax-saving technique for any taxpayer using the cash method is to pay as many expenses as possible in December while putting off the receipt of income until January, the new tax year. The idea is to decrease this year’s tax bill by offsetting income from the present tax year with expenses while deferring income until the following tax year. However, if you anticipate a significant increase in your income in the next year that will put you into a higher tax bracket, or if the tax rate is set to increase in the new year, it makes more sense to receive as much income during the present year as you can, and to defer paying expenses until the next one.

Grants are usually taxed as earned income, as are all monetary prizes, unless a recipient assigns an award to a qualified charitable institution. In that case, for tax purposes, the prize and the donation are not treated as income and a deductible charitable contribution, but rather as if the award was not received. If you win a monetary prize, you may enter the amount received on Form 1040 (as “Other Income”) and thus avoid paying self-employment tax on it. On the other hand, if you fear a home-office deduction or hobby loss challenge by the IRS, it might be better to enter such income on Schedule C. You should discuss how to treat a money prize with your tax advisor.

For help with respect to home office deductions and hobby losses, among other things, watch this space.

Current tax and benefit rules do not work well for authors. Many authors hold a number of jobs to sustain a creative career, and need to navigate a complex, bureaucratic tax system. Those who are registered solely as self-employed do not receive holiday or sick pay, or other employee benefits such as company pensions.

A 2016 European Commission study on authors’ remuneration which surveyed authors, journalists, translators and illustrators across Europe found that UK writers had less protection than in many other countries. For example the AGESSA scheme in France allows authors to receive benefits such as sick pay and unemployment benefit, with publishers and other content users making contributions to the fund. Similar provisions apply in Germany.

The only thing that hurts more than paying an income tax is not having to pay an income tax.

Thomas Dewar – Income Tax, Pay, More

Universal Credit

Emerging and struggling authors face difficulties in claiming benefits. Under the old system, which is now being phased out and replaced by Universal Credit, some authors with low earnings could claim Tax Credits to supplement their income. This enabled them to dedicate more time to their writing, ensuring that they could continue to write as a profession.

But the introduction of Universal Credit means that the self-employed must meet the “Minimum Income Floor” to receive benefits. This is equivalent to the National Living Wage for most working-age people. Given the median annual income of a professional author is £10,500, which is well below the National Living Wage, many authors will lose their entitlement to benefits under Universal Credit.

Furthermore, a self-employed worker’s entitlement to Universal Credit is assessed monthly. This will make it even harder for professional writers to reach the Minimum Income Floor and claim Universal Credit, as authors’ incomes are not stable and tend to fluctuate from month to month.

We are calling for reforms to Universal Credit so that it does not penalise self-employed creators on low incomes. We also believe it should deal with “lumpy” incomes by basing payments on average incomes over two years. This would ensure that authors are paid benefits in lean periods and do not fall out of benefits on receiving an advance or royalty cheque.

Making Tax Digital (MTD)

Under the Government’s MTD proposals, any business or self-employed worker whose annual turnover exceeds £10,000 would have to file quarterly returns online. The Society of Authors has long argued that the minimum threshold is far too low, and would place an administrative and financial burden on lower paid workers.

Self-employed workers and businesses earning above the VAT threshold (currently £85,000) were required to start filing quarterly returns for VAT purposes from April 2019. It will be extended to self-employed workers earning below the VAT threshold from April 2020 at the very earliest. We will be keeping a close eye on HMRC’s next steps and ensuring that any future reforms don’t damage authors’ interests.

National Insurance Contributions (NICs)

In September 2018 the Government announced that it was dropping plans to abolish Class 2 NICs. This is good news for the lowest paid, but we question why HMRC has completely rolled back plans that would have benefited 3.4 million people.

Class 2 NICs are paid by self-employed workers earning more than £6,365 (2019/2020 figures). Those earning below this threshold can make voluntary Class 2 contributions of £3 a week to access benefits such as the state pension. Had Class 2 NICs been absolished, those earning below the threshold could only have made voluntary contributions through Class 3 NICs, which are £15 a week. This adds up to £780 per year, a fivefold increase on the Class 2 annual contribution of £156.

The SoA submitted evidence and met with HMRC officials, in order to express concern that this change would disproportionately affect authors and other creators who are already struggling financially. We are pleased that HMRC has listened to concerns of the lowest-paid earners. However we urge the Government to continue to find an approach to National Insurance which simplifies the system for everyone, whilst protecting the pensions of the lowest paid.

#PayTheCreator

Creators’ work is the foundation of the largest sector within the UK economy. Yet their needs are repeatedly ignored when policy, economic and support decisions are being made.

We are a member of the Creator’s Rights Alliance (CRA) #PayTheCreator campaign, which brings together the campaigning work of member organisations to collectively call for creators of all types to be paid properly for the work they do, and the rights they grant, and to be given the same considerations enjoyed by other workers in the areas of pay, business support and policy making.

As a writer, you can save hundreds (even thousands!) of dollars at tax time by deducting business expenses. That’s because every time you write off an expense, you lower your taxable income – putting the money you spend on your business back in your pocket.

A Few Things to Keep in Mind

When it comes to deducting business expenses, there are certain regulations you need to follow:

Business expenses must be both ordinary (commonly accepted in your trade) and necessary (helpful and appropriate for your business). The expenses we list below fall into this category.

The IRS requires documentation of any business expense you deduct. That’s why it’s so important to track your expenses during the year. If you didn’t track your expenses last year, don’t worry; our guide shows you how to retroactively find deductible expenses.

Because there’s always a chance you may be audited, save your business receipts for at least three years after you file your taxes.

Tax Deductions for Writers

If you’re a writer, here are 19 deductible expenses you should keep track of throughout the year:

1. Mileage: Keep track of all your business-related trips! While there are lots of ways to do this (like taking odometer readings before and after trips), the easiest way is to use an app like Stride that records mileage while you drive:

Between your home office and appointments (this does not apply if you have a permanent place of work to which you must commute)

Between client appointments

On work-related errands, such as picking up supplies

If you choose to take the standard mileage deduction, keep in mind that you cannot deduct individual vehicle expenses like gas, oil changes, car repairs, and car insurance.

2. Home Office: The IRS keeps a close eye on this deduction, so make sure you only write off your office if it’s a dedicated home workspace used solely and regularly for your writing business.

Have a home office? You can write it off with either:

The simplified option: Multiply the square footage of your office (up to 300 square feet) by the standard rate of $5.

The actual expense method: Add up the expenditures related to your home office, including:

Direct expenses, such as supplies for and repairs to your office. You can deduct these in full.

Indirect expenses, like your mortgage, insurance, and utilities. You’ll divide the total cost of these expenses by the percentage of your home that’s used for business.

3. Software and Other Subscriptions: You can write off any software or subscriptions you use to run your business, like:

4. Professional Development: You can deduct costs for any continuing education classes, conferences (like the American Society of Journalists and Authors Conference), or publishing events (like BookExpo) that help you learn new techniques and improve your business. You can even deduct travel and lodging expenses if you travel to a convention or conference. Meals are deductible when you’re away for business, but only up to 50 percent.

5. Subscriptions: The cost of magazines, journals, newsletters, and other subscriptions that are useful for your writing business (e.g. a magazine to which you want to sell a freelance article) is deductible.

6. Research Expenses: If you invest in books or research for your writing, you can deduct those costs.

7. Outsourcing: The cost of hiring someone to help with your business (e.g. an editor or proofreader) is deductible.

8. Agent Fees: Keep track of any fees your literary agent charges… they’re deductible!

9. Office Supplies: Items that you buy for everyday office use, like pens, paper, postage, and notepads, are all deductible. Good news: you can still write these off even if you take the simplified home office deduction.

10. Cell Phone Bills: Do you use your phone exclusively for business? You can fully deduct related expenses (including the phone purchase and monthly bills). If you also use your phone for personal reasons, you should only deduct the portion used for business. The best way to do this is to calculate what percentage of your calls were work-related and then claim that percentage of your bill.

11. Business Cards: Designing and printing business cards is a deductible marketing expense.

12. Submission Fees: From small journal submission fees to larger contest entry charges, all your submission fees are deductible.

13. Printing and Copying: Keep your receipt anytime you print or copy work-related materials like marketing flyers, rough drafts, and office records. Print jobs are deductible!

14. Advertising: When you invest in promoting your business, keep track of how much you spend! Online ads, signs, print ads, videos, website hosting fees, and more are all deductible.

15. Promotional Goodies: If you give away items like bookmarks to help promote your business, keep the receipts… promo goodies are deductible!

16. Parking: Anytime you have to pay for parking while you’re working, save your receipts; these expenses are deductible. Unfortunately, this doesn’t apply to parking tickets or traffic violations, so drive safely!

17. Tolls: Any toll fees you pay while working are tax deductible as long as they’re not already being reimbursed.

18. Memberships: If you enroll in any memberships, such as to the Science Fiction Writers of America, to help you do your job, you can deduct your dues. This also applies to nonfiction writers and their professional organization memberships.

19. Health Insurance: As long as you don’t get health insurance via a spouse or employer, you can deduct 100 percent of your monthly premiums. Keep in mind that if you receive a government subsidy, you can only write off the amount you pay each month (not the original price of your plan). Note: your health insurance premiums are taken as a personal deduction on Form 1040, NOT deducted as a business expense.

Some Common Expenses You Can’t Deduct

The IRS deems some common expenses as non-deductible. These include:

Personal hygiene expenses, like haircuts, clothing that can be reasonably worn outside of work, and dry cleaning (unless it’s for a uniform)

Legal violation fees, like parking tickets or court fees

Commuting mileage if you work at a permanent office away from home

Life insurance premiums when you are the beneficiary, even if you take the policy out to secure a business loan

An Easy Way to Track Your Expenses

Have you tried our free expense tracker? Stride is an app that makes it simpler than ever to find deductible expenses, take pictures of receipts, and automatically record business mileage.

Are you a member?
Click here to access the Writers’ How-to series for free!

The Writers’ How-to series offers professional guides on a variety of topics for writers.

  • The Directory of Canadian Publishers is a searchable online database available as a one-year subscription.
  • Publications offer information and advice on the business of writing and are available for purchase in PDF format online. Print versions are available by special order. * Please contact the office at [email protected] or 416-703-8982 to order. Please note: Print publications are subject to an additional charge of $2.00 per publication to cover costs associated with printing, shipping, and handling. *Paper copies are not currently available as staff work from home.

DIRECTORY OF CANADIAN PUBLISHERS

This searchable online database lists Canadian publishers who currently accept unsolicited manuscripts. Listings include informaton about genres, categories, and any specific submission instructions. The Directory also includes a helpful introduction with quick tips on finding a publisher, submitting a manuscript, and negotiating a contract.

Click the Buy Now button to purchase a one-year subscription to the Directory of Canadian Publishers for $10.00.

Once your order is processed, we will send you details on how to access the Directory through our website. Please allow 2 business days for your order to be processed.

PUBLICATIONS

Select the publications you would like to purchase below using the Add to Cart button. Your cart will open in a new window, where you can review your selections before purchasing. When finished with payment, be sure to click the “return to Writers’ Union” button. Your username and password will then be emailed to you for access to download your publications.

Purchase the whole set of Writers’ How-to publications

Download every publication in the series for information and advice on all of the topics below.

Latest Publications

Thinking About Your Archives? It’s Never Too Late to Consider the Future of Your Past (2021)
By Sarah Hillier

This guide to literary archives covers basic archival principles and what’s important to keep, how to maintain and organize your files, digital considerations, selecting the right archival repository, how to negotiate the donation or sale of your archives, and more.

Everything You Never Wanted to Know About Taxes (2019)
By Joel Fishbane

A practical tax guide for those in the business of writing that covers types of income and expenses, details about the GST, and incorporation. This publication contains information useful to all writers, whether you file your own taxes or have them filed by a professional.

The Last Chapter: Estate and Legacy Planning for Writers (2019)
By Susan Goldberg

This publication covers wills and powers of attorney, literary estates and appointing a literary executor, and how to plan your literary archive. It includes comments from Shauna Singh Baldwin, Brian Brett, Terry Fallis, Lawrence Hill, Robert J. Sawyer, Susan Swan, and others.

How to Self-Publish (2017)
By Eve Silver

This in-depth guide covers the how and why of self-publishing, from editing and design to distribution and marketing. It includes information suitable for authors with both unpublished and previously published materials.

$9.99 – Add to Cart

Sell Your Book: An Author’s Guide to Publicity and Promotion (2017)
By Suzanne Alyssa Andrew

This publication provides ideas for publicity and promotional activities that work, including a blueprint for your own personal book marketing plan. It features tips from authors Claire Cameron, Chris Chambers, Farzana Doctor, Christine Fisher Guy, Maria Meindl, Lana Pesch, and Russell Smith, with industry advice from Dundurn Press’s Margaret Bryant, Quill & Quire’s Sue Carter, and McNally Robinson’s Chris Harrow.

Contracts Self-Help Package

If you have been offered a contract by a publisher, or anticipate such an offer in the near future, help is available. This package helps writers evaluate and negotiate contracts offered by publishers. The Model Trade Book Contract is an example of an equitable publishing agreement between an author and publisher. Help Yourself to a Better Contract (written for the Union by legal-counsel Marian Hebb) is a guide to the negotiation process, including a checklist of favourable contract provisions.

Model Trade Book Contract (2021)

This comprehensive model contract provides reasonable minimum terms for trade book contracts and is a useful comparative tool for evaluating your publisher’s contract.

Help Yourself to a Better Contract (2006)
By Marian Hebb

Checklist of favourable book contract provisions with advice on what to ask and what to watch for. Designed to aid writers in book contract negotiations with their publishers.

Other Publications

Anthology Rates and Contracts (2006)

This document provides notes on contributions to anthologies, suggests minimum rates, and provides a suggested anthology contract.

$7.00 – Add to Cart

Author & Editor (1983)
By Rick Archbold, Doug Gibson, Dennis Lee, John Pearce, Jan Walter

A booklet describing the relationship between author and editor, including a list of dos and don’ts for both parties.

$7.00 – Add to Cart

Author & Literary Agent (2007)

Guidelines and responsibilities governing the relationship between the author and the literary agent.

$7.00 – Add to Cart

From Page to Screen (1999)

A reference guide regarding options, film, and TV contracts for original literary works, including information on minimum and maximum rates paid.

$7.00 – Add to Cart

Ghostwriting (1995)
By Marian Hebb

This publication includes various details to consider when negotiating a ghost writing agreement, including a sample contract.

$7.00 – Add to Cart

Glossary of Publishing Terms (2003)

An aid to authors when dealing with the book publishing industry — usually during contract negotiations. Intended as a user-friendly, alphabetical reference guide to terms commonly used within the industry.

$7.00 – Add to Cart

Writers’ Guide to Grants (2001)

An informative list of grants available to Canadian writers; includes information about writing samples, types of juries and how they judge, and application procedures.

How to file taxes as a published writer

Taxes, record-keeping, and keeping track of deductions don’t always come naturally to writers. This post, written by tax professional Andrew Stern, author of Z Art of Taxes, helps demystify the process.

Take it away, Andrew…

What writers should know about taxes

KISS! No, not the rock group. You know what I mean. Simplicity.

I’ll start with a general tax/financial overview and then address a few specific issues for writers.

Your financial life can overwhelm if not handled strategically and in a timely fashion. Create a system where you can track your entire financial life without it taking much of your time. No special skill set is required.

It’s easier than you think. All tax & financial responsibilities start with excellent recordkeeping. You must be able to see and analyze your financial life to accomplish your financial goals and meet your tax & financial responsibilities.

Tax planning and preparation is a math puzzle with variables from year to year. The math, for the most part, is straightforward.

Your goal is to connect your opportunities into one cohesive overall tax strategy: business deductions, business use of home and auto, retirement plan funding, estimates, health insurance, medical expenses, Health Savings Accounts. They all fit together into your tax planning.

What writers can deduct

Your business deduction opportunities are the same as any other self-employed taxpayer. Tax code states that an expense can be deducted for business if it meets the test of being “ordinary and necessary” to your profession.

Your task is to carefully analyze where you spend your money to see what fits into that definition. There are certain expenses that are black and white; you drive a car, use a phone, have an office. What you are looking for, in addition to the obvious, are the indirect, peripheral, personal expenses that might be linked to the tax code definition of what constitutes a business expense.

Manipulate and exploit your financial life. Identify what you like to spend money on and see if it can be linked to your business. If you like to drink wine and spend money on wine, write articles about wine and submit them to publications for publishing. If you like to travel, write travel articles and submit them for publishing. Look at what your interests are, where you spend your money on those activities, and use them as subject matter for your writing opportunities.

Book “production costs”

If you spend money to create a product, such as a book, film, or a set of recordings (what we call an album), a product that once it is finished will get duplicated and sold, the expenses associated with the creation of the product have specific rules. All expenses incurred are rolled into one “production cost” category, they are capitalized (sorry, tax speak), and amortized (sorry, tax speak again, this means deducted) over a three (3) year life, using the safe harbor. You can deduct 50% of the production costs in the 1st year, 25% in years 2 & 3.

For example, if I record an album I would pay for musicians, engineering, recording studio time, art work, mixing, and mastering. Those are all production costs. They create the product which I can then duplicate and sell.

Keys to tax preparation and tax planning

  1. Track your entire financial life using personal finance software.
  2. Stay current on all tax deadlines, filings, and scheduled tax payments.
  3. Start early in the year for tax preparation. This allows you to go through this process with enough time to ensure that you have not overlooked anything or missed opportunities.
  4. The information required for your tax return preparation is obtained thru careful analysis of your yearly software reporting.
  5. Turn what you spend money on into deductions.
  6. Engage in tax planning every year.
  7. Perform tax planning every year in November or December.
  8. Find a good tax practitioner who is…
    • Smart, someone with a bigger perspective of the world
    • Responsive, always returns e-mails and phone calls within a day or two
    • Can explain issues in plain English
    • Street-wise & financially savvy

Using a personal finance software program is the BEST way to track your financial life:

  1. No more creating spreadsheets where you must log in every single piece of data.
  2. No more dumping receipts on your desk and sorting thru them.
  3. No more last minute crush to the deadline.

Using the personal financial software works like this

  1. Every line item on every credit card and checking account statement is downloaded directly into the software.
  2. All you must do is to categorize what the inflow and outflows are.
  3. No special bookkeeping skill set required.
  4. Doesn’t take very much time, 5 to 10 hours a year.

Clear as muddy waters?

Andrew Stern is a tax practitioner, Enrolled Agent, musician. I’ve had my own tax accounting practice for 30 plus years, working for a wide variety of clientele, including many taxpayers in the arts: writers, musicians, fine artists, etc. Been playing guitar since I was a teenager, have my own ProTools recording studio in my residence, write, record and release music with my spouse, Laura LaRue. The past 5 years we have released dance singles, charting Billboard top 20 dance charts, licensed and used for placement, most recently Shameless season 7 on Showtime. Also have catalog for pop, rock, ballads, and Latin dance available thru download. Music and videos can be reached at z-axman.com. Latest project is our Nashville style country album, just being released. You can check it out at 3pairsofboots.com, available thru download.

Please note: This blog post is not a substitute for legal or tax advice. If you have specific tax issues or questions, discuss them with your legal or tax advisor.

Art: Vanitas Still Life by Jacob de Gheijn II

Are you a self-employed scribe? Though it may not always seem like it when you’re crouched over a keyboard cranking out content, your words can be worth their weight in gold if you know which tax deductions to claim. В В Keep reading for a list of ten unmissable tax deductions for writers. В

Self-Employment Tax

В Being a self-employed writer makes you eligible for the self-employment tax deduction. Your eligibility means you can reduce your taxable income by the employer-equivalent portion (i.e., half) of your self-employment taxes. Self-employment tax includes both Social Security and Medicare tax. For example, paying $1,000 in self-employment tax would reduce your income subject to tax by $500. Reducing your taxable income lowers your overall tax liability. В

Office Space

В Enjoying casual Friday every day isn’t the only perk of being a work-from-home wordsmith. You can also deduct the costs of your home office in one of two ways. You can deduct a certain dollar amount per square foot of your office up to a specified square footage through the simplified method. Or, you can deduct a percentage of the real costs of the home office through the traditional manner. В

Equipment

В From a personal computer to a desk, you’ll have to fork over a pretty penny on office equipment for your writing business. You can offset these expenditures by depreciating them – that is, deducting the costs in a single year or over a period of years.

Health Insurance

В It might not cure your writer’s block, but getting health insurance is a must for penmen and women of all ages. Fortunately, self-employed writers can deduct 100 percent of the premiums they pay for medical, dental and vision insurance. В

Hired Help

В Ernest Hemingway once said, “The only kind of writing is rewriting.” If you are fortunate enough to have the resources to hire in-house or contract editors or proofreaders to aid in the rewriting process, you can deduct their wages. You can also reduce your income by any tax-deductible hiring expenses, from recruitment to job fair expenses. В В

Declaration of status

The Internal Revenue Service requires that we have declaration of status on file for anyone who is or will be receiving payments from Springer. The type of form to be filled out depends on the country of citizenship. Below are the names and description of the forms that we require.

Revenue service forms

W9 , this form is to be completed and signed by all US nationals, and US permanent residents. (individuals and companies) This form represents a declaration of US citizenship/permanent residence. At the end of the tax year all authors who fall under this category will receive a 10-99 Misc form listing all payment made during the corresponding tax year.

Tax form for authors/editors publishing with Springer US offices

We recommend that you complete and return these tax forms to us along with your contracts; this will ensure that Springer withholds the appropriate tax rate on your royalties as required by the US Government. While these forms are not required, it is of benefit to you to complete and return these forms to us.

Please note:

Only fill in these forms when you sign a contract with Springer New York. This information is not relevant to any authors (whether or not based in the US) who sign contracts with Springer offices in any other country.

  • All United States citizens should fill out and return form W-9 with their Social Security Number (SSN) included. Royalty income will be subject to 28% backup withholdings as required by the United States Government on all W-9 forms received without SSN’s.
  • All foreign authors and editors should fill out and return form W-8BEN and include their assigned United States Government Individual Taxpayer Identification Number (ITIN) in Line 6 of the form. By including the ITIN, the tax treaty between the US and the individual’s respective country of residence will be applied. If no ITIN is given, royalty income will be subject to 30% backup withholdings as required by the United States Government. Foreign authors and editors can call the IRS directly at 1-800-829-1040 or visit their website at http://www.irs.gov/individuals/index.html and select the ITIN help function to get help based on their individual circumstances. Providing the individual’s country tax ID in Line 7 will not exempt them from withholding. Filling out the W-8BEN without and ITIN only confirms that the person is not a United States citizen. It does not exempt them from withholding’s deductions.
  • http://www.irs.gov/individuals/index.html

If you decide to return these forms at a future date instead of with the fully executed contracts, we ask that you kindly include a photocopy of the fully signed agreement for additional reference.

If you are a repeat Springer Editor and you have already supplied these forms to us in the past, you are not required to send them again.

All of these forms, along with detailed instructions on how to complete them, can also be downloaded from the Internal Revenue Service Website:

Tax withholding

US authors and permanent US residents

As long as we have a completed W9 form, there will be no tax withholding on any royalty payments.

Non US Authors

The Internal Revenue Service requires that we withhold 30% of all royalty earnings for all foreign nationals except as provided below:
Some countries have established tax treaties with the US, which benefits its citizens by lowering the amount of tax withheld by the US taxing authority. The way to take advantage for this is by obtaining an individual tax identification number from the US internal revenue service. This document is valid for life, and can be used with other companies from which our authors may also be receiving payment. For more information please go to IRS.gov and type ITIN in the search term. Then click on the top subject Individual Taxpayer Identification Number (ITIN) you will be prompted to a detailed frequently asked questions section. Once an ITIN is obtained, this must be submitted to our office and we will then apply the appropriate tax withholding rate. *some countries do not have a tax treaty with the US, in this case the rate will remain at 30%

Contact the author helpdesk for questions on author royalties

Editor’s/author’s complimentary copy

Book editors/authors are entitled to receive a free copy of the electronic version of their book. According to the publishing agreement between an author/editor and Springer, authors/editors may receive free print copies. The agreement will also state if a discount applies when obtaining additional print copies.

Book discounts for authors & editors

Book authors, editors and chapter authors are entitled to order Springer books — print and electronic versions — at a generous discount. The quantity of books ordered must be in the normal range for private use. Resale is not permitted.

At the end of the book production process book authors receive either

  • an e-mail that includes their log in details for their personal MySpringer account. You are registered as an author and will receive your discount automatically when ordering online through MySpringer.
  • or an e-mail that includes the personal SpringerToken¹ (together with instructions how to use it).

If you did not receive one of these e-mails for any reason, you can alternatively request the author discount (SpringerToken) via the request form below. The time between submitting the request and receiving the token should generally not take longer than two working days.

¹) SpringerToken for authors: personal discount that can be used by one person only. It is valid for a lifetime. Just enter it with your first book order. For any further online book orders your author discount will apply automatically.

Ordering books with a discount (SpringerToken)

The SpringerToken is only needed for your first order of Springer books (print and electronic versions). It is valid for a lifetime. For any further online orders you will automatically receive your author discount.

Further ordering information

  • Payment methods
    You may choose between credit card or invoice (options might depend on the delivery country).
  • Shipping times
    Shipping times are mentioned on each book’s homepage on springer.com and on your specific order confirmation.
  • Tax charges
    Tax is charged according to the delivery country. It is possible to enter a tax free code during the ordering process or on you springer.com user profile page (My Springer).
  • Contact the author helpdesk for questions on author discounts

Invoice information

Invoice copy / invoice correction / statement of account

For any questions about your invoice or statement of account please contact our author helpdesk

How to file taxes as a published writer

How to file taxes as a published writer

How to file taxes as a published writer

What Is a Tax Return?

A tax return is a form or forms filed with a tax authority that reports income, expenses, and other pertinent tax information. Tax returns allow taxpayers to calculate their tax liability, schedule tax payments, or request refunds for the overpayment of taxes. In most countries, tax returns must be filed annually for an individual or business with reportable income, including wages, interest, dividends, capital gains, or other profits.

Key Takeaways

  • A tax return is a documentation filed with a tax authority that reports income, expenses, and other relevant financial information.
  • On tax returns, taxpayers calculate their tax liability, schedule tax payments, or request refunds for the overpayment of taxes.
  • In most places, tax returns must be filed annually.

Understanding Tax Returns

In the United States, tax returns are filed with the Internal Revenue Service (IRS) or with the state or local tax collection agency (Massachusetts Department of Revenue, for example) containing information used to calculate taxes. Tax returns are generally prepared using forms prescribed by the IRS or other relevant authority.

In the U.S., individuals use variations of the Internal Revenue System’s Form 1040 to file federal income taxes. Corporations will use Form 1120 and partnerships will use Form 1065 to file their annual returns. A variety of 1099 forms are used to report income from non-employment-related sources. Application for automatic extension of time to file U.S. individual income tax return is through Form 4868.

Typically, a tax return begins with the taxpayer providing personal information, which includes their filing status, and dependent information.

The Sections of a Tax Return

In general, tax returns have three major sections where you can report your income, and determine deductions and tax credits for which you are eligible:

Income

The income section of a tax return lists all sources of income. The most common method of reporting is a W-2 form. Wages, dividends, self-employment income, royalties and, in many countries, capital gains must also be reported.

Deductions

Deductions decrease tax liability. Tax deductions vary considerably among jurisdictions, but typical examples include contributions to retirement savings plans, alimony paid, and interest deductions on some loans. For businesses, most expenses directly related to business operations are deductible. Taxpayers may itemize deductions or use the standard deduction for their filing status. Once the subtraction of all deductions is complete, the taxpayer can determine their tax rate on their adjusted gross income (AGI).

Tax Credits

Tax credits are amounts that offset tax liabilities or the taxes owed. Like deductions, these vary widely among jurisdictions. However, there are often credits attributed to the care of dependent children and seniors, pensions, education, and many more.

After reporting income, deductions, and credits, the end of the return identifies the amount the taxpayer owes in taxes or the amount of tax overpayment. Overpaid taxes may be refunded or rolled into the next tax year. Taxpayers may remit payment as a single sum or schedule tax payments on a periodic basis. Similarly, most self-employed individuals may make advance payments every quarter to reduce their tax burden.

You can file a tax return by filling it out yourself, using a tax software program, or by hiring a tax preparer or accountant who will gather the required information from you and file it on your behalf.

Special Considerations

The IRS recommends that filers keep tax returns for at least three years. However, other factors may require more prolonged retention. Some situations may require indefinite retention of filed returns.

If a tax return contains errors, an amended return should be submitted to correct the discrepancy.

How to file taxes as a published writer

Cliché or not, we all know the two inevitable things in this world: death and taxes. Funny enough, both of them take you by inches, nibbles, and bits at a time. Well, beating death is somebody else’s job. I’m here to give you some very general financial planning advice for the self-published author.

Two Disclaimers: This blog post is written based entirely on United States tax law. That’s where we’re located, as are the majority of our clientele, so it only makes sense for me to focus there initially. If you’re an international tax guru, though, please contact me. I’d love to do a follow-up for authors who don’t live in the USA, but I’m going to need some research assistance.

Additionally, we are not tax preparation professionals or experts in tax and business law. We stand by this advice as generally useful, but your situation may vary. Consult a pro before making any final business decisions!

What’s Out and What’s In(corporated)?

One of the first things new small businesses often ask themselves is if they should incorporate. At the new, small-business level, the main reason to incorporate is to protect personal assets from liens, debts, and company bankruptcy. Your three typical options will all do this for you. They are Limited Liability Corporations (LLCs), S-Corporations, and C-Corporations.

A-B-C, Easy as 1-2-3

So what’s the difference between an LLC, an S, or a C?

S & C-Corporations require a level of bureaucracy. These types of corporations require regular shareholder meetings, detailed minutes of those meetings, and generally more meetings across the board (even though those meetings are just with myself). Since all of that sounds more like an early level of Hell than it does like something I want to do to be successful, that alone is enough for me to give them a pass.

Additionally, S-Corps also have ownership rules, such as requiring citizenship and a limited number of owners. LLCs have no punitive ownership rules. So based just on simplicity, LLCs are starting to look pretty good.

But what about the taxes? I’d probably put up with some of that unfun stuff of C and S-Corps if it saved me money, right?

Well, the C in C-Corps doesn’t stand for cash when it comes to taxes. C-Corps face the dreaded “double taxation” problem. What I mean is, all net income is taxed at the 34% corporate tax rate and then all distributions and/or payroll are taxed at the owners’/employees’ income tax rates. That’s a lot of taxes!

By contrast, LLCs & S-Corps are “pass thru” entities. What this means is profit and loss are not taxed at the corporate level. Instead, owners are taxed at their own tax rates based upon the ownership percentage.

S and C-Corps have complicated rules. C-Corps have a more significant tax burden. LLCs dodge both of those issues. I think it’s safe to say that an LLC is almost certainly the best option for starting a small, probably single-person, publishing businesses.

One extremely important thing to keep in mind for the self-published author is that without choosing one of the three above company options, the author will be a self-employed/sole proprietorship. A sole proprietor’s personal assets are not protected and can be seized/forfeited to cover any debts of a failed company. If the self-published author plans on taking on debt to fund the business or acquire assets, then she should definitely choose one of the Big Three above.

Does Size Matter?

Yes! And I’m not just saying that so we can all snicker together like 8 th graders.

Growth isn’t likely to be a major decision point for a very long time unless the owner reaches a point she stops consuming all of the profit as income and can afford to start taking a salary. Meaning that a small company – let’s say operating at less than $250,000 net income (after all expenses) – will likely operate as an LLC for a very long time.

Once the profit begins to exceed that of what the IRS defines as a “middle class income” (roughly that magical $250,000 mentioned above), then a C-Corp could become the better option. It’s much more attractive to look at $1 million net income and paying yourself a salary of $100K with attributable taxes compared to $1 million in personal income tax.

Interstate Commerce

There’s some common wisdom floating around the interweb that one should incorporate outside of their home state in order to reap the benefits of more business-friendly states. This is a thing, but it adds many layers of complexity that the average small business owner probably doesn’t want.

Larger corporations incorporate in other states when they can get tax breaks and the like for having corporate offices in one place and manufacturing/retail someplace else. As you can imagine, these aren’t likely to be concerns of the average small business owner, especially authors (even before weighing the costs of all the added complexity).

That said, you may live in a state that is just heinously unfair to your situation. If so, the added difficulty may be worth the financial incentive.

The Cost of Doing Business

Here’s some news: Setting up corporations costs money. The good news is, in most states, the fees for filing paperwork and getting business licenses are typically only a few hundred bucks. Are you ready for what could be the bad news?

Depending on a variety of factors and preferences, you probably need to budget at least a thousand dollars to set up your new incorporation. The reason is this stuff is hard. There are a lot of i’s to be dotted and t’s to be crossed, sometimes literally. You need this work done correctly, professionally, and on the first try. You should pay somebody to do it, and, sadly, good lawyers and accountants ain’t cheap.

I mean, if I suggested getting a professional for your covers, what did you think I was going to say about taxes?

So now you’re all set up as a business with a novel that has been professionally edited, designed, and published. Are you wondering how you’re going to tell people about it? Come back next week for some basic suggestions on marketing your new book.

Receiving a grant from the Canada Council for the Arts has different tax implications for everyone. The Council cannot provide advice on the income tax implications of your grant. The Council recommends that you consult with a fiscal advisor to determine how the grant you receive will impact your personal and/or business income taxes. It is important to note that the payment terms of a grant may have an impact on the calculation of the taxes payable.

Payee name versus Responsible party

When you receive a grant, you have to fill out the Grant Acceptance Form (GAF) that allows the grant recipient to select a payee for the grant as well as select to which bank account the grant payment must be issued. Although you may request to have the grant deposited in a bank account other than that of the grant recipient, the T4A at the end of the year will be made out in the name of the grant recipient for payments issued during the calendar year. The grant recipient – not the payee name on the cheque – is the party responsible for any tax filings based on funds received.

T4A – Box 105

Scholarships, bursaries, fellowships, artists’ project grants, and prizes

In accordance with Canada Revenue Agency (CRA) guidance, the Canada Council for the Arts enters all grants in box 105 of the T4A slips. Box 105 is described as follows on the T4A: “Scholarships, bursaries, fellowships, artists’ project grants, and prizes”.

Enter on line 13010:

Individuals who are not self-employed who received an art production grant should enter the amount per the T4A less eligible expenses on line 13010 of their tax return, if the amount received is neither business nor employment income. Please refer to Income Tax Folio S1-F2-C3, Scholarships, Research Grants and Other Education Assistance, and Income Tax Folio S4-F14-C1, Artists and Writers for more information (links below).

Enter on line 13499/14300:

An artist who is self-employed is generally considered to be operating a business, provided the activity is undertaken in pursuit of profit and there is objective evidence of business-like behaviour which supports that intention. If you are self-employed, report your income and eligible expenses on the appropriate lines for self-employment income (lines 13499 to 14300). Please refer to Income Tax Folio S4-F14-C1 for more information on self-employed income (link below).

Expected expenses versus Grant payment

You may request that Council issue multiple payments for your grant instead of receiving one big lump sum. It is important to understand why. A T4A is prepared yearly for payments issued during the prior calendar year. It will be easier for tax reporting purposes if you try to match your grant income and eligible expenses in a given year.

Income Tax Folio S4-F14-C1 provides examples of expenses that are deductible by an artist or writer. Example 7 illustrates how to calculate income from an art production grant that is neither business nor employment income, taking into account the applicable exemptions.

Paragraphs 3.98 to 3.101 of Income Tax Folio S1-F2-C3 also explain how to calculate the amount of an art production grant to be included in income when it is neither business nor employment income.

Links

This income tax folio discusses the reporting of income by artists and writers from artistic and literary endeavours. It includes the criteria used by the Canada Revenue Agency (CRA) to distinguish artists and writers who are employees from those who are self-employed. This distinction is important in determining the expenses that are deductible in computing income.

An artist or writer may receive amounts that are neither business nor employment income, that may be required to be included in income. This Chapter also discusses the tax treatment of amounts received by an artist or writer that are to be used in the production of a literary, dramatic, musical, or artistic work (referred to in this Chapter as an art production grant).

This Chapter provides a general discussion of the taxation of scholarships, fellowships, bursaries, prizes, research grants, certain government financial assistance for education and training, forgivable loans and repayable awards. It examines the differences between the types of payments and benefits described above and explains how such amounts should be treated for income tax purposes. It provides the reader with an extensive review of the applicable legislation and is intended for readers who have a general understanding of the Act.

The Canada Revenue Agency (CRA) offers a free Liaison Officer service to owners of small businesses and self-employed individuals to help them understand their business tax obligations. A visit from a Liaison Officer is 100% confidential.

Other links and tools on the Canada Revenue Agency website

You can also find more information on “Tax Tips for Artists” on the CARFAC website.

6 Min Read | Mar 25, 2022

How to file taxes as a published writer

Being a freelancer means being your own boss, and that can be awesome. You go out, kill something, and drag it home every day. That’s how it’s done, baby! And you’re not alone. In fact, freelancers are expected to make up the majority of the U.S. workforce within the next decade. 1

And why not? As a freelancer, you choose your hours, what projects to take on, and where you work. You get to call the shots!

But even if you already have a full-time job, freelancing is a great way to earn some extra money. And let’s be honest, who doesn’t want more cash in their pockets?

But here’s some real talk: Whether you’re a full-time freelancer or just getting your side hustle on, it will impact how you file your taxes. And if you’re not careful, you could lose a large chunk of your freelance income to an enormous tax bill.

Tax Basics for Freelancers

What are the basics? There are three main things you need to know:

What’s the minimum I have to earn to pay freelance taxes?

If you earn $400 or more from freelance work in any given year, you are responsible for paying taxes on those earnings. Dave recommends you save as you go by setting aside around 25–30% of every freelance check you receive in a separate savings account to cover the taxes.

Business taxes can be confusing. Get the help you need.

Why so much? Because you have to pay both income tax and the self-employment tax.

What is the self-employment tax?

The self-employment tax is 15.3% and solely exists to cover your Social Security and Medicare taxes. 2

At a normal full-time job, your Social Security and Medicare taxes are taken out of your paychecks automatically—and your employer covers half of those taxes. But as a freelancer, you’re considered both an employee and an employer. That’s why the IRS wants you to cover the whole 15.3%.

The Schedule SE tax form helps you calculate your self-employment tax, which you’ll then report on your standard Form 1040. You might also be able to deduct the employer-equivalent portion (50%) of your self-employment tax on your 1040.

Remember, the self-employment tax is in addition to your regular income tax rate. That’s why Dave recommends setting aside 25­–30% out of your freelance checks in a separate savings account: because that’ll cover both your income and self-employment taxes. This will keep you from getting hit with a huge bill at tax time.

When do I have to pay freelance taxes?

According to the IRS, you should pay taxes quarterly if you expect to owe at least $1,000 in taxes this year. 3 Since taxes from your freelance income aren’t being withheld throughout the year, there’s a good chance you’ll need to estimate your taxes for the upcoming year and pay the IRS on a quarterly basis.

So, how do you know if you need to do this or not?

That’s a great question. If you’re only making a couple thousand dollars or less freelancing each year, you can probably skip estimated tax payments and just report your freelance income when you file your tax return.

But if it’s looking like you’ll owe $1,000 or more in taxes, Form 1040-ES can help you ballpark how much you’ll make during the year and then determine your estimated taxes based on your projections.

If you underpay your estimated tax—these are estimates, after all—you’ll have to pay the remaining taxes when you file your annual tax return. (And yes, freelancers must file an annual tax return by April 15—just like everyone else.) On the other hand, if you overpay your estimated tax, you’ll receive the excess amount back in the form of a tax refund.

Keeping Track of Your Freelance Income

As a freelancer, you should receive a 1099-MISC from each business client who paid you $600 or more. 4 For example, if you’re an event photographer who worked several corporate events for a specific company in your town, you can probably expect them to send you a 1099-MISC form.

What if your customers or clients use PayPal or other online payment systems to pay for whatever product or service you offer? If that’s the case, you might get 1099-K forms from those online payment systems instead. 5

But just because you didn’t receive a 1099-MISC or 1099-K from a client doesn’t mean you’re off the hook. You still need to report all your self-employment earnings to the IRS on a Schedule C form.

A Schedule C tax form serves as the hub for all your freelance income and expenses. First, you’ll report all the freelance income you earned during the tax year in Part I. This includes amounts already reported on the 1099 forms you received from clients and amounts not yet reported from clients who didn’t send a 1099. After that, you’ll list your expenses in Parts II–V to see if you can claim any deductions.

Self-Employment Tax Deductions

Tax deductions lower your taxable income, potentially reducing your tax bill and saving you hundreds of dollars in the process. And as a freelancer, you get to claim a bunch of them!

But many self-employed professionals aren’t taking advantage of tax deductions. That means some freelancers are paying more taxes than they have to!

As a freelancer, you can claim deductions on expenses that, according to the IRS, are “ordinary and necessary” for the operation of your business.

Some of the most common deductions for freelancers include:

Advertising and marketing

Computer equipment and software

Travel and business meals

Careful documentation and detailed bookkeeping—like saving all your original receipts and invoices—can help you prove that those expenses were vital to your business, which will save you money come tax season.

One way to make the process of tracking your expenses simpler is to open a separate checking account specifically for freelance work. It’s a great way to keep your personal and business finances separate—and track your expenses so you can claim them on your income taxes.

Find a Quality Tax Professional

Taxes are complicated enough as it is—and they only get more complex when you throw multiple streams of income into the mix. One of the biggest mistakes you could make as a freelancer is to try and go it alone when tax season comes around.

Dave’s nationwide network of tax Endorsed Local Providers (ELPs) can help. Work with a top-rated tax advisor who will take the time to help you understand your tax situation and make sure you get every deduction you’re eligible for.

How to file taxes as a published writer

About the author

Ramsey Solutions has been committed to helping people regain control of their money, build wealth, grow their leadership skills, and enhance their lives through personal development since 1992. Millions of people have used our financial advice through 22 books (including 12 national bestsellers) published by Ramsey Press, as well as two syndicated radio shows and 10 podcasts, which have over 17 million weekly listeners. Learn More.

The Tax Adviser encourages you to submit articles or call to reserve a topic.

The Tax Adviser covers a wide range of tax information. As an editorial objective, The Tax Adviser deals primarily with the technical aspects of federal (and some state) taxation, providing practical, administrative, and technical commentary through articles and regular columns. Thus, the material has a broad range of appeal, satisfying the needs of anyone who must keep informed on federal tax matters. Qualified articles will be accepted from CPAs, lawyers, tax executives, and professors.

We request that you submit your article exclusively to The Tax Adviser; articles are not considered on any other basis. Please note that our acceptance of a manuscript for review is not approval to publish the article. It is our practice to send the article to at least two of our editorial advisers for their opinion on publishing the article, technical advice and constructive comments. The reviewers are expected to submit their decision within about four weeks.

Articles accepted for publication are subject to editorial revision. Regrettably, our budget does not provide for compensating authors of articles. However, as a token of our appreciation, an author will receive five copies of the issue containing his or her article. Also, 50 complimentary reprints of the article itself will be made available on request.

If you would like to have an article peer reviewed by an academic peer, please let us know.

Download author guidelines for suggested subjects and a guide to preparing a manuscript.

The Tax Adviser
AICPA
220 Leigh Farm Road
Durham, NC 27707

Joining ASCAP as a writer is a great first step for your music career. Before you finalize that application, make sure you have joined as a music publisher, too

A publisher is a person or entity that controls how a musical composition is used and monetized. Publishers pitch the works that they represent to recording artists and music supervisors and license them for film & TV, as well as other uses. They also collect multiple revenue streams for their writers, including mechanical royalties (e.g., from the sale or download of recordings), sheet music sales and more.

1. You are missing out on $$$ without one.

When ASCAP distributes royalties for a performance of your music, 50% goes to the writer(s), and 50% to the publisher(s). If you want to access your publisher’s share, you will need to set up a publishing company with ASCAP.

2. It’s easy.

All you need to become an ASCAP publisher is a mailing address, email address, US tax ID number and about 10 minutes. You don’t even need to set up a corporation or fictitious business name to join – if you choose the “Individual/Sole Proprietor” option, you can simply enter your Social Security Number and you are good to go.

3. Set yourself up for the future.

4. You can name it (almost) whatever you want.

Starting a publishing company is more than just a great business idea. Since each publishing company name has to be different than every other publishing company name in the world, it is also an opportunity to flex your creative muscles.

Ready to join? Visit www.ascap.com/join and choose the “Writer & Publisher” option to get started. Already an ASCAP music creator? Select the “Publisher” option.

Help us build a stronger future for music.

#StandWithSongwriters and make your voice heard.

Whether you are just starting a digital marketing campaign or thinking about hiring a marketing agency, one of the questions you might be asking is: “Are marketing expenses tax-deductible?”

The answer is “YES!” The government allows you to deduct marketing expenses used to generate or keep customers. Advertising and marketing expenses qualify as an ordinary, reasonable, and necessary tax deduction. When done right and with professionals, marketing and advertising can have a high ROI.

Marketing and advertising expenses aren’t a particularly tricky tax-deduction as long as they are directly related to your business activities. Below we’ll break down 8 categories of marketing expenses that are tax-deductible, tell you which ones are not, and what is considered marketing according to the IRS.

8 Common Marketing Expenses That Are Tax-Deductible

How to file taxes as a published writer

1. Website Expenses

  • Designing, developing, and creating your website
  • Website fees for hosting and maintenance
  • Ongoing website content creation
  • Document all of the different accounts and companies you pay each month to deduct website expenses if you use more than one

2. Marketing and Advertising Expenses

  • Marketing Plan or Marketing Strategy
  • Content Writing
  • Sales Enablement
  • SEO Services
  • Email Marketing
  • Newsletters
  • Graphic Design and Branding
  • Display banner ad campaigns (except political sites)
  • Paid Media Marketing: Google AdWords or Search Pay-Per-Click (PPC) campaigns

3. Consultant or Marketing Agency Retainer

  • Costs for hiring a consultant or marketing agency to conduct any of the campaigns above or below

4. Social Media Expenses

  • Paying a consultant or marketing agency (anyone outside your company) to run your social media
  • Content-creation expenses
  • Fees to companies that manage your social media accounts, and subscription-based social media sites like LinkedIn Pro.
  • Linked In, Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, ad campaigns
  • Influencer Marketing (May require 1099 contracts depending upon the amount paid)

5. Technology and Marketing Software Expenses

  • Monthly costs or annual subscriptions (which generally come with a discount) for software like the following:
    • Hubspot
    • Hootsuite
    • Mailchimp
  • Any CRM, social scheduling tools, or marketing software

6. Print Advertising Expenses

  • Ad space in newspapers, magazines, or billboards
  • Creation and printing of advertising materials like brochures, mailers, or business cards

7. Multimedia Advertising Expenses

8. Special Promotions

  • Publicity campaigns
  • Sponsor for a local event or pay to have your logo featured on a local sports jersey (You can deduct the expenses for any special event with the goal that it would expose people to your business)
  • Hosting seminars, webinars, or workshops promoting your business’s services
  • Swag for clients, influencers, and staff to promote your brand include promotional items like water bottles, t-shirts, and notebooks

How to file taxes as a published writer

Deducting Marketing Expenses vs. Selling Expenses

Business costs for both marketing and selling are deductible, but in separate places on your business tax return.

  • If you use your website for advertising, you may deduct web maintenance costs as an advertising expense.
  • If you use your website for selling (having a shopping cart, for example), this is a cost of selling and is considered separately.
  • Costs for temporary signs are considered advertising.
  • Costs for permanent signs (that last more than a year) are not advertising, but signs may be depreciated as long-term assets.
  • Advertising as an indirect political contribution is not deductible.
  • Advertising on your car: the cost of placing an ad on a vehicle is deductible however, the cost of operating or driving the vehicle is not. Read more about what the IRS says about ads on vehicles here.
  • Costs for help-wanted ads are a deductible business expense, but they are not considered marketing or advertising.
  • Donations to charities or non-profits are not a marketing or advertising expense. However, these expenses may be deductible in other areas of your business or personal tax return. Check with your accountant for further clarification.

Marketing Expenses That Are Not Tax-Deductible

You can’t deduct costs that are primarily personal or hobbies, even though they have some promotion value. For example, if your daughter is getting married and you invite some of your best clients to the wedding, you cannot deduct the wedding costs. You may not deduct costs of personal hobbies carried on with business associates. For example, if you and a client like to go to NASCAR events, you can’t deduct these costs as marketing or advertising expenses.

How to file taxes as a published writer

  • You cannot deduct advertising expenses associated with research and development activities.
  • While you can deduct the cost of putting an advertisement for your business on your car (business or personal), you cannot deduct the cost of driving your car around town as an advertising expense. The IRS specifically discusses this subject, because it’s misunderstood.
  • Advertising as an Indirect Political Contribution. You can’t deduct the cost of advertising in any publication or website used by or for a political party or candidate. No political expenses are deductible for businesses.

Conclusion

With any of these guidelines, you should check with your accountant to learn what tax deductions and filings are right for your business. If you plan your budget a year ahead, you’ll want to include marketing as a necessary operating expense that you can deduct from your taxes. This will help you get into the mindset of investing in marketing for your business this year and for each year to come. You’ll find you reach your revenue goals faster and have more to deduct from your bottom line.

Read more about which marketing and advertising expenses you can deduct in IRS Publication 535​.

Looking to spend your marketing budget to maximize your deductions?

How to file taxes as a published writer

Laura Laire

Laura is a Creative Business Strategist who cofounded LAIRE, Inc., a digital growth agency. Laura is an entrepreneur and avid writer with a love of studying marketing and high performance. Laura has trained hundreds of thousands of people as a speaker, trainer, and coach giving keynotes at seminars and conventions for the past 20 years. Laura absolutely lives for marketing, creating, and inspiring big ideas.

The Plain Writing Act of 2010 was signed on October 13, 2010. The law requires that federal agencies use clear government communication that the public can understand and use.

While the Act does not cover regulations, three separate Executive Orders emphasize the need for plain language: E.O. 12866, E.O. 12988, and E.O. 13563.

Requirements

Executive departments and agencies must:

Have a plain writing section on your website. Start with our templates for your plain writing page and compliance report (DOC).

Deadlines

By July 13, 2011, agencies must:

  • designate a senior official for “plain writing”
  • explain the Act’s requirements to staff
  • establish a procedure to oversee the implementation of the Act within the agency
  • train agency staff in plain writing
  • designate staff as points of contact for the agency plain writing web page
  • publish a compliance report (DOC) for meeting the requirements of the Act on its plain language web page

By October 13, 2011, agencies must:

  1. Use plain language in any document that:
    • is necessary for obtaining any federal government benefit or service or filing taxes
    • provides information about a federal government benefit or service, or
    • explains to the public how to comply with a requirement that the federal government administers or enforces
  2. Write annual compliance reports and post these reports on its plain language web page.

Questions?

Request a free training session for your federal agency.

Subscribe to our mailing list

Learn about upcoming events and get the latest news from the federal plain language community.

The Plain Language Action and Information Network develops and maintains the content of this site with support from the General Services Administration.

Winners of the 21st Annual Law Student Tax Challenge

The Section is pleased to announce the winners of the 21st Annual Law Student Tax Challenge, a contest designed to give students an opportunity to research, write about, and present their analyses of a real-life tax planning problem. The competition is open to both J.D. and LL.M. law students. For the 21 st year of the competition each team presented their oral arguments virtually before a panel of distinguished tax lawyers and tax court judges, with the winners announced at a virtual awards ceremony. Holden Branscum and William Gebo of University of Memphis Cecil C. Humphreys School of Law were awarded first place in the J.D. Division. Their coach was William Kratzke. Adnan Alam and Melia Mbanefo of Temple University Beasley School of Law were awarded first place in the LL.M. Division. Their coach was Andrew Weiner.

Winners, J.D. Division

1st Place: Team 18

Holden Branscum and William Gebo of University of Memphis Cecil C. Humphreys School of Law, 1st place winners for the J.D. Division.

2nd Place and Best Written: Team 37

Max Cargal-Bley and Han Shen of the University of Washington School of Law, 2nd place (and best written) winners for the J.D. Division.

3rd Place: Team 6

Allison Martinez and Chloe Webb of the University of Missouri – Kansas City School of Law, 3rd place winners for the J.D. Division.

Winners, LL.M. Division

1st Place: Team 7

Adnan Alam and Melia Mbanefo of Temple University Beasley School of Law, 1st place winners for the LL.M. Division.

2nd Place: Team 9

Paige Cham and Anastasia Jones of the University of Florida Levin College of Law, 2nd place winners for the LL.M. Division.

Best Written: Team 5

Otto Bosch and Micah Moore (not pictured) of the University of Missouri – Kansas City School of Law, Best Written winners for the LL.M. Division.

LL.M. Semi-Finalists

  • Hsin-Ming (Mindy) Berlin and Joseph Thomas
    Villanova University Charles Widger School of Law
  • Chase Hewitt and James Phillips
    University of Maine School of Law
  • Trevor Rowland and Andrii Onysko
    University of Oregon

Entry. Rules, and Problems

  • J.D. Rules
  • LL.M. Rules
  • J.D. Problem
  • LL.M. Problem
    LL.M. Problem: Employee Location Data (Excel)
    LL.M. Problem: Form 8986

Videos: 21st LSTC Winners Oral Round


How Does the Challenge Work?

An alternative to traditional moot court competitions, the Law Student Tax Challenge (LSTC) is organized by the Section’s Young Lawyers Form. The LSTC asks two-person teams of students to solve a complex business problem that might arise in everyday tax practice. Teams are initially evaluated on two criteria: a memorandum to a senior partner and a letter to a client explaining the result. Based on the written work product, six teams from the J.D. Division and four teams from the LL.M. Division receive a free trip to the Section’s Midyear Meeting, where each team presents its submission before a panel of judges consisting of the country’s top tax practitioners and government officials, including tax court judges. The competition is a great way for law students to showcase their knowledge in a real-world setting and gain valuable exposure to the tax law community.

Scott Woody, who won the J.D. Division of the 2016 LSTC alongside teammate Frank Cardoza, writes about what the LSTC has done for him.

Testimonial from 2016 LSTC Winner Scott Woody

Participating in the Law Student Tax Challenge (“LSTC” or the “Challenge”) was an invaluable tool in developing my career as a tax attorney. The Challenge allowed me to develop and demonstrate real world legal skills as well as provided me with multiple networking opportunities.

The Challenge helped me develop the type of research and writing skills that are invaluable regardless of if I chose to become a tax attorney or not. The Challenge also allowed me to develop a written work product, in the form of a “partner memo” and a “client letter” that I could present to potential employers to demonstrate my day one abilities. Some potential employers even commented on how they felt that kind of work product was more valuable than even a journal article because it showed a product that was researched, written, reviewed, and rewritten by me and my partner, by ourselves. The Challenge also allowed to me demonstrate my ability to commit to a project and to show I had the perseverance to complete it.

The Challenge also presented, and continues to present, me with multiple networking opportunities- both within the ABA Tax Section and in the general legal community. The ABA Tax Section is a very open and welcoming community and when coupled with my participation in the LSTC, most section members were quick to speak to me in person or via email. In addition, the mere mention of my voluntary participation in a national competition during law school remains an instant conversation starter at any conference or legal gathering I attend.

Simply put, I can say without a doubt my participation in the Challenge was a significant factor in where my career is today.

LSTC Archive

We have created an archive of previous Law Student Tax Challenge videos, problems, best written winners, results, and more.

How to file taxes as a published writer

Self-published authors face daunting questions about what they can and can’t write off on their tax returns. We at Self-Publishing Relief are not accountants, so it’s important that you get the recommendations of a trained personal accountant for your unique tax situation. But we can offer you some generally accepted information to help you begin sorting out your self-publishing finances.

Q: As a self-published writer, what can I write off on my taxes?

A. Generally speaking, you can write off any expenses that go directly toward the advancement of your writing career: printer paper and other office supplies, plus books or other media purchased for research are some examples. Travel for work-related events is usually an acceptable write-off too—as long as your trip isn’t a vacation in disguise. Writers who have a home office space dedicated specifically to writing can also write off a percentage of their mortgage or rental payment based on square footage. Learn more about common write-offs for creative writers.

Self-published writers can also write off the cost of publishing, including costs related to editing, design, typesetting, printing, etc. If you pay an independent contractor (like a freelance editor or a personal assistant) over $600 a year (at the time of this writing), ask for a W-9 form so that you can write off that expense. Corporations do not need to send you a W-9.

Q: What shouldn’t I write off?

A. If something you’re hoping to write off is used for both personal and professional tasks, talk to an accountant about writing it off.

Q: What if I lose more money than I make?

A: As long as you have documentation that can prove you’re serious about making a business of your writing, it shouldn’t matter if you lose money on your efforts. To prove to the government that you’re a legitimate self-publishing enterprise, consider setting up separate business accounts with banks and credit card companies, applying for a Federal Employer Identification Number, getting a local business license, etc. Learn more about proving the legitimacy of your writing business.

Q: Do I need a specialized accountant?

A: We strongly recommend that you hire a personal accountant if you are going to write off business expenses for self-publishing. Tax software programs are not always adequately equipped to make judgment calls about your indie expenses and income. And a professional accountant can help advise you if you’re audited. If you find yourself making a lot of money, you may want to research accountants who specifically handle taxes for writers.

Q: How should I keep track of my expenses?

A: Writers can itemize their expenses into categories like:

  • Advertising
  • Web and online expenses
  • Supplies
  • Professional services
  • Travel
  • Meals

Ask your accountant for a full list.

Q: What should I do about my self-published royalties?

A: You have to report all income to the government, whether from e-book royalties or print sales. Keep careful documentation.

Write Off With Care

Demonstrating to the government that you are attempting to make a profit in spite of taking heavy losses might be fine for a while. But after a time, Uncle Sam may start asking questions. In a best-case scenario, you should be able to eventually show some profit for your self-publishing efforts—five straight years of losses might raise a red flag. If you are audited, be prepared with thorough documentation and accounting.

Question: Do you write off self-publishing expenses?

A Tax Preparer, or a Tax Accountant, is responsible for submitting tax forms on behalf of clients to pay the appropriate amount and maximize the client’s return. Their duties include interviewing clients about their income and expenses, auditing account details and acting as a liaison between clients and the IRS.

Tax Preparer duties and responsibilities

Tax Preparers perform many accounting, customer service and organizational tasks to help maintain the financial health of their clients or employer. Their duties and responsibilities often include:

  • Informing clients or employers on the tax preparation process
  • Collecting relevant financial records, including pay stubs and income statements
  • Inputting data from financial records into tax return software or databases
  • Using applicable federal, state and local tax law to determine deductions and how much each client will pay or earn on the return
  • Completing and filing tax documents with appropriate agencies, like the IRS, state and local government entities
  • Acting as a representative for clients with applicable agencies as required
  • Building customer relationships to promote and expand the business

Tax Preparer Job Description Examples

Example 1

Post a job in minutes
and start receiving quality resumes as soon as today.

What does a Tax Preparer do?

Tax Preparers work for financial institutions to provide specific tax advice and submit a person or business entity’s taxes. Their role is to produce error-free tax forms on behalf of a client to maximize their financial health. They review the past tax returns of their clients and collect new tax data to calculate how much their client owes. They give advice on future tax planning and communicate with clients about upcoming tax requirements and deadlines. Tax Preparers can upkeep an individual’s tax files or work with a business’s tax records and help distribute W-2s to employees.

Tax Preparer skills and qualifications

Tax Preparers use their transferable soft skills, technical abilities and industry knowledge to ensure returns are on-time, complete and accurate. These skills and qualifications often include:

  • In-depth knowledge of applicable tax laws, regulations and deadlines
  • Proficiency with common tax preparation, word processing and spreadsheet software applications
  • Familiarity with the tax return submission and confirmation process, including how to navigate the IRS and other government entity online platforms
  • Excellent customer service skills, including patience and flexibility
  • Great organizational skills, including time management and strategic thinking
  • Strong written and verbal communication skills
  • Keen attention to detail

Tax Preparer salary expectations

A Tax Preparer makes an average of $16.45 per hour. Pay rate may depend on level of education, experience and geographical location.

Tax Preparer education and training requirements

Tax Preparer candidates should have at least a high school diploma or GED and completed coursework in tax preparation, accounting, bookkeeping, business finance and other relevant topics. Roles that only handle simple tax returns may only require minimum education and on-the-job training. Single corporations or roles with more complex tax return duties may require an associate or bachelor’s degree in accounting, finance or another relevant field. Previous training with federal, state and local tax laws may be demonstrated with completed federal and/or state examination and certification or licensure.

Tax Preparer experience requirements

Entry-level Tax Preparer candidates may have the minimum education with 1 or 2 years of previous work experience in customer service, administrative support, accounting or another relevant field. Some candidates may have worked only 1 or a few previous tax seasons in this role. Experienced candidates may have 3 or more years of previous experience in those fields or have previous experience as a Tax Preparer. Other experienced candidates may also have experience as a Certified Public Accountant, demonstrating more advanced knowledge of best practices and experience with tax audits.

Job description samples for similar positions

If the job description for the Tax Preparer does not suit your needs, view descriptions for related professions:

Frequently asked questions about Tax Preparers

What is the difference between a Tax Preparer and a CPA?

A Tax Preparer is a niche accounting role while Certified Public Accountant (CPA) is a broad designation that can refer to any type of Accountant who has fulfilled their certification requirements. Tax Preparers generally work as part of a team, while CPAs can choose to work independently to provide accounting consultations for businesses or individuals. Not all Tax Preparers are CPAs, although some do hold this designation to show their professional qualifications. CPAs can choose to focus on taxes like Tax Preparers do, or they can perform other accounting responsibilities like overall records compliance and balancing a company’s financial recordkeeping.

What are the daily duties of a Tax Preparer?

Tax Preparers spend most of their time in an office environment reading through financial documents and filling out forms. They request specific forms from the IRS and use them to submit tax returns for their clients. Tax Preparers may also talk with their clients in person to learn more about their recordkeeping practices and possible opportunities for write-offs. To get larger returns for their clients, Tax Preparers review tax laws to find tax credits and exemptions. They sign tax forms on behalf of their client and mail them to the IRS, then update their clients on the status of their return.

What are the characteristics of a good Tax Preparer?

Good Tax Preparers are focused, routine-oriented people who have the natural math skills to perform correct calculations on tax forms. They are highly organized and can easily access the records they need, recalling where they filed specific forms, receipts and account reports. Tax Preparers are also excellent researchers who can find financial details for clients who had poor recordkeeping practices prior to hiring a Tax Preparer. They are logical and strategic, able to make suggestions about future business practices that could reduce their tax costs or make their accounting more efficient.

What should you look for on a Tax Preparer’s resume?

When reviewing resumes for a Tax Preparer, look for some form of formal training in accounting practices. Tax Preparers should include information on their tax preparation certification if they live in a state where it is required. Previous bookkeeping experience and experience filing taxes for businesses demonstrate that a candidate has the technical skills to uphold compliance when preparing tax documents.

Job Description Examples

Need help writing a job description for a specific role? Use these job description examples to create your next great job posting. Or if you’re ready to hire, post your job on Indeed.

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

There aren’t that many Mega Evolutions in Pokémon X and Y, but there are probably more than you think, making it even more difficult to catch ’em all.

In order for a Pokémon to undergo a Mega Evolution, it needs to be holding a Mega Stone appropriate to its type, and the trainer needs to be wearing the Mega Ring. If both conditions are met and the Pokémon is able to mega evolve, then you can select the option from within a battle to trigger the Mega Evolution.

Only one Pokémon can mega evolve during a battle, but that isn’t too bad of a limit considering the game’s random encounters run rampant, and triggering a Link Battle is easy enough. Each available Mega Evolution is listed below along with its corresponding Mega Stone location.

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

Pokémon X Mega Evolutions

Mega Venusaur: If Bulbasaur is chosen as your second starter, it comes with its Mega Stone, Venusaurite. If not, you can pick it up at Vernal Avenue Stone Emporium in Lumiose City.

Mega Charizard X and Y: If Charmander is chosen as your second second, it comes with its Mega Stone, Charizardite X or Y. If not, you can pick it up at Vernal Avenue Stone Emporium in Lumiose City.

Mega Blastoise: If Squirtle is chosen as your second starter, it comes with its Mega Stone, Blastoisinite. If not, you can pick it up at Vernal Avenue Stone Emporium in Lumiose City.

Mega Alakazam: You can find this stone, Alakazite, in the Reflecting Cave, floor B3F, during the post-game.

Mega Gengar: You will be given this stone, Gengarite, in Laverre City.

Mega Kangaskhan: You can find this stone, Kangaskhanite, in the Glittering Cave during the post-game.

Mega Pinsir: You can find this stone, Pinsirite, in the Santalune Forest during the post-game. It is exclusive to Pokémon X.

Mega Gyarados: You can find this stone, Gyaradosite, in Couriway Town during the post-game.

Mega Aerodactyl: You will be given this stone, Aerodactylite, in Ambrette Town.

Mega Mewtwo X and Y: Mewtwo is holding this stone, Mewtwonite X or Y, upon capture. He’s located in a cave in the Pokémon Village that requires Surf to access.

Mega Ampharos: You will be given this stone, Ampharosite, in Azure Bay.

Mega Scizor: You can find this stone, Scizorite, in the Frozen Cavern located behind Abomasnow.

Mega Heracross: You can find this stone, Heracronite, in Santalune Forest during the post-game. It is exclusive to Pokémon Y.

Mega Houndoom: You can find this stone, Houndoomite, in Route 16 during the post-game. It is Pokémon Y exclusive.

Mega Tyranitar: You can find this stone, Tyranitarite, in the Cyllage Gym during the post-game. It is Pokémon X exclusive.

Mega Blaziken: When you get Torchic from the event giveaway, it’ll come with this stone, Blazikenite.

Mega Gardevoir: In the Lumiose City southern boulevard cafe, you can trade for a Ralts. The Ralts holds this stone, Gardevoirite.

Mega Mawile: You can find this stone, Mawilite, in Shabbneau Castle during the post-game.

Mega Aggron: You can find this stone, Aggronite, in the Cyllage Gym during the post-game. It is Pokémon Y exclusive.

Mega Medicham: You will be given this stone, Medichamite, in Laverre City during the post-game.

Mega Manectric: You can find this stone, Manectite, on Route 16 during the post-game. It is Pokémon X exclusive.

Mega Banette: You can find this stone, Banettite, in the Cave of Emptiness during the post-game.

Mega Absol: You will be given this stone, Absolite, in Kiloude City during the post-game.

Mega Garchomp: You can find this stone, Garchompite, on Victory Road during the post-game.

Mega Lucario: You can find this stone, Lucarionite, held by the Lucario gifted to you in the game. You can turn down this Lucario, but if you want the stone and not the critter, just set the Pokémon free after you take its stone.

Mega Abomasnow: You will be given this stone, Abomasite, at the Frozen Cave where you obtain Abomasnow.

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

So, while Pokémon X and Y technically has every single Pokémon since the series inception, it only has a handful of Mega Evolutions. However, since the mechanic has now been introduced, it’s safe to assume subsequent installments in the franchise will build upon the new evolution mechanic. It would probably be best to evolve ’em all this time around, so you can fill out your Pokédex now and not have to worry about it in later installments.

This story originally appeared on Geek.

Mega Evolutions

A brand new feature of the Pokйmon X & Y games are Mega Evolutions. These are special features of Pokйmon, different to evolutions and forms, that have your Pokйmon Mega Evolve in battle into these appearances. Their abilities, stats and sometimes even types are different. To get a Pokйmon to Mega Evolve, they need to be holding a special Mega Stone item unique to their species, as well as receiving the Mega Ring and the Key Stone. To get your Pokйmon to Mega Evolve, you can select a button when picking the move and then select a move. The Pokйmon will both evolve and attack in that turn. You may only have one Mega Evolution in a battle.

US Name: Mega Venusaur
Jp. Name: Mega Fushigibana

Type: Grass/Poison
Classification: Seed Pokйmon
Height: 7′ 10″
Weight: 342.8 lbs.
Ability: Thick Fat

Details:
This Pokйmon was first revealed in the Pokйmon Direct on September 4th. This Pokйmon is to Mega Evolve from the Bulbasaur you receive from Professor Sycamore in Lumiose City. It has increased Defense and Special Defense stats.

US Name: Mega Charizard X
Jp. Name: Mega Lizardon X

Type: Fire/Dragon
Classification: Flame Pokйmon
Height: 5’07”
Weight: 243.6lbs
Ability: Tough Claws

Details:
This Pokйmon was revealed during the airing of the special episode Pokйmon Origins. This Mega Evolution is exclusive to the game Pokйmon X and has an increased Attack stat

US Name: Mega Charizard Y
Jp. Name: Mega Lizardon Y

Type: Fire/Flying
Classification: Flame Pokйmon
Height: 5′ 07″
Weight: 221.6 lbs.
Ability: Drought

Details:
This Pokйmon was first revealed in the Pokйmon Direct on September 4th. This Pokйmon is to Mega Evolve from the Charmander you receive from Professor Sycamore in Lumiose City. It has a significantly increased Special Attack stat. It was later revealed to be exclusive to Pokйmon Y

US Name: Mega Blastoise
Jp. Name: Mega Kamex

Type: Water
Classification: Shellfish Pokйmon
Height: 5′ 03″
Weight: 222.9 lbs.
Ability: Mega Launcher

Details:
This Pokйmon was first revealed in the Pokйmon Direct on September 4th. This Pokйmon is to Mega Evolve from the Squirtle you receive from Professor Sycamore in Lumiose City

US Name: Mega Mewtwo X
Jp. Name: Mega Mewtwo X

Type: Psychic/Fighting
Classification: Genetic Pokйmon
Height: 2.3m
Weight: 127.0kg
Ability: Steadfast

Details:
This Pokйmon was revealed within the October issue of CoroCoro in September 2013. It is a Mewtwo Evolution that is exclusive to Pokйmon X and has a different type to its counterpart in Pokйmon Y. It has an increased Attack stat

Item Required
Mewtwonite X

US Name: Mega Mewtwo Y
Jp. Name: Mega Mewtwo Y

Type: Psychic
Classification: Genetic Pokйmon
Height: 1.5m
Weight: 33.0kg
Ability: Insomnia

Details:
This Pokйmon was first leaked in a promotional pamphlet of the Present Guide for the movie Extremespeed Genesect: Mewtwo Awakens, replacing Mewtwo on the poster with a caption calling it the Eclair Forme. However, soon afterwards it was revealed by Pokйmon Smash, though without saying it is actually a Mewtwo form with the official sites stating it as a new Pokйmon.
It was eventually confirmed as a Mega Evolution in CoroCoro in August 2013 and was revealed to be exclusive to Pokйmon Y in September 2013. It has an increased Special Attack stat

Item Required
Mewtwonite Y

US Name: Mega Blaziken
Jp. Name: Mega Bashamo

Type: Fire/Fighting
Classification: Blaze Pokйmon
Height: 1.9m
Weight: 52.0kg
Ability: Speed Boost

Details:
This Mega Evolution was first shown in August 2013’s issue of CoroCoro. It features the special ability of Speed Boost and has an increased Attack stat

Item Required
Blazikenite

US Name: Mega Lucario
Jp. Name: Mega Lucario

Type: Fighting/Steel
Classification: Aura Pokйmon
Height: 1.3m
Weight: 57.5kg
Ability: Adaptability

Details:
This Mega Evolution was first shown in August 2013’s issue of CoroCoro. It features the special ability of Adaptability. It also has an increase Attack stat

Item Required
Lucarionite

US Name: Mega Mawile
Jp. Name: Mega Kucheat

Type: Steel/Fairy
Classification: Deceiver Pokйmon
Height: 1.0m
Weight: 23.5kg
Ability: Huge Power

Details:
This Mega Evolution was first shown in August 2013’s issue of CoroCoro. It features the special ability of Huge Power. It has increased Defense & Special Defense

US Name: Mega Absol
Jp. Name: Mega Absol

Type: Dark
Classification: Disaster Pokйmon
Height: 1.2m
Weight: 49.0kg
Ability: Magic Bounce

Details:
This Mega Evolution was first shown in August 2013’s issue of CoroCoro. It features the special ability of Magic Bounce. It has an increase Attack and Speed

US Name: Mega Ampharos
Jp. Name: Mega Denryuu

Type: Electric/Dragon
Classification: Light Pokйmon
Height: 1.4m
Weight: 61.5kg
Ability: Mold Breaker

Details:
This Mega Evolution was first shown in August 2013’s issue of CoroCoro. It features the special ability of Mold Breaker and features a change in type to Electric/Dragon

US Name: Mega Kangaskhan
Jp. Name: Mega Garura

Type: ??
Classification: Parent Pokйmon
Height: ??
Weight: ??
Ability: Parental Bond

Details:
This Mega Evolution was first shown in the Video Game Championships in Vancouver in August 2013. It’s unique in that is allows the baby in Kangaskhan’s belly to come up and battle with the focal point of the evolution being based on the baby

US Name: Mega Garchomp
Jp. Name: Mega Gaburiasu

Type: Dragon/Ground
Classification: Mach Pokйmon
Height: 1.9m
Weight: 95.0kg
Ability: Sand Force

Details:
This Pokйmon was revealed within the October issue of CoroCoro in September 2013. It has decreased Speed but increased Attack and Special Attack

Pokemon X

Pokemon X (3DS)

Multiple mega-evolutions per battle?

Accepted Answer

Well, I just found out the answer to my question, but I’ll leave it here in case anyone else has the same question in the future.

The answer is no, you cannot mega-evolve more than one Pokemon per battle, even if your currently mega-evolved Pokemon faints.

More Questions from This Game

Game Detail

  • Platform:3DS
  • Genre:Role-Playing » Trainer
  • Developer:Game Freak
  • Publisher:Nintendo
  • Release:October 12, 2013
  • See Also:Pokemon Y
  • Also Known As:Pocket Monsters X (JP)
  • Franchise:Pokemon

Game Trivia

Pokemon X and Y’s naming could be influenced by a number of factors. The most likely explanation is that the names are derived from the variables of the 3D Cartesian graphing system, which uses the points (x,y,z) to determine length, width, and depth of a 3D object. This ties into the fact that it is on the 3DS, which has 3D graphics and made Pokemon capable of using truly 3D graphics for the first time. Additionally, the legendary Pokemon Xerneas, Yveltal, and Zygrade had their names derived from this logic: look at the first letter of their names. This has led many to speculate about the possibility of a Pokemon Z expansion or sequel to Pokemon X/Y.

Sign Up or Log In

To use this feature, you need to be logged in to GameFAQs. Please log in or register to continue.

A Mega Moment is a special research quest released as part of Pokémon Go’s Mega Evolution rework in April 2022.

To access this quest, you need to be Trainer Level 5 or above. It’s also a branching quest, which means it will play out slightly differently depending on a certain choice you make.

Below you’ll find all of the A Mega Moment quest steps and rewards in Pokémon Go.

‘A Mega Moment’ quest steps in Pokémon Go

To unlock A Mega Moment in Pokémon Go you need to be Trainer Level 5 or above, but, once it’s unlocked, you can complete this quest at your own pace.

A Mega Moment is also a branching quest, which means, at a specific point, you’ll be asked to pick between three different options. Which option you pick will change one of the challenges and a number of the rewards.

Below you’ll find every A Mega Moment quest step and reward in Pokémon Go – just be wary of spoilers!

Thank you to Amiibofan101 for the help with this information!

‘A Mega Moment’ Step 1 of 4

  • Catch 3 Pokémon – Bulbasaur encounter
  • Catch 3 Pokémon – Charmander encounter
  • Catch 3 Pokémon – Squirtle encounter

Rewards: 500 XP, 200 Stardust and 10 Poké Balls

At this point, you’ll be asked to choose between Venusaur, Charizard and Blastoise. This choice only affects some of the rewards you’ll receive and one challenge in Step 3.

‘A Mega Moment’ Step 2 of 4

  • Catch 5 Pokémon – 10 Poké Balls
  • Use 5 Berries to help catch Pokémon – 10 Great Balls
  • Power up Pokémon 5 times – 10 Razz Berries

Depending on which Pokémon you choose, you’ll earn an encounter with either Venusaur, Charizard or Blastoise and 200 Mega Energy for that Pokémon after completing the above challenges. No matter your decision, however, you’ll also receive one Premium Raid Pass.

‘A Mega Moment’ Step 3 of 4

  • Earn 5 hearts with your buddy – 50 Venusaur, Charizard or Blastoise Mega Energy
  • Power up Pokémon 10 times – 50 Venusaur, Charizard or Blastoise Mega Energy
  • Mega Evolve Venusaur / Charizard / Blastoise – 1 Charge TM

Rewards: 1000 XP, 600 Stardust and 100 Mega Energy for either Venusaur, Charizard or Blastoise

‘A Mega Moment’ Step 4 of 4

  • Win a raid – 6 Revives
  • Defeat a Team Go Rocket Grunt – 2 Silver Pinap Berries
  • Take a snapshot of your buddy – 6 Hyper Potions

Rewards: 2000 XP, 1500 Stardust and 100 Mega Energy for either Venusaur, Charizard or Blastoise

New to the game is a long overdue Mega Evolution update, which has arrived alongside the A Mega Moment research. May 2022 in Pokémon Go started with the Air Adventures event and the release of Mega Latias and Mega Latios. Currently both the Great League and Flying Cup are running in the Go Battle League. Elsewhere, we’ve recently seen the release of more Gen 7 Pokémon as part of the Season of Alola. The first details surrounding Go Fest 2022 have also been announced, including the event date.

A Mega Moment best Choose Path choice in Pokémon Go explained

After completing Step 1 for A Mega Moment in Pokémon Go, you’ll be asked to pick between the final evolutions for the Gen 1 starter Pokémon – Venusaur, Charizard and Blastoise. Your choice determines which one you’ll earn from completing Step 2 and the Mega Energy you receive throughout the questline.

Mega Charizard Y.

The question is, however, which Mega Evolution is best – Mega Venusaur, Mega Charizard X, Mega Charizard Y or Mega Blastoise?

When looking at the max CP level each Mega Evolution can reach, it’s clear that Mega Charizard Y is the most powerful. If you have a Charizard with 100% perfect IV stats, then, at Level 30, it can reach 3,819 CP and this number rises to 4,445 CP at Level 40.

This number is significantly higher than the other Mega Evolutions, who have the following CP levels at 100% perfect IV stats:

Mega Venusaur

  • Level 30 – 3,170 CP
  • Level 40 – 3,698 CP

Mega Charizard X

  • Level 30 – 3,300 CP
  • Level 40 – 3,850 CP

Mega Blastoise

  • Level 30 – 3,378 CP
  • Level 40 – 3,941 CP

If you decide to go with Charizard Y, then the best moveset for this Pokémon is Fire Spin (Fast) and Blast Burn (Charged).

The choice, however, is completely up to you and you can always use this research quest to fill in a missing entry in your Mega Pokédex.

How A Mega Moment works in Pokémon Go

A Mega Moment was released as part of April 2022’s rework to Mega Evolution in Pokémon Go and requires players to be Trainer Level 5 or above to unlock.

Since it’s a special research quest and has no deadline, you can complete A Mega Moment whenever you like after unlocking it.

A Mega Moment contains four quest quests and, like most Pokémon Go quests, you need to complete three challenges for every step, collecting the rewards as you progress. A number of the rewards and one of the challenges, however, depend on which final evolution for the Gen 1 starter Pokémon you select after completing Step 1.

Good luck completing A Mega Moment!

Will you support Eurogamer?

We want to make Eurogamer better, and that means better for our readers – not for algorithms. You can help! Become a supporter of Eurogamer and you can view the site completely ad-free, as well as gaining exclusive access to articles, podcasts and conversations that will bring you closer to the team, the stories, and the games we all love. Subscriptions start at £3.99 / $4.99 per month.

Tagged With

  • Android
  • iOS
  • MMO
  • Mobile
  • Niantic
  • Pokémon Go
  • RPG
  • Windows Phone

About the Author

Senior Guides Writer

Lottie Lynn is Eurogamer’s Senior Guides Writer. She likes exploring new games and still has nightmares about the moon from Majora’s Mask.

Yesterday we caught wind of a new type of evolution coming in Pokemon X and Y. Today we learn how Mega Evolution works, where to learn the technique, and which Mega Pokemon will only be available through a special launch day distribution event. Oh, and there are three new Pokemon at the bottom, so if you’re saving yourself for October 12, don’t look.

First off, don’t expect to be walking around the Kalos region with Mega Mewtwo stuffed inside a pokeball — these Mega Evolutions only occur in battle, when a Mega-capable Pokemon is holding a very specific Mega Stone. For instance, in order to evolve Lucario into Mega Lucario, he’ll have to be holding a chunk of Lucarionite.

Once Mega Lucario is done kicking ass, he’ll revert back to his normal form and stuff himself back inside his pokeball.

Razer Limited Edition Boba Fett Xbox Wireless Controller

Limited edition Star Wars controller
This Xbox controller from Razer is inspired by our favorite Mandalorian—Boba Fett. It comes with a charming stand also decked out in the character’s colors.

One of the Megas, Mega Blaziken, will only be available during a special, incredibly short distribution event held during the launch of the games on October 12. Players will be able to grab a special Torchic holding a Blazikenite Mega Stone, which they’ll have to evolve to Blaziken before going all super saiyan with him.

Want to see them in action?

Players will most likely learn about these Mega Evolutions in the seaside town of Shalour City, home of the Tower of Mastery and the spirited gym leader Korrina, who seeks to unlock the hidden potential of her Pokemon.

Also announced today were two new types of Pokemon training, injecting a little Monster Rancher style into the franchise. Here’s the details:

Super Training or S.T. is being introduced in Pokémon X and Pokémon Y, allowing players to help their Pokémon grow stronger when they’re not in battle. On the Touch Screen of the Nintendo 3DS system, players can have their Pokémon participate in Super Training, activities that will increase a Pokémon’s base stats, the underlying values that define its HP, Attack, Defense, Sp. Atk, Sp. Def, and Speed stats.

One Super Training activity involves having Pokémon train by facing huge Pokémon-shaped Balloon Bots in a virtual space, with both sides trying to shoot balls into the opponent’s goal. Using the Circle Pad and Touch Screen to avoid shots from the Balloon Bots while landing their own in the goal, players will enjoy this action-packed feature while increasing their Pokémon’s base stats to help them become stronger for battle.

For a more casual way to help Pokémon strengthen their base stats, Core Training lets players set up training bags, earned by completing Super-Training Regimens, for Pokémon in their party to use. Pokémon will work on Core Training by themselves, raising their stats on their own. By tapping on the Touch Screen during a Core Training session, players can help their Pokémon increase their base stats, too. Players will be able to see how their Pokémon are doing at their Core Training at any time from the main Super Training screen.

And finally, it wouldn’t be a big Pokemon announcement without some new critters.

Pokemon X

Pokemon X (3DS)

What is the best mega evolution pokemon?

Top Voted Answer

There is no “best” Mega evolution, just like there is no “best” pokemon in general. The one’s that are looking particularly viable right now are Alakazam, Gengar, Tyranitaur, Heracross, Aggron, and Mawhile. Though all of them are good, and a lot of Mega Evolutions are arguably more competitively viable with other items instead of mega stones.

Also, don’t feel too bad about having Y. Your Mega Mewtwo is going to be much better than the Mega Mewtwo X. By a lot. In that it has more Special attack than Deoxys Attack. And way better defenses to boot.

Answers

Mega Kangaskhan is my favorite. That thing is terrifying. Is it the best? They’re all pretty good honestly. For me, it may very well be the best, especially since normal kangaskhan can have the Scrappy ability.

But ive got my head handed to me quite a few times against Mega Mawile.

In my opinion, here are the mega evolution pokemon in tiers.

OP Tier
Medicham
You all may think that this Pokemon is in the UU tier, since you almost never see it, but its ability, Pure Power, makes its base attack stat to 200. Also giving is a speed boost to 100, and access to all three elemental punches, this Pokemon is one of the biggest threats of all.

Gengar
La la la. I am a ghost and poison force of destruction. AND I CAN LEARN DAZZLING GLEAM!! This Pokemon has an amazing movepool, and has also 175 Base Sp.atk and 130 Speed.

OP to OU Borderline
Mewtwo X and Y
Charizard Y
Tyranitar
Mawile

OU
Charizard X
Garchomp (Poor garchomp. his stats were destroyed!)
Kangaskhan
Alakazam
Pinsir

With the first weekend of the Pokemon Winter Regional Championships behind us, Shacknews is taking a fresh look at some of Pokemon’s best Mega Evolutions. Here are four fearsome Mega Evolved Pokemon from Pokemon X & Y.

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

The first weekend of the Pokemon Winter Regional Championships is officially in the books. The first batch of Winter Regional matches were held this past weekend in Virginia, Southern California, Oregon, and Missouri with thousands of competitors vying for an invitation to the 2015 World Championships. The second weekend will be held in Kissimmee, Florida on February 28.

Players will compete in Single, Triple, Rotation, Multi, and GS Cup battles, with over 700 Pokemon at their disposal. Mega Evolutions, the major addition to Pokemon X & Y, will indeed be allowed and could very well turn more than one of these matches on their head. In observance of the Pokemon Winter Regionals, Shacknews is taking a couple of days to examine some of the more powerful Mega Evolutions to hit the Pokemon series thus far. Today, we check out the best Megas to come out of the aforementioned Pokemon X & Y.

Those that are assembling their Pokemon rosters may want to consider adding the following:

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

Mega Charizard X

Ability: Tough Claws

The Mega Evolution that donned the cover of Pokemon X did so for a good reason. This version of Charizard’s Mega Evolution is undoubtedly the superior one for a couple of reasons. Mega Charizard X gets a sharp jump in its Attack stats, as well as a modest boost in Defense and Special Attack. Its bolstered stats make its Fire-type attacks a greater force to be reckoned with.

On top of that, Mega Charizard X is one of the few Megas (and the only Charizard Mega) that actually changes the Pokemon’s type. Charizard will morph from Fire/Flying to a Fire/Dragon type. That makes the decision to go Mega as much a strategic choice as anything else. The switch will remove Charizard’s weakness to Electricity and its new dual-type will negate the weakness to Ice that so many Dragon types are vulnerable to.

Physical attacks like Dragon Claw and Flare Blitz, with Aerial Ace backing them up, make Mega Charizard X one of the stronger Mega choices to come out of Pokemon X & Y. Remember, Charizard is popular for a reason and this particular Mega Evolution was such a hit that it emerged again as Charizard’s Final Smash in Super Smash Bros. for 3DS and Wii U.

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

Mega Venusaur

Ability: Thick Fat

Of course, if Charizard isn’t your favorite starter, there worse ways to go than with the Bulbasaur family. Venusaur’s Mega Evolution takes the Grass/Poison-type’s relatively mundane abilities and transforms it into the far-more useful Thick Fat. Thick Fat reduces the heavy damage done by Venusaur’s two weaknesses by halving the damage from Ice and Fire-type moves. This ensures that Venusaur can withstand most punishment and, barring a Psychic barrage, will stay on the field long enough to get a few attacks in.

Mega Venusaur gets a modest stat boost across the board, with its Defense getting the biggest upgrade. Petal Dance/Solar Beam and Sludge Bomb will take the best advantage of its dual Grass/Poison-types, while other defensive-minded moves like Reflect or Light Screen can help keep teams standing. Mega Venusaur won’t win style points, but it’s a solid choice for a go-to Mega.

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

Mega Kangaskhan

Ability: Parental Bond

One of the more unsung Mega Evolutions among casual Pokemon players, Mega Kangaskhan has actually been embraced quite heavily in the competitive world. A big part of that is because of its ability that is literally unlike any other in the game. Parental Bond was crafted solely for Kangaskhan, the lone Pokemon that goes into battle with its young.

Parental Bond allows Kangaskhan to use its child in battle. Any offensive strikes will hit twice, once at its normal rate of damage from the adult and once at a slightly lesser damage rate from the child. With increased stat boosts all around, particularly in Attack, Mega Kangaskhan is a versatile force. Giga Impact will devastate foes and can be used as a potential finishing move, but Mega Kangaskhan can also be adept with other types of moves. Rock Slide, Brick Break, Crunch, or Shadow Claw are all solid choices for its arsenal, but be sure to take full advantage of that Parental Bond ability. It will not work with moves that already strike multiple times, so keep that in mind when setting this offensive juggernaut’s arsenal.

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

Mega Absol

Ability: Magic Bounce

Normally, the go-to for pure Dark-types is Umbreon, who capably fills any ‘tank’ role just dandy. Absol, however, would like to fill a different kind of role, as a striker that attacks fast and hard. Mega Absol sees an ample jump in its Special Attack and Speed stats, the latter of which can go all the way from 75 to 115.

On top of being a faster choice than the standard Absol, Mega Absol also gets the Magic Bounce ability, which essentially means the Magic Coat move effect is always active. This means there’s good reason for Mega Absol to always warm up with either Swords Dance or Calm Mind before going with a full-on blitz. Mega Absol’s Dark-based attacks are perfectly viable and as long as it can withstand the opponent’s opening salvo, its increased stats should carry it through most fights.

Those are just some of the Mega Evolution options to go to war with when constructing your Pokemon roster. Of course, many more Megas were introduced during November Pokemon Omega Ruby and Alpha Sapphire. Come back tomorrow to see which of the newer Mega Evolutions are worth taking onto the battlefield.

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

Ozzie has been playing video games since picking up his first NES controller at age 5. He has been into games ever since, only briefly stepping away during his college years. But he was pulled back in after spending years in QA circles for both THQ and Activision, mostly spending time helping to push forward the Guitar Hero series at its peak. Ozzie has become a big fan of platformers, puzzle games, shooters, and RPGs, just to name a few genres, but he’s also a huge sucker for anything with a good, compelling narrative behind it. Because what are video games if you can’t enjoy a good story with a fresh Cherry Coke?

Last update: Wednesday, May 11, 2016

The big highlight of the new Pokemon games are the Mega Evolutions. To unlock them however, You need to get a certain stone to equip the Pokemon with. Here is the list of the evolvable Pokemon, and where to get the stones. (Mega Blastiose/Mega Charizard/ Mega Venusaur , Mega Blaziken and Mega Lucario are omitted on purpose, as You get the stones for them instantly).

In game

Mega Abomasnow -Abomasite

Talk to the Abomasnow after defeating Team Flare in the Frozen Cave)

Ampharos -Ampharosite

An island beneath the Spirits Den. A man gives it to You.

Gengar -Gengarite

Lavarre City. A woman to the north-east of the gym gives it to You

Aerodactyl -Aerodactylite

Ambrette Town. One of the scientists in the Fossil Lab

After-game

Absol -Absolite

Kiloude City. Defeat Your rival in the after-game.

Mewtwo -Mewtwonite x/y

Depending on the version, You receive it after he is caught.

Gardevoir -Gardevorite

Luminose City/ Café Soleil. T rade with Diantha to get it.

Night

Those stones only appear as sparkling objects during night time, and can only be found in that time period.

Alakazam -Alakazamite

Aggron -Aggronite

(Y ONLY!) Second level rock of the Cyllage gym. The X version contains Tyranitarite for a Tyranitar

Banette -Banettite

Chamber of Emptiness (cave on Road 22).

Garchomp -Garchompite

Tower in the ruins of the Victory Road.

Gyardos -Gyardosite

Waterfalls to the south-east of Courier Town

Heracross -Heracrossite

(Y ONLY!). Left to the entrance once You get to Santalune Forest. If You have X however, You will get Pinsirite for Your Pinsir.

Houndoom- Houndoomitie

(Y ONLY!). Road 15. Halfway through, there is an area where two skaters skate around. However, If You have X, You will find Manectite for Your Manectric.

Kangaskhan -Kangaskhanite

Glittering cave. Take the first turn right and You will find the stone at the end of the corridor.

Mawile -Mawileite

Second floor of Shabboneau Castle, to the left.

Sponsored Links

Nintendo recently showed off the evolved forms of Pokemon X and Y‘s three starter creatures, Froakie, Chespin and Fennekin. The latest screens and trailer also showcase Pokemon that are evolved from fossils, as well as male and female-specific forms for Pokemon.

One of the Pokemon with varying forms is Mewtwo, whose previously announced Mega-evolved form is actually called Mega Mewtwo Y, accessible through the Mega Mewtwonite Y item found in Pokemon Y version. This new Pokemon X and Y trailer shows the other form, Mega Mewtwo X, a fighting/psychic type that is, you guessed it, obtained through the same means in Pokemon X.

The games will launch on October 12 for 3DS.

Evolved Forms of Chespin, Fennekin, and Froakie
and More Mega-Evolved Pokémon Revealed

Details Disclosed on How Mewtwo Mega Evolves into Mega Mewtwo X and Mega Mewtwo Y!

BELLEVUE, WA-September 13, 2013-It was recently announced that Mewtwo can achieve Mega Evolution, an extremely powerful form that only certain Pokémon can access during battles in Pokémon X and Pokémon Y. It is now known that Mewtwo can Mega Evolve into either Mega Mewtwo X or Mega Mewtwo Y, depending on which Mega Stone Mewtwo holds-Mewtwonite X or Mewtwonite Y. The previously announced Mega Mewtwo is in fact Mega Mewtwo Y; Mega Mewtwo X is being introduced for the first time today. Players can obtain Mewtwonite X in Pokémon X and Mega Evolve Mewtwo into Mega Mewtwo X, which gains the Fighting type to go along with its Psychic type. Players can Mega Evolve Mewtwo into Mega Mewtwo Y, whose Special Attack is greatly boosted, by obtaining Mewtwonite Y in Pokémon Y. Both titles launch worldwide on October 12, 2013, for the Nintendo 3DS family of systems.

An already powerful Dragon- and Ground-type Pokémon, Garchomp, can Mega Evolve into Mega Garchomp in Pokémon X and Pokémon Y. The increased energy released by its Mega Evolution turns Mega Garchomp’s arms into huge blades that send out a furious attack. Mega Garchomp’s Attack and Special Attack are greatly increased after it Mega Evolves, so its Dragon-type move Dragon Claw becomes extra ferocious.

Evolved Forms of Chespin, Fennekin, and Froakie Are Revealed!

Since the reveal earlier this year, Pokémon fans have debated which first partner Pokémon-Chespin, Fennekin, or Froakie-they are going to choose in Pokémon X and Pokémon Y. Players are now getting a first look at their evolved forms, featured in a new gameplay trailer released today on Pokemon.com/XY.

· When Chespin evolves into Quilladin, the hard spikes on its body grow even sturdier, and it’s able to withstand the impact of even something the size of a tractor-trailer truck without flinching. Its solid shell repels attacks while it strikes back with its pointed spines. The gentle Spiny Armor Pokémon never seeks out battles on its own, but when an opposing Pokémon strikes, it fights back! It can learn the Ground-type move Mud Shot, which does damage to opponents and lowers their Speed. This move is super effective against Fire-type Pokémon, which are usually tough opponents for Grass types like Quilladin.

· Braixen is the evolved form of the Fire-type Fox Pokémon Fennekin. Players will notice that Braixen keeps a small twig tucked into its tail. Fennekin often snacks on a twig, but Braixen uses it in another way-the twig calms its mind and is also sometimes used in battle after being set aflame with a little friction. Braixen can learn the Psychic-type move Psyshock, a special move that deals damage based on the opponent’s Defense, as if it were a physical move. Players will want to use Psyshock on opponents that have high Special Defense.

· Froakie has awesome jumping skills that are greatly improved when it evolves into Frogadier. This Bubble Frog Pokémon can reach to the top of a 2,000-foot tower with ease and eludes its opponents by leaping around ceilings or into trees. Frogadier can learn the Flying-type move Bounce, which sends the user into the air on its first turn so it can attack on the second. Bounce is super effective against Grass-type Pokémon, which often pose a challenge for Water types like Frogadier.

Trainers Can Show Their Style!

In Pokémon X and Pokémon Y, players can visit boutiques and a salon to change their Trainers’ outfits and hairstyles. You can change your clothes, hat, shoes, and accessories to show off your individual style and put together different looks. There are boutiques in many of the cities throughout the Kalos region, each with its own unique style. Adding to this customized feature, when players change their outfits and hairstyles, their icons on the Player Search System (PSS) update too!

Never-Before-Seen Pokémon That Possess Different Forms!

Some Pokémon in Pokémon X and Pokémon Y possess a number of different forms, some of which are being revealed for the very first time today.

· The stylish Poodle Pokémon, Furfrou, can be groomed into a number of different appearances. The more it is groomed, the more styles may become available, some of which are being shown for the first time today. Players will be alerted to Furfrou’s grooming schedule, and if it’s left untended, its fur will grow long and shaggy, returning to Furfrou’s original look. This Pokémon is very intelligent and loyal to its Trainer, and it’s said that in ancient times Furfrou guarded the king of the Kalos region. Furfrou can learn Baby-Doll Eyes, a new Fairy-type move debuting in Pokémon X andPokémon Y that allows its user to go first regardless of Speed and can lower the opponent’s Attack stat.

· Meowstic is a never-before-seen Psychic-type Pokémon that has different forms depending on its gender. This expressionless Constraint Pokémon does not show emotion to others, but it seems that some Trainers love the unsociable front it puts on. Unlike other Pokémon that have different forms based on gender, the moves Meowstic can learn will differ based on whether it’s male or female. Male Meowstic can learn the Psychic-type move Miracle Eye, a move that allows future moves to hit regardless of the opponent’s evasion, making it a powerful support in battle. Female Meowstic are better at outright attacks and can learn the Psychic-type move Extrasensory, which not only does damage but can also cause the target to flinch so it can’t use moves on that turn.

Introducing More People You’ll Meet!

More is known about Team Flare. Five Scientists are believed to be the driving force behind this mysterious group, each one identified by a different hairstyle and unique outfit. The purple-haired woman is Celosia, the orange-haired woman is Aliana, the green-haired woman is Bryony, and the blue-haired woman is Mable. There is one man among the Scientists, Xerosic, who is easily identifiable by his red goggles and fire-red hair. Their focus is world-changing, and they have a clear goal in mind, but what is it?

Everyone in the Kalos region loves Diantha, a famous movie star Trainers will meet during their journey. In addition to her acting career, Diantha is a Pokémon Trainer, though she seems to show more interest in other Trainers who have real potential.

Nintendo has released a new Pokemon X and Y trailer, confirming the information posted yesterday regarding Mega forms of the battling critters.

Three new Pokemon were also revealed: Dedenne, Horubii, and Meekuru, and while you watch the trailer, were uploading new shots for the game. So check back in a bit for those.

Mega Evolution is a new transformation certain Pokemon can undergo during battle by allowing them to “tap into hidden reserves of strength and power” unrealized in their regular Evolutions.

Pokemon like Mega Mewtwo and Mega Lucario can use the Mega Evolution power in battle and will see their looks change and stats increase, giving Trainers a great advantage against their opponents.

Some who use this system may even change their Ability or type while in battle – but only certain Pokemon, under certain conditions, can Mega Evolve, Unlike regular Evolution, Mega Evolution only occurs during battle—once the battle ends, the Mega-Evolved Poke will return to its usual state.

IN order to pull off a Mega Evolution, trainers will need an item called a Mega Stone which exist for all Pokemon that can Mega Evolve. Each is also named after the Pokemon to which it grants power.

For instance, the “Lucarionite Mega Stone” will help Lucario Mega Evolve.

Mega Stones are hidden throughout the Kalos region, and players must find them to be able to unlock the powerful Evolution.

Pokemon X and Pokemon Y are out worldwide October 12 on 3DS.

To see this content please enable targeting cookies. Manage cookie settings

Tagged With

  • 3DS XL
  • Fighting
  • Mega Evolutions
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo 3DS
  • Pokémon
  • Pokémon X and Y
  • RPG
  • Screens
  • Video

About the Author

Half-blind/half-dyslexic, bad typist, wine enthusiast, humanitarian, intellectual savant, idiot savior, lover of all things nonsensical, animal hoarder and highly sarcastic.

Support VG247

You give us money, we give you an ad-free reading experience, merch discounts, a newsletter every month, and elite status amongst your friends.

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

Share

In case, you just received the game and have been itching to try out something new, Mega Evolved Pokemon are the new type of Pokemon featured in Pokemon X and Y.

Certain Pokemon can transform into the Mega Evolved Pokemon while they are in a battle and are reverted back to their original state once the battle is over.

For more help on Pokemon X and Y, read our Elite Four, Pokemon-Amie and Mega Stones Locations Guide.

Pokemon X and Y Mega Evolved Pokemon

In order to commence the Mega Evolution, every Pokemon must have their Mega Stone while they are in the battle. We have compiled a list of all Pokemon that can undergo Mega Evolution.

Mega Venusaur
Type: Grass/Poison
Ability: Overgrow (Increases Grass-Type attacks by 50% when HP is below 33%).
Mega Type: Grass/Poison
Mega Ability: Thick Fat (Decreases the damage taken from Fire and Ice attacks by 50%).

Mega Charizard X
Type: Fire/Flying
Ability: Blaze (Increases Fire-Type attacks by 50% when HP is below 33%).
Mega Type: Fire/Dragon
Mega Ability: Tough Claws (Melee Attacks have improved damage).

Mega Charizard Y
Type: Fire/Flying
Ability: Blaze (Increases Fire-Type attacks by 50% when HP is below 33%).
Mega Type: Fire/Flying
Mega Ability: Drought (This will allow user to change the weather to make the glaring Sun appear at the battlefield).

Mega Blastoise
Type: Water
Ability: Torrent (Increases Water-Type attacks by 50% when HP is below 33%).
Mega Type: Water
Mega Ability: Mega Launcher (The power of Pulse Attacks is increased greatly).

Mega Ampharos
Type: Electric
Ability: Static (It reduces the speed of the Pokémon that performs a direct attack on your Pokémon).
Mega Type: Electric/Dragon
Mega Ability: Mold Breaker (It renders the effects of other enemy attacks to minimal, thus; reducing damage).

Mega Absol
Type: Dark
Ability: Pressure or Super Luck (It increases the critical hits delivered on to the enemies).
Mega Type: Dark
Mega Ability: Magic Bounce (This will return the Status Moves back to the casting Pokémon).

Mega Mawile
Type: Steel/Fairy
Ability: Hyper Cutter or Intimidate (It decreases the enemy Attack stat by 33%).
Mega Type: Steel/Fairy
Mega Ability: Huge Power (This will allow you to two fold the Attack stat of your character).

Mega Mewtwo X
Type: Psychic
Ability: Pressure (Double PP will be used each time your character uses a move).
Mega Type: Psychic/Fighting
Mega Ability: Steadfast (It increases your character’s speed by 50%).

Mega Mewtwo Y
Type: Psychic
Ability: Pressure (Double PP will be used each time your character uses a move).
Mega Type: Psychic
Mega Ability: Insomnia (It allows you to evade Sleep Status Condition).

Mega Lucario
Type: Fighting/Steel
Ability: Steadfast or Inner Focus (It increases your character’s speed by 50%).
Mega Type: Fighting/Steel
Mega Ability: Adaptability (It increases the damage of an attack by 50% if the Attack Type and Pokémon Type is the same).

Mega Blaziken
Type: Fire/Fighting
Ability: Blaze (Increases Fire-Type attacks by 50% when HP is below 33%).
Mega Type: Fire/Fighting
Mega Ability: Speed Boost (This will enable your character to increase its Speed by 50% with each turn in the Battle).

Mega Kangaskhan
Type: Normal
Ability: Early Bird or Scrappy (It will allow you to raise your character from the Sleep Status Effect 50% earlier than the usual time).
Mega Type: Normal
Mega Ability: Parental Bond (This will allow you to use the same move 2 times in one turn).

Mega Garchomp
Type: Dragon/Ground
Ability: Sand Veil (Using this ability; your character will have 25% more chance of avoiding SandStorm and the damage done from it).
Mega Type: Dragon/Ground
Mega Ability: Sand Force (It increases the damage done from Ground-Type, Rock-Type, and Steel-Type moves when a Sandstorm is around).

Mega Aerodactyl
Type: Rock/Flying
Ability: Rock Head or Pressure (Double PP will be used each time your character uses a move).
Mega Type: Rock/Flying
Mega Ability: Tough Claws (Melee Attacks have improved damage).

Mega Gengar
Type: Ghost/Poison
Ability: Levitate (Your character will NOT take any damage from the Ground-Type attacks).
Mega Type: Ghost/Poison
Mega Ability: Shadow Tag (This ability will allow you to trap a Pokémon. The enemy Pokémon will NOT be able to switch or evade the area).

Mega Gyarados
Type: Water/Flying
Ability: Intimidate (It decreases the enemy Attack stat by 33%).
Mega Type: Water/Dark
Mega Ability: Unknown

Mega Abomasnow
Type: Grass/Ice
Ability: Snow Warning (This ability allows you to change the weather of the battleground to bring in a storm which will remain there until the very end of the battle).
Mega Type: Grass/Ice
Mega Ability: Snow Warning (This ability allows you to change the weather of the battleground to bring in a storm which will remain there until the very end of the battle).

Mega Gardevoir
Type: Psychic/Fairy
Ability: Synchronize or Trace (This ability will allow you to replace your ability with the ability of your enemy. In case of multiple enemies, you will be asked to choose from different abilities).
Mega Type: Psychic/Fairy
Mega Ability: Pixilate (This ability will allow you to transform all the Normal-Type Attacks to Fiary-Type Attacks).

Mega Aggron
Type: Steel/Rock
Ability: Rock Head or Sturdy (This ability will prevent Recoil while you are dealing damage to the enemies).
Mega Type: Steel/Rock
Mega Ability: Filter (This will allow you to reduce the Critical Hits delivered by the enemies by 50%).

Mega Tyranitar
Type: Rock/Dark
Ability: Sand Stream (This ability will allow you to bring in a dust storm each time your Pokémon comes into the battleground; this will last until the very end of the battle).
Mega Type: Rock/Dark
Mega Ability: Sand Stream (This ability will allow you to bring in a dust storm each time your Pokémon comes into the battleground; this will last until the very end of the battle).

Have we missed out anything? Do let us know in the Comment Section below!

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

Mega Evolutions

Nintendo’s latest press release announced Mega Evolutions which it classily describes as an evolution beyond all evolutions. So, what really are mega evolutions?

To start with, not all Pokémon are capable of mega evolution and even those Pokémon that are capable can mega evolve only under special circumstances. Mega evolution can only be used during a battle and the Pokémon will return to its regular form once the battle ends. Mega evolution may cause a change in the Pokémon’s ability or type and will always cause an increase in the Pokémon’s stats and change its appearance.

Mega evolutions are triggered by special items called Mega Stones. There exists a Mega Stone for every Pokémon that is capable of mega evolution and the stone is named after the Pokémon that can use it. These Mega stones are hidden throughout the Kalos region and acquiring them is necessary to unlock your Pokémon’s mega evolution.

In typical Pokémon fashion a Wi-Fi event is the only way to acquire Blaziken’s Mega Stone which will be held by a Torchic with the hidden ability Speed Boost which will show its true potential once you evolve your Torchic into Blaziken and then into Mega Blaziken. The Wi-Fi distribution will begin on October 12, 2013 and will last for a short period of time only.

The following Pokémon are definitely capable of mega evolution: Blaziken, Lucario and Mewtwo.

Super Training

Super training will allow the player to increase the Pokémon’s base stats that define its HP, Attack, Defense, Sp. Atk, Sp. Def, and Speed. Super training will work in the form of mini games that can be played using the touch screen and the circle pad. Completing super training regimens will get the player access to training bags. Theses training bags will be used for Core Training by the party Pokémon by themselves as they raise their stats. Players will be able to see how their Pokémon are doing at their Core Training at any time from the main Super Training screen.

New Pokémon

Also revealed were two new Pokémon: Bunnelby and Skiddo. Official descriptions follow-

Bunnelby is a new Normal-type Pokémon that creates its den by digging in the ground with its large, shovel-shaped ears. These powerful ears are strong enough to chop right through thick tree roots, making them a force to be reckoned with in battle. Bunnelby can learn the Ground-type move Dig. On the first turn, the user burrows underground, and on the second turn, it attacks! In Double Battles, a Pokémon can use Dig to avoid its ally’s attack and then dish out damage on the next turn.

It is now known that Skiddo evolves into the already announced Gogoat. A Grass-type Pokémon, Skiddo has a gentle nature and is said to be the first Pokémon to live alongside humans. Because of this relationship, Skiddo doesn’t mind carrying people or supplies on its back, and it has become able to read the feelings of its riders through their grip on its horns. Skiddo can learn the Grass-type move Leaf Blade, where the user wields a sharp leaf to slice like a sword.

Gym Leader Korrina

Korrina was revealed as a new gym leader whose gym is in Shalour City, a seaside town. The city is where the Tower Of Mastery exists which has a link to Mega Evolutions. Korrina apparently holds the key to mega evolutions suggesting that it will be necessary to earn her gym badge to unlock mega evolutions. Korrina will hence be one of the earlier gym leaders as these new features will not be held off from the players for too long.

Pokémon X and Y: Mega Evolution

5. Gengar

Gengar , the final evolution of the original Ghost Pokémon, Ghastly . Gengar was already a threat and the mega evolution makes it unbelievably powerful. Before mega evolution, its Special Attack is 130 and Speed is 110, already pretty high. After mega evolution, its Special Attack goes up to 170 and Speed goes up to 130. This makes it a very good special sweeper.

Mega Gengar also gets the Shadow Tag ability. This traps the opponent so that they cannot switch to another Pokémon. The move, Baton Pass, will still allow the opponent to switch though.

It is a Ghost/Poison type, so it gets stab from some strong moves, such as Shadow Ball and Sludge Bomb. Mix that with immunities to Normal and Fighting type attacks, and he gets a well deserved spot in the top 5.

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

4. Kangaskhan

Another classic Pokémon with a much deserved mega evolution. Anyone who plays online has run into Mega Kangaskhan on more than one occasion. Kangaskhan’s mega evolution is unique because it allows it to get an extra hit with every move, thanks to the Parental Bond ability. The child does the second hit at half damage. It also has a chance to cause any secondary effect the move has, as well as land a critical hit.

The real threat of this mega evolution comes from Kangaskhan’s movepool . It can learn Fake Out and Sucker Punch, two priority moves. Power-up Punch is also amazing because you will get twice the Attack increase.

Choosing the right moves can make Mega Kangaskhan one of the best physical sweepers in the game.

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

3. Mawile

With a high Attack and even higher Defense, Mega Mawile is already looking good. The mega evolution’s ability really makes it shine. Huge Power doubles the damage of all attacks, so you can imagine how hard it can hit. It is also a Steel/Fairy type so it has a lot of resistances. Dragon and Poison type attacks can’t touch Mawile . Considering Fairy type Pokémon are weak to Steel and Poison attacks, that takes away two weaknesses right there.

Mawile can learn the dreaded Sucker Punch as well, but it’s power is stronger than almost every other Pokémon. It is a Physical attacker and gets STAB from Iron Head. It also gets that boost from the only physical Fairy attack in the game, Play Rough.

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

2. Charizard (X)

Normally, Charizard is my favorite Pokémon and the mega evolution for Pokémon X is one of the coolest. What makes Mega Charizard X so unique is the change from Special Attack to Attack . After mega evolving, Charizard’s attack goes from 84 to 130. It also gains the ability, Tough Claws, which increases the power of all moves that make physical contact by 30%.

Mega Charizard X also gets the secondary type of Dragon. This allows it to hit very hard with not only Flare Blitz, but Dragon Claw as well. Give this Pokémon Dragon Dance and after a couple turns it will be nearly unstoppable.

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

1. Pinsir

The Terror of the Skies. The thing nightmares are made of . All of these accurately describe Mega Pinsir . Its Attack is a whopping 155 after mega evolving. It also has a high Defense and Speed. The ability though, this is what makes him King Pinsir . Aerilate increases the power of Normal type moves by 30% and turns them into the Flying type.

Since Pinsir changes to Bug/Flying when it mega evolves, it gets STAB from Normal attacks. Why is this good? Two reasons: Return and Quick Attack. Return has a base power of 102 and after the boosts it is 198.9. This move will one-hit KO pretty much any Pokémon that doesn’t have high defense or resistance to Flying type attacks.

Quick Attack is a priority attack and gets a nice boost due to its ability. This is very useful in situations that Pinsir is not faster than the opponent.

The pure power of Mega Pinsir , when using the right moves, makes it the number one mega evolution.

A Special Limited-Time Wi-Fi Distribution Event to Celebrate Mega Evolution Begins

Worldwide on October 12 th , 2013

Mega Evolution is a new, awe-inspiring transformation certain Pokémon can undergo during battle in the highly anticipated Pokémon X and Pokémon Y video games. Pokémon that Mega Evolve will tap into hidden reserves of strength and power that have never been realized in their regular Evolutions, giving players battling with a Mega-Evolved Pokémon a dominant advantage. Mega Evolutions will revolutionize Pokémon battles and usher in a new Pokémon transformation never before seen in the Pokémon world.

Pokémon like Mega Mewtwo and Mega Lucario will harness the power of Mega Evolution in battle and will see their looks change and stats increase, giving Trainers a great advantage against their opponents. Some Pokémon that Mega Evolve may even change their Ability or type while in battle. Only certain Pokémon, under certain conditions, can Mega Evolve, and unlike regular Evolution, Mega Evolution only occurs during battle—once the battle ends, the Mega-Evolved Pokémon will return to its usual state. One crucial element to undergoing Mega Evolution is a particular kind of item called a Mega Stone. Mega Stones are special stones that exist for all Pokémon that can Mega Evolve, each named after the Pokémon to which it grants power. For instance, the Lucarionite Mega Stone will help Lucario Mega Evolve. Mega Stones are hidden throughout the Kalos region, and players must find them to unlock the incredible power of Mega Evolution.

One Mega Stone, Blazikenite, will not be found during normal gameplay in Pokémon X or Pokémon Y. Players of the new titles will need to participate in a special limited-time Wi-Fi distribution event via Nintendo Network to get a Torchic holding a Blazikenite Mega Stone. This is how players can receive the Blazikenite Mega Stone when the new titles launch. The character distribution begins October 12 th , the same day Pokémon X and Pokémon Y launches worldwide for the Nintendo 3DS family of systems, and this distribution event will only last for a short period of time. Players will need to evolve the Torchic they receive via the distribution into Combusken and finally into Blaziken in order to harness the power of this Mega Stone and Mega Evolve Blaziken into Mega Blaziken.

The Torchic received in this distribution also has the Hidden Ability Speed Boost, a very powerful Ability that increases a Pokémon’s Speed at the end of every turn. This limited-time character distribution event allows players to get a Torchic with Speed Boost, which becomes incredibly effective once they Mega Evolve Blaziken into Mega Blaziken.

Brand-New Method of Pokémon Training: Super Training!

Super Training or S.T. is being introduced in Pokémon X and Pokémon Y, allowing players to help their Pokémon grow stronger when they’re not in battle. On the Touch Screen of the Nintendo 3DS system, players can have their Pokémon participate in Super Training, activities that will increase a Pokémon’s base stats, the underlying values that define its HP, Attack, Defense, Sp. Atk, Sp. Def, and Speed stats.

One Super Training activity involves having Pokémon train by facing huge Pokémon-shaped Balloon Bots in a virtual space, with both sides trying to shoot balls into the opponent’s goal. Using the Circle Pad and Touch Screen to avoid shots from the Balloon Bots while landing their own in the goal, players will enjoy this action-packed feature while increasing their Pokémon’s base stats to help them become stronger for battle.

For a more casual way to help Pokémon strengthen their base stats, Core Training lets players set up training bags, earned by completing Super-Training Regimens, for Pokémon in their party to use. Pokémon will work on Core Training by themselves, raising their stats on their own. By tapping on the Touch Screen during a Core Training session, players can help their Pokémon increase their base stats, too. Players will be able to see how their Pokémon are doing at their Core Training at any time from the main Super Training screen.

More never-before-seen Pokémon that players will encounter in the Kalos region have been announced by The Pokémon Company International. You can check them out at Pokemon.com/XY.

By emitting radio waves from its antenna-shaped whiskers, new Electric- and Fairy-type Pokémon Dedenne can communicate with far-off allies. It can also plug its tail into outlets to drain electricity from them. Its Ability, Cheek Pouch, is new to Pokémon X and Pokémon Y. If a Pokémon with this Ability eats a Berry during battle, it will not only reap the benefit from the Berry, but the Pokémon will also be able to regain HP. Dedenne can learn the new Electric-type move Nuzzle, which looks cute as the user nuzzles up to a target with its cheeks fully charged, but it’s quite dangerous! Nuzzle will do damage while paralyzing the opponent.

Bunnelby is a new Normal-type Pokémon that creates its den by digging in the ground with its large, shovel-shaped ears. These powerful ears are strong enough to chop right through thick tree roots, making them a force to be reckoned with in battle. Bunnelby can learn the Ground-type move Dig. On the first turn, the user burrows underground, and on the second turn, it attacks! In Double Battles, a Pokémon can use Dig to avoid its ally’s attack and then dish out damage on the next turn.

It is now known that Skiddo evolves into the already announced Gogoat. A Grass-type Pokémon, Skiddo has a gentle nature and is said to be the first Pokémon to live alongside humans. Because of this relationship, Skiddo doesn’t mind carrying people or supplies on its back, and it has become able to read the feelings of its riders through their grip on its horns. Skiddo can learn the Grass-type move Leaf Blade, where the user wields a sharp leaf to slice like a sword.

Introducing Gym Leader Korrina

Korrina is the Gym Leader in Shalour City, a seaside town known for its amazing views. It’s also home to the Tower of Mastery, which seems to have a connection to Mega Evolution. Gym Leader Korrina seeks to draw out her Pokémon’s strength to reach still greater heights, and it’s said that she may hold the key to Mega Evolution! In addition to being a Gym Leader, Korrina is a fantastic roller skater.

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

Pokemon GO players can Mega Evolve Charizard into X or Y – but which is best?

Pokemon GO’s recent Mega Moment event has introduced players to Mega Evolution! Trainers have been busy Mega Evolving their Pokemon, and have been faced with an interesting choice.

Most Pokemon only have one potential Mega Evolution – for example, the terrifyingly strong Mega Kangaskhan. However, Charizard is a special case, as it has two potential Mega Evolutions!

When players have enough Mega Energy, they can choose to obtain either Mega Charizard X, or Mega Charizard Y. The evolution you choose will require less Mega Energy in future, allowing you to Mega Evolve your Charizard more easily.

In this guide, we’ve broken down all the differences between Mega Charizard X and Y. If you can’t decide which version to evolve your Charizard into, we’ve got you covered!

Don’t forget to check out our Mega Latias and Mega Latios raid guide to get some extra Mega Energy!

Mega Charizard X vs Y Comparison Pokemon GO

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

As with all Mega Evolutions, when you Mega Evolve your Charizard, it is a temporary change. As a result, both Mega Charizard X and Y will learn the same moves.

Just like the original Charizard form, both Mega Evolutions are powerful Fire-types. They have access to the following moves:

  • Fast Moves: Air Slash, Dragon Breath, Ember, Fire Spin, Wing Attack
  • Charged Moves: Blast Burn, Dragon Claw, Fire Blast, Flamethrower, Overheat

Our recommended moveset for Charizard depends on what form you choose to Mega Evolve it into. Let’s take a look at each Mega Evolution in detail!

Mega Charizard X Stats and Type

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

Mega Charizard X excited lots of Pokemon fans upon release. It changed Charizard’s typing to Fire / Dragon-type, allowing the fan-favorite ‘Mon to finally become a Dragon type!

While this typing change means Mega Charizard X is vulnerable to Ground-type moves, it can also deal more damage with its powerful Dragon-type moves. Our recommended moveset for Mega Charizard X is:

  • Fast Move: Dragon Breath
  • Charged Moves: Dragon Claw, Blast Burn

Please note that in order to teach your Charizard Dragon Breath or Blast Burn, you’ll need to get your hands on some Elite TMs. Check out our Alolan Geodude Community Day Guide to find out how to get some!

Mega Charizard X also has different stats to Mega Charizard Y. Here are Mega Charizard X’s stats!

  • Max CP: 4353
  • Attack: 273
  • Defense: 213
  • Stamina: 186

Mega Charizard Y Stats and Type

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

Unlike Mega Charizard X, Mega Charizard Y does not change type when it Mega Evolves. This means that Mega Charizard Y retains Charizard’s Fire / Flying-type.

While this type change means Mega Charizard Y will deal less damage with its Dragon-type moves, it remains immune to Ground-type moves. Here’s our recommended moveset for Mega Charizard Y:

  • Fast Move: Fire Spin
  • Charged Moves: Blast Burn, Dragon Claw

As we mentioned previously, both Mega Charizards have different stats. Here’s Mega Charizard Y’s stats:

  • Max CP: 5037
  • Attack: 319
  • Defense: 212
  • Stamina: 186

Should I Choose Mega Charizard X or Y?

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

Because both Mega Charizard forms are terrifyingly strong, it’s hard to decide which to Mega Evolve into: Mega Charizard X, or Mega Charizard Y. We’ve put together a handy table to compare the differences between the two forms!

Mega Charizard X Mega Charizard Y
Type Fire / Dragon Fire / Flying
Max CP 4353 5037
Attack 273 319
Defense 213 212
Stamina 186 186

As the table shows, Mega Charizard Y has higher Max CP and Attack. This means that Mega Charizard Y is the better choice if you’re looking for an incredibly strong Fire-type attacker.

However, Mega Charizard X has its advantages, too. Using one in a raid will boost all your allies’ Dragon-type attacks, and it can deal more Dragon-type damage too!

All in all, both Mega Charizard X and Y are incredibly strong Pokemon in Pokemon GO. Which one you Mega Evolve your Charizard into depends entirely on your needs.

Both Mega Charizard forms are incredibly powerful in raids. Find out if they make our best raid team for May 2022 here!

There’s never been a better time to battle in Pokemon GO. Check out our flying cup guide and best team here.

Don’t forget to check out our May 2022 raid hour schedule too! It’s a great opportunity to earn some Rare Candy XL!

Published: 6/May/2022 11:25

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

Niantic / The Pokemon Company

Mega Evolutions are some of the most powerful fighters in Pokemon Go, but they won’t come cheap, so you’ll want to make sure you’re focusing your Mega Energy on the best ones.

The Mega Evolution mechanism was first introduced in Pokemon X & Y, giving existing species a far more powerful form. They’ve been dropped in recent mainline games, but Mega Evolutions are still around in Pokemon Go – as long as you have enough Mega Energy.

Mega Evolutions are a temporary state, and you’ll need to win Mega Raids to earn enough Mega Energy to get there. This is a time-consuming (and sometimes costly) process, so you’ll want to make sure you’re focusing on only the best Mega-Evolved Pokemon.

Below, we’ve ranked the best Mega Evolutions currently available in Pokemon Go, from Mega Gengar to Mega Blastoise, and explained why they’re the Pokemon you’ll want on your team.

6. Mega Aerodactyl

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

  • Cost: 200 Mega Energy (40 Mega Energy after first use)
  • Fast Move: Rock Throw
  • Charged Move: Rock Slide or Ancient Power

Mega Aerodactyl is a brilliant Rock-type attacker for Raids, with a huge 292 Attack stat and a max 4655 CP. It doesn’t have much bulk and it struggles with a big weakness to Ice-type attacks, but you’ll get loads of use out of it with Legendaries like Rayquaza and Zapdos being weak to Rock.

The best feature of Mega Aerodactyl, though, is the boost it offers to Rock-types and Flying-types on your team – especially as there are a lot of meta-relevant Rock-type Pokemon like Tyranitar, Rampardos, and Landorus that will benefit from this.

5. Mega Gyarados

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

  • Cost: 200 Mega Energy (40 Mega Energy after first use)
  • Fast Move: Waterfall or Bite
  • Charged Move: Hydro Pump or Crunch

Mega Gyarados is a great all-rounder in Pokemon Go, and it’s got the stats to back up its ferocious appearance: An astonishing max 5,332 CP means it has the highest potential CP in the game, and its 292 Attack stat mixed with decent Defense and Stamina makes it a force to be reckoned with.

Mega Gyarados can perform as either a Water-type Mega or a Dark-type Mega thanks to the new typing it gets when Mega Evolving. If you want to go for Water-type, Waterfall and Hydro Pump are superior move options. If you’d prefer Dark-type, go with Bite and Crunch for optimal DPS.

4. Mega Blastoise

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

  • Cost: 200 Mega Energy (40 Mega Energy after first use)
  • Fast Move: Water Gun
  • Charged Move: Hydro Cannon or Hydro Pump

Blastoise has been a fan-favorite since the early Pokemon days, and its Mega Evolution makes it powerful enough to finally earn a place on your team. Water Gun and Hydro Cannon will make it one of the best Water-types you can get, and plenty of bulk means it’ll stick around for a long time.

Mega Blastoise gets bonus points for the boost it gives to fellow Water-type Pokemon, especially when many Legendary Raid Bosses are Ground, Rock, or Fire-type. Always keep in mind Mega Blastoise’s clear weaknesses to Grass and Electric-types, though.

3. Mega Venusaur

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

  • Cost: 200 Mega Energy (40 Mega Energy after first use)
  • Fast Move: Vine Whip
  • Charged Move: Frenzy Plant or Solar Beam

Mega Venusaur was one of the OG Mega Evolutions in Go, and it remains just as desirable as it was back then. It has great bulk so it should be able to last a long time in battle, and a respectable 241 Attack stat means it can deal some huge damage too.

When it comes to moves, you’ll want a Grass-type build of Vine Whip as a Fast Move and Frenzy Plant as a Charged Move, thanks to its incredible damage output. Frenzy Plant is an Elite move, though, so if you don’t have access to it then Solar Beam is a solid backup option.

2. Mega Charizard Y

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

  • Cost: 200 Mega Energy (40 Mega Energy after first use)
  • Fast Move: Fire Spin
  • Charged Move: Blast Burn or Dragon Claw

Mega Charizard Y is one of the few Pokemon that can rise above 5,000 CP in Go, and that makes it a massive threat. That’s not all, though, as it also has a ridiculously high 319 Attack stat, which more than makes up for its relatively low Stamina and Defense (as far as Mega Evolutions go).

Mega Charizard Y is on the costly side, with a huge 200 Mega Energy entry barrier and 40 Mega Energy required each time after, but it’s worth the investment as it’s one of the top Fire-types in the game, especially with Fire Spin and Blast Burn in its moveset.

1. Mega Gengar

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

  • Cost: 200 Mega Energy (40 Mega Energy after first use)
  • Fast Move: Lick
  • Charged Move: Shadow Ball or Sludge Bomb

Mega Gengar is the best Ghost-type in Pokemon Go, and arguably the best Mega Evolution full stop. The beloved Kanto creature was already a beast in PvE, but the ability to Mega Evolve has taken it to a new level, with a max CP just under 5,000 and an absolutely wild 349 Attack stat.

Mega Gengar has access to some incredible moves like Shadow Ball and will be a powerful asset in almost any scenario – even when Ghost-types aren’t super-effective. Its only setback is its weakness to Ghost and Psychic-type moves, but it’s a small price to pay for excellence.

So there you have it: The best Mega Evolutions in Pokemon Go that you should be spending your time and resources on. Of course, any Mega Evolution is a powerful asset to have, but these ones rise to the top.

With the recent changes to Mega Evolution, it’s even easier to get Mega Pokemon, so give them a try and see what works best for you!

If you’re looking to become the ultimate Trainer, why not check out our other Pokemon Go guides:

Can’t find Mega Stones in Pokemon X & Y? Follow these directions for Mega Stone success!

Before you can collect a Mega Stone, you have to get the Mega Ring first. After this, some Mega Stones will be granted to you, or you need to collect them separately.

Stones found after defeating the Elite Four can only be collected between 8:00pm-9:00pm and you’ll pick where they are straight away as there is a sparkly spot where the Mega Stone is hiding.

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

Charizard, Blastoise and Venusaur Mega Stones: Professor Sycamore grants these stones when you pick your second starter character. Can’t wait? Buy them from the Vernal Anue Stone Emporium in Lumiose City.
Abomasnow Mega Stone: Talk to Abomasnow (at the end of the Frozen Cavern) and he will give you the stone.
Absol Mega Stone: You get this stone in Kiloude City after defeating the Elite Four.
Aerodactyl Mega Stone: Get this in Ambrette Town.
Aggron Mega Stone: This is in Pokemon Y only, and you get it in Cyllage Gym after defeating the Elite Four.
Alakazam Mega Stone: Find this in the B3F level of the Reflecting Cave after beating the Elite Four.
Ampharos Mega Stone: You’ll get this in Azure Bay.
Banette Mega Stone: Find this in the Cave of Emptiness after defeating the Elite Four.
Garchomp Mega Stone: Find this in Victory Road after defeating the Elite Four.
Gardevoir Mega Stone: In the Southern Boulevard of Lumoise City, there’s a café. Trade for a Ralts (which will be holding a mega stone).
Gengar Mega Stone: You’ll get given this in Laverre City.
Gyrados Mega Stone: Find this in Couriway Town after beating the Elite Four.
Heracross Mega Stone: Pokemon Y only – it can be found in Santalune Forest and can only be found after beating the Elite Four.
Houndoom Mega Stone: This is only available in Pokemon Y and can be found on Route 16.
Khangaskhan Mega Stone: Find this in the Glittering Cave after defeating the Elite Four.
Lucario Mega Stone: This will be given to you when you are given the Lucario.
Manectric Mega Stone: Pokemon X only – Find this on Route 16 after beating the Elite Four.
Mawile Mega Stone: Find this in Shabboneau Castle after beating the Elite Four.
Medicham Mega Stone: Find this in Laverre City after beating the Elite Four.
Mewtwo Mega Stone: Find this in the Unknown Cave near the Pokemon Village after beating the Elite Four.
Pinsir Mega Stone: Pokemon X only – find this in Santalune Forest after beating the Elite Four.
Scizor Mega Stone: Find this in the Frozen Cavern behind Abomasnow.
Tyranitar Mega Stone: Pokemon X only – find this in Cyllage Gym after beating the Elite Four.

MegaBlaziken, MegaAbsol, MegaMawile, MegaMewtwo, MegaLucario and MegaAmpharos have been confirmed as the first six of the new kind of Pokemon evolution.

Remember how Game Freak teased that weird-looking Mewtwo-like Pokemon a while back? The latest edition of Japan’s CoroCoro magazine has revealed that it is indeed an evolution of Mewtwo, but not just an ordinary evolution, a mega evolution. That’s right, Pokemon X and Y will feature mega evolutions, which rather than your standard evolution are a kind of super-beefed up version of the initial Pokemon. It’s basically Super Saiyan but for Pokemon.

The Magazine revealed the appearance of the first six of these mega evolutions: MegaBlaziken, MegaAbsol, MegaMawile, MegaMewtwo, MegaLucario and MegaAmpharos. There doesn’t seem to be any clear pattern, with some of the megas coming from three-evolution families, some coming from two, and some coming from Pokemon that previously didn’t evolve at all. I guess you could consider mega Pokemon the counterpart to “baby” Pokemon introduced back in Gen II.

Each of the mega Pokemon will have a special ability that’s not normally accessible to them, for example, MegaBlaziken has SpeedBoost while MegaMewtwo has Insomnia. The respective Pokemon reach these forms through “Mega Evolution,” though it isn’t clear how this will be achieved.

Apparently, the key to understanding Mega Evolutions is via a character named Koruni (Japanese name), who is one of Pokemon X and Pokemon Y‘s Gym Leaders.

The magazine also reveals that Torchic, the fire starter from Ruby and Sapphire who can eventually become MegaBlaziken, will be the first distribution event Pokemon.

I think these look quite cool, Lucario and Absol in particular. It’s nice to see Game Freak revisiting their older, popular Pokemon when working on a new series, as i’m always much more excited to hear about new evolutions for existing Pokemon than brand-new Pokemon.

Pokémon fans of the original starters will be shocked to know that Pokémon X and Y will see their return, but not as expected.

Here are the new forms of Charizard, Venusaur, and Blastoise.

Click each to see HD versions.

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

As the press release from the Pokémon Company reads,

Pokémon X and Y players do not receive Chespin, Fennekin, or Froakie from Professor Sycamore but are in fact given the choice of a classic partner Pokémon—Bulbasaur, Charmander, or Squirtle—from the very first Pokémon games, Pokémon Red and Pokémon Blue!

A gameplay trailer for the Mega evolutions of Charizard, Venusaur, and Blastoise was also released. Watch their exciting transformations below!

New Mega evolution information

Mega evolutions were first announced earlier in August. It’s since been confirmed that Mega evolutions will be in battle only, and will be activated via held item stones.

Now, more details of Mega evolutions have been unveiled.

According to today’s press release, “trainers must also obtain a bracelet called the Mega Ring that holds a mysterious stone called a Key Stone. The Trainer’s Key Stone resonates with the Mega Stone held by his or her Pokémon.”

A first look at the two Mega Rings is below.

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

How to trade from ‘Pokemon Black’ and ‘White’

A new system for trading old Pokémon from the Black and White DS games was announced called the Pokémon Bank, which “allows players to conveniently store up to 3,000 of their beloved Pokémon on the Internet.”

In using the Pokémon Bank, players will be able to download an app on their 3DS that allows them to easily transfer Pokémon from Pokémon Black and White to their 3DS system. From there, they can load up their Pokémon X and Y games to access the previous Gen.’s creatures.

The app will be called Poké Transporter, and will have an annual service fee attached to its sister service, the Pokémon Bank. Read more on the cloud trading service here on Bulbapedia.

What do you think of the new Gen. I starter Mega Evolutions?

Hypable’s Pokémon podcast Poké Chat recorded a live episode today about the new original starter Mega evolutions! Watch that YouTube video here.

Edit Locked

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

These games are perhaps most notable for two new features: the new Fairy-type note the first new type since Generation II, a 14-year gap and Mega Evolution. A new Eeveelution, Sylveon, was the first announced Pokémon to have the Fairy type; older Pokémon that have inherited this type include Jigglypuff, Gardevoir, Marill, and Mawile, among others. Primarily introduced to balance the Dragon type, the Fairy-type is strong against Dragon, Dark, and Fighting types, and weak against Poison- and Steel-type attacks. Mega Evolution allows many older Pokémon to transform into even more powerful forms during battle, with new stats, Abilities, and sometimes new types. This is balanced by the inability of Mega Evolved Pokémon to hold any items that would aid them in battle other than the ones that activate their Mega Evolution, and that only one Mega Evolution can be used by a Pokémon Trainer on their team per battle.

The games were announced on January 8, 2013 via Nintendo Direct, and were released October 12 later that year across most territories, another first for the Pokémon series note Previously, countries outside of Japan would have to wait weeks or even months for Game Freak to finish localization before they could get their hands on a non-Japanese copy . X and Y feature multilingual support rather than all languages being on separate game carts, although choosing a specific language “locks” the game to that language until saved data is deleted.

Pokémon Origins, a four-episode anime special Mini Series, was produced as a nostalgia-laden tie-in special to help entice and garner support from players of the original Pokémon games and to premiere Charizard’s Mega Evolution of Mega Charizard X. The miniseries aired in Japan 10 days prior to the release of Pokémon X and Y.

  • The official English commercials for the games can be viewed here: first variant, second variant, third variant.
  • The first announcement trailer for the games can be viewed here.
  • The two Nintendo Direct: Pokémon Direct presentations focusing on the games can be viewed here: (January 8th, 2013 broadcast; September 4th, 2013 broadcast).
  • The official website for the games can be visited here.
  • The Iwata Asks (in Motion) interview for the games can be read here.
  • Additional XY-centric videos can be viewed in this official playlist.

Not to be confused with X Meets Y, the The X of Y trope, the Pokémon 10th anniversary CD album Pokémon X: 10 Years of Pokémon, Lugia (which has been referred to as “Pokémon X” in some media), Pokémon Crystal (which was once known as Pokémon X), the webcomic Pokémon-X, or the Pokémon the Series: XY anime.

Please place information regarding the new Pokémon on the page for Generation VI Pokémon sheet.

In what could be described as an Evolution beyond all Evolutions, Mega Evolution is a new, awe-inspiring transformation certain Pokémon can undergo during battle in the highly anticipated Pokémon X and Pokémon Y video games. Pokémon that Mega Evolve will tap into hidden reserves of strength and power that have never been realized in their regular Evolutions, giving players battling with a Mega-Evolved Pokémon a dominant advantage. Mega Evolutions will revolutionize Pokémon battles and usher in a new Pokémon transformation never before seen in the Pokémon world.

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

Pokémon like Mega Mewtwo and Mega Lucario will harness the power of Mega Evolution in battle and will see their looks change and stats increase, giving Trainers a great advantage against their opponents. Some Pokémon that Mega Evolve may even change their Ability or type while in battle. Only certain Pokémon, under certain conditions, can Mega Evolve, and unlike regular Evolution, Mega Evolution only occurs during battle—once the battle ends, the Mega-Evolved Pokémon will return to its usual state. One crucial element to undergoing Mega Evolution is a particular kind of item called a Mega Stone. Mega Stones are special stones that exist for all Pokémon that can Mega Evolve, each named after the Pokémon to which it grants power. For instance, the Lucarionite Mega Stone will help Lucario Mega Evolve. Mega Stones are hidden throughout the Kalos region, and players must find them to unlock the incredible power of Mega Evolution.

One Mega Stone, Blazikenite, will not be found during normal gameplay in Pokémon X or Pokémon Y. Players of the new titles will need to participate in a special limited-time Wi-Fi distribution event via Nintendo Network to get a Torchic holding a Blazikenite Mega Stone. This is how players can receive the Blazikenite Mega Stone when the new titles launch. The character distribution begins October 12th, the same day Pokémon X and Pokémon Y launches worldwide for the Nintendo 3DS family of systems, and this distribution event will only last for a short period of time. Players will need to evolve the Torchic they receive via the distribution into Combusken and finally into Blaziken in order to harness the power of this Mega Stone and Mega Evolve Blaziken into Mega Blaziken.

The Torchic received in this distribution also has the Hidden Ability Speed Boost, a very powerful Ability that increases a Pokémon’s Speed at the end of every turn. This limited-time character distribution event allows players to get a Torchic with Speed Boost, which becomes incredibly effective once they Mega Evolve Blaziken into Mega Blaziken.

Brand-New Method of Pokémon Training: Super Training!

Super Training or S.T. is being introduced in Pokémon X and Pokémon Y, allowing players to help their Pokémon grow stronger when they’re not in battle. On the Touch Screen of the Nintendo 3DS system, players can have their Pokémon participate in Super Training, activities that will increase a Pokémon’s base stats, the underlying values that define its HP, Attack, Defense, Sp. Atk, Sp. Def, and Speed stats.

One Super Training activity involves having Pokémon train by facing huge Pokémon-shaped Balloon Bots in a virtual space, with both sides trying to shoot balls into the opponent’s goal. Using the Circle Pad and Touch Screen to avoid shots from the Balloon Bots while landing their own in the goal, players will enjoy this action-packed feature while increasing their Pokémon’s base stats to help them become stronger for battle.

For a more casual way to help Pokémon strengthen their base stats, Core Training lets players set up training bags, earned by completing Super-Training Regimens, for Pokémon in their party to use. Pokémon will work on Core Training by themselves, raising their stats on their own. By tapping on the Touch Screen during a Core Training session, players can help their Pokémon increase their base stats, too. Players will be able to see how their Pokémon are doing at their Core Training at any time from the main Super Training screen.

More never-before-seen Pokémon that players will encounter in the Kalos region have been announced this morning by The Pokémon Company International. You can check them out at Pokemon.com/XY.

· By emitting radio waves from its antenna-shaped whiskers, new Electric- and Fairy-type Pokémon Dedenne can communicate with far-off allies. It can also plug its tail into outlets to drain electricity from them. Its Ability,Cheek Pouch, is new to Pokémon X and Pokémon Y. If a Pokémon with this Ability eats a Berry during battle, it will not only reap the benefit from the Berry, but the Pokémon will also be able to regain HP. Dedenne can learn the new Electric-type move Nuzzle, which looks cute as the user nuzzles up to a target with its cheeks fully charged, but it’s quite dangerous! Nuzzle will do damage while paralyzing the opponent.

· Bunnelby is a new Normal-type Pokémon that creates its den by digging in the ground with its large, shovel-shaped ears. These powerful ears are strong enough to chop right through thick tree roots, making them a force to be reckoned with in battle. Bunnelby can learn the Ground-type move Dig. On the first turn, the user burrows underground, and on the second turn, it attacks! In Double Battles, a Pokémon can use Dig to avoid its ally’s attack and then dish out damage on the next turn.

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

· It is now known that Skiddo evolves into the already announced Gogoat. A Grass-type Pokémon, Skiddo has a gentle nature and is said to be the first Pokémon to live alongside humans. Because of this relationship, Skiddo doesn’t mind carrying people or supplies on its back, and it has become able to read the feelings of its riders through their grip on its horns. Skiddo can learn the Grass-type move Leaf Blade, where the user wields a sharp leaf to slice like a sword.

Introducing Gym Leader Korrina

Korrina is the Gym Leader in Shalour City, a seaside town known for its amazing views. It’s also home to the Tower of Mastery, which seems to have a connection to Mega Evolution. Gym Leader Korrina seeks to draw out her Pokémon’s strength to reach still greater heights, and it’s said that she may hold the key to Mega Evolution! In addition to being a Gym Leader, Korrina is a fantastic roller skater.

Charizard is even more sought after now.

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

Mega Evolution has arrived in Pokémon Go, and with it comes the opportunity to capture Pokémon capable of Mega Evolution by participating in the new Mega Raids.

A handful of Mega Pokémon are already available to capture and use in Pokémon Go, including both Mega Charizard X and Y. The two different forms of the Fire-type starter are incredibly powerful, both sitting in the top tier of potential max CP in the game.

If you plan on attempting to capture each form of Charizard, you will need to prepare your team. So here is how to beat and capture Mega Charizard X and Y through Mega Raids in Pokémon Go.

Mega Charizard X counters

Compared to a normal Charizard, you will need to update your strategy against Mega Charizard X because it is no longer Fire/Flying-type. That means you can’t use Electric-types to take it down quickly, but Rock-types have actually become more useful because now it is vulnerable to Ground-type attacks too.

Groudon is actually your best option here, as the Legendary Ground-type won’t take super-effective damage from the Dragon and can hammer it with powerful moves like Earthquake. You won’t want to only rely on Groudon, though, because even its defenses won’t hold up forever against Mega Charizard X.

Your other best options are going to be powerful Rock-types like Rhyperior, Tyranitar, and Rampardos that can either take several hits or just lay into the Mega Evolved boss.

Rampardos is probably the worst option of the three because of its abysmal defenses. But if you just need something to quickly whittle the Dragon down, the combination of Smack Down, Rock Slide, or even Outrage can only help your cause.

Rhyperior is much bulkier and can handle almost all of the standard attacks Mega Charizard X will be dishing out. Tyranitar can also take the hits, but will hit a lot harder with its Smack Down and Stone Edge combo, but you really can’t go wrong with any of these picks.

Mega Charizard Y counters

In a more traditional matchup, Mega Charizard Y is a Fire/Flying-type and can be easily countered by Rock-types. It also hits on the special attack side, so it will be dealing a lot more damage in certain matchups.

Skipping Groudon, you can use Rhyperior, Tyranitar, and Rampardos to great effect against Mega Charizard Y because it is four-times weak to Rock-type attacks.

Zekrom would also be a great option here because it resists both of the STAB attack types from Mega Charizard Y thanks to its own Dragon/Electric-typing. Charge Beam and Wild Charge will be your best options here for moves, and make sure you have a solid defensive option in the back if you need to stall for time.

Other good options on both sides include Terrakion, Kabutops, Omastar, Kyogre, Gyarados, Vaporeon, Milotic, Suicune, and Swampert. That will likely vary, though, depending on the movesets you have available when preparing for the raid.

Once you complete your Mega Raid, you will have a chance to capture whichever Charizard you defeated and add it to your roster.

It’s another cheating day for your favorite Pokemon game, this time it’s the cheat for Pokemon Mega Emerald X & Y Edition. I suppose you are already familiar with this amazing Pokemon rom hack, and today I will share with you my collection of cheats for Mega Emerald X&Y Edition that have been tested and verified by me personally.

You can also find some of the cheats for the game on other websites sources but here, I only list the best, most useful, and probably the safest to use cheat codes.

What does it mean? Some cheats can cause a mess to your game, not to mention all Pokeball, all berries, all items, and all TM/HM codes. But there’s an alternative for the said cheats which you can find below.

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

I will certainly update this post as soon as I find a new cheat code for Pokemon Mega Emerald X&Y Edition so stay tuned.

Pokemon Mega Emerald X&Y Edition Cheats for Game Boy Advance

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

Cheat code:
A2A4317B 9817FF81
093ECE84 CE99DAF5
9045E027 05EA1143
A6A74710 82BD7E29

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

Cheat code:
BFF956FA 2F9EC50D

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

Cheat code:
82005274 0060

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

Cheat code:
82005274 0061

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

Cheat code:
D8BAE4D9 4864DCE5
A86CDBA5 19BA49B3
A57E2EDE A5AFF3E4
1C7B3231 B494738C
C051CCF6 975E8DA1

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

Cheat code:
958D8046 A7151D70
8BB602F7 8CEB681A

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

Master code: (Enter this first)
1006AF88 0007

Cheat code:
83007CF6 YYYY
Replace YYYY with the corresponding Pokemon ID

008B = Freiza
008C = Goku-4
008D = Cell
008E = P-giratina
007B = Keldeo
00A2 = Reshiram
00A3 = Zekrom
00B5 = Charizard-y
00D1 = Dialga
00D2 = Giratina
00CF = Palkia
00D9 = Heatran
00AC = Mewtwo-x
00AD = Mewtwo-y
00BB = M-Venasaur
00BC = M-Blastoise
00EE = Hoopa
00FD = M-Deoxys
0181 = Gensect
000D = P-Groundon
000E = P-Kyogre
0050 = M-Metagross
0080 = P-Dialga
0021 = Darkarai
0022 = M-Rayquaza
0073 = Arceus
0096 = Mewtwo
0097 = Mew
0199 = Jirachi
0056 = M-Latias
0057 = M-Latios
0039 = Excadreel
0038 = Bastidon
0032 = Rampardos
0031 = M-Lucario
0045 = Tornados
0046 = Landorus
0047 = Thundorus
00D0 = B-Kyurem
00CD = Volcanion
00BF = M-Gyarados
00BA = Regigas
00E2 = M-Diance
00D4 = Zygred
000A = M-Blazeken
000B = M-Swampert
000C = M-Sceptila
0020 = Magmotar
0030 = M-Slamence
00A0 = Greninja
0032 = Rampardos
0033 = Rhyperior
0017 = M-Mantric
0018 = M-Bennate
0028 = Spirit bomb
0131 = Braivery
00D6 = M-Tyrenitar
001D = M-Sabliyane
001F = Xenres
002E = M-Garchomp
003B = Pyroar
00C7 = M-Houndoom

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

How to use: Replace YYYY with the TM/HM id
82005274 0YYYY
Example: Use the code 82005274 0153 to obtain cut.

Where to get the item:
Head over to Mart and buy the first item in the list. See the item in your bag after the purchase.

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

Mastercodes
B749822B CE9BFAC1
A86CDBA5 19BA49B3

Cheat codes:
65B97174 4A8FBA5C = Level 1
C1AEDD79 5939EF0C = Level 2
4CDE397B EFF6E457 = Level 3
86CB4F01 FB39B8BA = Level 4
EDBF0C4A FA18FA9F = Level 5
2C79FE38 E30F38FE = Level 6
A1EA0A38 A5E9063B = Level 7
04756825 0807C6A1 = Level 8
717DA41F 3FD37B40 = Level 9
076F8D1D EE3C0CD9 = Level 10
B69C8450 473A2A6A = Level 11
B3401E47 CF42C6B5 = Level 12
46657519 7800204C = Level 13
6E6EAE73 5F46BEDD = Level 14
A48D6017 E245D5ED = Level 15
E9D7E085 67756459 = Level 16
61F31742 495EF9E6 = Level 17
8C48D400 C701EBD6 = Level 18
5D38792B D1EC3503 = Level 19
B717825B 7A66F6A1 = Level 20
C90DB070 BE358A19 = Level 21
BFA8DF8D 806599B4 = Level 22
E5125084 0C4E73CE = Level 23
308CCC86 A32374F3 = Level 24
8478EB4A 57D82CBB = Level 25
2E3B86B4 1A2623D7 = Level 26
792D8658 E6CD2F14 = Level 27
DAABA89A CD8FD51E = Level 28
E4E4CA17 0386E75A = Level 29
640BC06E 716F7457 = Level 30
D7C48346 0C094A48 = Level 31
EF3658F0 6036495C = Level 32
7E63F78B FD346BBC = Level 33
80548C01 6804F508 = Level 34
4376B266 5BEABEF3 = Level 35
31A2B5C3 9B086C90 = Level 36
FB3D5638 6665FC5A = Level 37
A983268B A4800A5D = Level 38
EF5C2FD1 979F146D = Level 39
0DD48BFF CA04B434 = Level 40
0E183E24 7565CD99 = Level 41
405D137B A9EA697E = Level 42
338BB970 618C9289 = Level 43
3D4129AD 3F389E0B = Level 44
78937EED BD8501FC = Level 45
843AEF6E EB4896DD = Level 46
E3E9EC3B ADD8FA82 = Level 47
9C2970FF 7954A215 = Level 48
22A2A040 8618D6B6 = Level 49
93C37C9C 0419D3FE = Level 50
2B297F54 9510DB40 = Level 51
A04A94AF 6479DACA = Level 52
56571931 747837C4 = Level 53
569B7C43 6157E073 = Level 54
0ED659B3 0A74B037 = Level 55
1D6FDAFA E4DAF9FC = Level 56
06F84E22 833CC1F1 = Level 57
F7503B2F 6481CAD7 = Level 58
DAC5A494 F20312CD = Level 59
9B96A548 FC6BDEF8 = Level 60
A81962BA EA98B8D5 = Level 61
42A11A06 BFA9A866 = Level 62
E9681BC1 6F8839C3 = Level 63
6310815F 4890EAB8 = Level 64
C2ACED85 878CBAEA = Level 65
EC997ADC 4D78B881 = Level 66
55149812 50A4CD21 = Level 67
BAEE7273 E708BFA6 = Level 68
BAC64E2F D1147153 = Level 69
92CEFA5B 8F95C77D = Level 70
64AA1C21 0FBF4CC8 = Level 71
175BA46E 035419E1 = Level 72
CB688E20 CC46D8CF = Level 73
7602A075 72B4D087 = Level 74
8457FCFF 96956D3E = Level 75
7775D0C5 B930F262 = Level 76
B3CC9F71 DDB7ACAD = Level 77
0850AF9F 31D9D9A1 = Level 78
0BB7C094 5CDC5554 = Level 79
E5114176 8B9F8080 = Level 80
45D3BD95 F1377F94 = Level 81
8BAF13F3 34CF7392 = Level 82
5DA165FA 4525BB59 = Level 83
1ADA323F DED65B38 = Level 84
5F443F91 FE6F4146 = Level 85
E2C9E71B AA334D46 = Level 86
B345CB03 F2C1D3AD = Level 87
2A8ECD89 717B74BA = Level 88
2F01B8D7 4C7A2A4D = Level 89
C6D0207B 40494F80 = Level 90
C273D55A EDAA426E = Level 91
A9ACF54E 19FDC0F3 = Level 92
0D59D962 9B361B64 = Level 93
1F7214E8 96ECA8E0 = Level 94
A6A1B407 393CE546 = Level 95
A4B46892 A6FD7E0B = Level 96
5BCCF641 1F14428F = Level 97
9C45DC79 486E2DAE = Level 98
3F175042 05B8A08D = Level 99
68770050 678B8139 = Level 100

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

How to mega evolve a pokémon in pokémon x and y

The Pokémon Company announced the inclusion of a new type of evolution in Pokémon X and Pokémon Y called the Mega Evolution. This new transformation type will be available for certain Pokémon during battle. Announced Mega Evolved Pokémon include Mega Mewtwo and Mega Lucario. Some Pokémon that Mega Evolve may change their Ability or type while in battle.

The Mega Stone will allow Mega Evolution to take place and one exists for each Pokémon that can Mega Evolve. Each stone is named for its corresponding Pokémon and all are hidden throughout the Kalos region. One Mega Stone mentioned in today’s announcement was Lucarionite.

Blazikenite, one of the Mega Stones, will not be found during normal game play. Players of Pokémon X and Pokémon Y will have to participate in a limited-time Wi-Fi distribution event via the Nintendo Network to get a Torchic holding a Blazikenite Mega Stone. This Torchic will come with the Hidden Ability, Speed Boost. The character distribution begins on October 12, 2013 and will last for a short period of time. Torchic will need to be evolved into Combusken and then Blaziken in order to harness the Blazikenite Mega Stone.

Super Training (S.T.) is being introduced in Pokémon X and Pokémon Y. This will allow players to help their Pokémon grow stronger when not in battle. Pokémon will be able to participate in Super Training activities that increase base stats. One of the announced Super Training activities involves having your Pokémon train by facing large Pokémon-shaped Balloon Bots in a virtual space with both sides trying to shoot balls into the opponent’s goal.

Core training will also allow players to strengthen their Pokémon’s base stats. They’ll be able to set up training bags for their Pokémon to use. These training bags are earned by completing Super Training regimens. Players will be able to help their Pokémon increase their base stats by tapping on the touch screen. The Super Training screen will allow players to see how their Pokémon are doing at their Core Training.

New Pokémon Announced:

Dedenne is an Electric- and Fairy-type Pokémon. It can communicate with far-off allies by emitting radio waves from its antenna-shaped whiskers. Its tail can be plugged into outlets to drain electricity from them. Its ability, Cheek Pouch, will allow it to regain HP if it also eats a Berry. Nuzzle, an Electric-type move, allows Dedenne to paralyze opponents.

Bunnelby is a Normal-type Pokémon that creates its den by using large, shovel-shaped ears to dig in the ground. These ears can chop through thick tree trunks. Bunnelby can use the Ground-type move, Dig, to help avoid its ally’s attacks in Double Battles and then attack on the next turn.

Skiddo is a Grass-type Pokémon which evolves into Gogoat. Skiddo lives alongside humans and doesn’t mind carrying people or supplies on its back. It can read the feelings of its riders through their grip on its horns. Skiddo can learn the Grass-type move, Leaf Blade, which allows it to wield a sharp leaf like a sword.

New Gym Leaders Announced:

Korrina is the Gym Leader of Shalour City. Shalour City is as seaside town and the home to the Tower of Mastery. According to today’s announcement, Korrina may hold the key to Mega Evolution.

Pokémon X and Y will launch worldwide on October 12, 2013 to the Nintendo 3DS and retail for $39.99. For more information on Pokémon X and Pokémon Y, visit pokemon.com/xy, Like the official Pokémon Facebook page at Facebook.com/Pokemon, and follow Pokémon on Twitter @Pokemon.

Official Pokémon X and Y Art:

How to find a vet for your cat

In this Article

  • When Should I Find a Vet?
  • How Do I Find a Vet?
  • How Do I Know if a Vet Is Right for My Pet?
  • What Questions Should I Ask When Choosing a Vet?
  • What Should I Do if I Have a Problem With My Vet?

Choosing a veterinarian is one of the most important decisions you’ll make for your cat or dog. Your veterinarian will be an important partner for you in making sure your pet lives a long, healthy life. Think about the issues that are important to you, like the clinic’s hours and location. Knowing your preferences ahead of time will help you narrow down your choices.

When Should I Find a Vet?

The best time to find a vet is before you need one. Ideally, you’ll choose a vet before you bring home your pet, and some offices can even help you find the best pet for your family.В

If you’re moving, you should look for a vet as soon as possible. Don’t wait until your dog or cat needs a vet before you start looking for one. You don’t want to have to deal with the stress of having to find a vet if your pet is sick or injured.В

How Do I Find a Vet?

Word of mouth is often the best way to find a vet. Ask your friends and family for recommendations. Online reviews can be helpful, but suggestions from people you trust are even better. Different pets and families have different needs, though, so consider meeting with a few vets before making your choice.В

You can also check with your state’s veterinary medical association for a list of qualified veterinarians, or search the American Animal Hospital Association to locate accredited veterinary practices. If you’re moving, your current vet may be able to make recommendations.

If your dog or cat is purebred, you can check in with local breed clubs. The club members often know which vets have experience with your pet’s specific breed.В

How Do I Know if a Vet Is Right for My Pet?

Here are some things to consider when you’re choosing a vet:В

  • Arrange a visit to the vet without your pet so you can tour the office. This is a great time to notice if the office is clean and well-organized. You can talk to the staff and see if they seem friendly and helpful.В
  • Ask about the services they offer. If your pet needs an X-ray or other test, can they do it at the office, or will you have to go somewhere else?
  • Find out the office hours and how emergencies are covered. If it’s a practice with more than one vet, you may want to ask if you can see a specific vet.
  • Find out if their philosophy matches yours. Veterinarians are simply people whose personalities can vary. Some are warm while others are very businesslike. Look for a vet whose attitude feels like a match.

What Questions Should I Ask When Choosing a Vet?

Some of the questions you should ask will depend on your pet’s breed and age, as well as anything you know about their medical needs and history. Start with a few basics when you’re considering a new vet.

  • How many veterinarians are in your practice?
  • What are your hours?
  • Do you accept walk-ins?
  • How do you handle emergencies?
  • Do you accept insurance?
  • Do you offer dental care?
  • How much do you charge for an office visit?В
  • Can you do tests and procedures on-site?
  • Do you have a pharmacy?
  • What are your payment policies?

What Should I Do if I Have a Problem With My Vet?

If you aren’t happy with your vet’s care of your pet, you can try talking to them about it. Go into the conversation with an open mind, and be willing to listen to why the vet’s care differed from what you expected. It can be a difficult conversation to have, but your vet should also be open to listening to your concerns. Be prepared to share the reasons for your concerns. Your vet may be able to explain their procedures to you, or they may decide to shift their treatment approach. If you still disagree, you may need to schedule a second opinion or change vets.

If you feel like your vet is not a good match for you for any reason, request a copy of all of your pet’s records and find a new vet. You can ask the receptionist for copies, and you’re legally entitled to them. If your vet asks why you’re leaving, you can give an honest, constructive answer.В

Show Sources

American Kennel Club: “How to Find the Right Vet For Your Dog.”

American Veterinary Medical Association: “Finding a veterinarian.”В

Animal Humane Society: “Finding the right veterinarian.”

Bellweather Harbor: “Questions to Ask When Looking for a New Vet.”

PETMD: “Missed Diagnoses: What to Do When You Think Your Vet Is Missing Something.”

Spot Speaks: “Five Red Flag Indicators That It’s Time to Find a New Vet.”

American Animal Hospital Association: “AAHA-accredited hospital locator.”

It’s not just for shots; you’ll need a cat veterinarian for a number of reasons. Maybe you’re a new cat parent, your family just moved, or your cat is in need of medical care. Whatever the reason, it’s important to find a cat vet with whom you—and your feline friend—are comfortable seeing on a regular basis.

What’s the best way to go about finding a vet that’s right for you and your cat? Here are your options.

Friends and Reviews

Consider asking close friends who have cats about their choice. Another good way to find a vet, of course, is to explore reviews of local facilities online. But take reviews of a cat hospital with a grain of salt, according to Dr. Patty Khuly, as they often reflect subjective cases of financial coverage, rather than the care they provide.

What’s Important toYou

Once you have a list of potential vets to choose from, there are several factors to consider that can help you whittle it down. What’s most relevant to you? Price, location, hours, wait times, and bedside manner should all come to mind. Does the vet offer grooming and boarding? If your cat suffers from a disease or recurrent health problem, a vet that specializes in this issue might be the best route. Ultimately, consider the factors that are important to you specifically before deciding to meet with a certain practice.

While everyone has a different opinion on what is most important here are some common questions to ask yourself when researching a veterinarian for your cat:

  • Does the place have a good reputation? How long have they been in practice?
  • Are the facilities clean and updated?
  • Are their other patients in the office? This can be a good indicator that other cat parents trust this particular veterinarian.
  • Are they timely at responding to questions or at seeing your cat at your scheduled appointment time?
  • Is the staff friendly?

Follow Your Instincts

Look to a vet’s website to find answers to the issues most important to you. If you can’t find answers online, don’t hesitate to call the office and ask these questions before making an appointment. You can even ask to come in and meet the vet without your cat. Once you do, ask him or her questions and follow your instincts. Is this someone you feel like you can trust with your cat even if you’re not in the room?

Finding a Vet That Offers Unique Services

Cat care has come a long way. Many vets now offer holistic and alternative forms of treatment such as homeopathy, herbal medicine, acupuncture, and chiropractic care. If you are searching for alternative care for your pet, start with the database of vets who are members of the American Holistic Veterinary Medical Association (AHVMA), and all of whom specialize in small-animal care.

Emergency Care

What should you do if it’s the middle of the night and you’re in sudden need of a vet’s attention? When your cat is suddenly in distress and your regular vet isn’t available, it’s important to be prepared. Learn about the recommended 24-hour emergency services in your area, and keep this contact information handy in case of an emergency. Or, search online using terms like “emergency vet” to find an off-hours treatment center near you. Just like a human ER, keep in mind you’ll likely pay much more for emergency services at a cat hospital than you would at a regular veterinarian office.

Doing your research when finding the right cat veterinarian is worth the work. After all, this is the person who, next to yourself, matters most to the health of your family.

Contributor Bio

Kara Murphy

Kara Murphy is a freelance writer who lives in Erie, Pennsylviania with her cat Olive.

Choosing a Vet is an important decision when we take on a new cat or kitten. After all, they quickly become part of the family, and we always want to make sure our family members are well cared for!

If you’ve had cats before, you may have a trusted Vet that you have been using for a long time. But if you are a new cat or kitten owner, how do you go about choosing a Vet? What sort of things might you need to consider?

Table of contents

  • By nature, cats are independent
  • So, what sorts of things can we do to try and make sure our vet is the best fit for our cat?
  • Once you’ve found a practice you like, check out their cat credentials!
  • Here are some things to look out for that all Veterinary practices can do to help cats feel more relaxed about their Vet visit:
  • To summarise
  • You might also be interested in:

First, it’s important to look at some of the traits that cats have,that might have an impact on how well they cope with taking a trip to the Vets.

By nature, cats are independent

They like to be in control of their own environment. They are solitary hunters, and can often be quite territorial. Whilst this may make cats sound like they are tough and feisty, in reality, underneath all this, they are very sensitive creatures. They like routine and will often naturally keep themselves in a routine without human intervention!

When a cat is taken to the vets, it must relinquish control of its environment. It cannot escape from the basket. And it may not feel that the cat basket is part of its territory. It certainly knows that the funny sights and sounds of the vets are not its own territory! During transportation, the cat also comes across lots of unfamiliar smells and will experience a significant disruption to its routine. If you then consider that the cat may be feeling unwell (which is why they need to visit the vets) or may be in pain, you can see why a vet trip might be a tricky thing for a cat to get their head around!

So, what sorts of things can we do to try and make sure our vet is the best fit for our cat?

Thinking ahead is essential. Just before your kitten or cat arrives, or just shortly after, have a look around at what vets are within your area. It’s much easier to make a decision on choosing a vet when you have plenty of time. Definitely don’t leave this decision until the last minute, or until an emergency situation arrives!

Contacting some practices, chatting to them, and seeing if they will offer you a guided tour is also a great idea. Lots of practices are open to this. And will offer in-person or virtual tours of their premises. Although the current situation with the global pandemic has changed things slightly. Online reviews are also invaluable to check whether your local practices are providing the care that you’d want for your pet.

Once you’ve found a practice you like, check out their cat credentials!

The ISFM – International Society of Feline Medicine – is the Veterinary arm of the iCatCare organization. This is an organization that champions all things feline. It provides research and evidence-based information about all aspects of cats; from their behavior and their management, through to medical information. The ISFM have developed a scheme for veterinary practices and staff. Whereby they can work to achieve cat-friendly status and train their staff to become ISFM recognised practitioners. There’s often nothing at all wrong with practices that haven’t undergone this training and assessment by the ISFM. But the ones that have, would have done it to show that they are willing to go that extra mile for our feline friends.

Here are some things to look out for that all Veterinary practices can do to help cats feel more relaxed about their Vet visit:

  • Waiting Area – a little separate waiting area or room for cats can make all the difference! They will enjoy the quiet space and will appreciate being away from dogs. If there is no separate waiting area available, some vets might make use of cat-only consulting times instead. These are times of the day when no dogs are around.
  • Shelving! This might seem like a strange one, but small shelving units to stand cat boxes on can really make a big difference to cats. It removes them from the eyeline of other cats. And raises them off the floor to stop them feeling so vulnerable.
  • Blankets in the waiting room. This is another handy tip. Lots of practices will have small blankets or towels available for you to cover your cat basket with. Just another way of helping the cat feel more secure.
  • Cat-friendly pheromones. Don’t worry, these won’t make you grow whiskers or start Meowing! We can’t smell them and we’re not affected by them, but they really help cats. They come in the form of a plug-in, similar to an air-freshener in design, and gradually release cat-friendly calming pheromones into the air. These work best if combined with a plug-in in your home, a spray in the cat basket and a plug-in located in the waiting room at the vets (or in the kennel area). Look out for these, lots of vets use them!

To summarise

Hopefully, this has helped to give you an idea of what to look for when choosing a vet for your cat. And has given you an idea of what a vets visit is like from a cat’s point of view! Whatever vet you choose; whether they are a regular vet, ISFM accredited clinic or cat-only practice; as long as they are providing you with the best care for your cat and you are comfortable with entrusting your family pet to them, then that’s all that matters.
If you need some help finding a Vet near you, we’ve got a great resource for finding Vets. Which can be located here. Simply pop your location in and we will bring you up a list of practices nearby.

Even healthy cats need regular visits to the vet – here’s our guide on how to finding a vet to suit you.

You and your vet

Even healthy cats will require regular visits to a veterinary practice, so it’s important that finding a vet is one of the first things you do with a new cat. Take your cat for health checks at least once a year – early recognition of symptoms as well as treatment may prevent your cat from getting ill.

Choosing a vet

All vets working in the UK have to be registered with the Royal College of Veterinary Surgeons (RCVS). Choosing a vet might be daunting – often a recommendation from a friend or neighbour is a good place to start. Otherwise, you could phone around your local vets or even visit them before you make your choice.

You’ll want to make sure that the practice you choose has high standards of care, offers good facilities and has kind and knowledgeable staff.

Things to consider when choosing a vet

  • location – especially relevant in an emergency, you might want to make sure that your vet is near to you
  • facilities – some veterinary practices will allow you to take a look around on open days. You’ll notice equipment like X-ray machines and laboratory equipment, and you’ll want to make sure the operating theatre is clean and well-equipped
  • appointment system and routine opening hours. Are you able to get an appointment at short notice for urgent problems?
  • whether the practice is accredited to the RCVS Practice standards scheme (PSS). This is a voluntary initiative to accredit veterinary practices in the UK through setting standards and carrying out regular inspection

Visiting the vet

Once you’ve decided on the ideal vet, it is sensible to build a lasting relationship to ensure you can both do the best for your cat. When your cat has an appointment with the vet, take them in their designated cat carrier.

On initial consultation, your vet might ask a veterinary nurse to assist with handling the cat, especially if you are nervous about how your cat will react. They will examine your cat as well as asking you some questions about general health, eating, drinking and toileting habits. As always, if you have noticed anything unusual about your cat’s behaviour, you’ll need to let your vet know.

Finding the right vet for you and Your cat is important and the number of cat vets is growing.

One of the most important aspects of being a good pet parent is choosing the right vet for your cat. The best time to take care of that responsibility is BEFORE any sort of emergency makes a trip to the vet necessary.

Wherever you happen to live, whether it’s a big city or a small suburban town, there are certain to be many small and large veterinary practices from which you can choose the right vet for you and your kitty companion. One of the best starts toward making that choice is to get referrals from neighbors, friends, and family, ideally from people who are also cat owners, because cats – like every species – do have their own special medical and behavioral issues. You might even want to find a vet that specializes in cat care, a growing specialty field in veterinary medicine.

Armed with your recommendations, there is one important question that you’ll have to ask yourself before moving on to the next step toward finding the vet that is the best fit for you and your cat. How much time will it take you to get to the vet’s office from your home? You should consider what that commute might be like in a variety of situations. While a half hour drive might not seem inconvenient at first thought, consider how important those extra minutes might be in reaching your vet’s office in an emergency situation. Even if your visit isn’t an emergency, many kitties just don’t enjoy travelling. If that’s the case with your feline friend, then it might make sense for you to focus on finding a vet closer to home.

Once you’ve narrowed your list of prospective vets, your next step is to set up a “well cat” appointment. This visit is a way for you to check out the “chemistry” between you and the vet AND between the vet and your cat. Since most vets keep to a tight schedule, it might make sense to request 15 minutes or so additional time when you schedule your appointment, so that you can get to know the vet as well as allowing ample time for your kitty’s exam.

Arrive for your appointment armed with a list of questions, so that you make the most of the time you have in the examination room. However, your review of a prospective match should begin before you even get to meet the vet. Is the waiting room clean and well maintained? Will your pet feel safe while when you have to wait? After all, there are fewer more stressful situations for cats than being trapped in their cat carriers with unfamiliar, barking dogs nearby! There are even vets who have separate waiting areas for cats and dogs just to avoid such situations. Of course, if you do opt for one of the increasing number of vets who have a dedicated feline practice, that won’t be a consideration for you. Finally, are the people behind the reception desk friendly? They are likely to be your first point of access to your vet in the future, so you should feel comfortable with the level of attention and concern you receive from them.

Once you, your cat and the vet are in the examination room, it’s time to carefully note how the vet interacts with his prospective patient. Is his or her tone soothing? Do you sense that your cat has the vet’s undivided attention? Does the vet seem to respect you and your opinions about your cat’s care?

Many of the questions you can ask will help determine if a vet is the right fit. You might ask how many vets are on staff or on call, how emergencies are handled after regular office hours, what staffing is available if kitty has to stay overnight for observation, and what their attitude is toward alternative medications, therapies or supplements. Is the rest of the staff educated or licensed? Don’t be afraid to ask about payment plans for expensive tests or surgeries during your conversation, as well as to inquire about the types of pet insurance that the practice accepts.

It might take visits with two or more vets before you finally settle on the one that you know will be your best partner in the ongoing well-being of your cat.

How to find a vet for your cat

As a cat owner, I know first-hand how stressful a visit to the Lomsnes Veterinary Hospital can be for both cat and owner. It is one of the main reasons owners do not bring their cat to the veterinarian. Unfortunately, less than half of all cats return to see their vet after their initial kitten visits. Imagine if you never saw your doctor or dentist after childhood!

Without regular veterinary care, cats can suffer from pain and disease, unbeknownst to their owners. Cats are experts at concealing symptoms – they don’t let on that anything is bothering them until way past the time when we should be intervening. A variety of diseases, including dental disease, chronic kidney disease, infectious viral diseases, and arthritis, are undetectable to most owners in their early stages. Your veterinarian is often able to diagnose and treat these and other diseases early, resulting in a longer, happier, healthier life for your cat. This means more quality time spent with you!

We know regular veterinary visits are of benefit to our cats – but how do we get them to Lomsnes Veterinary Hospital? Some owners are fortunate to have cats that enjoy, or at least tolerate, a car ride and a visit to the vet. If your cat is anything like mine, then a trip to the veterinary hospital is most definitely a rodeo. However, this shouldn’t prevent our “grumpy” cats from getting proper health care too.

There are a number of steps that can be taken to make a trip to the vet less stressful for both cat and owner. They take a little foresight and preparation but are certainly worth the effort! Below are some tips for a stress-free vet visit.

  1. Starting from a young kitten, touch your cat’s ears and paws. Gently open its mouth and lift its tail. Teach them that these actions are not threatening. These are all things that your veterinarian will do during a routine physical examination. If your cat is already used to this, the physical examination will be a less frightening experience for them. In addition, this will ease nail trims, teeth brushing, and administration of medications by you.
  2. Days before the anticipated veterinary visit, place the travel carrier in the room where your cat spends most of its time. If your cat doesn’t seem to have a preference for a particular room, place the carrier in a warm, low traffic, and relatively quiet area of the house. Put a favourite blanket and toys inside the carrier. Throughout the day, place a small treat in the carrier to encourage your cat to go in all on its own. Reward any entry into the carrier with loving pets and a small treat.
  3. Pheromones can create a positive association for the cat with its carrier. These are compounds produced in glands near the cat’s whiskers and are used in marking behaviours. When a cat rubs its face on a person or object, it is communicating a sense of comfort and safety. We have been able to create compounds that mimic these hormones. They are available as Feliway (brand) sprays, diffusers, and wipes. Spray or wipe Feliway on the carrier once a day while the cat is adjusting to it, and on the day of the veterinary visit.
  4. When it comes to getting your cat in the carrier on the day of the visit, I find a smooth but quick approach works best. Ideally, at this point, your cat may go into the carrier on its own. If not, then you will have to put your cat into its carrier. Plan ahead – have the carrier set up and the door open, ready for your cat. Don’t allow your cat time to resist – once they start, they usually have the upper hand. Instead, quickly and calmly place your cat in its carrier and close the door.
  5. Always transport your cat in a carrier – never allow it to roam free in a vehicle. This is both unsafe for you as a driver, and stressful for your cat. Ideally, strap the carrier securely in the vehicle with a seat belt.
  6. At Lomsnes Veterinary Hospital, open the carrier door and allow the cat time to adjust to its new surroundings. It may come out and explore the room, or it may choose to stay in its carrier for the entire visit. This is usually not an issue, provided the top can be removed to allow examination by your vet.
  7. If a cat is likely to claw or bite, then it may be safely restrained with a blanket or by a registered veterinary technician if necessary. If restraint techniques are used, they are for the safety of the cat, the staff, and you.
  8. Once home, your cat may be “off” for a few hours to a few days. It may hide, or display aggression towards you or other animals in the household. In most cases, giving your cat its own room with food/water/litterbox and time to adjust are sufficient for your cat to calm down and feel at ease in its own home again. As always, it is recommended to keep calm and not discipline your cat when it is afraid.

Check out this video for helpful hints on how to get your cat in their carrier.

There are lots of reasons for us to see cats on a regular basis. Keeping up-to-date with vaccinations and deworming, preventing disease, and early disease detection and treatment are important to keep our pets and communities healthy. We recommend annual wellness examinations for cats under the age of 8. As cats age, they may require examinations every 6 months as well as annual senior bloodwork in order to detect diseases at their earliest stages.

If you have any questions about your cat’s health or wish to book an appointment, please don’t hesitate to call Lomsnes Veterinary Hospital at 403-342-6040. We are always happy to see our feline patients!

How to find a vet for your cat

How to find a vet for your cat

Feline Emergency? Call us right away at (760) 749-0099!

If you live in Valley Center or the surrounding area and need a trusted veterinarian to care for your cats – look no further. The mission of A Cat’s View Veterinary Hospital is to provide high quality and compassionate medical and surgical care in a healing environment. Designed from a cat’s point of view, our hospital aims to to be respectful of our feline patients’ perception of sight, sound, smell, touch, and chemical communication via pheromones to create a soothing and calm environment for your cat. We are passionate about community education on the specific and unique needs of cats. Your cats’ health and well being are very important to us, and we take every possible measure to give your cat the care they deserve.

A Cat’s View is a full-service cat hospital that offers care from kitten-hood to geriatric, and every stage in between. We offer preventative health plans, nutritional and behavioral consultations, surgical procedures, and cutting-edge dental care. We are experienced at treating serious conditions and offering regular cat wellness care.

We are happy to offer a number of resources that enable you to learn about how to take better care of your cats. Please feel free to browse our site, particularly the educational articles. The best veterinary care for felines is proper nutrition and problem prevention, so becoming knowledgeable about preventative cat care is essential to the success of your cat’s health! If you have any questions, call (760) 749-0099 or email us and we’ll promptly get back to you. Our hospital is very easy to get to — just check out the map below!

At A Cat’s View, we treat your cats like the valued family members they are.

How to find a vet for your cat


A Cat’s View Veterinary Hospital

(760) 749-0099

29115 Valley Center Rd Ste A&B
Valley Center, CA 92082

Congratulations—you’re now a cat parent! The bond between you and your pet can be among the most rewarding in life. And such gifts rarely come without responsibility.

While cats have a reputation for being independent and less needful than dogs, they do require much of the same care as their canine counterparts. Immunizations, spay/neuter procedures, dental care, proper diet, grooming, and regular checkups are all part of responsible cat care.

If this seems daunting, don’t panic. Your veterinarian is there to help you and your pet get through the experience with as few snags as possible. Still, the experience can be stressful, especially for your pet, so we’d like to offer a few tips on what to expect during your cat’s first visit to the vet, and what you can do to prepare for it.

Preparation For Your Cat’s First Vet Visit

Even the calmest cat can become stressed by a trip to the vet–carriers, car trips, loud noises, unfamiliar smells, can all boost a cat’s stress level. Fortunately, there are a few things you can do to make the experience less challenging for you, your cat, and the vet staff.

Assemble all your pet’s paperwork. Whether your cat was adopted or purchased, there will be paperwork. Your vet will need to review your animal’s health records, including vaccination history, to develop a comprehensive care plan.

Get your cat accustomed to being handled. One of the first things your vet will do is to perform a routine physical exam of your pet. That’s a fair amount of handling for any animal, and the more accustomed your pet is to being touched and picked up, the more likely it is to tolerate being handled by the vet and vet staff.

Acclimate your cat to the carrier. Being placed in a carrier can be stressful for your cat. To ease the transition, leave the carrier out and open in a place your cat can thoroughly examine it a few days before the visit. Cats are naturally curious, and your pet will likely want to sniff and check out this strange object. The more familiar your cat is with the carrier, the less stressed it will be being placed inside it. Outfitting the carrier with one of your pet’s favorite blankets can also help reduce anxiety.

Take a practice car ride. If your cat is jittery about car trips or has never ridden in a car, take a practice run with your cat safely in the carrier. Take few loops around the block then return home and let your pet out of the carrier. Acclimating your cat to travel can greatly reduce stress. And a calm cat is far easier for you and your vet to handle.

Editor’s Note: Try these pet stress relief tips to help calm your new cat during times of high anxiety.

Questions To Ask During Your Cat’s Vet Appointment

The initial vet visit is a time for sharing information. A vet will commonly ask you about your cat’s health history, vaccination records, and home environment (so have your pet’s paperwork with you). Your responses help the vet develop a complete picture of your pet’s health, so be complete and honest in your answers. Establishing a baseline normal for your cat or kitten also helps to highlight anything unusual or out of character (such as lethargy, irritability, or loss of appetite) that could be symptomatic of a health problem that may rise in the future.

The initial visit is also the time for you to ask your vet any questions you may have about cat care. Don’t be shy—there are no stupid questions. Your vet possesses a wealth of information and can recommend safe and effective products or warn you away from those that might be ineffective or harmful. The relationship you establish with your vet will help assure that your cat receives the best possible care.

Here are 10 questions to ask on your kitten’s first trip to the vet:

1. What does the wellness exam include?

2. What basic information can the vet share? (e.g. age, breed, congenital and heredity conditions, etc.)

3. What vaccinations are necessary, and what is the schedule for their administration?

4. What is the ideal age to spay/neuter your cat?

5. What types of preventative—flea, heartworm, etc.—should you use, how and when should you administer them?

6. How should you care for your cat’s dental health?

8. When and how should you begin litter box training?

9. What type of cat litter and how many litter boxes should you provide?

10. What is the best way to groom your cat?

What to Expect During The Office Visit

When you arrive at the vet, you’ll typically be asked to check in at the reception desk. Some vets provide separate waiting areas for cat and dog owners, which can help reduce stress for cats not accustomed to being around dogs. Keep your cat in its carrier until you reach the exam room.

During an initial visit, your vet will perform a basic physical exam of your animal—checking eyes, ears, mouth, joint flexibility, and weight. The vet will also palpate the cat’s belly and abdomen to check for any masses or soreness. Depending on your pet’s vaccination history (which can be easily stored in your Figo Pet Cloud), the vet may administer inoculations. Feel free to ask about the clinical importance of any of these procedures and vaccines.

Following the appointment, office staff will typically review each item of your bill with you—including exam costs, any vaccinations, x-rays, or other procedures. Discuss the advantages of cat insurance with your vet to manage the financial responsibilities of caring for your cat in the event of a serious illness or injury.

We hope these tips will help you and your pet have a stress-free vet visit!

Cecily Kellogg is a pet lover who definitely has crazy cat lady leanings. Her pets are all shelter rescues, including the dog, who is scared of the cats. She spent eight years working as a Veterinary Technician before becoming a writer. Today she writes all over the web, including here at Figo.

The content on the page may not display correctly using your current browser.

Alternative browsers include: Firefox | Chrome

Got Pets Mobile Vet

LOW STRESS + HIGH QUALITY VETERINARY CARE

Serving Northern New Jersey and surrounding areas
Call (201)312-0418 for an appointment!

  • Home
    • Hospital Policies
    • Privacy Policy
  • About Us
    • Our Doctor
    • Our Staff
    • Hours
  • Services
    • In-House Veterinary Services
    • Mobile Service Area Map
  • Pet Library
  • Informational Pages
    • Pet Food Recalls
    • Pet Health Screening
    • How To Videos
    • Poisonous Plants
    • Links
    • Surgical FAQ’s
  • Contact Us
    • Forms
      • Appointment Request
      • New Client
      • Rx Refill
      • Change of Address
      • Client Feedback
    • Emergencies

Processing .

Got Pets Mobile Vet

Got Pets Mobile Vet welcomes you to our website!

How to find a vet for your cat

Welcome to Got Pets Mobile Vet, where we strive to offer low stress/high quality veterinary care for your pet(s) in the comfort of your home. We provide comprehensive in-home health care services to companion animals in Northern Bergen County and the surrounding areas. We are able to accomplish many of the same services that are available in a hospital setting without the added stress of a carrier, car ride, or long wait. Our house call practice allows us to get acquainted with your pet in a familiar environment and to tailor our services to his/her particular needs. We will work with you to provide the best possible care for your pets at every stage of their life.

From routine preventive and wellness care for your cat, dog, or pocket pet, to early detection and treatment of a wide range of animal conditions, diseases, and surgical care, Got Pets Mobile Vet has the expertise and compassion to provide the veterinary care your pet needs. We look forward to getting to know you and becoming your pet’s advocate for a healthy lifestyle.

Please browse our website to learn more about the mobile veterinary services we provide. You can also find information in our pet library, view videos and pictures, and see details about upcoming events. Please How to find a vet for your cat call or email us today for all of your pet health care needs.

HOURS

Day Open Close
Monday 8:30am 6:00pm
Tuesday *8:30am 8:00pm
Wednesday 8:30am 6:00pm
Thursday *9:00am 6:00pm
Friday 8:30am 5:00pm

*Dr. Gess available for appointments at Bergen County Veterinary Center in Waldwick, NJ on Tuesday 12 pm – 8 pm and Thursday 9 am – 6 pm.

How to find a vet for your cat

HOURS

Day Open Close
Monday 8:30am 6:00pm
Tuesday *8:30am 8:00pm
Wednesday 8:30am 6:00pm
Thursday *9:00am 6:00pm
Friday 8:30am 5:00pm

*Dr. Gess available for appointments at Bergen County Veterinary Center in Waldwick, NJ on Tuesday 12 pm – 8 pm and Thursday 9 am – 6 pm.

If you have a cat or a dog , you’re probably going to make a trip to the vet at some stage. It might be a routine trip for your cat’s vaccinations, or perhaps your puppy has eaten something he shouldn’t have. Not all vet clinics offer the same services, so it’s important to find one that will suit you and your pet.

How to find a vet for your cat

What factors should you consider when choosing a vet?

While your goal might be to find a vet who is capable and compassionate, there are other aspects to consider. These include:

    • Location: Look for a practice that’s close to home. This can be handy when you need to make regular visits, when there’s an emergency, and for those times when your pet needs an extended stay.
    • Staff: Observe how the staff interact with each other and the animals in their care. Do they appear knowledgeable and caring? Are there enough vets to cope with a busy period? If your pet stays overnight, will it be supervised?
    • Facilities and equipment: Modern clinics should be well equipped to provide clinical, anesthetic and diagnostic care. Check whether operations can be performed on-site.
    • Areas of specialty: Most general vet clinics will treat cats and dogs.
    • Qualifications: Vet clinics should usually display the practitioners’ accreditation and qualifications. But if you want to know more, ask about the vet nurses’ certifications and if they run any ongoing training. If your pet needs specialist treatment, look for a vet who’s registered with the Australasian Veterinary Boards Council, as its membership requires longer study and expertise in a specific area.
    • Fees: There are no standard fees for veterinary services or medications, so enquire prior to treatment about costs for routine check-ups or specific treatments that you are advised that your pet will need. Ask for a full quote before going ahead with treatment. However, consider your choice on more than price alone – a clinic might be more expensive because it provides access to better equipment, more staff and a wider range of services.
    • Personal recommendations: Don’t underestimate the value of talking to your friends, family and other pet owners about their experiences with vets. Trainers, pet sitters and groomers might also have recommendations.

If your preferred vet clinic is not open after hours, ask what they can offer in case of an emergency. Some suburban clinics work together to offer after-hours care on rotation, or there might be a nearby emergency vet hospital operating 24/7.

Before making your choice, shop around. Call clinics in your neighbourhood, ask the questions you want answered. If and the staff are friendly, it’s likely your pet will be cared for.

Most importantly, make sure your pet is happy with the vet you choose, so you can all enjoy calm, stress-free visits.

Pet insurance can help to cover your vet bills. Review pet insurance policies on iSelect today.

*iSelect’s partnered with Choosi Pty Ltd (ABN 15 147 630 886) to help you compare pet insurance policies. iSelect earns a commission from Choosi for every policy sold through the website or contact centre. iSelect and Choosi do not compare all providers or policies in the market.

Any advice provided by iSelect on this website is of a general nature and does not take into account your objectives, financial situation or needs. You need to consider the appropriateness of any information or general advice we give you, having regard to your personal situation, before acting on our advice or purchasing any policy. You should consider iSelect’s Financial Services Guide which provides information about our services and your rights as a client of iSelect. iSelect receives commission for each policy sold by Choosi.

Relaxing at the Vet

Keep Your Cat Calm at the Vet

Few things strike fear in the hearts of cat parents like a trip to the vet — and the result, too often, is that our cats get inadequate healthcare. In fact, cat advocacy group the Catalyst Council estimates that cats go to the vet less than half as often as dogs.

These tips will be easy with a kitten. With an adult cat, you follow all the same procedures, but you must go much slower:

  1. As early as possible in your cat’s life, get him used to different people and environments.
  2. Use a cat harness and leash to go out into the world, and give your cat treats and playtime in each new environment.
  3. Take practice trips to the vet once or twice a week — your cat won’t be examined, but you’ll give him treats and let him get used to the place. (See more about keeping your cat calm in the car here.)
  4. Make the cat carrier a positive place — leave it open all the time, filled with comfy bedding. Feed your cat in it and stick treats inside it often. (See more about keeping your cat calm in his carrier here.)
  5. Get your cat used to being handled the way the vet will handle her. While you’re at home and for just a few seconds to start, get your cat used to being scruffed, having her hindquarters handled, and lying on her back, so those won’t feel scary during a vet visit.
  6. Vets are people, too, and some can have varying levels of ease with cats. (After all, not everyone is a “dog” or “cat” person!) Make sure you go to a vet that spends some time talking with and getting to know your cat before jumping to the exam. You might even consider trying a cat-only clinic if you have one nearby.
  7. If you’re bringing your cat to the clinic, ask the clinic when the least busy times are and schedule accordingly. The less you have to wait, the better.
  8. Think about bringing a towel or yoga mat to put on the exam room table. Vets like stainless steel because it is very easy to clean, but it’s also cold and slippery. Giving the cat something to grip may make a big difference.
  9. Janet Tobiassen Crosby, DVM, who writes About.com’s Veterinary Medicine column, suggests packing a goody bag with items such as treats, catnip, and your cat’s favorite toys. If your cat’s a hider, bring a towel that smells like home so she can have her head underneath it.
  10. Many vets recommend practicing touching your cat at home the way your vet might during a basic exam. “When your cat is at home, relaxed and happy, look in his ears; open his mouth — gently and only if you are sure of how to do it, and handle his paws — even introducing a clipper and tapping on a claw — to help make these health-exam basics less scary over time,” says Dr. Crosby.

Get the Most Out of Your Cat’s Vet Visit

Come Prepared
If you recently moved, bring a copy of your cat’s medical records with you. Write down any medications your cat may be taking and the dosage. When making an appointment, ask if you should bring a sample of your cat’s stool or urine.

Make a List
Write down all the things that concern you about your cat: hair coat, diet, exercise program, toilet habits, etc. This will help you communicate better.

Write it Down
Don’t be afraid to write down the information your veterinarian provides to you. Ask if there is a handout or a brochure containing more details.

Don’t Be Embarrassed
Your cat’s veterinarian is the other family doctor. There’s no need to feel awkward about asking anything or mentioning something that you’ve noticed. Your veterinarian wants to help keep your cat healthy and happy. Without your observations, important information may be missed.

Ask About Emergency Coverage
Find out the process for after-hours emergencies. If the veterinary hospital refers its patients to an emergency facility, be sure you know the address, phone number, and hours.

Types of Visits and Common Questions

New Kitten Visits
Owners of new kittens have many questions about litter training, diet, obedience, behavior, spay/neuter, and vaccination schedules. Your veterinarian is very experienced and comfortable with these questions.

Sick Visits
Write down the history of your cat’s illness. Did your cat stop eating? Is he vomiting? How often? What is he vomiting? Could he have eaten something he shouldn’t have? What might it have been? Was your cat in a fight with another animal? Has he recently been in a kennel? Did you change your cat’s diet recently? Veterinarians have to be detectives when it comes to diagnosing some diseases and the history you provide is very valuable and may help your veterinarian save your cat’s life.

Wellness Visits
Healthy adult cats still require a health exam. Ask which vaccinations are appropriate for your cat and inquire about seasonal concerns such as fleas and ticks. This is also a great time to discuss upcoming events that might affect your pet such as vacations and visitors.

Checkups for Senior Cats
If your cat is getting older, ask about your cat’s tolerance for exercise, how to recognize senile behavior, what to do about arthritis and other aches and pains, and if a blood panel is necessary to evaluate your cat’s blood and organ health.

Thundershirt: The Secret Trick to Try before Your Cat’s Next Vet Visit

Thundershirt, which is a partner of Petfinder, makes a shirt designed for dogs and now cats to help them relax and overcome anxiety and fear. The Thundershirt applies a small amount of pressure to the torso, which is believed to have a calming effect on the nervous system. It is essentially used the same way a parent uses swaddling to calm a newborn baby.

Try a Thundershirt to Improve Vet Visits

For some cats, a Thundershirt may make getting into the carrier easier and reduce the hissing, screaming, growling, and biting that accompany vet visits. A testimonial on Thundershirt’s website from Soren W., a Durham, NC-based veterinarian, says, “Thundershirt is helpful in terms of making the trip to the vet hospital and while at the clinic. We have seen that positive effect here with cats that we put Thundershirt on. They relax almost immediately from the stress associated with a vet visit. I even use the Thundershirt at home to help calm my cat while trimming his nails.” (Get five more vet-recommended tips for keeping your cat calm at the vet.)

Last year, our own staff writer Joan wrote about her experience with Thundershirt for dogs and how it helped her dog with his fear of thunderstorms. Have you used a Thundershirt during your pet’s vet exam? Tell us about your experience!

Updated 12 September 2020 By Pawesome Cats 6 Comments

  • Share
  • Tweet
  • Pin
  • Email

How to find a vet for your catWhen it comes to choosing a vet for your cat, you should put as much energy into finding the right vet as you would when choosing a doctor for yourself.

Having a vet that you can rely on and trust is essential, because even if your cat remains healthy; there are still regular routine checks that are necessary as part of your cat’s preventative healthcare plan.

Your vet should be fully trained and qualified in veterinary medicine, but just as importantly they need a good bedside manner. Many cats get extremely stressed at vet visits, so a vet who can put your cat at ease is important.

Additionally, your vet should be a people person – during your cat’s lifetime you may have to deal with serious health issues and your vet should be someone who’s able to listen, understand and advise you of your options.

If you’re new to an area or have only recently welcomed a furry four legged friend into your family, ask neighbours and friends who they take their pets to. Nothing is better than word of mouth recommendations or advice on which local veterinary clinics to avoid.

10 Questions to Ask When Choosing a Vet

1. What days and hours of operation does the veterinary clinic have?

You need a vet that is easy to get to (only a short drive away with ample parking), and that has extended opening hours including late nights and weekends, so it is easy to get your cat to the vet for routine appointments.

2. Do they offer appointments at short notice?

They should certainly offer emergency appointments, but you also want to know how far in advance you’d have to book more routine appointments such as annual check-ups and vaccinations.

3. What veterinary services do they offer?

Do they only provide basic veterinary care, or do they have the facilities for other services such as dental care, surgeries, testing, x-rays and blood tests? It’s also worth checking how modern and up-to-date their equipment and facilities are and the overall cleanliness of the premises.

How to find a vet for your cat

Image: Lindsey Turner via Flickr

4. Is there a separate waiting area for cats?

Many cats get stressed going to the vet, and having to wait patiently next to a barking dog will only add to their anxiety.

5. Do they offer house calls for follow up visits or routine vaccinations?

House calls are much less stressful for your cat, and may be convenient if you don’t have access to a car or are house-bound for another reason.

6. What out of hours/emergency care do they offer?

Some vets have their own staff on call 24 hours a day, which gives you great continuity of care, but you might have to contact another emergency vet out of hours.

” data-medium-file=”https://i0.wp.com/pawesomecats.com/wp-content/uploads/2014/06/choosing-a-vet.jpg?fit=300%2C214&ssl=1″ data-large-file=”https://i0.wp.com/pawesomecats.com/wp-content/uploads/2014/06/choosing-a-vet.jpg?fit=740%2C529&ssl=1″ loading=”lazy” src=”https://i0.wp.com/pawesomecats.com/wp-content/uploads/2014/06/choosing-a-vet.jpg?resize=740%2C529″ alt=”Veterinary training and qualifications are important, but when you’re choosing a vet for your cat, there are also other questions you should ask | Choosing a Vet for Your Cat – 10 Questions You Should Ask” width=”740″ height=”529″ srcset=”https://i0.wp.com/pawesomecats.com/wp-content/uploads/2014/06/choosing-a-vet.jpg?w=740&ssl=1 740w, https://i0.wp.com/pawesomecats.com/wp-content/uploads/2014/06/choosing-a-vet.jpg?resize=300%2C214&ssl=1 300w” sizes=”(max-width: 740px) 100vw, 740px” data-recalc-dims=”1″ />

Image: Paul L Dineen via Flickr

7. Do they have overnight staff?

If your cat is kept in overnight following a surgical procedure, you’ll want to know that there are trained staff there at all times during your pet’s recovery.

8. What’s their view on alternative medicines and therapies?

It’s important when choosing a vet that you find the right match for you with regard to this. If you believe in using complementary therapies alongside traditional medicine, it’s good to have a vet who has knowledge in this area or is at least supportive of your views.

9. How much will it cost?

Treatment costs can vary considerably at different veterinary clinics, so it’s important to be aware of these things up front. How much are standard appointments for routine check-ups and annual vaccinations? It’s also worth finding out what payment methods they accept and whether they offer instalment payment plans for more expensive treatments, such as surgery. If you have pet insurance, will they bill the pet insurance company direct, or will you be required to pay the cost of treatment first and then claim it back?

10. Will they allow you to inspect the vet clinic facilities and meet the staff?

When choosing a vet, we recommend making an appointment to visit the veterinary clinic and meet the people who work there first. After all, if you don’t feel comfortable with the vet and the clinic, you’re not going to take your cat there.

What do you look for when choosing a vet for your cat?

There are so many vet practices to choose from it’s difficult to know which one to pick. But it’s worth doing a bit of homework to make sure that both you and your pet are happy with your choice.

How to choose the right vet practice for you and your pet

Find a registered vet

It’s illegal for anyone who isn’t registered to practice as a vet. The body responsible for this is the Royal College of Veterinary Surgeons (RCVS). Qualified vets will have the initials MRCVS or FRCVS after their name. You can check if your vet is registered on the RCVS website.

The RCVS also has a voluntary Practice Standards Scheme which accredits vet practices according to the services and specialties they offer. They are rigorously inspected every four years and may also have spot checks in between. You can tell whether a practice is accredited because it will display the RCVS Accredited Practice logo. You can find your nearest vet practice on the RCVS website.

Personal recommendation

Recommendations can be a really useful way of finding a vet. Find out what other pet owners in your area think about their vet – but consider whether they have the same type of animal as you because different pets have different requirements.

Distance

It’s a good idea to choose a practice close to your home. Not only is it convenient, if there’s an emergency it’s good to know that you can get your pet to the vet as soon as possible because quick treatment could save their life. Think about where the practice is located, if it’s near any public transport links or, if you drive, does it have a car park or is there public parking nearby?

Opening hours

All vets have to make arrangements for their clients’ pets to receive emergency treatment outside normal hours – although it may not actually be at their own practice if they don’t have the facilities so it’s worth asking about this. You and your pet may be sent somewhere further afield. If you work long hours you might want to check if the practice is open on weekday evenings or at the weekend.

If your pet needs an overnight stay at the practice, ask whether there’ll be a member of staff on site monitoring them continuously.

Bedside manner

All animal lovers want to know that their pet is in good hands. Do all the staff treat your pet sympathetically and seem genuinely interested? They may need to restrain or muzzle your pet for treatment but there’s no excuse for rough handling. Also think about whether you’re being well informed about what’s going on and, if you have to give your pet any treatment, if you’re given clear information on how to do this.

Price

The prices that veterinary practices charge can vary depending on their location, the facilities they offer and their overheads. Staff should be able to give you typical costs for routine treatments and don’t forget to ask exactly what’s included when you’re given a quote. If your pet is having surgery, find out whether there will be further charges for post-op check-ups. It’s definitely worth getting pet insurance – you’ll be breathing a sigh of relief when you’re faced with a bumper vet bill.

Some charities, like The Blue Cross, provide veterinary treatment to people on benefits for a donation or at a reduced fee. Contact your nearest charity for advice.

Specialist vets

Most vets carry out a variety of medical and surgical procedures but there may be times when it’s better for a specialised vet to take over – for example if your pet needs an MRI scan or has a complex fracture. If your practice doesn’t have a specialist then they may refer your pet to another vet.

Also think about what range of pets the practice usually treats. If you’ve got an unusual or exotic pet, it’s worth finding a vet who has experience with that species. If you’re not sure your local practice should be able to point you in the right direction or you can search for a practice by species on the RCVS website.

Extra services

Some vets provide extra services, like puppy training and obedience classes, which can be really helpful. Many offer advice and factsheets to help you care for your pet. If you’re interested in what other services your local practice provides, give them a ring or see if they’ve got a website.

Where can I find a cat vet near me?

Can’t find a cat vet near you? Unsure if a visit to your local cat clinic or cat hospital is necessary? With FirstVet, you’ll get instant access to expert advice and treatment recommendations from our licensed veterinarians online. Our skilled vets are here to help answer your questions 24/7, no matter where you are – day or night.

If your cat needs additional care, our vets will refer to a cat clinic or ct hospital near you. FirstVet is completely independent and has a nationwide catalog of veterinary clinics, so you can always meet the right veterinarian as soon as possible.

How to find a vet for your cat

Are you concerned about your cat?

Book a video consultation with an experienced veterinarian within minutes

✓ Low-cost video vet consultations
✓ Over 700,000 satisfied pet owners
✓ Experienced, licensed vets, 24 hours a day

Treatment without going to a cat hospital near you

We provide advice and simple suggestions for things that you can do at home to help your cat. Our vets can help you decide whether an issue is an emergency, or when to visit a cat clinic. If your cat needs to visit a vet for an examination or treatment, then you will be directed to your registered vet. If you do not have a registered cat clinic near you, our vets will help you to find your nearest open cat vet near you.

FirstVet is completely independent and has a nationwide catalog of veterinary clinics, so you can always meet the right veterinarian as soon as possible.

Our vets have years of experience treating a variety of conditions. We’re here to help you manage your cat’s:

Coughing and Sneezing

Injuries and Other Accidents

Accidental Poisoning or Toxin Ingestion

Fleas, Ticks and, Other Parasites

Rehabilitation and Post-Op Care

How it works

1. Download the FirstVet App

Create an account using your email address and cell phone number. Next, you’ll be asked to create a profile for each of your pets.

2. Start a chat with us

Select a case type and start describing your pet’s symptoms and any questions or concerns you may have.

3. Your FirstVet video call

If our vets need to take a closer look, we’ll switch to a video consultation

4. Get the record sent to your email

After your chat, you’ll get an email with details for your pet’s medical record.

You’re just a click away from unlimited video veterinary advice for your cat. Pay per consultation ($35), or get unlimited vet visits for just $90.

6-month Subscription

Unlimited access for just $65

Open 24 hours a day, 365 days a year

Prescriptions (in select states)

Annual Subscription

Unlimited vet visits for just $90

Open 24 hours a day, 365 days a year

Prescriptions (in select states)

Single Consultation

$35 per consultation

Open 24 hours a day, 365 days a year

No registration fee

Meet some of our cat vets

Our licensed veterinarians are here to provide you with peace of mind and education about the health of your cat. On average, our veterinarians have over 10 years of clinical experience before working with FirstVet pet parents.

How to find a vet for your cat

Dr. Jessica Lowe

Dr. Jessica Lowe graduated from the University of the West Indies, St. Augustine, Trinidad and Tobago School of Veterinary Medicine. Prior to that, Dr. Lowe attended the University of Maryland, College Park where she earned her first degree. She has a diverse background, working in small animal medicine, emergency veterinary medicine, exotic medicine, lab animal medicine and public health veterinary medicine, for over 10 years. Dr. Lowe has a special interest in feline medicine and internal medicine. She has 2 cats at home and enjoys outdoor biking and traveling. Dr. Lowe joined FirsVet in 2021.

How to find a vet for your cat

Dr. Allison Schwartz

Dr. Allison Schwartz graduated from the University of Pennsylvania School of Veterinary Medicine in 2011. She completed a Small Animal Medicine and Surgery rotating Internship at Garden State Veterinary Specialists in NJ. Since completing her internship, Dr. Schwartz has enjoyed being a small animal general practitioner, with a special interest in dentistry, pediatrics, and surgery. In her free time, Dr. Schwartz enjoys baking, cooking, reading, and of course spending time with her husband and young son. Dr. Schwartz joined FirstVet in 2021.

How to find a vet for your cat

Dr. Diane Givler

Dr. Diane Givler received her veterinary degree from Ross University in 2008 and spent her clinical year at LSU (Geaux Tigers!). She is originally from Pennsylvania, and has practiced small animal medicine in Rochester, NY, Columbia, SC, and Southport, NC. Dr. Givler has worked in small private-owned hospitals, large corporate hospitals, and on a non-profit surgically-equipped spay/neuter RV. Most recently she has been self-employed as a relief veterinarian and is currently living on a 58 foot sailboat with her husband, two dogs, and one cat. Dr. Givler joined FirstVet in 2020.

How to find a vet for your cat

Dr. Eve Cohen

Dr. Eve Cohen received her veterinary degree from St. Matthew’s University in Grand Cayman in 2014 and spent her clinical year at the University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign. She then completed a Small Animal Medicine and Surgery rotating internship at BluePearl Veterinary Partners in New York City. Dr. Cohen has been a small animal general practitioner in NYC, Long Island, and Bluffton, SC. Her special interests include anesthesia and pain management, geriatric care, and wildlife rescue and rehabilitation. Dr. Cohen is a classically trained violinist and violist and also holds a Bachelor of Arts Degree in Creative Writing from Skidmore College. She lives in Bluffton, SC with her fiance, 3 rescued cats and a toy poodle – all named after musical references. Dr. Cohen joined FirstVet in 2020.

Finding the right veterinarian, knowing when to take your cat to the vet, and how to get them there with minimal stress can help keep your pet in good health.

How to find a vet for your cat

When to take your cat to the vet

So, how often do cats need to go to the vet? One of the best ways to ensure your cat stays healthy is with an annual check-up. Yearly exams can help avoid medical emergencies and set a baseline for body and muscle condition.

Between checkups, it’s important to be aware of your cat’s health and stay vigilant for any signs of illness. It’s a cause for concern when your adult cat hasn’t eaten in more than 24 hours, or if kittens younger than 6 weeks old have not eaten in 12 hours. Make an appointment with your veterinarian immediately if this occurs.

How to find a vet for your cat

Find a Cat Friendly Practice ®

Some veterinary clinics have found ways to make their practices more “cat friendly”. This may include separate feline exam rooms, waiting areas, and entrances. Some areas of the country even have cat-only practices.

Because veterinarians and their staff realize the importance of cat veterinary visits, some have worked to make sure they are doing everything they can to make it easier for you and your feline friend. Established by the American Association of Feline Practitioners (AAFP) and the International Society for Feline Medicine (ISFM), the Cat Friendly Practice ® program is a global initiative designed to elevate care for cats by reducing the stress for the cat, caregiver, and the veterinary team.

You can expect a Cat Friendly Practice ® to:

  • Understand the unique needs and behaviors of cats
  • Have a feline-friendly environment and make veterinary visits more cat friendly
  • Understand how to approach and handle cats in a gentle, empathetic, and caring manner
  • Have the appropriate equipment and facilities needed to diagnose and treat feline patients
  • Meet specific standards for the facility and care of hospitalized cats

Cat Friendly Practice ® is a registered trademark of the American Association of Feline Practitioners.

How to find a vet for your cat

Tips for an easier trip

Now that you know when to take your cat to the vet and how to choose the right doctor, there are several ways you can help your cat have a successful, less stressful trip.

  • Stay calm. Cats can sense our anxiety or frustrations, which may cause them to become fearful or anxious.
  • Give rewards to encourage positive behavior. For example, if your cat is sitting calmly in or near a carrier, give a treat.
  • Make the carrier a familiar place at home by leaving it in a room where your cat spends a lot of time.
  • Place familiar soft bedding inside the carrier.
  • Do not chase the cat to get it into the carrier.

Click here for more tips on getting your cat to the veterinarian.

Before your appointment, observe your cat’s behavior. Download and complete this document to help provide important information to your veterinarian about your cat’s eating patterns and behavior.

Picky or Sick?

If your cat’s not eating, it could be a sign of a serious health issue. Take this 5-question quiz to help determine when it’s time to take your cat to the veterinarian.

Disclaimer: This information is not intended to replace discussions with an animal medical professional. Discuss behaviorial and medical concerns with your veterinarian.
Content references can be made available upon inquiry. This site is intended for US residents only.

Medically Reviewed by Jenna Stregowski, RVT Updated May 03, 2022

As a loving pet parent, you probably know that one of the most important things you can do for your cat is to get regular veterinary care. But what does “regular” mean? How often should you take your cat to the vet?

The American Animal Hospital Association recommends that all pets see a veterinarian at least annually, perhaps more if the dog or cat has specific health needs.

Randy Wheeler, DVM, a longtime veterinarian and executive director of the Iowa Veterinary Medical Association, says there isn’t a hard-and-fast rule for how often your cat should see the vet because it depends on too many factors: age, lifestyle, and where the pet lives.

The bottom line, Wheeler says: Form a good working relationship with your veterinarian because they will best advise you on how often your specific pet needs checkups. This kind of cooperative relationship will pay off in the long run if your cat does run into more serious health conditions.

With those factors in mind, here are some general guidelines for when to take your cat to the vet:

Kitten Vet Visits

New cat owners are usually bound by an agreement with a shelter or breeder to take their kitten to see a vet soon after adoption. This kicks off your relationship with your chosen veterinarian and provides an opportunity for the vet to start observing and tracking your kitten’s health from very early in his life.

Vaccines will begin when your kitten is 6–8 weeks old, depending on their lifestyle, family history, and common diseases where you live, Wheeler says. This first round will include shots for rhinotracheitis, calicivirus, and panleukopenia.

About three or four weeks later, your kitten will get the second round of those vaccines, recurring every three or four more weeks until the kitten is roughly 4 months old.

Around the three-month mark is when the rabies vaccines start, Wheeler says, with boosters at the one-year mark and then every three years (or whatever the manufacturer recommends).

Deworming treatments are typically given at some of these visits since most kittens get intestinal worms from their mothers.

Those initial trips to the vet will also include physical exams and a discussion about flea and tick prevention, Wheeler says. This is also a good time for you to ask for your vet’s advice about any nutrition, behavior, or training questions you might have.

Soon after, around the six-month mark, your kitten will be ready to be spayed or neutered.

Adult Cat Vet Visits

Once a year check-ups are recommended for adult cats until age 6–8 years old, though cats at any age with health concerns (especially chronic conditions) may need to see the vet more often for monitoring.

Vaccine boosters will continue as your pet eases out of the kitten stage (1 year old and onward, Wheeler says).

Your vet will inquire about your cat’s lifestyle, especially whether he’s an indoor-only cat or a cat that sometimes ventures into the outdoors. Outdoor or indoor-outdoor cats face more risks outside: parasites, predators, and maybe even becoming separated from your best friend Otis and having a heckofa time finding the way back to the farm.

Another risk that increases for cats who venture outdoors: Diseases like feline leukemia and feline infectious peritonitis (FIP), which spread from cat to cat (although they don’t affect humans or other pets). The feline leukemia vaccine will also be offered to your cat as a kitten and recur throughout your cat’s life. Although there is a vaccine for FIP, it’s generally not recommended by vets.

Recurring visits will also give your vet a chance to inspect your cat’s teeth, along with giving general physical exams and advice about preventative care. “[I] can’t say enough about dental care,” Wheeler says. Teeth cleanings will help prevent bad breath, and you’ll want to make sure your pet’s teeth and gums are healthy so your cat doesn’t have trouble eating or isn’t in any pain.

Vaccines, like the one for rabies, will continue, too. Your vet is likely to recommend them for every one to three years, Wheeler says.

Senior Cat Vet Visits

You’ll likely start going to the vet multiple times per year when your cat is 8–10 years old, Wheeler says. Most vets start advising visits every six months once cats approach their senior years.

While you’ll want to report any behavior changes to your vet no matter your cat’s age, that discussion becomes more important when your cat reaches his elder years. If a cat is drinking more water than he usually does, for example, it could indicate bigger concerns such as kidney problems or diabetes, Wheeler says.

Hopefully, visiting the vet frequently throughout your cat’s life will make these visits as stress-free as possible. It’s also why having a trusted vet you’re comfortable with can pay dividends, Wheeler says. They’ll know your cat and can tell if something is amiss.

That’s the shortfall of vaccine-only clinics or low-cost spay and neuter clinics: They might not spot other health issues your cat is enduring. A regular relationship with your vet is the best way to assure thorough health screenings and long-term health tracking for your cat.

Is Your Cat Due for a Vet Visit?

If your cat hasn’t been to the vet in the last year, it’s probably time to make an appointment. To make these appointments easier to remember, try writing them down in a planner or making a reminder on your phone or email calendar. Your vet’s office might even offer appointment reminders via email, text, or phone call if you opt in for them.

If your cat has severe anxiety before vet visits and tends to run away or hide when it’s time to get them in the car, take a look at these tips for getting your cat into a carrier as well as ways to ease your cat’s anxiety in general to make vet visits a less stressful experience for everyone involved. Some cat parents even use vets who offer mobile services so their cats can been seen in the comfort of home.

If you need to find a new veterinarian for your cat, you can search through the Cat Friendly Homes’ Cat Friendly Practice or Cat Friendly Certified clinic throughout the country here.

By focusing on cats, we are able to provide the best possible care in the area with precision, love, and genuine care. Check out all our services today!

Serving Buffalo, Amherst, & Williamsville, NY

By focusing on cats, we are able to provide the best possible care in the area with precision, love, and genuine care. Check out all our services today!

Serving Buffalo, Amherst, & Williamsville, NY

By focusing on cats, we are able to provide the best possible care in the area with precision, love, and genuine care. Check out all our services today!

Serving Buffalo, Amherst, & Williamsville, NY

By focusing on cats, we are able to provide the best possible care in the area with precision, love, and genuine care. Check out all our services today!

Welcome to Summer Street Cat Clinic

Serving the communities of Buffalo, Amherst & Williamsville, NY since 1981

Summer Street Cat Clinic has two convenient locations to better serve you. Come see us in Buffalo, NY, or Getzville, NY!

Search for a Location Nearest You:

COVID-19 Policy

For more details on COVID-19 and how it can affect your cat, please check out this resource from Cornell Feline Health Center: Click Here!For current Summer Street Cat Clinic policies during the COVID-19 pandemic, visit the link below:

Serving Buffalo, Amherst & Williamsville, NY

As the proud owner of a cat, you know they have unique needs. Summer Street Cat Clinic offers comprehensive veterinary care for your feline friend with a staff that loves working with cats. We strive to offer an environment without the stresses of the many sounds and smells of a general veterinary office.

When you come to one of our two cat-friendly facilities, in Buffalo, or Getzville, NY, our veterinarians, and technicians will work with you to provide the best healthcare for your cat. Whether it is for an annual exam, preventive care, illness, or minor grooming, we can help!

As soon as you walk through our doors, you will see that our veterinarians, licensed veterinary technicians, and receptionists all love what they do. We have been doing it for over 35 years! Give us a call or stop in today.

Many assume that cats communicate via meow, purring, or
hissing. But it’s so much more. Learn the signs by hovering over different parts of the cat.

1. Hot ears

In most cases, hot ears are normal in cats, but if extremely hot, it could be a sign that your cat may be running a fever.

2. Sweaty Paws

Sweaty paws usually occur when body temperature rises, but it can also happen as a bodily reaction to stress or high anxiety.

3. Urinary

Frequent trips to the litter box or urinating outside of the litter box could be a sign of lower urinary tract disease and may be time to see a vet.

4. Tail

A swaying slowly or twitching tail could indicate that your cat is focused. Let your curious cat follow their hunting instincts.

Curious to learn more?

Subscribe to our YouTube channel to get exclusive content and more!

PLEDGE TO TAKE YOUR CAT TO THE VET

By taking the Royal Canin pledge to Stay Curious, you are committing to taking the first step in learning more about your cat and their health.

I PLEDGE THAT.

Though my cat is known for hiding their health issues, I pledge to uncover their pain by learning the signs and taking them to the vet. I will also follow the vet’s advice and continue to do yearly checkups so my cat gets the certified help they need regularly.

Continue to Stay Curious

Sign up for email and receive nutritional guidance, pet care tips, and a welcome offer!

Did you know that 50% of cat owners do not take their cat to the vet?

Cats naturally mask their illnesses, but despite appearances, cats need to see their vet as frequently as dogs. That’s why Royal Canin is partnering with our industry experts and veterinary clinics to drive awareness of Take Your Cat to the Vet, and the importance of preventive veterinary care.

Let’s work together and raise awareness for #Cat2Vet and together help make a better world for cats.

Have you seen the signs?

As the saying goes ‘prevention is better than a cure’and cats are experts at hiding illness. It’s important to take your cat to the vet regularly so that your cat’s health is maintained more easily. Sometimes, subtle changes to your cat’s behaviour are a sign they need to go to the vet. Here are 8 signs that it may be time to see a veterinarian:

  1. – Your cat’s appetite has changed (increased begging or leaving food behind).
  2. – Your cat is sleeping more than usual.
  3. – Your cat is drinking more.
  4. – Your cat has stopped jumping onto elevated spaces.
  5. – Your cat is using the litter more frequently, or started toileting elsewhere.
  6. – Your cat is vomiting or has changes in stool consistency.
  7. – Your cat is scratching or itching more.
  8. – Your cat is suffering from hairballs.

It’s important to let your vet know about even subtle changes to what is normal for your cat.

Itching or scratching?

Itching, scratching and biting are the first signs that something may be going on beneath your cat’s skin. There are many causes of skin problems in cats such as food allergies, parasites and infections, endocrine issues or environmental allergies. In cases of skin-related problems such as sores, rashes, and hair loss, it is crucial to consult your veterinarian so that they can establish the underlying cause.

Carrying too much weight?

With 1 in every 2 cats overweight, it can be hard to tell what is healthy. Your veterinarian is your cat’s best ally to ensure they are a healthy weight. Your vet can help advise you on appropriate weight targets, nutritional weight loss plans and alternatives to food-based interactions. It’s important to speak to your vet before making any changes to your cat’s diet or lifestyle.

Litter Jitters?

If your cat’s litter box behaviour has changed, make sure you contact your veterinarian. Cats are particularly susceptible to urinary issues, which can quickly escalate from minor to life threatening. Your cat’s vet will be able to advise you on the best course of action. Ensuring your cat always has access to fresh, cleaning drinking water will help keep their urinary system healthy.

10 tips to bring your cat to the vet

Because cats are experts at hiding illness, it’s very important they see a veterinarian regularly. However, it is common for a veterinary visit to be a stressful experience. Small changes can make a massive difference to reduce this stress. Here are our top 10 tips to bring your cat to the vet.

Your kitten first appointment

Have you welcomed a kitten in your family and wondering what to do for your first vet visit? Your new kitten should see a vet as soon as possible so their overall health can be checked & they can become accustomed to vet visits. Separate to milestone appointments, it’s a good idea to have a veterinary consult within 24 to 72 hours after adopting your new kitten.

Speak with your local vet

It’s always better to speak to your local vet if you have any concerns or questions. They can confirm whether your cat is healthy, overweight or whether you need to change their diet.

Nutrition for life

A cat’s nutritional needs change throughout its life. A cat’s life stage or age is one of the most important considerations when choosing your cat’s food. Certain stages in your cats life, such as growth when they are a kitten, call for more specific amounts of key nutrients for optimum health.

Royal Canin provides tailored nutritional solutions for your cat at every stage of their life, from when they are a kitten, through to their senior years. Discover how life stage can have an impact on their nutritional requirements.

CAT CHAT WEBINAR

You can now watch our very first `Cat Chat` Facebook event. You will hear from industry experts:

Topics of discussion include general cat health and wellbeing, cat behaviour , how and when to bring your cat to the vet and top cat myths will be busted.

Redbarn February 03, 2019 1 comment
Share

Cats have a reputation for being self-sufficient creatures. They typically require less maintenance than dogs and enjoy cleaning themselves; however, visiting the vet is still a necessary part of responsible cat care. Your cat may need immunizations, spay/neuter procedures, dental care, dietary or grooming recommendations, and let’s not forget regularly scheduled checkups.

For many pet parents, taking their cat to the vet for the first time can seem daunting. But, we’re here to help! We collected tips from Dr. Ena Valikov , owner of Beach Vet Hospital in Long Beach, CA, about how to calm your kitty on the big day and avoid stressful scenarios.

Dr. Ena graduated from The University of California, Davis— the No 1 Veterinary School in the U.S— and practices clinical veterinary medicine and surgery in her Southern California vet office.

3 Helpful Tips to Avoid Stressful Vet Visits

How to find a vet for your cat

1. Put Yourself in Their Paws

“For too many kitties, a visit to the vet can feel just like an alien abduction,” Dr. Ena explains. “Cats are creatures of habit– thriving in a predictable, stable routine. But even for cats, vet visits can become an extraordinary adventure.”

Think about it, going to the vet as a new kitten probably feels something like going to the dentist when you were a child. For most of us, the first time is a scary and unpleasant experience. It’s all too common to see children crying their eyes out in the waiting room, begging to go back home.

2. Recognizing Fear and Stress

Your cat may experience anxiety when anticipating a trip to the vet. To help them feel at ease in the veterinarian’s office, you first need to know the general signs of an anxiety-ridden feline.

According to Dr. Ena and PetMD , when a cat’s head is turned sideways or backward, they are most likely feeling nervous or anxious about something. You may also notice increased isolation or have a hard time coaxing them out of their corner. Recognizing when your feline becomes stressed and what particular acts are causing such a reaction will help you adjust your regular routine accordingly.

3. Make the Carrier Safe

We know there are many cat carriers out there to choose from. That’s why we recommend asking your vet, just like we asked our local vet, Dr. Ena, for their input on the safest ones.

“Get the kind whose top is easy to unlatch. Leave it out with the door open or take it off altogether, and leave it where she likes to hang out,” she said. “Put in stuff with smells of you–If your kitten loves your socks, put them in the carrier. If she likes to sleep on top of your head, put that pillow or the pillowcase in her carrier instead of the laundry.”

Dr. Ena also recommends tossing in some of your cat’s favorite treats to assist them in getting comfortable in their carrier. Redbarn Protein Puffs for cats work great for on-the-go travel because of their resealable pouch and fun, tiny size.

Vet Visit Checklist for Cats

How to find a vet for your cat

1. Do Your Research

Spend some time researching cat nutrition from trustworthy, authoritative sources. Don’t get sucked into a black hole though,

2. Come Prepared with Questions About Their Diet

It’s also a good idea to cut out ingredient labels or take a picture from every container of food and treats to discuss with your veterinarian. This way you’ll get clear, direct feedback on the items you already have stocked in your pantry.

3. Know What to Bring

Be sure to bring in your cat’s complete medical records—this includes your cat’s vaccines, deworming records, medications, past surgeries, and medical invoices.

4. Take Notes and Video

Record your detailed observations and bring them to your vet, especially if your pet is sick. It’s important to take advantage of your vet’s professional training and years of clinical experience while you are at the office.

Dr. Ena has a tip for this, too. “Is your cat doing something weird but you can’t tell what it is…. hiccups, a cough, a sneeze or puking? Whip out your smartphone. Film it and bring it to the vet.”

Unless your cat is sick and needing to be seen right way, pick a day you aren’t overwhelmed with a mile-long to-do list. Give yourself and your kitty plenty of time to prepare and discuss.

What to Ask Your Vet During Your Cat’s Checkup

How to find a vet for your cat

Convincing your cat to head to the vet’s office is often a job within itself. But, to make the trouble worth it, you need to know what questions you should be asking your vet in their first place. Take this list below with you and bring up anything that was skipped in the natural flow of conversation.

  • Ask About Parasite Control: Your veterinarian will know which parasites and which medications are appropriate in your area.
  • Identification Tags and Microchips: Microchips make reunions with lost pets much more likely and provide an extra layer of security for you and your cat.
  • Training: Kittens are easiest to socialize and train in the first six months of life. Cats are known to respond best to patient, consistent, and positive reward-based training. Your vet may have some unique tips for you to try at home.
  • Nail Trimming: It’s easier than you think, but your vet will walk you through the process so you feel comfortable doing it on your own. Bonus tip—ask your veterinarian or their veterinary nurse to show you where “the quick” spot is.
  • Spaying and Neutering: Ask your veterinarian about ideal timing for necessary elective procedures, anesthetic choices, anesthetic monitoring, pain relievers, pre-operative preparations, and costs.

Know When to Get Vaccinated

When it comes to caring for a new kitten, guidelines from The American Veterinary Medical Association suggest kittens start their core vaccine, called FVRCPC (feline virus rhinotracheitis, calicivirus, panleukopenia (distemper more like puppy parvovirus of cats) at six weeks old. Boosters are needed every month until 12-16 weeks of age. Some vaccines are boosted annually and others every three years.

Schedule your future appointments while you’re in the office so you don’t miss these important dates.

Preparing for Costs

Research financing options like Care Credit, veterinary insurance companies like Healthy Paws, and other helpful insurance options before you need them. Veterinary teams will gladly provide estimates.

Do you have any tips on how to have a smooth vet visit with your cats? Let us know in the comments below.

How to find a vet for your cat

Does the thought of travelling your beloved cat to the vets make your hair stand on end?

Do you put off important vet check ups because it’s too stressful to bring your cat to the vet?

Coming to the vets will inevitably create some stress and anxiety for your cat but unfortunately this is an all too common reason for not going to the vets. This becomes an issue especially as your cat gets a little older as attending geriatric clinics as part of your cat’s preventative health care can ensure your cat has a longer more comfortable life.

However, we can’t do this if you don’t come to see us! Cats are independent, territorial animals that need to be in control of their surroundings and are sensitive to unfamiliar scents. Cats dislike travelling because they are suddenly being removed from their usual territory and are exposed to new noises and odours and experience unfamiliar movements. All things can make vet visits more stressful for your cat which in turn can make you more stressed. Fortunately, there’s a lot that you can do to make trips more pleasant to ensure they can have access to the best medical attention they deserve.

How to make vet trips less stressful for your cat

Keep calm!

This may sound obvious but stay calm and talk to your cat in a low and soft voice. If you are anxious or frustrated with they will detect this and become anxious and fearful. So give yourself enough time before travelling to the vet to reward your cat with affection, play and treats. Giving your cat a fuss before travel is likely to not only calm them but you too!

Choose a suitable carrier

Make sure your carrier is warm, comfortable and large enough for your cat to stand up and turn around. Plastic carriers are ideal for easy cleaning if you fear there may be mess and top and front opening carriers allow the cat to be carefully lifted in and out. If you think your cat would feel happier sitting in the base whilst being examined that will be fine, just let your vet know.

Get your cat used to their carrier

A cat’s aversion to the carrier is often reinforced by the fact that often the only time they go inside it is for a vet visit. Use the carrier at home by leaving it open to encourage your cat to sleep or be fed in the carrier. You can also make the carrier more familiar by putting bedding in that smells of home or rubbing a cloth with your cats scent around the inside of the carrier. Finally, you could try a pheromone spray inside the cat carrier 30 minutes before using it.

Avoid feeding

Do not feed your cat for at least 6 hours before the journey to avoid nausea or vomiting.

Wrapping & Covering up

If your cat panics when trying to put them in the carrier, wrap them up in a thick blanket and place both in the carrier. Once inside the carrier keep it covered with a towel or blanket that smells of home or is sprayed with Feliway to help keep them calm.

Carefully does it

When transporting the carrier either by hand or by car try to avoid swinging or allowing it to bang into things. When driving a good place is either in the footwell or a seat secured with a seatbelt so it cannot move.

Accidents happen

Tell us if you think your cat has soiled their carrier on arrival. We understand accidents do happen and are more than happy to clean them up for you. Take spare bedding (smelling of home or sprayed with Feliway) just in case. Let us worry about the rest! Calder Vets Dewsbury are proud to have been officially certified as a Gold standard “Cat Friendly Clinic” by The International Society for Feline Medicine (ISFM). This means that on arrival there is:

  • A dedicated cat only section in the waiting room allowing cats to wait away from dogs
  • Calming Feliway diffusers in the cat waiting area, consultation room and Feliway sprayed towels to cover cats in baskets
  • A dedicated cat consultation room so cats can be examined in an area free from the smells and sights of dogs
  • Cat advocates who are nurses knowledgeable in cat behaviour who have promised to encourage cat friendly handling and prevent unnecessary stress

How to find a vet for your cat

Choosing the right veterinarian for your dog is something that you should carefully consider. This is the person that could potentially save your pet’s life and keep them healthy. Both and your pet should come to a consensus about this person before you make a long-term commitment to work with them. Here are some things to consider when choosing a veterinarian.

Ask for personal recommendations
One of the best ways to find the right veterinarian is to ask your friends and family members for recommendations. Other families with pets in your area may know some good veterinarians to check out, so that should be the first place you look for advice.

Find a veterinarian with an expertise in treating dogs
Veterinarians are not all created equal. There are different types of veterinarians that specialize in working with different types of animals, and some of them may have more experience treating cats, rabbits, or other types of non-canine animals. You will definitely want to work with a veterinarian who has an expertise in treating dogs specifically, so ask about how much experience they have with dogs before you get started.

Look for licensed personnel
Although most people would assume this would be a given, that is not always the case. Make sure that veterinarian really is licensed in your state and also see if some of the other workers are licensed, because there are also registered veterinary technicians. You can ask to see their licenses or contact your state board of veterinary medicine for more information.

Inquire about their approach to pets and medicine
A veterinarian is not just there to administer medication, but to provide care for the entire being. Vets tend to have different approaches when it comes to pets and medication. Have a brief discussion with your potential vet and see what they think about wellness and prevention issues when it comes to dogs. If they are not on the same page with you, then you should keep looking.

Consider the cost and location
If an emergency situation occurs, then you will need to be able to get to the vet’s office quickly. Try to find a veterinarian that is less than an hour away from you at the most. Costs can also vary depending on the vet, so see if their prices fit into your budget before you commit to them.

Both you and your pet should be comfortable
Being comfortable around your veterinarian is important because you should be able to tell them everything about your dog. The same thing applies to your dog because they should also feel at ease around the vet. Some initial discomfort around a vet can be normal for some dogs, but signs of anger, fear, or distress toward a vet is certainly a red flag that you should move on.

Look for a clean facility
Have a look around the facility and notice the level of cleanliness. If the place seems a little dingy or dirty, then that is also a sign to move on. Since it is a medical facility, it should be just as clean as a hospital for humans.

Personal referrals are a great way to start the search, but you should still spend some time to get know the vet and staff first. Ask about their background and experience, and then see if they hold views similar to yours on medical treatments for pets. Make sure that both you and your pet are comfortable with the vet and facility. The veterinarian will play a significant role in your pet’s life, so keep looking until you find the right one.

Most veterinarians treat feline patients, so it should be easy to find a cat vet in your area. But that doesn’t mean that you shouldn’t put some time and effort into finding a veterinarian with whom you feel comfortable and who you trust. If you’re in the market for a new pet doctor, ask friends and family members for recommendations.

At the minimum, cats should see a veterinarian once a year for a wellness exam. At this time, your cat will receive any necessary vaccines she needs, and receive an overall health check. The vet will listen to her heart and lungs, check her teeth, eyes, and ears, palpate her organs, and check her skin, fur, and overall body condition. Depending on her age and health, your vet may want to conduct additional diagnostic testing, including blood work or fecal samples.

Your veterinarian will also offer advice on at-home care, including grooming, exercise, and diet. She will explain to you what your cat’s ideal health looks like – including her weight, skin and fur condition, and temperament.

Grooming includes nail trims, fur brushing, and ear cleaning. Most cats keep themselves clean and don’t require traditional soap-and-water baths. However, if your pet cat is older, obese, or otherwise unable to clean herself, you may need to give her a hand.

Another important part of keeping your pet healthy is keeping your pet safe. This includes keeping her indoors, and outfitting her with a cat-safe collar and ID tag. And to really safeguard your pet from becoming a stray, consider microchipping. This permanent form of identification can help you reunite with your cat in the event that she is lost and brought to a shelter, animal control kennel, or veterinarian’s office (anywhere they would have a chip scanner).

Your cat should also be seen by a veterinarian anytime you have a concern about her health or wellness. This includes if she appears to be injured or in pain, or is experiencing a change in temperament, activity level, or appetite, as these are often indicators of illness or injury. It’s better for your cat’s health (and your wallet) to catch a problem early on rather than postponing treatment.

The most important vaccines include the FVRCP vaccine (often referred to as cat distemper) and the Rabies vaccine. Depending on your cat’s lifestyle – for instance, if she’s ever allowed outdoors – your veterinarian may also recommend additional vaccines, including that for FIV (feline immunodeficiency virus). Keep in mind that ALL cats, even those that are indoor-only, should receive the FVRCP and Rabies vaccines.

Vaccines are typically administered in the following series. Your veterinarian may alter your pet’s schedule based on need or personal recommendation. Always defer to your veterinarian, as she knows your pets best.

FVRCP vaccine (feline viral rhinotracheitis, calicivirus, panleukopenia)
This vaccine is first given by 4-8 weeks of age, in a series of boosters every 4 weeks until 16 weeks, and afterward, once a year. It protects against several highly contagious and some often fatal diseases of the respiratory, gastrointestinal, and nervous systems.

Rabies vaccine
This vaccine is first given at about 6 months of age, then given 9-12 months later (but not one day late). After two vaccines are administered on time, it’s given once every three years for life. It protects against rabies, a fatal virus that can transmit to any mammal, including humans.

We also highly recommend that you spay or neuter your pet cat as soon as possible (ideally, before 4 months of age, when their adolescent period begins). Spaying and neutering not only helps prevent unwanted litters, thereby curbing the cat overpopulation problem, it also has many health and behavior benefits.

Southwest Minneapolis’ Community Newspaper

Pandemic is taxing the veterinary industry in complicated ways

A client’s cat became sick one recent Sunday. She called five local veterinary emergency clinics but none were able to see her.

COVID has taxed the veterinary industry in a way we haven’t seen before. In a short amount of time, the pandemic created the perfect storm of too many animals needing help and not enough people to help them.

New pets

When the shelter-in-place order first went into effect, we started to see more puppies. At first it was so fun! I went from seeing one puppy a week to two to three a day. After several weeks, we were getting overrun with new puppies and new pets in general.

Where did all of these animals come from?

For some people, getting a new puppy was already in the works and they just bumped up the timing of that adoption. It made sense! The shelter-in-place order forced most people to be at home and freed up a lot of time for training and all of the extra work that comes with puppyhood.

For others, isolation created a lonely void. When you can’t see other people, animals are desperately needed companions. Soon finding a pet at a shelter or rescue became difficult; they had all been adopted!

Busy season

You wouldn’t think that there would be a busy season for veterinarians. But in the summer months, we are about 10% to 20% busier than in the winter. It’s not just snowbirds returning north that increase our animal traffic. Pets are outdoors more so we see more cat bite abscesses, injuries from running around the dog parks and skin infections from swimming in the lakes.

In addition, we have an unusual vestige of rural farming days in which people want to book their “spring shots.” On the farm, that’s when the farm animals, including dogs and cats, would get their vaccines. That tradition is slowly disappearing, but for many of our older clientele, this is what they were taught and what they are used to.

Staffing shortage

While other industries are laying people off, the veterinary industry is experiencing a staffing shortage. Many people in our industry, either by choice or circumstance, are not going to work. Some are self-identifying as high risk and are choosing to isolate. For others, new child or elder care responsibilities are keeping them at home because former caretakers are unavailable.

When a specialized industry gets stressed, pivoting is difficult. It takes eight years to make a veterinarian. Certified veterinary technicians go to school for two years. Even for non-degreed positions at the veterinary clinic, it takes six to 18 months to feel skilled at the job.

When veterinary staff are not able to come to work, it is not easy to replace them. Many veterinary clinics found themselves in a situation where a significant percentage of their work force was no longer available. Right now, there are fewer people to provide services for more animals. COVID pushed the industry past its tipping point, and that level of stress cannot be maintained.

ER overload

At our clinic, we responded to the influx of animals by putting a pause on seeing new clients. Unfortunately, we weren’t the only clinic backed into that solution. That means that there are fewer places for an animal in need to go.

If a general practitioner can’t see a patient, then sometimes the only option is the emergency clinic. This means that the local ERs get overloaded. We will get reports at the beginning of the day about which clinics are closed and not accepting patients. One client told me he considered going to Duluth with his sick pet because it was a six-hour wait to get into the metro ERs.

Adaptation

So what is a veterinary clinic to do while trying to operate in the pressure cooker?

Long term, we’ll figure it out. New businesses will form, staffing structures will change, more people will go to vet school.

In the short term, we’ll do the best we can with what we have. For general practitioners, that means pushing off wellness exams to allow more space for urgent patients. Our doctors in quarantine are helping by doing telemedicine calls for patients that can safely be helped that way.

You just keep trying hard and try to adapt. That’s the pandemic way.

Receptionist burnout

It is important to turn a spotlight on the experience of the veterinary receptionist during this crisis.

When the veterinary clinic is at capacity, that doesn’t mean that pets don’t still need care. Imagine being the person who has to break the news to a stricken pet parent that their veterinary clinic can’t help them today.

Clients in distress often don’t take this news well. Their frustration is taken out on the receptionist, sometimes in very degrading ways. This takes a huge emotional toll and contributes to the burnout of an already stressed veterinary team.

The client is right for advocating for their pet. The veterinary team is right for saying “no” if they feel like taking on another patient will negatively impact quality of care. It’s a lose-lose situation, and the veterinary receptionist is at the fulcrum of that vice grip.

We’ll keep working toward solutions, but it is important that the receptionist experience during this time be shared. A broad ask is for pet owners to have empathy for the person who answers the phone at your clinic.

How to find a vet for your cat

Welcome to All About Cats Veterinary Hospital in Las Vegas, Nevada, where we provide veterinary care, boarding and grooming exclusively for cats. As our name says: we’re All About Cats! Our Las Vegas veterinarians and staff of “cat people” are dedicated to providing excellent care to cats and the people who love them. Our compassionate, talented veterinary care team brings a wealth of knowledge and experience to cater to our feline patients’ specific needs and health concerns. We strive to make every visit as calm and comfortable as possible for cats.

Las Vegas Cat Care Services: Wellness Exams, Spay and Neuter Surgery & More

Our experienced cat veterinarians provide complete care including:

Our cat wellness care services are dedicated to supporting cats through all six stages of the feline life cycle: kitten, junior, prime, mature, senior and geriatric. Our veterinarians are committed to helping all cats live long, healthy and active lives with specialized care for each phase of the life cycle. We also offer behavioral advice for common problems including destructive scratching, inappropriate elimination, feline aggression and environmental enrichment.

How to find a vet for your cat

In addition to these services, our cat hospital includes an on-site pharmacy to quickly fill any prescription needs. Cat food for specialty diets is available for purchase at our Las Vegas veterinary hospital.

How to find a vet for your cat

Why Visit a Cats Only Hospital?

Our veterinary team understands that a trip to the vet can be stressful for cats and their owners, so we created a cats-only environment. At our cat clinic, we know that the sounds and smells of other animals, including dogs, can be very frightening and upsetting to cats. That’s why our clinic does not allow dogs or other animals. This creates a calm, stress-free environment. We invite you to take a virtual tour of our cat hospital or schedule an in-person visit to learn more about the difference that our cats-only care approach can make for you and the special cats in your life.

Meet our Las Vegas Cat Veterinarians

Dr. Terri Koppe founded all About Cats Veterinary Hospital in October of 2001 after recognizing the need for a cat-exclusive Las Vegas veterinary hospital. Dr. Koppe is joined by Las Vegas cat veterinarians Dr. Alissa Lansing, Dr. Ashley Love and Dr. Jody Morris. All our veterinarians specialize in feline medical, dental, and surgical veterinary care and are passionate about helping cats live healthy and happy lives. Our mission is simple: provide experienced, loving care just for cats at our Las Vegas veterinary hospital.

Cat Care from Cat Lovers, for Cat Lovers

Our love for cats shines through in everything we do! As evidenced by our cat-only environment and feline-friendly boarding area, our animal hospital is committed to providing the best in veterinary care for cats.

August 22 nd , 2018, is a day dedicated to bringing cats to the veterinary clinic. But you might be wondering, why is an entire day dedicated to getting our feline friends to the doctor?

While there are more pet cats in the United States than dogs, significantly fewer ever see a veterinarian. According to the American Association of Feline Practitioners (AAFP) and a study by Bayer Animal Health, 83% of pet cats go to the veterinarian in their first year of life, and then never go again. There are a number of reasons that pet owners are reluctant to take their cats to the vet clinic. Many pet owners do not understand the value of a yearly exam.

How to find a vet for your catYour cat may not love visits to the vet, but annual checkups are essential for your feline friend.

But why does my cat have to regularly see a vet?

For many cats and their people, going in the carrier, the car, and into a vet clinic is very stressful! So, they avoid taking them to the veterinarian. But cats are experts at hiding illness, so owners may believe everything is going fine until their feline friend gets so sick that he cannot hide it anymore. Often the only symptom of a serious disease may be some weight loss, which many owners dismiss as a normal part of aging (it isn’t!). Finally, many cat owners believe nothing can happen to their indoor cats, therefore they do not need preventative health care such as vaccines and parasite control. However, even indoor cats can be exposed to fleas and heartworm-carrying mosquitos through screen windows and doors, intestinal parasites by eating bugs and mice that enter the house, and sometimes they do escape outside, and therefore should be protected against potentially deadly viruses such as panleukopenia and rabies. Additionally, an indoor only lifestyle does not exempt a cat from a legally mandated rabies vaccine.

Knowing why your cat needs to see the doctor on an annual basis (and semi-annual for senior/geriatric cats) is important for owners to understand. It’s about more than just vaccines! The physical exam performed by your veterinarian is a valuable and much underrated tool that helps identify problems in their earliest stages. Many owners do not even recognize that a veterinarian is performing a physical exam, but by putting his or her hands on the cat, he or she may be able to detect subtle changes in the coat quality, the amount of muscle, problems with the teeth, and anything abnormal happening in the abdomen just with a physical exam. As your cat ages, we recommend increasing the number of vet visits because the risk of certain types of disease, such as kidney disease and hyperthyroidism. Catching these signs early in the progress of the disease can lead to more successful treatments and outcomes.

How to find a vet for your catCatching problems early may prevent illnesses that could develop later in life.

The importance of catching problems early

Regular veterinary visits also allow an owner and veterinarian to work together to deal with medical and behavioral problems early. For instance, obesity is becoming one of the top health concerns of our pets, which can lead to diabetes and worsen arthritis in cats. If your veterinarian sees your kitty regularly, he or she can intercede and provide a diet plan before kitty becomes too fat. Additionally, we are now recognizing that dental disease can significantly impact quality of life by causing pain; identifying problems early can help prevent pain (and be less costly for an owner in the long run). Your veterinarian can also help with advice about behavior problems, such as house soiling.

Reducing the stress of a trip to the vet

So how can we reduce the stress of bringing our feline friends to the doctor’s office? Number one is to choose a veterinarian that you are comfortable with! Vets are people too, and finding one that you trust and whose personality is a good match for you and your cat is important. Also look for a veterinary clinic that caters to cats by having a quiet waiting area separate from dogs, and places to keep the cat carrier elevated off the floor in the waiting area and exam room. Ask if they have separate spaces to hospitalize dogs and cats. You can even find a practice that has been certified cat-friendly by the AAFP by clicking here!

How to find a vet for your catThe carrier can sometimes be scary – try leaving it out for a few days before vet visits so that your cats are comfortable with it!

Cat carriers don’t have to be scary!

Number two, teach your kitty that the carrier isn’t a scary object! I used to keep my cat carriers tucked away in a closet, and all my cats would flee under the bed as soon as I brought one out. Now, there are always a couple cat carriers out with soft towels or blankets inside. Instead of being scary things associated with car rides, my cats use their carriers as safe little caves in which to sleep or hang out. If you don’t want to keep a carrier out all the time, bring the carrier out at least a few days ahead of the vet visit and feed the kitty some tasty treats or canned food daily inside the carrier to associate it with good things. Once kitty is in the carrier, do not remove him until you are in the exam room at the veterinary clinic; many cats get scared and will bolt from an owner’s arms once outside the house. You may also want to try using a pheromone spray (i.e., Feliway) on the towel in the carrier which can help keep your kitty calm, as well as covering the carrier with a towel to decrease visual stimulation.

For cats that just refuse to enter the carrier calmly, tipping the carrier door-side up and putting the cat in back feet first usually works much better than forcing him in head first.

Finally, for some cats, no matter what you try, going to the veterinarian is an incredibly stressful experience involving yowling and tearing at the carrier. For these kitties, finding a veterinarian that makes house calls may make all the difference, allowing them to stay within their comfortable home environment. Alternatively, you may try with your veterinarian about using a mild anti-anxiety medication on the day of the visit, which can help smooth out the entire experience, from carrier to physical exam to back home again.

How to start saving to become independent

This article was co-authored by Ara Oghoorian, CPA. Ara Oghoorian is a Certified Financial Accountant (CFA), Certified Financial Planner (CFP), a Certified Public Accountant (CPA), and the Founder of ACap Advisors & Accountants, a boutique wealth management and full-service accounting firm based in Los Angeles, California. With over 26 years of experience in the financial industry, Ara founded ACap Asset Management in 2009. He has previously worked with the Federal Reserve Bank of San Francisco, the U.S. Department of the Treasury, and the Ministry of Finance and Economy in the Republic of Armenia. Ara has a BS in Accounting and Finance from San Francisco State University, is a Commissioned Bank Examiner through the Federal Reserve Board of Governors, holds the Chartered Financial Analyst designation, is a Certified Financial Planner™ practitioner, has a Certified Public Accountant license, is an Enrolled Agent, and holds the Series 65 license.

There are 15 references cited in this article, which can be found at the bottom of the page.

This article has been viewed 27,347 times.

Achieving financial and personal independence is a great feeling, and is manageable with some hard work and careful budgeting. You will have to assess everything you earn and everything you spend, and figure out areas you can make savings. Once you are regularly saving money you will find it becomes a habit and the money will accumulate quicker than you expect. With some solid savings behind you, and an informed and in control approach to your finances, you will be able to stand on your own two feet.

Set yourself on the right financial path

How to start saving to become independent

How to start saving to become independent

Achieving financial freedom is a goal for many people. It generally means having enough savings, investments, and cash on hand to afford the lifestyle you want for yourself and your family—and a growing nest egg that will allow you to retire or pursue the career you want without being driven by earning a certain amount each year.

Unfortunately, too many people fail to achieve it. They are burdened with increasing debt, financial emergencies, profligate spending, and other issues that thwart them from reaching their goals. Then there are unexpected events, such as a hurricane or earthquake—or pandemic—that overturn plans and reveal holes in their safety nets that weren’t visible before.

Trouble happens to nearly everyone, but these 12 habits can put you on the right path.

Key Takeaways

  • Set life goals, both big and small, financial and lifestyle, and create a blueprint for achieving those goals.
  • Make a budget to cover all your financial needs and stick to it.
  • Pay off credit cards in full, so you carry as little debt as possible, and keep an eye on your credit.
  • Create automatic savings via your employer’s retirement plan and by setting up an emergency fund.
  • Take care of your belongings, as maintenance is cheaper than replacement, but, more important, take care of yourself and stay healthy.

1. Set Life Goals

What is financial freedom to you? A general desire for it is too vague a goal, so get specific. Write down how much you should have in your bank account, what the lifestyle entails, and at what age this should be achieved. The more specific your goals, the higher the likelihood of achieving them.

Next, count backward to your current age and establish financial mileposts at regular intervals. Write it all down neatly and put the goal sheet at the very beginning of your financial binder.

2. Make a Budget

Making a monthly household budget—and sticking to it—is the best way to guarantee that all bills are paid and savings are on track. It’s also a regular routine that reinforces your goals and bolsters resolve against the temptation to splurge.

3. Pay Off Credit Cards in Full

Credit cards and similar high-interest consumer loans are toxic to wealth-building. Make it a point to pay off the full balance each month. Student loans, mortgages, and similar loans typically have much lower interest rates; paying them off is not an emergency. Paying on time is and will build a good credit rating.

4. Create Automatic Savings

Pay yourself first. Enroll in your employer’s retirement plan and make full use of any matching contribution benefit. It’s also wise to have an automatic withdrawal for an emergency fund, which can be tapped for unexpected expenses, and an automatic contribution to a brokerage account or something similar.

Ideally, the money should be pulled the same day you receive your paycheck, so it never even touches your hands, avoiding temptation entirely. However, keep in mind that the recommended amount to save is highly debated. In some cases the feasibility of such a fund can be a question.

5. Start Investing Now

Bad stock markets can make people question this, but historically there has been no better way to grow your money than through investing. The magic of compound interest will help it increase exponentially over time, but you need a lot of time to achieve meaningful growth. Don’t try to be a stock picker or trick yourself into thinking you can be the next Warren Buffett. There can only be one.

Instead, open an online brokerage account that makes it easy for you to learn how to invest, create a manageable portfolio, and make weekly or monthly contributions to it automatically. We’ve ranked the best online brokers for beginners to help you get started.

Achieving financial freedom can be very difficult in the face of growing debt, cash emergencies, medical issues, and overspending, but it is possible with discipline and careful planning.

6. Watch Your Credit

Your credit score determines what interest rate you are offered when buying a new car or refinancing a home. It also impacts seemingly unrelated things, such as car insurance and life insurance premiums.

The reasoning is that someone with reckless financial habits is also likely to be reckless in other aspects of life, such as driving and drinking. This is why it’s important to get a credit report at regular intervals to make sure that there are no erroneous black marks ruining your good name. It may also be worth looking into one of the best credit monitoring services to further protect your information.

7. Negotiate

Many Americans are hesitant to negotiate for goods and services, worrying that it makes them seem cheap. Overcome this cultural handicap and you could save thousands each year. Small businesses, in particular, tend to be open to negotiation, where buying in bulk or repeat business can open the door to good discounts.

8. Continuous Education

Review all applicable changes in the tax laws each year to ensure that all adjustments and deductions are maximized. Keep up with financial news and developments in the stock market and do not hesitate to adjust your investment portfolio accordingly. Knowledge is also the best defense against those who prey on unsophisticated investors to turn a quick buck.

9. Proper Maintenance

Taking good care of property makes everything from cars and lawnmowers to shoes and clothes last longer. As the cost of maintenance is a fraction of the cost of replacement, it’s an investment not to be missed.

Learn to know the difference between the things you want and the things you need.

10. Live Below Your Means

Mastering a frugal lifestyle by having a mindset of living life to the fullest with less is not so hard. Indeed, many wealthy individuals developed a habit of living below their means before rising to affluence.

This isn’t a challenge to adopt a minimalist lifestyle or a call to action to head to the dumpster with things you’ve hoarded over the years. Making small adjustments by distinguishing between the things you need and the things you want is a financially helpful habit to put into practice.

11. Get a Financial Advisor

Once you’ve gotten to a point where you’ve amassed a decent amount of wealth—be it liquid investments or tangible assets that aren’t as readily available to convert to cash—get a financial advisor to educate you and help make decisions.

12. Take Care of Your Health

The principle of proper maintenance also applies to the body. Invest in good health with regular visits to doctors and dentists, and follow health advice about any problems you encounter. Many problems can be helped—or even prevented—with lifestyle changes such as more exercise and a healthier diet. Some companies have limited sick days, making it a notable loss of income once those days are used up. Obesity and ailments make insurance premiums skyrocket, and poor health may force earlier retirement with lower monthly income.

The Bottom Line

These 12 steps won’t solve all of your money problems, but they will help you develop healthy habits that can get you on the path to financial freedom—whatever that means for you.

How to start saving to become independent

It sounds like an obvious thing, but the first step to garner enough savings is to save, and the second step is to save enough.

Synopsis

  • Abc Small
  • Abc Normal
  • Abc Large

By Dhirendra Kumar

Many people ask for different kinds of financial advice. Sometimes, it is about inputs: ‘I have a certain amount of money. What should I do with it?’ Sometimes it is abo